 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    BASE BETA
 
                               PC DOS USER'S GUIDE
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
                                     Jim Lee
                                V$ILJIM at BCRVM1
                                Tieline 443-8279
                               Boca Raton, Florida
 
                                       and
 
                                Margaret Averett
                                AVERETT at BCRVM1
                                Tieline 443-2174
                               Boca Raton, Florida
 
 
 
 
 
                          BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  (TBD)
 
  THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH DOES NOT APPLY TO THE UNITED
  KINGDOM OR ANY COUNTRY WHERE SUCH PROVISIONS ARE
  INCONSISTENT WITH LOCAL LAW:  INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
  MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS
  IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
  IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
  WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
  PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  Some states do not allow
  disclaimer of express or implied warranties in
  certain transactions, therefore, this statement may
  not apply to you.
 
  This publication could include technical inaccuracies
  or typographical errors.  Changes are periodically
  made to the information herein; these changes will be
  incorporated in new editions of the publication.  IBM
  may make improvements and/or changes in the
  product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
  publication at any time.
 
  It is possible that this publication may contain
  reference to, or information about, IBM products
  (machines and programs), programming, or services
  that are not announced in your country.  Such
  references or information must not be construed to
  mean that IBM intends to announce such IBM products,
  programming, or services in your country.
 
  Requests for technical information about IBM products
  should be made to your IBM authorized reseller or IBM
  marketing representative.
 
  (C) COPYRIGHT INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES
  CORPORATION 1981, 1994.  ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
  Note to U.S. Government Users -- Documentation
  related to restricted rights -- Use, duplication or
  disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in
  GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  +--- NOTE ------------------------------------------+
  |                                                   |
  | Before using this information and the product it  |
  | supports, be sure to read the general information |
  | under Appendix B, "Notices" on page 455.          |
  |                                                   |
  +---------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                            iii
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  iv  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CONTENTS
  ________
 
 
 
 
 
     ABOUT THIS BOOK  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  IX
|    Related Books  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  ix
 
|    WHAT'S NEW FOR PC DOS 7  . . . . . . . . . . .  XIII
|    New PC DOS Commands  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  xv
|    New, Changed, or Removed Optional Tools  . . . .  xv
|    New, Changed, or Removed .INI Files  . . . . .  xvii
|    New or Changed PC DOS Commands and Device
|     Drivers   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  xvii
|    New, Changed or Removed Keyboards and Code
|     Pages   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  xvii
|    PC DOS Commands No Longer Provided   . . . .   xviii
 
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
  PART 1.  USING THE DOS OPERATING SYSTEM  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1
 
|    CHAPTER 1.  INSTALLING PC DOS 7  . . . . . . . .   3
|    What's New about Setup for PC DOS 7  . . . . . .   3
     Before Installing  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5
|    Hardware and Software Prerequisites  . . . . . .   6
|    Mouse Support during Setup   . . . . . . . . . .   7
|    Changes Made by Setup to the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
|     CONFIG.SYS Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   8
     SETUP Command and Its Options  . . . . . . . . .  11
     Other Installation Options   . . . . . . . . . .  14
     Optional Tools Selection   . . . . . . . . . . .  15
     Installation Guidelines  . . . . . . . . . . . .  20
|    PC DOS Standard Installation   . . . . . . . . .  22
 
|    CHAPTER 2.  USING THE ONLINE BOOK VIEWER   . . .  29
|    Starting the PC DOS Viewer   . . . . . . . . . .  31
|    Viewing the Initial PC DOS Viewer Screen   . . .  34
|    Getting Other Types of Online Help   . . . . . .  35
|    Linking to More Topics   . . . . . . . . . . . .  40
|    Moving around in the PC DOS Viewer   . . . . . .  43
|    Printing from the PC DOS Viewer  . . . . . . . .  44
|    Copying Topic Information into a File  . . . . .  44
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                          v
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     CHAPTER 3.  CONFIGURING YOUR SYSTEM  . . . . . .  47
     Bypassing CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT Commands    49
     Using CONFIG.SYS Commands  . . . . . . . . . . .  51
     Using Multiple Configurations  . . . . . . . . .  57
     Specifying Startup Commands in Your AUTOEXEC.BAT
      File  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  65
 
     CHAPTER 4.  WORKING WITH THE TEXT EDITOR   . . .  73
|    What's New about the E Editor for PC DOS 7   . .  73
     Choosing a Text Editor   . . . . . . . . . . . .  74
     Starting the E Editor  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  75
     Creating or Modifying a File   . . . . . . . . .  82
     Using Cursor Movement Keys to Move Around in the
      Text File   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  90
     Performing Basic Editing Tasks   . . . . . . . .  92
     Selecting Text   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   101
     Using Key Combinations to Manipulate Text  . .   106
     Using E Editor Commands  . . . . . . . . . . .   115
     Customizing the E Editor   . . . . . . . . . .   134
     Comparing a Text Editor and a Word Processing
      Program   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   140
 
     CHAPTER 5.  CONNECTING COMPUTERS   . . . . . .   143
     Understanding What the InterLnk Program Does     143
     Establishing the Connection between Computers    148
     Including INTERLNK in Your CONFIG.SYS File   .   149
     Running the InterLnk Program   . . . . . . . .   150
     Redirecting Drives   . . . . . . . . . . . . .   152
     Excluding Drives from Redirection  . . . . . .   153
     Breaking the Connection between Computers  . .   153
     Remote Copying of INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNK.EXE
      Files   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   153
     Reviewing Cable Specifications   . . . . . . .   155
 
     CHAPTER 6.  MAKING MORE MEMORY AVAILABLE   . .   161
|    Determining Your System's Memory Type  . . . .   162
     Understanding How RAMBoost Works   . . . . . .   162
     Using Advanced Features  . . . . . . . . . . .   175
|    Learning RAMBoost Tips and Techniques  . . . .   180
 
  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
  PART 2.  USING THE DOS OPTIONAL TOOLS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  193
 
 
 
  vi  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    CHAPTER 7.  USING THE PC DOS SHELL   . . . . .   195
     Installing PC DOS Shell after Installing DOS     195
     Starting the PC DOS Shell  . . . . . . . . . .   197
     Selecting Items from Lists or Menus  . . . . .   198
     Starting a Program   . . . . . . . . . . . . .   198
     Getting Help   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   199
     Leaving the PC DOS Shell   . . . . . . . . . .   204
|    Customizing the PC DOS Shell   . . . . . . . .   205
     Changing Screen Colors   . . . . . . . . . . .   206
     Switching between Text and Graphics Mode   . .   206
     Organizing Programs  . . . . . . . . . . . . .   207
     Working with Properties  . . . . . . . . . . .   214
 
     CHAPTER 8.  USING CENTRAL POINT BACKUP   . . .   229
     Installing Central Point Backup after
      Installing DOS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   229
     Configuring Central Point Backup   . . . . . .   232
     Viewing the Main Central Point Backup Window     236
     Changing the User Level  . . . . . . . . . . .   237
     Making a Backup  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   240
     Selecting Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   243
     Selecting Drives to Back Up  . . . . . . . . .   252
     Viewing Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   255
     Working with Setup Files   . . . . . . . . . .   256
     Comparing Data   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   262
     Restoring Data   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   266
     Performing Network Backups   . . . . . . . . .   269
     Tape Drive Information   . . . . . . . . . . .   275
     Backup Strategies  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   285
|    Using the CPBDIR Program   . . . . . . . . . .   291
 
|    CHAPTER 9.  USING STACKER COMPRESSION  . . . .   293
|    Setting Up Stacker   . . . . . . . . . . . . .   296
|    Monitoring Your Drives (from DOS or Windows)     307
|    Using Stacker Tools  . . . . . . . . . . . . .   316
|    Working with Advanced Stacker  . . . . . . . .   336
|    Command Summary  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   352
|    Troubleshooting  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   356
 
|    CHAPTER 10.  USING PCMCIA SUPPORT  . . . . . .   371
|    Considerations Before Starting PCMCIA  . . . .   373
|    Setting Up PCMCIA (PCMDINST)   . . . . . . . .   374
|    Configuring Your PCMCIA System (PCMSETUP)  . .   375
 
 
                                                                  Contents  vii
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Configuring PCMCIA   . . . . . . . . . . . . .   384
|    Advanced Configuration Considerations  . . . .   393
|    Configuring PC Cards after the Original
|     Installation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   403
 
|    APPENDIX A.  MORE INFORMATION ABOUT INSTALLING   409
|    Choosing the Correct Installation Procedure  .   409
     Performing the LAN Server Administrator
      Installation of PC DOS  . . . . . . . . . . .   419
|    Rerunning Setup  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   425
|    Uninstalling and Restoring Your Previous
|     Version of DOS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   430
|    Viewing and Editing the System Files during
|     Install   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   431
|    Viewing the README.TXT File  . . . . . . . . .   433
|    Working with XDF-Formatted Diskettes   . . . .   434
|    Working with Setup Bundle Files  . . . . . . .   440
     Using the Emergency Startup Diskette   . . . .   441
     Problem Determination  . . . . . . . . . . . .   442
 
     APPENDIX B.  NOTICES   . . . . . . . . . . . .   455
     Trademarks and Service Marks   . . . . . . . .   455
 
     INDEX  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   459
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  viii  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  ABOUT THIS BOOK
  _______________
 
 
 
 
 
|    This book is written for novice users or users who
|    are already familiar with DOS and who have
|    experience using computers.
 
     This book is organized into two parts.  Part 1
     contains instructions for use with the fundamental
     DOS features.  Part 2 contains information on the
     Optional Tools available with DOS.
 
     If DOS is not yet installed on your computer system,
     you will need to run the Setup program.  For
|    information about how to set up PC DOS, see
|    Chapter 1, "Installing PC DOS 7" on page 3.
 
 
| RELATED BOOKS
  _____________
 
|    The DOS library includes the following
|    documentation:
 
|    o   PC DOS 7 Command Reference and Error Messages
         _____________________________________________
 
         Part 1 of this book contains the commands,
         listed in alphabetical order, that can be typed
         from the DOS command prompt.  It also includes
         information on DOS device drivers, CONFIG.SYS
|        commands, menu configuration commands, REXX
|        commands for DOS, and .INI file information.
|        Part 2 includes error messages in a
|        cause-and-action format.
 
     o   Online books are provided with PC DOS containing
         the same information as is available in the PC
                                                     __
         DOS 7 Command Reference and Error Messages
         __________________________________________
         hardcopy manual.  The three online books
         provided with PC DOS include:
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                         ix
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         -   PC DOS 7 Command Reference
             __________________________
         -   PC DOS 7 Error Messages
             _______________________
         -   PC DOS 7 REXX Reference
             _______________________
 
     o   PC DOS Keyboards and Code Pages
         _______________________________
 
|        This book, available for optional purchase,
|        contains examples of keyboard layouts and code
|        page tables that can be used with DOS.
 
|    o   PC DOS 7 Technical Update
         _________________________
 
|        This book, available for optional purchase, is
|        written for programmers who develop applications
|        for DOS.
 
|        Included with the hardcopy version of this book
|        is a diskette, containing the online version,
|        which is viewable using the PC DOS Viewer.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  x  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   PC DOS 7 REXX User's Guide and Reference
         ________________________________________
 
|        This book, available for optional purchase,
|        describes how to write programs with REXX and
|        and is for both beginner and experienced
|        programmers.
 
|    o   PC DOS 7 Coupon Booklet
 
|        This booklet contains coupons provided by major
|        hardware and software computer companies.  These
|        coupons offer discounts or information about
|        their products.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                            About This Book  xi
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  xii  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| WHAT'S NEW FOR PC DOS 7
  _______________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    PC DOS 7 includes the following new features as well
|    as enhancements to features in prior versions of PC
|    DOS:
 
|    o   PC DOS Setup program includes enhancements that
|        allow you to:
 
|        -   Use a mouse device during installation.
 
|        -   Use the DOSKey program immediately after
|            installation of PC DOS because the DOSKEY
|            command-line statement is now automatically
|            added to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
 
|        -   View or edit the changes Setup mades to your
|            CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files prior to
|            system restart.  For example, if you use
|            another command retrieval program other than
|            DOSKEY, you can edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file
|            and delete this command-line statement
|            before the Setup changes become effective.
 
|        -   Understand what changes were made to these
|            system files by reviewing comment lines
|            added by Setup.  Comment lines describe what
|            was deleted, added, replaced, or updated in
|            these files.
 
|        See the installation information for a complete
|        list of Setup enhancements.
 
|    o   RAMBoost more effectively handles multiple
|        configurations now.  The most common questions
|        asked about RAMBoost and RAMBoost Setup are now
|        included in a tips and techniques section.
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                       xiii
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   The E Editor has the following enhancements for
|        PC DOS 7:  menu selection, mouse awareness,
|        expanded sort capabilities, deleted record
|        recovery, ability to change E Editor default
|        settings (for color, tab and margin settings,
|        window mode, and so forth), and a new browse
|        mode for the online F1 help.
 
|    o   A new program, File Update, monitors the files
|        on two computers to keep them sychronized (for
|        example, when you work on one computer at home
|        and one at work).
 
|    o   A new documentation viewer, PC DOS Viewer, is
|        used to read or search online books for PC DOS
|        information.  Three online books are included
|        with PC DOS:  an online Command Reference
|        manual, an online REXX user's guide and
|        reference, and an Error Messages manual which
|        includes the more common error messages for PC
|        DOS and PC DOS optional tools.
 
|        This viewer also allows quick access to help for
|        DOS commands, DOS device drivers, and DOS .INI
|        files information.  In addition you can get
|        quick help for REXX commands or DOS error
|        messages.
 
|    o   The enhanced Advanced Power Management driver
|        (POWER.EXE) has added power management events.
 
|    o   Support is provided for certain docking device
|        drivers.  After typing either the DOSDOCK
|        command for DOS or the DDPOPUP command for
|        Windows, these drivers are dynamically loaded
|        when PC DOS senses the appropriate docking
|        devices.
 
|    o   The amount of conventional memory required by PC
|        DOS has been reduced, allowing more memory for
|        your applications.
 
 
 
 
  xiv  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   The QCONFIG command now identifies and displays
|        additional machines, adapters, and planars.
 
|    o   The BACKUP command, formally included in DOS
|        versions prior to PC DOS 6, has been returned as
|        a command provided with PC DOS 7.
 
 
| NEW PC DOS COMMANDS
  ___________________
 
|    The following commands are new for PC DOS 7
 
|    ACALC          DPMS         PCMSETUP     STAC
|    CHECK          FILEUP       REMOVDRV     STACKER
|    CNFIGNAM       HCONVERT     REPORT       SYSINFO
|    CONFIG         PASSWD       REXX         TUNER
|    CREATE         PCM          SCREATE      UNCOMP
|    DDPOPUP        PCMDINST     SDEFRAG      UNPACK2
|    DCONVERT       PCMFDISK     SDIR         VIEW
|    DOSDATA        PCMINST      SETUP (StackeXDF
|    DOSDOCK        PCMRMAN      SSETUP       XDFCOPY
 
 
| NEW, CHANGED, OR REMOVED OPTIONAL TOOLS
  _______________________________________
 
|    The new features of and enhancements to the optional
|    tools provided with PC DOS include:
 
|    o   REXX Language Support has been added as the PC
|        DOS programming language tool of choice.  REXX
|        for DOS includes utilities and REXX commands
|        that have been designed to work specifically
|        with PC DOS.
 
|    o   Stacker Compression is now the optional tool
|        that provides data compression for your system.
|        Stacker Compression allows you to:
 
|        -   Convert any existing SuperStor/DS,
|            DoubleSpace, or DriveSpace compression
|            during Stacker Setup.
 
 
 
 
                                                    What's New for PC DOS 7  xv
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        -   Convert any standalone version of Stacker
|            Compression you might already have
|            installed.
 
|        -   Make menu selections using either the
|            Stacker DOS Toolbox or the Stacker Windows
|            Toolbox.
 
|        -   Use data on compressed diskettes even on a
|            computer that does not have Stacker
|            installed.
 
|        -   Guard your data because every time you start
|            up your system Stacker runs AutoProtect to
|            make sure your data is in good condition.
 
|    o   PCMCIA Support now provides easier Setup
|        procedures because of the new DOS and Windows
|        full-screen interfaces included with PC DOS 7.
|        The PCM.INI file is updated for you as you use
|        the PCMCIA installation program to make
|        selections for the type of PCMCIA support you
|        want.
 
|    o   Central Point Backup has been enhanced.
 
|    o   Anti-virus protection provided with PC DOS
|        (AntiVirus or IBM AntiVirus for Windows), has
|        been updated to recognize and fix more viruses.
 
|        If you are using AntiVirus Services, a
|        full-service anti-virus protection offering
|        provided separately by IBM or have previously
|        purchased the IBM AntiVirus/DOS product
|        separately, you do not need to install the
|        AntiVirus optional tool provided with PC DOS.
|        For more information about IBM AntiVirus
|        Services, refer to the coupon provided in the
|        separate coupon booklet.
 
|    o   IBM DOS Shell has been renamed to PC DOS Shell.
 
 
 
 
  xvi  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| NEW, CHANGED, OR REMOVED .INI FILES
  ___________________________________
 
|    The following .INI files have been added, changed,
|    or no longer required for PC DOS 7:
 
     NEW            CHANGED      REMOVED
|    E.INI          RAMBOOST.INI ADDSTOR.INI
|    PCM.INI                     DBLSPACE.INI
|    RAMSETUP.INI
|    STACKER.INI
 
 
| NEW OR CHANGED PC DOS COMMANDS AND DEVICE DRIVERS
  _________________________________________________
 
|    For further information about what was enhanced or
|    changed about the following DOS commands and device
|    drivers, type "help" followed by the name of the
|    command or device driver.
 
|    NOTE:  You must add the extension of the device
|           driver file.  For example, you would type
|           "help ansi.sys" to get online help about the
|           ANSI.SYS device driver.
 
|    ANSI.SYS       DISPLAY.SYS  HIMEM.SYS    QCONFIG
|    BUFFERS        DOSKEY       IBMBIO.COM   RAMBOOST
|    COMMAND.COM    E (E Editor) IBMDOS.COM   RAMBOOST.EXE
|    DBLSPACE.COM   EMM386.EXE   INTERLNK     RAMDRIVE.SYS
|    DEFRAG         FIND         MSCDEX       RAMSETUP
|    DISKCOPY       HELP         POWER        SETUP
|                                             SMARTDRV.EXE
 
 
| NEW, CHANGED OR REMOVED KEYBOARDS AND CODE PAGES
  ________________________________________________
 
|        452 keyboard
|        453 keyboard (provides the DIN 2137 German
|        keyboard layout)
|        865 code page
|        912 code page
|        915 code page
 
|    The United Kingdom keyboard 168 has been removed.
 
 
                                                  What's New for PC DOS 7  xvii
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Type "help keyb" for more keyboard and country code
|    information.
 
 
| PC DOS COMMANDS NO LONGER PROVIDED
  __________________________________
 
     The following commands are no longer provided with
     PC DOS 7  This list includes:
 
     o   SuperStor/DS compression commands replaced by
         Stacker commands.
 
     o   PCMCIA Support commands replaced because of the
         new DOS and Windows full-screen installation
         interfaces.
 
     o   Infrequently used commands that are not being
         installed as part of PC DOS 7.
 
     o   Commands no longer provided by PC DOS.
 
|        -   If you have a previous version of DOS
|            installed and are upgrading your system,
|            these commands will not be removed during
|            installation.
 
|        -   If you still want to use these commands and
|            have no diskettes from previous versions of
|            DOS, these commands will be provided through
|            electronic delivery, such as bulletin board
|            services.
 
|        -   If you have a licensed copy of PC DOS 6.3,
|            you are authorized to copy these commands to
|            any system with a licensed copy PC DOS 7.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  xviii  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    SUPERSTOR/DS   PCMCIA       FILES PROVIDEREMOVED
|    COMMANDS       COMMANDS     THROUGH BBS  COMMANDS
     DBLSPACE.SYS   PCMFDD.EXE   4201.CPI     EXPAND
     MOUNT          PCMINFO      4208.CPI     MEUTOINI
     RTOOL          PCMMTD       COMP.COM     RECOVER
     SSTOR          PCMMTD.EXE   EDLIN.EXE
     SSUNCOMP       WPCMINFO.CPL EGA.SYS
     SSUTIL                      EPS.CPI
     UDEOFF                      EXE2BIN.EXE
     UDEON                       FASTOPEN.EXE
     UNMOUNT                     GRAPHICS.COM
                                 GRAPHICS.PRO
                                 PPDS.CPI
                                 PRINTER.SYS
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   What's New for PC DOS 7  xix
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  xx  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
                                        PART 1.  USING THE DOS OPERATING SYSTEM
                                        _______________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
|    CHAPTER 1.  INSTALLING PC DOS 7  . . . . . . . .   3
 
|    CHAPTER 2.  USING THE ONLINE BOOK VIEWER   . . .  29
 
     CHAPTER 3.  CONFIGURING YOUR SYSTEM  . . . . . .  47
 
     CHAPTER 4.  WORKING WITH THE TEXT EDITOR   . . .  73
 
     CHAPTER 5.  CONNECTING COMPUTERS   . . . . . .   143
 
     CHAPTER 6.  MAKING MORE MEMORY AVAILABLE   . .   161
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                          1
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  2  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CHAPTER 1.  INSTALLING PC DOS 7
  _______________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    This chapter provides what you need to know to
|    perform a standard installation of PC DOS 7 (PC DOS)
|    on your computer system.  A standard installation
|    means you are:
 
|    o   Installing PC DOS on your existing hard disk
|        over another version of DOS or PC DOS.
 
|    o   Installing PC DOS on a newly formatted and
|        partitioned hard disk.
 
|    o   Installing PC DOS on a new computer system that
|        does not have any type of operating system
|        installed.
 
|    Special installation procedures might be required
|    because of the software or hardware you are using
|    with your computer system.  These procedures can be
|    found in the appendix of this guide.  Or, you can
|    review the installation guidelines (Table 2 on
|    page 20).  This table helps you choose the
|    installation information that pertains to your
|    system.  Read the specific information that applies
|    to your system before beginning the install process
                    ______
|    to ensure a successful installation.
 
 
| WHAT'S NEW ABOUT SETUP FOR PC DOS 7
  ___________________________________
 
|    The PC DOS Setup program (Setup) includes unique
|    features not found in previous versions of DOS.
|    Review this abbreviated description of enhancements
|    before beginning the installation.  Complete
|    information regarding these enhancements is
|    described elsewhere in this chapter or in the
|    installation information in the appendix:
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                          3
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Diskettes used for PC DOS installation (other
|        than the Setup diskette) have been specially
                  ______________
|        formatted using a format process known as
|        eXtended Density Format (XDF).  XDF extends the
|        capacity of the diskettes.
 
|        This special format does not affect running
         ___________________________________________
|        Setup.  The Setup program is specifically
         _____
|        designed to use XDF-formatted diskettes;
|        however, the Setup program for versions of PC
|        DOS prior to PC DOS 7 does not support this XDF
|        format.
 
|    o   The Setup Diskette runs the Setup program file
             ______________
|        (SETUP) and also serves as an emergency startup
|        diskette--even if you have compressed drives.
|        This diskette is not XDF-formatted; its format
|        is a standard DOS format.
 
|    o   There is a new command, the XDFCOPY command.
|        The purpose of this new command is to allow you
|        to make backup copies of all your PC DOS
|        XDF-formatted installation diskettes.  If you
|        need to copy your Setup Diskette or any
                           ______________
|        standard-formatted diskette, continue to use the
|        DISKCOPY command as you always have.
 
|    o   PC DOS Setup files are now packed together in
|        what is known as a bundle file.  If you need a
                            ___________
|        copy of a file from the PC DOS installation
|        diskettes, the recommended method is to rerun
|        Setup because Setup unpacks and copies files in
|        one step.  The EXPAND command is no longer
|        needed or supported.
 
|    o   Because XDF-formatted diskettes are different
|        than standard DOS-formatted diskettes, some DOS
|        commands are affected by this format:
 
|        -   Certain DOS commands only work with
|            XDF-formatted diskettes (XDF and XDFCOPY).
 
 
 
 
  4  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        -   Some DOS commands can be used on the
|            XDF-formatted diskettes but only under
|            specific circumstances (DIR and FORMAT).
 
|        -   Certain DOS commands cannot be used with
|            XDF-formatted diskettes (DISKCOPY and
|            DISKCOMP).
 
|        Refer to "Working with XDF-Formatted Diskettes"
|        on page 434 or the online PC DOS 7 Command
                                   ________________
|        Reference for specifics about using these
         _________
|        commands with XDF-formatted diskettes.
 
|    o   If you already have a mouse device attached and
|        loaded, PC DOS Setup will provide mouse support
|        during installation for making selections.
 
|    o   Comment lines are added to your system files
|        (AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS) to identify the
|        changes PC DOS Setup made.  Setup identifies the
|        lines in the files that were added, changed,
|        replaced, and updated.  If changing, replacing,
|        or updating a line, it includes the original
|        statement on the comment line for reference.
 
|    o   A new /C switch is added to the SETUP command to
|        remove comments lines to system files after
|        installation is completed.
 
|    o   Setup sequentially numbers the backup versions
|        for each of the two system files (AUTOEXEC.BAT
|        and CONFIG.SYS) whenever you run the Setup
|        program.
 
 
  BEFORE INSTALLING
  _________________
 
|    Before installing, take a few minutes to review the
|    questions that follow before you actually begin the
|    installation.
 
|    o   Do you have enough free space to install DOS?
|    o   Do you have the correct required hardware?
 
 
                                             Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  5
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Should you be using a SETUP command parameter to
|        install?
|    o   Which installation procedure should you use?
|    o   Do you want to install and copy PC DOS files to
|        your hard disk?
 
|    You should read all the information in the following
|    sections before proceeding to "PC DOS Standard
|    Installation" on page 22.
 
 
| HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE PREREQUISITES
  ___________________________________
 
|    PC DOS operates on all IBM or compatible computers
|    with at least 512K of memory.  As a minimum, you
     must have a computer that has a 1.44MB-capacity,
     3.5-inch diskette drive or a 1.2MB-capacity,
     5.25-inch diskette drive specified as drive A.  Your
|    hard drive should have a minimum of 6MB of free
|    space to install only the DOS files and Central
|    Point Backup(**) for DOS.  18MB of free space is
|    needed if you want to install PC DOS plus all the
|    optional tools.
 
|    If upgrading from a previous version of DOS, keep
     _________________________________________________
|    the following things in mind:
     _____________________________
 
|    o   You can upgrade only DOS Version 3.3 or higher.
|    o   You can upgrade only a FAT-formatted hard disk.
|    o   You might want to back up and save your previous
|        version of DOS (see "Uninstalling and Restoring
|        Your Previous Version of DOS" on page 430).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Central Point Backup is a trademark of Central Point Software, Inc.
 
 
  6  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| MOUSE SUPPORT DURING SETUP
  __________________________
 
|    PC DOS allows you the option of using a mouse during
|    installation if you have a mouse program loaded.
 
|    Click mouse button 1 (normally the left mouse
|    button) once to make an option selection, choose a
|    function key, or toggle choices from NO to YES in
|    the optional tools list.
 
|    NOTE:   The only time mouse support would not be
|           available during Setup is if you need to boot
|           the system using the startup diskette (see
|           "Installing If You Have No Hard Disk" on
|           page 410).
 
|    If all the selections you can make are not visible
|    at one time in a window, you will see a small
|    highlighted rectangular bar in brackets at either
|    the top or the bottom of the window to indicate
|    "More" selections.  Click on the rectangular bar at
|    the top of the window to scroll up through the
|    choices and the one at the bottom to scroll down.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                             Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  7
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CHANGES MADE BY SETUP TO THE AUTOEXEC.BAT AND CONFIG.SYS FILES
  ______________________________________________________________
 
|    Setup modifies your AUTOEXEC.BAT file and your
|    CONFIG.SYS file.  Optionally, you can make additonal
|    changes to the system files yourself during
|    installation.  What modifications Setup makes to
|    your system files depend on whether or not you
|    already have a version of DOS or PC DOS installed on
|    your system.
 
|    IF YOU CURRENTLY HAVE A PREVIOUS VERSION (RERUNNING
|    SETUP OR UPGRADING) OF DOS:
 
|    The following are the changes that PC DOS Setup
|    makes to these files.
 
|    o   Backing up your current system files as
|        AUTOEXEC.nnn or as CONFIG.nnn, where nnn is the
                  ___              ___        ___
|        next highest incremental number between 000 and
|        999.  Even if only one of the system files is
|        changed, both the AUTOEXEC.BAT and the
|        CONFIG.SYS files are given the same incremental
|        number so they can be easily identified as
|        corresponding pairs.
 
|        For example, if you have both a CONFIG.003 file
|        and a CONFIG.005, file (and because CONFIG.005
|        is currently the highest incremental number),
|        the next file extension number would be
|        CONFIG.006 instead of CONFIG.004.
 
|    o   Verifying that all the required lines are
|        included in the system files and, if not, adding
|        them.
 
|        For example, if you selected an optional tool
|        requiring a command-line statement, the
|        appropriate statement will be added.
 
|    o   Updating DOS programs with new programs that
|        perform the same function (see "What's New for
|        PC DOS 7" on page xiii).
 
 
 
  8  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Removing obsolete DOS programs (see "PC DOS
|        Commands No Longer Provided" on page xviii).
 
|    o   Preserving existing DEVICE and INSTALL
|        command-line statements in the CONFIG.SYS file,
|        even if you have multiple configurations for
|        system startup.
 
|    o   Detecting if Windows is installed, and making
|        appropriate changes to the Windows .INI files,
|        such as SYSTEM.INI, PROGMAN.INI, and WIN.INI
|        files.  Also, saving a backup version of these
|        files with an file name extension of .BAK.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                             Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  9
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Adding one of the following four types of
|        comment lines.  The type of comment line added
|        depends on how Setup modified the file:
 
|              REM ===== PC DOS 7.0 - Add     =====
|              REM ===== PC DOS 7.0 - Delete  =====  original_statement
                                                     __________________
|              REM ===== PC DOS 7.0 - Replace =====  original_statement
                                                     __________________
|              REM ===== PC DOS 7.0 - Update  =====  original_statement
                                                     __________________
 
|        When Setup updates, deletes, or replaces a
|        command-line statement, the original statement
|        is placed on the comment line for reference.
|        Edit these files if you want to return the
|        command-line statement to how it was originally.
 
|        To view or edit changes made to your system
|        files, answer YES when queried during Setup (see
|        "Viewing and Editing the System Files during
|        Install" on page 431.).
 
|        After completing Setup, you can remove all the
|        comments added by Setup at the same time.  Any
|        command-line statements where you added the REM
|        statement will not be removed.
 
|        To remove the PC DOS 7.0 REM comments (after the
|        installation has completed), insert the Setup
                                                 _____
|        Diskette into drive A and type the following at
         ________
|        the DOS command prompt:
 
|              a:setup /c
 
|    IF YOU DO NOT HAVE A PREVIOUS VERSION OF DOS:
 
|    Setup will create system files if they do not
|    already exist.
 
|    A minimum CONFIG.SYS configuration is created that
|    includes:
 
|    o   Adding a HIMEM.SYS statement
|    o   Adding a FILES statement with at least 30 files.
 
 
 
  10  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Adding a BUFFERS statement with at least 10
|        buffers.
|    o   Adding a SETVER statement.
 
|    A minimum AUTOEXEC.BAT file configuration is created
|    that includes:
 
|    o   Creating a path statement for the DOS directory.
|    o   Adding the DOSKey program, which allows you to
|        view, edit and carry out DOS commands you used
|        previously.
|    o   Loading the mouse if a mouse device is detected.
 
 
  SETUP COMMAND AND ITS OPTIONS
  _____________________________
 
     The SETUP command is used when you are installing
|    the latest version of PC DOS.  Insert the Setup
                                               _____
|    Diskette into your drive (drive A for example).
     ________
|    Then, to see the syntax and a brief explanation of
|    this command online, you would type "a:setup /?" (if
|    drive A is your diskette drive) at the DOS command
|    prompt.
 
|    After installing PC DOS, if you still need further
|    details about the SETUP command, type "help setup"
|    at the DOS command prompt.
 
 
  COMMAND SYNTAX
 
     The following syntax shows the options that can be
     used with the SETUP command:
 
|    [drive:]SETUP [/A][/B][/C][/E][/P][/Q.:]
      ______
|    [/T:filepath][/U][/W]
         ________
|    OR:
 
|    drive: SETUP [/?]
     ______
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  11
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  COMMAND PARAMETERS AND SWITCHES
 
     The following list provides a brief explanation of
     how each switch can be used with the SETUP command.
 
|    drive:      Specifies the drive where you insert the
     ______
|                Setup Diskette that contains the SETUP
                 ______________
|                program.
 
     /A          Specifies the LAN Server Administrator
                 installation option.
 
     /B          Specifies to use black and white instead
                 of color screen display.
 
|    /C          Removes comment lines from your
|                AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS system files
|                placed there by Setup.  This switch is
|                used after installation has been
|                completed.
 
|    /E          Installs only the files needed for the
|                PC DOS optional tools you select.  DOS
|                files are not recopied when you use this
|                switch.
 
     /P          Installs PC DOS on a disk that might be
                 incompatible with DOS.
 
|    /Q          Allows you to change your keyboard and
|                country selections without a complete
|                re-installation of PC DOS.  Your
|                AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files are
|                modified using this switch.
 
     /T:filepath Specifies the target path to copy DOS
        ________
                 files to.
 
|    /U          Use to uninstall the current version of
|                DOS; to use, you must have backed up
|                your previous version when you installed
|                the current version.
 
 
 
  12  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     /W          Allows Windows tools to be installed
|                even though a valid Windows directory
                 was not found.
 
|    /?          Displays the abbreviated online help.
 
|                Setup does not copy the SETUP program
|                file to your hard drive.  To use the /?
|                switch, you must insert the Setup
                                             _____
|                Diskette into your diskette drive and
                 ________
|                type "setup /?"
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  13
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  OTHER INSTALLATION OPTIONS
  __________________________
 
|    The PC DOS Setup program provides your system with
|    the information it needs to operate effectively.
|    During the installation, PC DOS will prompt you to
|    verify and change information and then acts on your
|    choices.  You will be prompted to make certain
|    decisions, such as:
 
     o   Do you want to change the current time and date?
     o   Will you want to partition and format your hard
         disk?
     o   What keyboard and country code page do you want
         to use?
     o   Do you want ISO fonts?
     o   Which optional tools do you want installed?
     o   Where do you want to install DOS to?
     o   Do you want to back up your previous version of
         DOS?
     o   Where are your current DOS files located now
         (applies only when you are upgrading your
         system)?
|    o   Do you need to edit or view the changes made to
         your system files by Setup or make your own
         additional changes to the system files
         (CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT)?
 
     If you do not know the answers, just accept the
     choices that PC DOS installation makes for you
     (called defaults)--except for optional tools.
             ________
 
|    Most of the optional tools are set to NO, which
|    means the tools will not be installed; be sure to
|    select the optional tools you want so the program
|    files get copied.  To see all the tools, scroll to
|    the top of the optional tools window.
 
|    NOTE:  The selection of the PC DOS Central Point
|           Backup for DOS optional tool has already been
|           defaulted to YES.
 
 
 
 
 
  14  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    You can always rerun Setup later to add any optional
|    tools you did not want to install initially using
|    the /E switch (typing "setup /e").
 
 
  OPTIONAL TOOLS SELECTION
  ________________________
 
|    PC DOS includes the optional tools listed in Table 1
|    on page 16.  During installation, you will be
|    prompted to choose which ones you want on your
|    system.  After you select the tools you want, Setup
|    copies the required program files for the selected
|    tools to your DOS directory.
 
|    Certain optional tools must run their own
|    installation program before they can be used (for
|    example, Stacker and PCMCIA Support) because they
|    require certain user-specified information, which is
|    obtained during program installation.  Before
|    running the optional tool installation program, you
|    should review the installation information about
|    each tool.
 
|    If you are upgrading your current version of DOS to
|    PC DOS 7 and currently have Windows installed on
|    your computer, you will see additional optional
|    tools just for Windows.
 
|    If you do not currently have Windows installed, the
|    Windows tools will not be included in the list of
|    optional tools.  If you want to add the optional
|    tools for Windows at a later time, install Windows
|    first and then rerun Setup using the /E switch.
 
|    NOTE:  Installing Windows first ensures that the
|           Windows .INI files are updated properly.
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Windows and Microsoft are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
 
| (**) PenDOS is a trademark of the Communication Intelligence Corporation.
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  15
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | The unresolved cross references will format      |
|    | correctly when the entire book is formatted.     |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
|    | Table 1 (Page 1 of 3). Optional Tools for DOS    |
|    |         and Windows                              |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
     | OPTIONAL   | WHAT IT DOES:           | REFER TO: |
     | TOOL:      |                         |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | PenDOS(**) | PenDOS allows the use   | Page --   |
|    |            | of pen-based            | Heading   |
|    |            | applications and allows | 'PDOS'    |
|    |            | you to use the mouse as | unknown   |
|    |            | the pen for             | --        |
|    |            | applications (for       |           |
|    |            | software and hardware   |           |
|    |            | prerequisites, see      |           |
|    |            | "Installing PenDOS" on  |           |
|    |            | page 418).              |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | REXX       | REXX is a simple yet    | The       |
|    | Language   | powerful programming    | online PC |
                                                     __
|    | Support    | language that can be    | DOS 7     |
                                              _____
|    |            | used by both beginners  | Command   |
                                              _______
|    |            | and experienced users   | Reference |
                                              _________
|    |            | to write programs.      |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
| (**) Phoenix is a trademark of Phoenix Technologies, Ltd.
 
| (**) PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International
|     Association.
 
| (**) Central Point is a trademark of Central Point Software, Inc.
 
 
  16  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
|    | Table 1 (Page 2 of 3). Optional Tools for DOS    |
|    |         and Windows                              |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | OPTIONAL   | WHAT IT DOES:           | REFER TO: |
|    | TOOL:      |                         |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | Phoenix(**)| Phoenix Personal        | Page 371  |
|    | PCMCIA     | Computer Memory Card    |           |
|    | Support    | International           |           |
|    |            | Association             |           |
|    |            | (PCMCIA(**)) support    |           |
|    |            | provides support for    |           |
|    |            | PCMCIA devices if your  |           |
|    |            | computer is equipped    |           |
|    |            | with PCMCIA sockets.  A |           |
|    |            | credit card-sized       |           |
|    |            | device is inserted into |           |
|    |            | these sockets extending |           |
|    |            | the capability of the   |           |
|    |            | computer.               |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | Central    | Central Point's         | Page --   |
|    | Point(**)Un|eUndelete for Windows is | Heading   |
|    | for        | a support utility for   | 'UDWIN'   |
|    | Windows    | Windows if it is        | unknown   |
|    |            | installed on your       | --        |
|    |            | computer.               |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | IBM        | IBM AntiVirus/DOS for   | See page  |
|    | AntiVirus/D|SWindows provides        | /AVWIN/   |
|    | for        | support for Windows     |           |
|    | Windows    | when using this tool to |           |
|    |            | protect your computer   |           |
|    |            | from viruses.           |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | IBM        | IBM AntiVirus/DOS       | Page --   |
|    | AntiVirus/D|Schecks for computer     | Heading   |
|    |            | viruses on either your  | 'AVIRUS'  |
|    |            | hard drives or          | unknown   |
|    |            | diskettes to prevent    | --        |
|    |            | loss of data.           |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  17
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
|    | Table 1 (Page 3 of 3). Optional Tools for DOS    |
|    |         and Windows                              |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | OPTIONAL   | WHAT IT DOES:           | REFER TO: |
|    | TOOL:      |                         |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | PC DOS     | Uses color and graphics | Page 195  |
|    | Shell      | to provide a visual way |           |
|    |            | of working with DOS.    |           |
|    |            | Information is set up   |           |
|    |            | in different areas on   |           |
|    |            | your screen, making it  |           |
|    |            | easy to find.           |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | Stacker(**)| Provides data           | Page 293  |
|    | Compression| compression utilities   |           |
|    |            | for effectively and     |           |
|    |            | safely increasing the   |           |
|    |            | amount of data you can  |           |
|    |            | store on your hard      |           |
|    |            | drives and diskettes.   |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | Central    | Central Point           | See page  |
|    | Point      | Backup(**) for Windows  | 233       |
|    | Backup for | provides support for    |           |
|    | Windows    | Windows when using this |           |
|    |            | full-screen program to  |           |
|    |            | backup the information  |           |
|    |            | on your computer.       |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
|    | Central    | Full-screen program for | Page 229  |
|    | Point      | backing up the          |           |
|    | Backup for | information on your     |           |
|    | DOS        | computer.  Installed as |           |
|    |            | a default.  If you do   |           |
|    |            | not want to install or  |           |
|    |            | use Central Point       |           |
|    |            | Backup, be sure to      |           |
|    |            | select NO on the        |           |
|    |            | optional tools screen.  |           |
     +------------+-------------------------+-----------+
 
 
 
  18  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
| (**) Stacker is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  19
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
  _______________________
 
     The following table helps you choose the correct
     procedure for the type of installation you want to
     do.
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
     | Table 2 (Page 1 of 3). Installation Guideline    |
     |         Choices                                  |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | INSTALLATION GUIDELINES      |    SEE PAGE...    |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are installing PC DOS |         22        |
     | for the first time and you   |                   |
     | have no other systems on     |                   |
     | your computer                |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you are installing PC DOS | 22 and -- Heading |
|    | on a new hard disk, a newly  |  'DSKV34' unknown |
|    | formatted hard disk, or a    |        --         |
     | partitioned hard disk        |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are installing PC DOS |         22        |
     | on your hard disk            |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you want to install PC    |        410        |
|    | DOS but have no hard disk    |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are installing PC DOS |         22        |
     | and you have Windows on your |                   |
     | computer                     |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are installing PC DOS |        409        |
     | files on a drive other than  |                   |
     | drive C                      |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are installing PC DOS |        411        |
     | and you have OS/2(*)         |                   |
     | installed                    |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you want to use OS/2 Dual |        413        |
     | Boot (after installation)    |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
 
 
  20  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
     | Table 2 (Page 2 of 3). Installation Guideline    |
     |         Choices                                  |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | INSTALLATION GUIDELINES      |    SEE PAGE...    |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are installing PC DOS |        414        |
     | on a PS/1(*)                 |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are installing PC DOS |        415        |
     | on a compressed drive        |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you want to review        |        418        |
|    | prerequisites for PenDOS     |                   |
|    | before installing            |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are a LAN             |        419        |
     | Administrator responsible    |                   |
     | for installing PC DOS        |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are a LAN user and    |        423        |
     | need to upgrade to PC DOS    |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you want to install PC    |        424        |
|    | DOS from a CD-ROM            |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you need to uninstall PC  |        430        |
     | DOS                          |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you want to rerun Setup   |        426        |
|    | to add optional tools        |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you want to add Windows   |        427        |
|    | optional tools only          |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you need to work with     |        434        |
|    | XDF-formatted installation   |                   |
|    | diskettes                    |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you want to view or edit  |        431        |
|    | the changes Setup made to    |                   |
|    | your system files            |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  21
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
     | Table 2 (Page 3 of 3). Installation Guideline    |
     |         Choices                                  |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | INSTALLATION GUIDELINES      |    SEE PAGE...    |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
|    | If you need to view the PC   |        433        |
|    | DOS README.TXT file          |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you are not installing on |        441        |
     | a hard disk but want to use  |                   |
     | some of the DOS commands     |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
     | If you have an installation  |        442        |
     | problem                      |                   |
     +------------------------------+-------------------+
 
 
| PC DOS STANDARD INSTALLATION
  ____________________________
 
|    Setup installs PC DOS on drive C on the hard disk in
|    your computer and makes choices (installation
|    defaults) for you.  Most people wanting to install
|    PC DOS will want to use this standard installation
|    procedure.
 
     Before beginning the install:
 
     o   Check the installation guidelines that apply to
         your system.  See the Installation Guidelines
         table, Table 2 on page 20.
 
     o   Make sure that your system has 512K of available
         memory.  This is the minimum amount of memory
|        needed for PC DOS.
 
         For additional information about the hard
         disk-space requirements, see "Hardware and
         Software Prerequisites" on page 6.
 
  ---------------
 
  (*) PS/1 and OS/2 are trademarks of the IBM Corporation.
 
 
  22  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Read the introductory information earlier in
|        this chapter, if you have not already done so.
 
     o   Be aware that this install is designed to
         replace all the existing DOS files currently in
         the directory you choose to install to.
 
     A file will be replaced if it has the same file name
|    as that being installed and if it already exists in
     the directory you choose to install to.
 
     TO INSTALL PC DOS:
 
|    1.  If you do not currently have DOS installed on
         _____________________________________________
|        your system (booting from diskettes):
         ____________________________________
 
|        a.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                        ______________
 
|        b.  Turn the power on (cold boot) for your
                                _________
|            computer or, if it is already powered on,
|            press CTRL+ALT+DEL (warm boot) to restart
                                 _________
|            your computer.
 
|        c.  Answer Yes when queried whether you want to
|            install PC DOS 7.
 
|        If you currently have DOS installed on your
         ___________________________________________
|        system:
         ______
 
|        a.  Turn on your computer and start your current
|            system.
 
             NOTE:  See the PC DOS README.TXT file for
                    special instructions if you have DR
                    DOS currently installed.
 
         b.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A or B.
                        ______________
 
         c.  Type either "a:setup" or "b:setup", at the
             DOS command prompt.
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  23
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    2.  After the PC DOS Welcome screen is displayed,
|        press ENTER or click on "Continue" to continue
         following instructions on the screens.
 
         A selection window is displayed that allows you
         to change the current time and date, character
         set for the country, keyboard layout for the
|        country, or the ISO font (if you have a VGA or
|        above display).
 
|    3.  If you want to change these options:
         ____________________________________
 
         a.  Either use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to
|            scroll through the list, and press ENTER for
|            the list item you want to change while it is
|            highlighted, or use the mouse to make your
|            change.  (Each list item is highlighted as
|            you come to it.)
 
|            After making your selection, you are
|            returned to the selection window.
 
|        b.  Continue to scroll the screen making the
|            changes you want.
 
|    4.  After changing options, either use the DOWN
|        ARROW to scroll to:
 
|              Options correct. Continue Setup.
 
|        Press ENTER.  Or, click on this line if using a
|        mouse.
 
|        A selection window is displayed that lets you
|        specify the optional tools you want to install.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  24  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         In order to have the files necessary for each
         optional tool copied to your hard disk, you must
         change the selection choice from NO to YES for
         each tool you want to install.
 
|        NOTE:   Central Point CPBackup for DOS is
|               defaulted to YES for you.
 
     5.  If you want to select any optional tools:
         _________________________________________
 
|        a.  Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll
             through the list of optional tools.  Each
             list item is highlighted as you come to it.
 
             Note that other tools, such as PenDOS, might
|            not be visible.  If you see the word "More"
|            appearing at the top of the optional tools
|            selection window, either use the mouse and
|            click on the rectangular bar or use the UP
|            ARROW to scroll to the top of the list.
 
|        b.  Either press ENTER, or click on the item
|            using the mouse to select an optional tool
|            for your system.  Note that pressing ENTER
|            or, clicking on the optional tool, toggles
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  25
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|            (changes back and forth) your choices from
|            NO to YES or YES to NO.  The amount of
|            available disk space is updated as you
|            select optional tools.
 
         c.  Continue to scroll the screen making the
             choices you want.  When you have finished,
|            scroll to the" Options correct. Continue
|            Setup." line and press ENTER, or click on
|            this line using your mouse.
 
|        A selection window is displayed that lets you
|        change the path for your previous DOS and
|        Windows (if Windows is detected during
|        installation) directories, if necessary.
|        Changing the path is only necessary if you are
|        upgrading from a previous version of DOS or
|        Windows.  Also, you can specify whether or not
|        to back up your previous version of DOS files.
 
     6.  Select one of the following:
 
         o   If you do not want to back up your previous
             ___________________________________________
             version of DOS:
             _______________
 
             Make sure the option specifies NO, which is
             the default.
 
         o   If you want to back up your previous version
             ____________________________________________
             of DOS:
             _______
 
|            Change the option to specify YES and then
|            press ENTER.  You will need to have enough
|            blank diskettes available to save your
|            previous DOS files.  Follow the instructions
|            on your screen until you have backed up all
|            the files.  The actual number of diskettes
|            depends on what version you are backing up.
 
|    7.  When you have finished, either use the DOWN
|        ARROW to scroll to the "Options correct.
|        Continue Setup." line and press ENTER, or click
|        on this line using your mouse.
 
 
  26  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    8.  Continue to follow the instructions on your
|        screen and insert the remaining installation
|        diskettes in the order prompted.  If you did not
|        select all the optional tools, you might not
|        need to insert every diskette during
|        installation.
 
|        Notice that, as Setup unpacks and copies files
|        to the DOS directory, a message appears at the
|        bottom of your installation screen showing the
|        file's name.
 
         Immediately before the PC DOS installation is
         finished, you are prompted whether you want to
|        view or edit the changes made by Setup and saved
|        in your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files.
|        Optionally, you can edit these files yourself
|        and modify the changes that Setup made.
 
|    9.  Answer YES or NO when prompted whether to edit
|        the changes in the system files.
 
|        o   If you answer YES, refer to "Viewing and
|            Editing the System Files during Install" on
|            page 431 for procedures to follow if you
|            select YES when prompted whether you want to
|            edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS
|            changes.
 
|        o   If you answer NO, either use the DOWN ARROW
|            to scroll to:
 
|                  Options correct. Continue Setup.
 
|            Then press ENTER.  Or, click on this line if
|            using a mouse.
 
     10. Follow the instructions on the screen until you
         are informed that the installation has been
|        completed and that your system will be rebooted.
|        System file changes only take effect following a
|        system reboot.
 
 
 
                                            Chapter 1.  Installing PC DOS 7  27
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        Be sure to remove any diskettes from the
|        diskette drive before pressing any key to
|        reboot.
 
     NOTES FOR INSTALLING:
 
     o   If you choose not to install all of the optional
         ________________________________________________
         tools:
         ______
|        You may not be required to insert every
|        diskette, if you do not select every optional
|        tool.
 
     o   If you have an error message occurring during
         _____________________________________________
         the installation process:
         _________________________
         See "Problem Determination" on page 442.  This
         section contains actions you can take to resolve
         problems you might have while running Setup.
 
     o   If you want to add any optional tools at a later
         ________________________________________________
         time that were not installed initially:
         _______________________________________
         You can use the /E switch (see "Installing
         Additional DOS and Windows Optional Tools" on
         page 426).
 
     o   If you have questions about any of the
         ______________________________________
         procedures or options:
         ______________________
         Help is available by pressing the F1 key.
 
     o   If you install PC DOS over an existing version
         ______________________________________________
         of DOS:
         _______
         Setup updates your existing CONFIG.SYS and
|        AUTOEXEC.BAT files and saves the original files
|        as CONFIG.nnn and AUTOEXEC.nnn.
                   ___              ___
 
     o   If you do not have a hard disk to install PC DOS
         ________________________________________________
         on:
         ___
         You can use the Setup Diskette as a startup
                         ______________
|        diskette to run DOS from your diskette drives.
|        You will not have all DOS features available;
|        you can use only the DOS commands that are
|        available on the Setup Diskette.  Use the DIR
                          ______________
|        command to list the files provided on that
|        diskette.
 
 
  28  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CHAPTER 2.  USING THE ONLINE BOOK VIEWER
  ________________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    The PC DOS Viewer is the documentation viewer for PC
         _____________
|    DOS 7 that allows you to read online books.  PC
|    DOS 7 comes with three books online:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                         29
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+------------+------------------------+
|    | NAME OF    | ICON       | CONTAINS...            |
|    | ONLINE     |            |                        |
|    | BOOK       |            |                        |
     +------------+------------+------------------------+
|    | CMDREF     | The online |                        |
|    |            | PC DOS     |                        |
|    |            | Command    |                        |
|    |            | Reference, |                        |
|    |            | which      |                        |
|    |            | provides   |                        |
|    |            | information|                        |
|    |            | about      |                        |
|    |            | command    |                        |
|    |            | syntax, PC |                        |
|    |            | DOS        |                        |
|    |            | commands,  |                        |
|    |            | device     |                        |
|    |            | drivers,   |                        |
|    |            | and .INI   |                        |
|    |            | files.     |                        |
     +------------+------------+------------------------+
|    | DOSREXX    | A          |                        |
|    |            | description|                        |
|    |            | of the DOS |                        |
|    |            | REXX       |                        |
|    |            | commands.  |                        |
     +------------+------------+------------------------+
|    | DOSERROR   | An         |                        |
|    |            | explanation|                        |
|    |            | of the     |                        |
|    |            | more       |                        |
|    |            | common DOS |                        |
|    |            | error      |                        |
|    |            | messages.  |                        |
     +------------+------------+------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  30  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| STARTING THE PC DOS VIEWER
  __________________________
 
|    The PC DOS Viewer can be started from:
 
|    o   The DOS command prompt
|    o   PC DOS Shell
|    o   OS/2
|    o   Microsoft Windows
 
|    STARTING THE PC DOS VIEWER FROM THE DOS COMMAND
|    PROMPT:  All online books for PC DOS 7 have a file
|    extension of .INF and are in the same directory as
|    your other PC DOS 7 files.  To start the PC DOS
|    Viewer and view any online DOS book with an
|    extension of .INF, at the DOS command prompt type:
 
|          view bookname
                ________
 
|    where bookname is the name of the online
           ________
|    book--either CMDREF, DOSREXX, or DOSRERROR.  For
|    example, you would type "view cmdref" to view the
|    online Command Reference.  The online book also
|    opens when you include the .INF extension (for
|    example, "view cmdref.inf").
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  31
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    STARTING THE PC DOS VIEWER FROM PC DOS SHELL:
|    Before you can start the PC DOS Viewer from the PC
|    DOS Shell, first you must:
 
|    o   Add the program item to the Main group.
 
|    o   Give the program a title, such as "Command
|        Reference," "Error Messages", or "REXX
|        Information."
 
|    o   Specify the command that starts the program,
|        such as "view cmdref.inf" to start the online PC
                                                       __
|        DOS 7 Command Reference.
         _______________________
 
|    For complete instructions for adding a program,
|    refer to "Adding a Program Item" on page 210.
 
|    STARTING THE PC DOS VIEWER FROM OS/2:  OS/2 allows
|    you to start DOS programs from the OS/2 desktop from
|    either a DOS full screen or from a DOS window.  The
|    online documentation viewer, PC DOS Viewer, is just
|    another program that can be started from the OS/2
|    desktop.
 
|    TO START A DOS PROGRAM FROM THE OS/2 DESKTOP:
 
|    1.  From your OS/2 desktop, double-click on the OS/2
|        System icon.
 
|    2.  Double-click on the Command Prompts icon.
 
|    3.  Double-click on either the DOS Full Screen or
|        the DOS Window icon.
 
|    4.  To start the PC DOS Viewer, type the command
|        used by the program (VIEW.EXE), followed by the
|        file name of the online book.
 
|        For example, you would type the following:
 
|              c:\DOS\view.exe cmdref.inf
 
 
 
 
  32  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        if your DOS files were on drive C in the \DOS
|        directory, to start the VIEW command and open
|        the CMDREF.INF file to view the online PC DOS 7
                                                ________
|        Command Reference.
         _________________
 
|        Be sure to include the letter of the drive and
|        path containing the PC DOS Viewer program.
 
|    5.  Press ENTER.
 
|    6.  Type "exit" and then press ENTER to close the
|        DOS window and return to OS/2 when you are
|        finished.
 
|    7.  Point to the title bar icon of the Command
|        Prompts window and double-click.
 
|    8.  Point to the title bar icon of the OS/2 System
|        window and double-click.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  33
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    STARTING THE PC DOS VIEWER FROM WINDOWS:  To start
|    the PC DOS Viewer while using Windows, use mouse
|    button 1 and double-click on the icon for the book
|    you want to view.  The PC DOS Viewer starts, and the
|    online book you selected is opened.
 
|    The icons for the PC DOS online books are located in
|    the IBM Tools group.
 
 
| VIEWING THE INITIAL PC DOS VIEWER SCREEN
  ________________________________________
 
|    Whenever you type the VIEW command followed by the
|    name of an online book, you will see a screen
|    similar to this:
 
|    o   Menu bar for task selection such as:  copying
         ________
|        and appending to a file, expanding and
|        collapsing the information tree, searching,
|        printing, accessing online help information
|        about the PC DOS Viewer, and exiting the PC DOS
|        Viewer.
 
|        Select any one of the options on the menu bar by
|        clicking on it with a mouse or, if you are using
|        the keyboard, highlight the option by using ALT
|        in combination with the highlighted letter of
|        the option, such as the letter "O" in Options.
 
|    o   Window displaying the contents of each book.
 
|        If a topic has subtopics, you will see a plus
|        sign (+) in front of the topic.  If you click on
|        the plus sign, the subtopics are expanded and
|        visible.  Also, the plus sign is replaced by a
|        minus sign (-).  If you click on the minus sign,
|        the list of topics will return to its collapsed
|        format.
 
|    o   Push buttons where you can select either the
         ____________
|        searching, printing, or viewing the index tasks.
|        These are located at the bottom of the PC DOS
|        Viewer screen.
 
 
  34  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        To go back to the screen from which you linked,
|        click on "Previous" or press ALT+E.
 
|        To go to the next topic, click on "Forward", or
|        press ALT+F.
 
|        To jump to the Table of Contents and make that
|        window active, click on "Contents" or press
|        ALT+T.
 
 
| GETTING OTHER TYPES OF ONLINE HELP
  __________________________________
 
|    There are various ways to get online help in
|    addition to using the PC DOS Viewer, including the
|    following:
 
|    o   HELP command
|    o   /? switch
|    o   F1 function key
|    o   Help option from the menu bar
 
 
| USING THE HELP COMMAND
 
|    Accessing help using the HELP command varies,
|    depending on which of the three online books the
|    information is found in.  Use one of the following
|    to find the type of help information you need.
 
|    TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT A SPECIFIC DOS COMMAND:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              help doscommand
                    __________
 
|        where doscommand is the name of the PC DOS
               __________
|        command.
 
|    2.  Press ENTER.
 
|    For example, if you want help about the DEFRAG
|    command, type
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  35
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    "help defrag"
 
|    To exit the viewer, click on "Services" and then
|    click on "Exit" if you are using a mouse.  If you
|    are using a keyboard, press F3 or you can press
|    ALT+V and then type "x" to return to the DOS command
|    prompt.
 
|    TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT A SPECIFIC DOS ERROR
|    MESSAGE:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              help letter
                    ______
 
|        where letter is the first letter of the error
               ______
|        message.
 
|    2.  Press ENTER
 
|    For example, type "help a" to find the error message
|    "Access denied".  You might need to use the scroll
|    bars on the right side of the window to scroll to
|    the message you want to read.
 
|    If the name of the DOS command and the letter that
|    the error messages begins with are the same (for
|    example, the E command and error messages that begin
|    with the letter "e"), add "error" preceding the
|    error message letter:
 
|          help error letter
                      ______
 
|    To exit the viewer, click on "Services" and then
|    click on "Exit" if you are using a mouse.  If you
|    are using a keyboard, press ALT+V and then type "x"
|    to return to the DOS command prompt.
 
|    TO SEE INFORMATION ABOUT A SPECIFIC REXX COMMAND FOR
|    DOS:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt type:
 
 
 
  36  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|              help rexxcommand
                    ___________
 
|        where rexxcommand is the name of the REXX
               ___________
|        command you need information about.
 
|    2.  Press ENTER.
 
|    For example, to find out more information about the
|    REXX LASTPOS command, you would type "help lastpos"
|    at the DOS command prompt.
 
|    If the name of the DOS command and the REXX command
|    are the same, add "rexx" precediing the REXX command
|    name:
 
|          help rexx rexxcommand
                     ___________
 
|    To exit the viewer, click on "Services" and then
|    click on "Exit" if you are using a mouse.  If you
|    are using a keyboard, press ALT+V and then type "x"
|    to return to the DOS command prompt.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  37
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| USING THE /? SWITCH
 
|    Each command has a /? switch that allows you to view
|    the syntax and other optional switches.  The online
|    help information displayed is more concise than the
|    information you see when you use the PC DOS Viewer.
 
|    TO VIEW THE SYNTAX OF A COMMAND:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              command /?
               _______
 
|        where command is the specific DOS or REXX
               _______
|        command you need syntax information for.
 
|    2.  Press ENTER.
 
|    For example, you might type "qconfig /?" to view the
|    syntax of the QCONFIG command and the switches and
|    parameters that can be used with this command.
 
|    If you type "view /?" you will see what to type to
|    use the PC DOS Viewer and open the online books.
 
 
| USING F1 OR THE HELP OPTION
 
|    Certain applications and PC DOS optional tools,
|    including the PC DOS Viewer, have their own help
|    information so you may not need to use the PC DOS
|    Viewer.
 
|    To access this help information, you must first
|    access the application or the optional tool by
|    either:
 
|    o   Typing the command name at the DOS command
|        prompt to start them (for example, typing
|        "cpbackup" to start Central Point Backup).
 
 
 
 
 
  38  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Or, if you are using a shell program such as
|        Windows, double-clicking on the icon for the
|        optional tool or application you need help for.
 
|    Whether you type the command or click on an icon,
|    you can then access help by pressing F1, clicking on
|    HELP at the bottom of the screen or by selecting
|    HELP from the menu bar.  Note that not all
|    applications or tools have a menu bar.
 
|    While in the PC DOS Viewer, F1 provides help about
|    menus, fields, push buttons, and menu bar options.
|    Place your cursor within the field or menu area or
|    highlight the menu option or push button for which
|    you need information before pressing F1.  When you
|    press F1, you see detailed help about the specific
|    item where the cursor is placed or that you have
|    highlighted.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  39
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| GETTING HELP WHILE USING THE PC DOS VIEWER
 
|    On the menu bar is the Help option.  You can select
|    "Help" from the menu bar by clicking on it with the
|    mouse or by pressing ALT+H.
 
|    From the Help option of the PC DOS Viewer, you can
|    get the following types of help:
 
|    HELP INDEX              An index of references to
|                            help topics for the document
|                            you are viewing.
 
|    GENERAL HELP            General information about
|                            the Help facility, including
|                            descriptions for other items
|                            on the menu bar and the
|                            other types of help
|                            available.
 
|    USING HELP              Information about how to use
|                            the Help facility.
 
|    KEYS HELP               A list and description of
|                            keys you can use while
|                            working with or moving
|                            around in the Help facility.
 
|    PRODUCT INFORMATION     Information specific to the
|                            product you are viewing.
 
 
| LINKING TO MORE TOPICS
  ______________________
 
|    The online books used with the PC DOS Viewer have
|    highlighted words and phrases that link (called a
|    hypertext link) to another part of the online book.
     ______________
|    If you move the mouse cursor to one of these
|    highlighted words or phrases and double-click on it,
|    you link to that related information in the online
|    book.  If you are not using a mouse, tab to a
|    highlighted word or phrase and then press ENTER.  If
 
 
 
  40  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    there is only one highlighted link, just press
|    ENTER.
 
|    To go back to the screen from which you linked,
|    click on "Previous" at the bottom of the PC DOS
|    Viewer screen or click on the button in the top-left
|    corner to close the window.
 
 
| SEARCHING FOR A SPECIFIC TOPIC
 
|    If you need information about a topic, you can
|    search for a keyword (a word that indicates the
                  _______
|    subject you want to find) that might be found in
|    either the text of the online book or in the book's
|    index.
 
|    There are three different ways to access the search
|    dialog box to search for a word in the text or
|    index:
 
|    o   Click on "Search" found at the bottom of the the
|        PC DOS Viewer screen if you are using a mouse,
|        or press ALT+S to jump to the Search push button
|        if you are using a keyboard.
 
|    o   Press ALT+V and then type the letter "s" or
|        click on "Services" on the menu bar and then
|        click on "Search".
 
|    o   Press CTRL+S.
 
|    After the Search for dialog box is displayed, type
|    the keyword you are searching for.  Search looks for
|    the keyword in both uppercase and lowercase letters.
|    For example, if you searched for the "typewriter",
|    it might find Typewriter, typewriter, or TYPEWRITER.
|    Up to 250 matches will be listed.  Try not to search
|    for a word that is too common (for example, the word
|    "the") or you will exceed the limitation of 250
|    matches.
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  41
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Specify whether you want to search This section, All
|    sections, or the Index.
 
|    NOTE:  You can only search This section if you have
|           the topic opened already.  When searching
|           just This section, the matches are
|           highlighted in the text; a list of matches
|           will not be displayed for this selection.
 
|    If matches are found, they are displayed in a window
|    for you.  Double-click on the one of the matches
|    using the mouse, or use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
|    to highlight the item and then pressing ENTER.
|    After you have read the information, you can return
|    to the other items that matched by clicking on the
|    Close button in the top-left corner to close the
|    window or by clicking on PREVIOUS at the bottom of
|    the PC DOS Viewer screen.
 
 
| FINDING INDEX TOPICS
 
|    If you just want to view the topics that are in the
|    Index, you can do one of the following:
 
|    o   Press ALT and the letter "i" to jump to the
|        Index push button at the bottom of the initial
|        the PC DOS Viewer screen.
 
|    o   Click on "Index" found at the bottom of the the
|        PC DOS Viewer screen if you are using a mouse,
|        or press ALT+I to jump to the Index push button
|        if you are using a keyboard.
 
|    o   Press ALT+O and then type the letter "i" or
|        click on "Options" on the menu bar and then
|        click on "Index".
 
|    o   Press CTRL+I.
 
|    To view additional screens of index topics, use the
|    scroll bars found on the right side of the window or
|    press the Page Down key.  The Index must be active
                                                 ______
 
 
  42  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    before you can see the scroll bars.  A window is
|    active after you click anywhere within the Index
|    window.  Also, the window is always active when you
|    use any of the methods discussed previously to
|    access the Index.
 
|    To close the Index, click on the Close button
|    [ [_] ] in the top-left corner of the active Index
|    window.
 
|    To expand the size of the Index window, click on the
|    arrow (A) in the top-right corner.  Click on the
|    double arrow (&udarrow.)  in the top-right corner to
|    return the window to its original size.
 
 
| MOVING AROUND IN THE PC DOS VIEWER
  __________________________________
 
|    There are several ways to move around quickly within
|    the PC DOS Viewer and within the online book:
 
|    o   Use the combination keys specified on the menus.
|        For example to quickly access the Index, you
|        would press CTRL+I.
 
|    o   Use the hypertext links to jump from subject to
|        subject.
 
|    o   Use the table of contents to scan the list of
|        topics and then move to that item by selecting
|        it.
 
|    o   Click on "Previous" to go to the topic you were
|        viewing prior to the current topic.
 
|    o   Click on "Forward" to go to the next topic
 
|    o   Click on "Help" from the menu bar, and then use
|        the keys and key combinations as listed when you
|        link to the Key assignments topic.
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  43
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| PRINTING FROM THE PC DOS VIEWER
  _______________________________
 
|    After locating the information you need in the PC
|    DOS Viewer, you can print it.  Using the PC DOS
|    Viewer PRINT command, you can print the index, the
|    table of contents, a particular section (only if the
|    topic is open), or all sections.
 
|    First, access the Print dialog box by doing one of
|    the following:
 
|    o   Click on "Print" found at the bottom of the the
|        PC DOS Viewer screen if you are using a mouse
|        or, if you are using a keyboard, press ALT+P to
|        jump to the Print push button.
 
|    o   Press ALT+V and then type the letter "p" or
|        click on "Services" on the menu bar and then
|        click on "Print".
 
|    Then specify what you want to print.  You can also
|    specify which printer you want to select to print
|    (parallel printers LPT1 through LPT3 or serial
|    printers COM1 through COM4).
 
 
| COPYING TOPIC INFORMATION INTO A FILE
  _____________________________________
 
|    With the PC DOS Viewer, you can copy information to
|    a new file or append information to an existing
|    file.
 
|    First, the topic must be opened or the COPY TO FILE
|    or APPEND TO FILE selections from the Services menu
|    option will be grayed.
 
|    You will know a topic is grayed if the hot key
                                            _______
|    letter, (also known as mnemonic character) is not
     _______
|    showing as a different color or as a brighter color
|    intensity if you are using a monochrome system.  An
|    example of a hot key is the letter "v" in the word
|    "Services" on the menu bar.
 
 
 
  44  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| COPYING INFORMATION TO A FILE
 
|    With the PC DOS Viewer, you can copy the information
|    about a topic into a separate file.
 
|    TO COPY TOPIC INFORMATION INTO A FILE:
 
|    1.  Open a topic.
 
|    2.  Press ALT+V and then type the letter "c".  Or,
|        click on "Services" on the menu bar and then
|        click on "Copy to file".
 
|    3.  Press CTRL+F.
 
|    When you select "Copy to file", the information is
|    copied to a temporary file named TEMP.TXT.  This
|    file is always placed in the directory you are
|    currently working in.  If you want to specify your
|    own file name, just type over "TEMP.TXT" in the
|    filename field.  Add the path if you want a
|    different path than the current directory path.
 
|    After the information is in a file, you can also use
|    the E Editor to read this file online or print it.
 
|    When you select "Copy to file" again, the TEMP.TXT
|    file will be overwritten (unless you specified a
|    file name other than TEMP.TXT) and the first topic
|    information will no longer be available.  If you
|    want your information to be added cumulatively,
|    select "Append to file" instead.
 
 
| APPENDING INFORMATION TO A FILE
 
|    Appending information to a file allows you to add
|    additional information about additional topics to
|    the same TEMP.TXT file.  The information is
|    cumulative.  If no TEMP.TXT file exists, this file
|    will be created the first time you append to a file.
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 2.  Using the Online Book Viewer  45
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    You can also name your own file rather than use the
|    TEMP.TXT file.  Specify the path and name of the
|    file and remember to specify this same path and file
|    name information everytime you want to append to the
|    file.  Or, it may be simpler to append to TEMP.TXT
|    and rename it after completing your appends.
 
|    TO APPEND INFORMATION ABOUT A TOPIC OR TOPICS TO THE
|    TEMP.TXT FILE:
 
|    1.  Open a topic.
 
|    2.  Press ALT+V and then type the letter "a" Or,
|        click on "Services" on the menu bar and then
|        click on "Append to file".
 
|    3.  Press CTRL+A.
 
|    As with copying information, the topic must be
|    opened or the Append-to-file selection from the
|    Services option of the menu will be grayed.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  46  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHAPTER 3.  CONFIGURING YOUR SYSTEM
  ___________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
     Configuring your computer is setting it up so that
     DOS, your hardware, and your applications work the
     way you want them or the way they were intended to
     be used.  This can be as simple as customizing the
     appearance of the DOS command prompt or as complex
     as setting up a new hardware component.  Most of
     your system's configuration information is stored in
     two files:
 
     o   The CONFIG.SYS file is a text file that contains
         special commands.  These commands set up your
         computer's hardware components (such as memory,
         keyboard, mouse, and printer) so that DOS and
         applications can use them.  When DOS starts, it
         processes the commands in the CONFIG.SYS file.
 
     o   The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is a special batch file
         that DOS runs immediately after carrying out the
         commands in your CONFIG.SYS file.  AUTOEXEC.BAT
         can contain any commands you want to carry out
         when you start your system.  For example, this
         file can contain commands that define the port
         to which your printer is connected, clear your
|        screen of startup messages, or start your
|        favorite program.
 
     These files typically are located in the root
     directory of your hard disk (usually drive C).
 
     Normally, DOS carries out the commands in both the
     CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files each time you
     start your computer.  However, if you need to, you
     can instruct DOS to bypass the commands in these
     files.  For more information, see "Bypassing
     CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT Commands" on page 49.
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                         47
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     When you installed DOS, Setup created a basic system
     configuration that works for most people.  You might
     want or need to change your system configuration.
     Before changing your configuration, refer to the
     following information.
 
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | TO:                     | SEE:                   |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Customize the way DOS   | "Using CONFIG.SYS      |
     | uses hardware, memory,  | Commands" on page 51.  |
     | and files.              |                        |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Add a new hardware      | "Hardware Devices      |
     | component or            | Configuration" on      |
     | reconfigure an existing | page 53.               |
     | component.              |                        |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Specify commands you    | "Specifying Startup    |
     | want DOS to carry out   | Commands in Your       |
     | when your computer      | AUTOEXEC.BAT File" on  |
     | starts.                 | page 65.               |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Define more than one    | "Using Multiple        |
     | system configuration.   | Configurations" on     |
     | For example, if several | page 57.               |
     | people use the same     |                        |
     | computer, each person   |                        |
     | can have a separate     |                        |
     | configuration.          |                        |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
 
     The rest of this chapter explains how to configure
     your system by using commands in your CONFIG.SYS and
     AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
 
|    The settings in your CONFIG.SYS file control the
|    basic components of your system, such as memory and
|    disk drives.  If you change your CONFIG.SYS file and
     the new settings are incorrect, your system might
     not be able to start correctly.  If this happens,
     restart your computer using your startup diskette
|    (the Setup Diskette from your installation
          ______________
 
 
  48  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    diskettes), or use the procedure to bypass
     CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT commands.
 
 
  BYPASSING CONFIG.SYS AND AUTOEXEC.BAT COMMANDS
  ______________________________________________
 
     If you need to, you can start your system without
     running the commands in your CONFIG.SYS and
     AUTOEXEC.BAT files.  This is most useful when you
     are experiencing system problems that might be
     related to the settings in your CONFIG.SYS or
|    AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  You have two choices:
 
     o   You can bypass your startup files completely.
 
     o   You can have DOS confirm each CONFIG.SYS command
         and process each command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
         file every time your computer starts.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  49
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  BYPASSING YOUR STARTUP FILES
 
     If you are having system problems that might be
     related to the commands in your CONFIG.SYS or
     AUTOEXEC.BAT files, you can temporarily bypass those
     files to start your computer.
 
|    TO BYPASS THE CONFIG.SYS AND AUTOEXEC.BAT FILES:
 
     1.  Start your computer.
 
     2.  Press F5 immediately after your computer
         displays the message "Starting PC DOS..."
 
     Any device that requires an installable device
     driver does not work because the installable device
     drivers are not loaded.  For example, programs that
     require expanded or extended memory are not able to
     run because no expanded- or extended-memory drivers
     are loaded.
 
     DOS uses the default environment variables of
     PATH=C:\DOS, PROMPT=$P$G, and COMSPEC=C:\COMMAND.COM
     temporarily until you correct the problem and
     restart your computer.
 
 
  CONFIRMING EACH CONFIG.SYS AND AUTOEXEC.BAT STATEMENT
 
     You can bypass selected CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT
|    statements when you initialize your system.
 
|    TO BYPASS COMMAND-LINE STATEMENTS:
 
     1.  Start your computer.  Just after your computer
         starts, DOS displays the message "Starting PC
         DOS..."
 
|    2.  Immediately press and release F8.
 
|        One at a time, PC DOS displays each command in
|        your CONFIG.SYS file, followed by a prompt.  For
 
 
 
  50  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        example, when DOS reaches the DOS=HIGH command,
|        it displays the following prompt:
 
|              DOS=HIGH  [Y,N,ESC]?
 
|        Respond by typing "Y" for Yes or "N" for No to
|        load each command in your CONFIG.SYS file.  If
|        you press, ESC before all lines of the
|        CONFIG.SYS file are displayed, your system
|        processes the rest of the lines in your
|        CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
 
|        When PC DOS finishes processing the CONFIG.SYS
|        file, it displays the following prompt:
 
|              Process AUTOEXEC.BAT  [Y,N]?
 
|    3.  Type "Y" to confirm each statement in your
|        AUTOEXEC.BAT file or type "N" to bypass your
|        AUTOEXEC.BAT file completely.  As each line of
|        your AUTOEXEC.BAT file is shown, you are given
|        the same choice as you had going through each
|        line of your CONFIG.SYS.  You can type "Y" for
|        Yes or "N" for No to process the statement.  You
|        can also press ESC to end the line by line
|        confirmation.  Your system then processes the
|        remaining lines in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
|        automatically.
 
 
  USING CONFIG.SYS COMMANDS
  _________________________
 
     When your computer starts, DOS carries out commands
     that configure hardware and reserve space in memory
     for information processing.  The file that contains
     these commands is called CONFIG.SYS.  PC DOS Setup
     creates a CONFIG.SYS file and stores it in the root
     directory of your startup hard disk.  The commands
     within this file control peripherals like your
     printer, your mouse, the display, various types of
     memory, and so forth.  You can add and change
     CONFIG.SYS commands to configure your system as
     needed.  For a list of the CONFIG.SYS commands
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  51
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    supported by PC DOS and an explanation of how to use
|    them, see the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                          __________________________
 
 
  CONFIG.SYS FILE EDITING
 
     To edit the CONFIG.SYS file, use a text editor, such
     as E Editor, that can save files as unformatted
     (ASCII) text.  Do not edit the CONFIG.SYS file using
     a word processor that saves files in a special
     document format.  If you do, your computer might not
     start.
 
     Because the CONFIG.SYS file controls how DOS starts,
     DOS reads it only when you start your computer.
     Therefore, after changing the CONFIG.SYS file, you
     must restart your computer for your changes to take
|    effect.
 
     TO MAKE CHANGES TO YOUR CONFIG.SYS FILE:
 
     1.  Make a copy of your CONFIG.SYS file on a
         separate diskette before you make any changes.
 
     2.  Edit the CONFIG.SYS file using the E Editor.
 
     3.  Add or change CONFIG.SYS commands, as necessary.
         Each CONFIG.SYS command must begin on a separate
         line.
 
     4.  When you have finished editing the CONFIG.SYS
         file, save your changes and exit from the text
         editor.
 
     5.  Restart your system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL so
|        that your changes can take effect.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  52  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  HARDWARE DEVICES CONFIGURATION
 
     Each hardware component of your computer is called a
     device.  Your computer's keyboard, mouse, display,
     ______
     printer, disk drives, and memory boards are all
     devices.  Each device has its own characteristics
     that can be customized.
 
     DOS uses a special program called a device driver to
                                         _____________
     control each device.  For example, DOS uses a
     built-in device driver to control how information is
     read to and from a diskette drive.  DOS has built-in
|    device drivers for your keyboard, display, hard
|    drives and diskette drives, and communication ports.
     Because these device drivers are built in, you do
     not have to do anything special to use them.  You
     can customize certain features of these devices by
     using CONFIG.SYS commands.  For a list of these
     commands, see the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                              __________________________
 
     Other devices, such as memory boards, a mouse, or
     CD-ROM have device drivers that are not built into
     DOS.  Such a device driver is called an installable
                                             ___________
     device driver because you install it by adding a
     command to your CONFIG.SYS file.  Many hardware
     devices come with their own device drivers.  For
     example, DOS comes with a device driver called
     HIMEM.SYS.  Several other installable device drivers
     are included with DOS.
 
     NOTE:  The device driver for your CD-ROM does not
            come with PC DOS.  To use your CD-ROM and
            access it through PC DOS (using MSCDEX.EXE),
|           the CD-ROM device driver must be loaded by
|           the CONFIG.SYS file.  For more information
            about MSCDEX(**), see "Specifying Startup
            Commands in Your AUTOEXEC.BAT File" on
            page 65.
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) MSCDEX is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  53
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     To use an installable device driver, add a DEVICE
     command for that driver to your CONFIG.SYS file.
     When DOS starts, it loads the device driver into
     memory.  For example, to load the HIMEM.SYS device
     driver from the C:\DOS directory, you would add a
|    command similar to the following to your CONFIG.SYS
     file:
 
           device=c:\dos\himem.sys
 
     When DOS reads this command, it loads the HIMEM.SYS
     device driver into memory.  The HIMEM.SYS device
     driver remains in memory and manages extended
     memory.
 
     NOTE:  Many hardware devices come with installation
            programs that automatically add the necessary
|           commands to your CONFIG.SYS file.
 
|    The order in which DEVICE and DEVICEHIGH commands
     appear in the CONFIG.SYS file is important because
     some device drivers enable devices that are then
     used by other drivers.  For example, the HIMEM.SYS
     extended-memory driver must be started before any
     drivers that use extended memory.
 
     The order in which device drivers should appear in
     your CONFIG.SYS file is as follows:
 
     1.  HIMEM.SYS if your system has extended memory.
 
     2.  Your expanded-memory manager if your system has
         an expanded-memory board.
 
     3.  EMM386.EXE if your system is an 80386 or higher
         processor with extended memory.  If your
         CONFIG.SYS file includes both an expanded-memory
         manager and EMM386, the EMM386 command line
         should include the NOEMS switch.
 
         EMM386 uses extended memory to simulate expanded
         memory on systems that do not have expanded
         memory.  EMM386 can also provide access to the
 
 
  54  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         upper memory area.  For more information, see
         Chapter 6, "Making More Memory Available" on
         page 161.
 
     4.  Any other device drivers.
 
     NOTE:  This list is intended to show only the
            correct order for device drivers.  It is not
            intended to be a list of the commands that
            your CONFIG.SYS file should contain.  The
            contents of your system's CONFIG.SYS file
            depends on the type of system, the amount or
            type of memory, the hardware configuration,
            and the applications you use.
 
 
  CONFIG.SYS FILE EXAMPLES
 
     The following is a typical CONFIG.SYS file for an
     80386 computer with 2MB or more of extended memory:
 
           device=c:\dos\himem.sys
           dos=high,umb
           device=c:\dos\emm386.exe ram
           files=40
           buffers=20
           break=on
           devicehigh=c:\dos\ansi.sys
 
     In this example:
 
     o   The BUFFERS command reserves 20 buffers for
         transferring information to-and-from disk
         drives.
 
     o   The FILES command reserves enough room to have
         40 files open at one time.
 
     o   The BREAK command checks frequently for the
         CTRL+C or CTRL+BREAK key combinations.
 
     o   The DOS=HIGH,UMB command runs DOS in the high
         memory area and specifies that programs should
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  55
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         have access to the upper memory area.  For more
         information about the upper memory area, see
         Chapter 6, "Making More Memory Available" on
         page 161.
 
     o   The DEVICE commands load the HIMEM.SYS and
         EMM386.EXE device drivers.  The HIMEM.SYS driver
         manages extended memory.  The EMM386.EXE driver,
         when used in a DEVICE statement with the RAM
         switch, provides access to the upper memory area
         and simulates expanded memory.
 
     o   The DEVICEHIGH commands load device drivers into
         the upper memory area.
 
     If you use a network, and your system includes an
     80286 processor and expanded memory, your CONFIG.SYS
     file might look like this:
 
           rem This computer's expanded-memory board came with
           rem its own expanded-memory driver, EMSDRV.SYS.
           device=c:\emsdrv\emsdrv.sys
           devicehigh=c:\dos\himem.sys
           device=c:\net\network.sys
           device=c:\dos\ramdrive.sys /a
           rem The /a switch instructs RAMDrive to use expanded memory.
           buffers=20
           files=30
           break=on
           rem The following command reserves space for 26 drives.
           lastdrive=z
 
     In this example:
 
     o   This CONFIG.SYS file loads device drivers for
         the expanded memory board, the HIMEM.SYS memory
         manager, and the network.
 
     o   The RAMDRIVE.SYS driver creates a RAM drive in
         expanded memory.
 
 
 
 
 
  56  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   The LASTDRIVE command reserves space for
         26 logical drives so that letters from A to Z
         are available as labels for drives.
 
 
  USING MULTIPLE CONFIGURATIONS
  _____________________________
 
     A single CONFIG.SYS file can define several
     different system configurations.  This can be useful
     if several people share a single computer, or if you
     want to be able to start your computer with a choice
     of configurations.
 
     Each step in defining how you would type multiple
     configuration commands in your CONFIG.SYS file is
     explained.
 
     STEP 1:  DEFINING A STARTUP MENU
     To use multiple configurations, you must define a
     startup menu.  To do this, create a configuration
     block with the block heading [Menu].  A menu block
     can contain any of the following commands:
 
     o   The MENUITEM command
     o   The MENUDEFAULT command
     o   The MENUCOLOR command
     o   The SUBMENU command
 
     When your computer starts, the startup menu appears
     and lists the available configurations; you choose
     the configuration you want.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  57
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +---------------------------+----------------------+
     | IF YOU TYPE THIS IN YOUR C|NDOS.PRODUCES:THIS STA|TUP MENU:
     +---------------------------+----------------------+
     |                           |                      |
     |                           |                      |
     |                           |                      |
     |                           |      IBM DOS Startup |enu
     |   [MENU]                  |      ================|======
     |   menuitem=DLS, Load DOS L|N Services Client     |
     |   menuitem=INTLNK, Load In|erLnk 1.iLoad DOS LAN |ervices Client
     |   menuitem=CPSW, Load Code|Page S2.tLoadgInterLnk|Client
     |   menucolor=7,1           |      3. Load Code Pag| Switching
     |   menudefault=DLS,20      |                      |
     |   .                       |   Enter a choice: 1  |ime remaining: 20
     |   .                       |                      |
     |   .                       |                      |
     |                           |                      |
     +---------------------------+----------------------+
 
     In this example:
 
     o   The MENUITEM command defines the item on the
         menu.  The first MENUITEM command value,
         "[DLS]", specifies the name of the associated
         configuration block.  The second value, which is
         optional, specifies the text, "Load DOS LAN
         Services Client" to display on the menu.  If you
         do not specify any menu text, DOS uses the name
         of the configuration block as the menu text.
 
     o   The MENUCOLOR command sets the text color to 7
         (white) and the background color to 1 (royal
         blue).
 
     o   The MENUDEFAULT command is optional.  When this
         command is used, it specifies which menu item is
         to be the default configuration.  The block must
         be defined elsewhere in the CONFIG.SYS file.
         When DOS displays the startup menu, the default
         menu item is highlighted, and its number appears
         after the "Enter a choice" prompt.  If no item
         is specified, the default is set to the first
         item.
 
 
  58  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         The MENUDEFAULT command also sets a timeout
         value.  You can specify a timeout value from 0
         to 90 seconds.  A timeout of 0 seconds forces
         automatic selection of the default, effectively
         bypassing the menu display.
 
         If you specify a timeout value but no item is
         selected within the specified time, DOS starts
         the computer with the default configuration.
 
         If you do not specify a timeout value, DOS does
|        not continue until ENTER is pressed.
 
     STEP 2:  DEFINING CONFIGURATION BLOCKS
     A configuration block is a set of CONFIG.SYS
       ___________________
     commands that you want DOS to run when that
     particular configuration is selected from the
     startup menu.  A configuration block begins with a
     block header--the block name surrounded by brackets.
     The block name must be a single word but can be as
     long as you want.  When DOS starts with a particular
     configuration, it carries out all the commands
     between that block header and the next block header.
 
     A configuration block can contain any command you
     would normally place in your CONFIG.SYS file.  A
     CONFIG.SYS file can define a [Common] block that
     includes commands common to all configurations.  DOS
     carries out the command in a [Common] block for
     every configuration.  You can have as many [Common]
     blocks as you want; DOS runs [Common] commands in
     the order in which they appear in the CONFIG.SYS
     file.
 
     The following CONFIG.SYS file defines two
     configurations and includes several commands that
     are common to both:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  59
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-----+--------------------------------------------+
     |     | CONFIG.SYS FILE (CONTINUED)                |
     +-----+--------------------------------------------+
     |     |                                            |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   [COMMON]                                 |
     |     |   files=30                                 |
     |     |   buffers=30                               |
     |     |   lastdrive=z                              |
     |     |   break=on                                 |
     |     |   device=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS                  |
     |     |   dos=HIGH,UMB                             |
     |     |   device=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS           |
     |     |   device=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE                 |
     |     |                                            |
     |     |   [CPSW]                                   |
     |     |   country=001,,C:\DOS\COUNTRY.SYS          |
     |     |   devicehigh=C:\DOS\display.sys con=(ega,,1|
     |     |                                            |
     |     |   [DLS]                                    |
     |     |   devicehigh=C:\NET\protman.dos /i:C:\NET  |
     |     |   devicehigh=C:\NET\dlshelp.sys            |
     |     |   devicehigh=C:\NET\ibmtok.dos             |
     |     |                                            |
     |     |   [INTLNK]                                 |
     |     |   devicehigh=C:\DOS\INTERLNK.EXE           |
     |     |                                            |
     |     |   [COMMON]                                 |
     |     |   devicehigh=C:\DOS\ANSI.SYS               |
     |     |   shell=C:\DOS\COMMAND.COM /P /E:512       |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |                                            |
     +-----+--------------------------------------------+
 
     This CONFIG.SYS file configures the computer for LAN
     networking [DLS], laptop computer connectivity
     [INTLNK], and code page switching and keyboard
     support [CPSW].  For all three configurations, DOS
 
 
 
  60  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     runs the commands in the [Common] configuration
     blocks.
 
     The INTLNK configuration uses the Client Device
     Driver (INTERLNK.EXE) to make the client computer
|    use the devices on the server computer as though
     they were local drives.  INTERLNK loads itself into
     upper memory when upper memory blocks are available.
     The [Common] section makes these upper memory blocks
     available.
 
     STEP 3:  USING INCLUDE STATEMENTS FOR MULTIPLE
     CONFIGURATIONS
     The CONFIG.SYS file can also contain the INCLUDE
     command.  You can include the contents of one
     configuration block in another by using the INCLUDE
     command.  The INCLUDE command instructs DOS to carry
     out the commands in another configuration block as
     well as the commands in the current block.  This
     command specifies the name of the block you want to
     include; the command can be used only within a
     configuration block.
 
     Suppose you wanted to add another configuration that
     includes all three of the previously discussed
     configuration blocks combined.  You could use the
     INCLUDE command to do this by adding a fourth
     configuration similar to the following:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  61
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-----+--------------------------------------------+
     |     | CONFIG.SYS FILE (CONTINUED)                |
     +-----+--------------------------------------------+
     |     |                                            |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   [LOADALL]                                |
     |     |   include=CPSW                             |
     |     |   include=DLS                              |
     |     |   include=INTLNK                           |
     |     |   set path=c:\net;c:\dos                   |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |   .                                        |
     |     |                                            |
     |     |   [Common]                                 |
     |     |                                            |
     |     |                                            |
     +-----+--------------------------------------------+
 
     The [LOADALL] configuration uses the INCLUDE command
     to include the [CPSW], [DLS], and [INTLNK] blocks.
     It also has its own SET PATH command.
 
     It is a good idea to place a [Common] block at the
     end of your CONFIG.SYS file, even if it does not
     contain any commands.  Some applications append
     commands to your CONFIG.SYS file.  If your
     CONFIG.SYS file has a [Common] block at the end, an
     application can append commands to the CONFIG.SYS,
     and DOS will carry out those commands for all your
     configurations.
 
     STEP 4:  MODIFYING THE AUTOEXEC.BAT FILE FOR
     MULTIPLE CONFIGURATIONS
     When using multiple configurations, it can be useful
     to have DOS run different AUTOEXEC.BAT commands for
     each configuration.  You can create branching code
     in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file by using batch commands
     such as the IF and GOTO commands.  With batch
     commands, you can have DOS carry out different
 
 
 
  62  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     AUTOEXEC.BAT commands, depending on the startup
     configuration.
 
     When a configuration is selected from the startup
     menu, DOS sets the CONFIG environment variable to
     the name of the selected configuration block.  In
     the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you can use the IF command to
     test the value of the CONFIG variable and then have
     DOS carry out different commands for different
     values.  When you test the value of the CONFIG
|    variable, you can enclose it both in percent signs
     (%) and double quotes ("), as shown in the example
     below.  For information about the IF command, type
     "help if" at the DOS command prompt.
 
     The following AUTOEXEC.BAT file tests the CONFIG
     variable and executes different commands, depending
     on the result; it is designed to work with the
     example CONFIG.SYS file.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  63
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +----+---------------------------------------------+
     |    | AUTOEXEC.BAT FILE                           |
     +----+---------------------------------------------+
     |    |                                             |
     |    |   @ECHO OFF                                 |
     |    |   PATH C:\DOS;C:\NET;                       |
     |    |   PROMPT $p$g                               |
     |    |   SET TEMP=C:\DOS                           |
     |    |                                             |
     |    |   rem Test the CONFIG environment variable t| see what menu item was selected.
     |    |   rem Was the network chosen to start?      |
     |    |   if "%CONFIG%" == "DLS" C:\NET\net start   |
     |    |                                             |
     |    |   rem Was code page switching and keyboard s|pport chosen?
     |    |   rem  ISO.CPI gives you ISO Support.       |
     |    |   if NOT "%CONFIG%" == "CPSW" GOTO NOTCPSW  |
     |    |   MODE CON CODEPAGE PREPARE=((850) C:\DOS\IS|.CPI)
     |    |   MODE CON CODEPAGE SELECT=850              |
     |    |   LOADHIGH KEYB US                          |
     |    |                                             |
     |    |   :NOTCPSW                                  |
     |    |   rem Inquire about loading mouse support?; |ait 3 seconds for a
     |    |   rem  response, if no response default to N|.
     |    |   CHOICE /C:YN /TN,3 Do you want to load MOU|E support?
     |    |   IF ERRORLEVEL 2 GOTO SKIPMOUSE            |
     |    |   LOADHIGH C:\DOS\MOUSE.COM                 |
     |    |                                             |
     |    |   rem Now load DOSKEY, show CALL batchcomman| to load IBM Antivirus/DOS
|    |    |   rem  and then come up in the DOSSHELL     |
     |    |   :SKIPMOUSE                                |
     |    |   LOADHIGH DOSKEY                           |
     |    |   SET IBMAV=C:\DOS                          |
     |    |   C:\DOS\                                   |
     |    |   CALL C:\DOS\IBMAVDR.BAT                   |
|    |    |   C:\DOS\DOSSHELL.EXE                       |
     |    |                                             |
     +----+---------------------------------------------+
 
     When DOS runs this AUTOEXEC.BAT file, it sets the
     path, prompt style, and the TEMP environment
     variable.
 
 
 
 
  64  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     DOS then tests the value of the CONFIG variable.
     The CONFIG.SYS value was set when you entered your
     choice of configuration from the Startup Menu.
 
     For example, if the name of the current
     configuration is not CPSW, DOS inquires whether you
|    want mouse support.  If you do not want to load the
|    mouse (or you do not make a choice of whether to
|    load the mouse in three seconds), mouse support is
|    not loaded.
 
     Whether or not you choose to have mouse support,
|    this configuration then runs DOSKEY, starts the IBM
|    AntiVirus/DOS, and starts the PC DOS Shell.
 
 
  SPECIFYING STARTUP COMMANDS IN YOUR AUTOEXEC.BAT FILE
  _____________________________________________________
 
     Each time you start your system, DOS carries out the
     commands in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  This file is
     located in the root directory of your hard disk
     (usually drive C).
 
     The .BAT file-name extension indicates that the file
     is a batch file--a series of commands that DOS
          __________
     carries out automatically.  The commands in the
     AUTOEXEC.BAT file set the characteristics of your
     devices, customize information that DOS displays,
     and start memory-resident programs and other
     applications.  To run AUTOEXEC.BAT without
     restarting your system, type "autoexec" at the DOS
     command prompt.
 
     You can customize your system by adding commands to
     your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  You can use any commands
     you would normally type at the DOS command prompt.
     To edit your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, type "e
     autoexec.bat" at the DOS command prompt.  If your
     AUTOEXEC.BAT file is not in your root directory, you
     must also include the path where it is located when
     you type the E command.
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  65
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    NOTE:   Before changing your original AUTOEXEC.BAT
|           file, copy and save it as a different name,
|           such as AUTOEXEC.BAK, as a precaution.
 
     For example, if you have a CD-ROM, you might want to
     include the MSCDEX command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT
|    file.  This command must include a /drive:drivename
                                         _____ _________
|    parameter that matches the /drive:drivename
                                 _____ _________
|    parameter used in the CONFIG.SYS file for the CD-ROM
     device driver.  Each CD-ROM device driver currently
     in use must have a unique driver name.
 
     NOTE:  The device driver that came with your CD-ROM
            must be loaded in the CONFIG.SYS file before
            you can access it in PC DOS using the MSCDEX
            command.
 
|    For more information about this command, refer to
|    the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                __________________________
 
 
  AUTOEXEC.BAT COMMANDS
 
     Every command in an AUTOEXEC.BAT file can also be
|    used in other batch programs.  Some of the most
|    common AUTOEXEC.BAT commands are:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  66  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+
     | COMMAND         | PURPOSE                        |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+
     | PROMPT          | Sets the appearance of your    |
     |                 | DOS command prompt.            |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+
     | MODE            | Sets the characteristics of    |
     |                 | your keyboard, monitor, and    |
     |                 | serial and parallel ports.     |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+
     | PATH            | Specifies the directories in   |
     |                 | which DOS searches for         |
     |                 | executable files (files with a |
     |                 | .COM, .EXE, or .BAT file-name  |
     |                 | extension).                    |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+
     | ECHO OFF        | Directs DOS not to display the |
     |                 | commands in your AUTOEXEC.BAT  |
     |                 | file as they run.  You can     |
     |                 | also prevent a command from    |
     |                 | being displayed by inserting   |
     |                 | an at sign (@) at the          |
     |                 | beginning of that line.        |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+
     | SET             | Creates an environment         |
     |                 | variable that can be used by   |
     |                 | programs.  The SET command can |
     |                 | also be used in the CONFIG.SYS |
     |                 | file.                          |
     +-----------------+--------------------------------+
 
|    For detailed information about these commands, refer
|    to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference, or type
                   __________________________
|    the command name followed by "/?" for the
|    abbreviated online explanation and command syntax.
 
     +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
     | The following cross reference will be corrected  |
     | when the entire book is formatted.               |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  67
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     For more information about programming batch files,
     see -- Heading 'DOS10' unknown --.
 
 
  TERMINATE-AND-STAY-RESIDENT PROGRAMS
 
     Another common use of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file is to
     start memory-resident programs--programs that load
           ________________________
     into memory and stay there while you use other
     programs.  These are also called
     terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) programs.  DOS
     ___________________________
     comes with several memory-resident programs that are
     commonly started from the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, such
     as:
 
     APPEND                      KEYB
     CPSCHED                     MOUSE
     DATAMON SENTRY (or TRACKER) SMARTDRV
 
|    For more information about these programs, you can
|    type "help" followed by the command name at the DOS
|    command prompt.  This opens the online PC DOS 7
                                            ________
|    Command Reference at the command specified.
     _________________
 
|    For an abbreviated explanation and command syntax
|    for these commands, you can type the command name
|    followed by the /? switch.
 
 
  CHANGING SCREEN ATTRIBUTES
 
     You can change your screen attributes using the
     PROMPT command and an ANSI set graphics mode escape
     sequence in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  To do this, you
     must ensure that the ANSI.SYS driver is loaded in
     your CONFIG.SYS file.
 
     NOTE:  If you load the ANSI.SYS driver after loading
            RAMBoost, place your DEVICE statement after
            the RAMBoost statement in the CONFIG.SYS
            file.
 
     There are three kinds of screen attributes:
 
 
  68  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     text format         Specifies whether text is bold,
                         underscored, blinking, or
                         hidden.
     text color          Specifies the text color.
     background color    Specifies the screen color.
 
     You must use the following syntax when changing
     these attributes in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
 
           prompt $e[x;xx;xxm
 
     In this example:
 
|        $e indicates the ANSI escape code.
         __
 
|        x indicates the number 1, 4, 5, or 8 that
         _
|        controls the text format.
 
|        xx indicates the numbers 30 through 37 that
         __
|        control the color of the text.
 
|        xxm where xx indicates the numbers 40 through 47
         ___       __
|        that control the screen color, and m indicates
                                            _
|        the ANSI set graphics mode.
 
     NOTE:  The order in which you type the parameters is
            not important.  However, each parameter must
            be separated by a semicolon.
 
|    TO CHANGE THE TEXT FORMAT:
 
|    Use one of the following.
 
     1    Changes the text to bold or high intensity.
     4    Changes the text to be underscored.  This works
          on monochrome displays only.
     5    Changes the text so that it blinks.
     7    Changes the screen display to reverse video.
          Reverse video reverses the foreground and
          background colors or shades used on the screen.
          For example, if your screen normally displays
          dark letters on a light background, reverse
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  69
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|         video displays light letters on a dark
|         background.
     8    Hides the text unless you subsequently change
          the background color.
 
|    TO CHANGE THE TEXT COLOR:
 
|    Use one of the following.
 
     30        Black
     31        Red
     32        Green
     33        Yellow
     34        Blue
     35        Magenta
     36        Cyan
     37        White
 
|    TO CHANGE THE BACKGROUND COLOR:
 
|    Use one of the following.
 
     40        Black
     41        Red
     42        Green
     43        Yellow
     44        Blue
     45        Magenta
     46        Cyan
     47        White
 
     If you choose a parameter that is not supported, the
     system ignores it and no change takes place.
 
     Some examples of the types of statements you can put
     in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file are:
 
|          prompt $e[1;33This command would show yellow
|                        text on a red background in bold
|                        or high intensity.
|          prompt $e[5;34This command would show blue
|                        text on a white background and
|                        would be blinking.
 
 
  70  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     NOTE:  The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is initially configured
            with a PROMPT command that provides a C:\>
            prompt and blinking cursor.  When you change
            the prompt command as in the prior examples,
            only the blinking cursor is displayed.  By
            adding on to the original PROMPT command, you
            can retain your C:\> prompt.
 
 
  AUTOEXEC.BAT FILE EXAMPLES
 
     The following example of a AUTOEXEC.BAT file
     contains the most commonly used AUTOEXEC.BAT
     commands:
 
           path=c:\;c:\dos;c:\utility;c:\batch
           prompt $p$g
           set temp=c:\temp
           doskey
           c:\smartdrv.exe
 
     In this example:
 
     o   The PATH command directs DOS to search for
         program files in the current directory and then
         in the following directories:  the root
         directory of drive C, C:\DOS, C:\UTILITY, and
         C:\BATCH.  A semicolon (;) separates each
         directory.
 
     o   The PROMPT command sets the command prompt so
         that it shows the current drive and directory,
         followed by a greater-than sign (>).
 
     o   The SET command creates an environment variable
         named TEMP and sets it equal to the directory
         C:\TEMP.
 
         NOTE:  The name you specify must be the name of
                an existing directory.  Many programs,
                including DOS itself, use this variable
                when storing temporary files.
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 3.  Configuring Your System  71
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   The DOSKEY command loads the DOSKey program into
         memory.  DOSKEY.COM can be located in any of the
         directories listed in the PATH command.
 
     o   The SMARTDRV command loads the SMARTDrive
         program into memory.
 
     Suppose your system has one diskette drive, one hard
     disk drive, a laser printer connected to port COM1,
     and DOS Shell.  You might want to put the following
     commands in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
 
           @echo off
           path=c:\;c:\dos;c:\utility;c:\lotus;c:\norton
           prompt $p$g
           mode lpt1=com1
           set temp=c:\temp
           doskey
           dosshell.exe
 
     In this example:
 
     o   The ECHO OFF command prevents the AUTOEXEC.BAT
         commands from being displayed as they are
         carried out.  The @ sign at the beginning of the
         line prevents the ECHO OFF command from being
         displayed.
 
     o   The MODE command redirects printer output from
         LPT1 (its default port) to the serial port COM1.
 
     o   The DOSKEY command loads the DOSKey program,
         which provides keyboard shortcuts at the DOS
         command prompt.
 
     o   The DOSSHELL command starts the DOS Shell
         program, which provides a graphical interface
         that performs many of the same file-management
         and disk-maintenance tasks that you perform from
         the command line.
 
 
 
 
 
  72  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHAPTER 4.  WORKING WITH THE TEXT EDITOR
  ________________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    The E Editor is the text editor provided with PC
|    DOS.  It is not intended to take the place of a word
|    processing program.  Even though the E Editor is
|    very flexible and full functioned it does not have
|    all the capabilities of a word processor.  However,
|    there are times when it is absolutely necessary to
|    use a text editor instead of a word processing
|    program.  For prior users of the E Editor, you will
|    find many new enhancements improving the
|    capabilities of the E Editor.  For readers who are
|    interested in comparing the differences of a text
|    editor to a word processing program, see "Comparing
|    a Text Editor and a Word Processing Program" on
|    page 140.
 
 
| WHAT'S NEW ABOUT THE E EDITOR FOR PC DOS 7
  __________________________________________
 
|    PC DOS 7 introduces many new features and
|    enhancements to the E Editor.  Some that will prove
|    beneficial are:
 
|    o   Menu selections for most of the tasks you
|        perform with a text editor.
 
|    o   Use of a mouse to make selections and mark text.
 
|    o   Use of F11 and F12 on an enhanced keyboard to
|        switch between files in the ring.  If you do not
|        have an enhanced keyboard, you can use the key
|        combinations of CTRL+P or CTRL+N.
 
|    o   Browse a file in read-only mode so that you do
|        not inadvertently change or delete it.
 
|    o   An editable E.INI file that allows you to
|        customize most functions of the E Editor  There
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                         73
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        is no need to reboot after making changes to the
|        E.INI file; exit the E Editor for changes to
|        take effect.
 
|    o   Syntax-directed editing for REXX and C files.
 
|    o   Expanded math capabilities so that you can work
|        with larger numbers, including binary numbers.
 
 
  CHOOSING A TEXT EDITOR
  ______________________
 
|    THE E EDITOR:
|    Using the E Editor, you can type commands from the
|    E Editor command line or use the menus to do
|    selected editing tasks.  Some of the things you can
     do are as follows:
 
     o   Select text and move, copy, overlay, or delete
         it.
     o   Copy and move text from one file into another
         file.
     o   Access multiple files.
     o   Locate and make a change globally in a file.
     o   Size and drag an editing window.
     o   Draw boxes around text.
     o   Add and multiply numbers in a marked area.
     o   Change characters in a marked area to all
         uppercase or all lowercase letters.
     o   Edit large text files.
     o   Use online help for information about the
         E Editor function keys and commands.
 
|    NOTE:  This chapter only discusses how to use the
            __________________________________________
|           E Editor as a text editor.  While some word
            __________________________
|           processing function may be noticed, the
|           E Editor is not intended to be a substitute
|           for your word processing program.
 
     THE EDLIN EDITOR:
     Edlin, the line editor included in previous versions
     of DOS, is also available.
 
 
 
  74  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     THE DOS 5.0 EDITOR:
     When you install this version of DOS, it analyzes
     your system and determines if you have a previous
     version of DOS on your system.  If you are a
     previous user of DOS 5.0, the DOS editor provided
     with DOS 5.0 will still be available for your use.
     If you prefer to use this editor, you can type
     "edit" at the DOS command prompt, followed by the
     path and name of the file you want, to load the
     DOS 5.0 Editor.
 
 
  STARTING THE E EDITOR
  _____________________
 
     You can start the E Editor by typing "e" (or "e"
     followed by the path and name of the file) at the
     DOS command prompt.
 
|    When you load the E Editor, you have the option of
|    using the E Editor command line for all your editing
|    tasks or using the menus to perform selected editing
|    tasks.  If you use the E Editor command line, you
|    need to press ESC to switch between the command line
|    and the editing window.
 
 
  VIEWING THE E EDITOR SCREEN
 
     After you start the E Editor and begin typing, the
     version number displayed is replaced by the function
     keys at the bottom of the screen and you see a
     screen similar to the following:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  75
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
     Reminder Line
 
     The bottom line of the E Editor screen displays a
     brief reminder of each action associated with the
     function key (or F keys, such as F1=Help and
     F2=Save).  You can perform the most common editing
     tasks with one keystroke.
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | FUNCTION   | WHAT IT DOES                        |
     | KEY        |                                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | F1=Help    | Accesses help information about     |
     |            | function keys and editing commands. |
     |            | You can page through this help      |
     |            | information using the PAGE UP and   |
     |            | PAGE DOWN keys.                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | F2=Save    | Saves the file you are editing but  |
     |            | does not exit the file.             |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
 
  76  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | FUNCTION   | WHAT IT DOES                        |
     | KEY        |                                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F3=Close   | Removes your file's text from       |
|    |            | memory without saving it.  If your  |
|    |            | file has been modified, you will be |
|    |            | asked whether you really want to    |
|    |            | close the file without saving.      |
|    |            | When there are no remaining files   |
|    |            | in memory, you exit to DOS.         |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | F4=File    | Saves your file and quits the       |
|    |            | E Editor after saving.  When there  |
|    |            | are no remaining files in memory,   |
|    |            | you exit to DOS.                    |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F5=Print   | Lets you print a file.              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F6=Draw    | Starts the drawing text graphics    |
|    |            | feature.  Then you type a number (1 |
|    |            | through 6), B for blank, or /       |
|    |            | followed by any character.  You can |
|    |            | create or erase text graphic        |
|    |            | drawings by moving around with the  |
|    |            | cursor keys.  See "Drawing Lines"   |
|    |            | on page 125 for more information.   |
     |            |                                     |
|    |            | NOTE:  This function key and        |
|    |            |        associated action is not     |
|    |            |        displayed on the reminder    |
|    |            |        line.  However, it is        |
|    |            |        active.                      |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  77
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | FUNCTION   | WHAT IT DOES                        |
     | KEY        |                                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F7=Rename  | Lets you change the name of the     |
|    |            | file you are editing.  Type the new |
|    |            | name and press ENTER.  Afterwards,  |
|    |            | press ESC to return the cursor to   |
|    |            | the text area; this does not change |
|    |            | the name of the previous copy on    |
|    |            | disk.  It changes the name of the   |
|    |            | file to be saved.  Renaming is a    |
|    |            | good way to begin a revised copy    |
|    |            | without losing the original file.   |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F8=Open    | Lets you open another file or more  |
|    |            | than one file at a time.  Type a    |
|    |            | filename, cursor to the text area   |
                    ________
|    |            | so you can begin editing this       |
|    |            | second file.  You can enter more    |
|    |            | than one file name separated by a   |
|    |            | space and can specify wild cards in |
|    |            | file names (for example, *.doc or   |
|    |            | *.c.).  Press F11 or F12 on an      |
|    |            | enhanced keyboard to switch between |
|    |            | the multiple files you are editing. |
|    |            | If you do not have an enhanced      |
|    |            | keyboard, you can use the           |
|    |            | selections on the menu for options  |
|    |            | (for example, Next file or Previous |
|    |            | file).  or press CTRL+P (previous)  |
|    |            | and CTRL+N (next).                  |
     |            |                                     |
|    |            | NOTE:   Do not select F8=OPEN to    |
|    |            |        edit your current file.      |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | F9=Undo    | Restores the original contents of a |
     |            | line you typed incorrectly.  Undo   |
     |            | does not restore deleted lines or   |
     |            | changes to multiple lines.  Only    |
     |            | the current line you are editing    |
     |            | can be restored.                    |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
  78  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | FUNCTION   | WHAT IT DOES                        |
     | KEY        |                                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F10=Menu   | Jumps to the menu.  Then the arrow  |
|    |            | keys can be used to move from       |
|    |            | selection-to-selection and to       |
|    |            | access the associated menus.        |
     |            |                                     |
|    |            | NOTE:   From a menu, you can use    |
|    |            |        mnemonics to make            |
|    |            |        selections.                  |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F11=Previou| Accesses the previous file you have |
|    |            | worked on when you have loaded      |
|    |            | multiple files in the E Editor.     |
|    |            | This key is available only on an    |
|    |            | enhanced keyboard.                  |
     |            |                                     |
|    |            | NOTE:  This function key and the    |
|    |            |        associated action is not     |
|    |            |        displayed on the reminder    |
|    |            |        line.  However, it is        |
|    |            |        active.                      |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F12=Next   | Accesses the next file in the ring  |
|    |            | when you have loaded multiple files |
|    |            | into the E Editor.  This key is     |
|    |            | available on an enhanced keyboard.  |
     |            |                                     |
|    |            | NOTE:  This function key and the    |
|    |            |        associated action is not     |
|    |            |        displayed on the reminder    |
|    |            |        line.  However, it is        |
|    |            |        active.                      |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
     The reminder line, called the function key text
                                   _________________
     area, changes when you hold down a SHIFT, CTRL, or
     ____
     an ALT key to show you the function key text
     appropriate to that shifted state.
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  79
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Information Line
 
     You also can see the name of the file you are
     editing, location of the cursor (line number and
|    column number), working mode (insert, replace, or
|    browse), and the version number of the E Editor.
 
 
     Command Line
 
     The command line can be found near the bottom of the
     E Editor screen.  To jump the cursor from the typing
     area to the command line, press ESC.  Press ESC
     again to return to the typing area.
 
 
     Window Style
 
     You can change the location of the reminder line,
     the information line, and the command line by
     selecting a different window style.  See
     "Customizing the E Editor" on page 134 to learn how
|    to alter the appearance of the editing screen and to
|    use other customization techniques.
 
 
  GETTING HELP
 
     To get information about the E Editor after the
     editing window appears, press F1 to display help
     information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  80  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
|    When you access the E Editor on-line help, you are
|    automatically put into browse mode.  It is not
|    possible to edit the help file in browse mode.  You
|    can use the arrow keys to scroll right, left, up, or
|    down.  In addition, you can use HOME to move your
|    cursor to the top line of the file or END to move
|    the cursor to the bottom line of the file.
 
|    You can use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys to move
|    forward and backward through the help screens.
 
|    To exit the online Help file, press F3.
 
 
  LEAVING THE E EDITOR
 
|    You can stop editing and exit from the E Editor
|    three ways:  close (without saving changes), file
|    (saving changes), and exit.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  81
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | F3=CLOSE   | Removes your file's text from       |
|    |            | memory without saving it.  If your  |
|    |            | file has been modified, you will be |
|    |            | asked whether you really want to    |
|    |            | close the file without saving.      |
|    |            | When there are no remaining files   |
|    |            | in memory, exit to DOS.             |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | F4=FILE    | Saves your file and removes it from |
|    |            | memory.  When all files are removed |
|    |            | from memory, you exit to DOS.       |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | ALT+F4=EXIT| Exits the E Editor after closing    |
|    |            | all files.  You are given the       |
|    |            | option of saving your changes if    |
|    |            | necessary.  You are returned to the |
|    |            | DOS prompt.                         |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
  CREATING OR MODIFYING A FILE
  ____________________________
 
     You can use the E Editor to create a new text file
     or modify an existing file.  For example, try
     entering some lines of text in a file named
|    REPORTS.TXT in your root directory.  Type the
     following:
 
           e c:\reports.txt
 
     You must always type the full path of the file
     ______________________________________________
     unless you started the E Editor from the directory
     __________________________________________________
     where you eventually want the file to be placed.
     _______________________________________________
 
     You see the editing window.  Your directory path and
     file name are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
     For descriptions of the parts of an E Editor screen,
     see "Viewing the E Editor Screen" on page 75.
 
     1.  Begin typing your text from where the cursor is
         positioned.  Try typing the text in the
         following example:
 
 
  82  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
               The following reports are required for the staff meeting on Friday:
                   1.  Weekly Status Report
                   2.  Funding Report
 
|        The default margins are set at 1 and 254.  When
|        you reach 254, the text automatically wraps to
|        the next line.
 
|        As you enter the text, note that the Line and
|        Col numbers change near the bottom of the
|        screen.
 
     2.  Save and file the information as C:\REPORTS.TXT
         by pressing F4.
 
         You see "Saving C:\REPORTS.TXT" flash at the
         bottom of your screen.
 
         If you do not specify the full path and file
         name when you load the E Editor, your file will
         be saved to the same drive and directory you
         were at when you created the file.
 
         You can change it by typing "save" followed by a
         new drive, directory, or file name.  If you were
         in the C:\OFFICE\NOTES subdirectory when you
         typed "e reports.txt", your file is saved as
         C:\OFFICE\NOTES\REPORTS.TXT instead of C:\.  If
         you want to save the file to this directory, you
         would type the following at the E Editor command
         line:
 
               save c:\reports.txt
 
         After leaving the E Editor, you are returned to
         a command line.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  83
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  NAMING AN UNNAMED FILE
 
     If you type only "e" at the DOS command prompt
     without specifying a file name, you see ".Unnamed
     file" near the bottom on the left side of the
     screen.
 
     TO NAME THE UNNAMED FILE:
 
|    1.  Press "F7=Rename" if you loaded an unnamed file
|        by typing "e".
 
|        You are prompted to enter a name for the file on
|        the E Editor command line.
 
|        Enter a file name after "Rename" on the E Editor
|        command line.
 
|        REMEMBER:  Be sure to include a full path name
|        (drive, directory, and subdirectory, if
|        applicable) where you want to find this file
|        when you exit the E Editor.  Unlike word
|        processing programs that always place files in a
|        specific directory, you must specify the exact
|        location where you want to place this file.
|        Otherwise, the file is put in the same drive and
|        directory as you were in when you loaded the
|        E Editor.
 
|    2.  Save and file under the new name by pressing F4.
 
     In addition to creating a new file and editing an
     existing file, you can also save and print files
     using the E Editor.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  84  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SAVING AND EXITING A FILE
 
     After you create a file or make changes to an
     existing file, you can save it using a new name or
     you can save it using the name you specified when
     you opened the file.  You also can save it with the
     same file name or new file name in a different drive
     or directory.
 
     It is a good idea to save your work in case there is
|    a power loss or equipment failure by pressing F2
     often during the editing session.  Also, the
|    E Editor has an AUTOSAVE feature.  You can activate
|    this feature using the Options menu or you can type
|    "autosave" followed by a number at the E Editor
|    command line.  Your file is temporarily saved to a
|    file after you press ENTER the number of times equal
|    to the number you typed after the word "autosave".
 
     CAUTION:
     SOME FILES THAT YOU OPEN MIGHT INCLUDE SPECIAL
     FORMATTING CHARACTERS.  IF YOU SAVE SUCH A FILE WHEN
     USING THE E EDITOR, SPECIAL CHARACTERS LOSE THEIR
     FORMATTING FUNCTION.
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | TO SAVE    | o   Press F4 to save the file and   |
|    | THE FILE   |     exit.                           |
|    | AND EXIT   |                                     |
|    | USING THE  |     The file is saved in the same   |
|    | SAME FILE  |     drive and directory you were in |
|    | NAME:      |     when you started the E Editor   |
|    |            |     or where you specified the      |
|    |            |     path.                           |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  85
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | TO SAVE    | 1.  Press ESC to get to the         |
     | THE FILE   |     E Editor command line.          |
     | AND EXIT   |                                     |
     | USING A    | 2.  Type:                           |
     | DIFFERENT  |                                     |
     | FILE NAME: |           file newname.ext          |
                                   ___________
     |            |                                     |
     |            |     where newname.ext is the new    |
                              ___________
     |            |     file name and extension for the |
     |            |     file you are saving.            |
     |            |                                     |
     |            |     REMEMBER:  If you attempt to    |
     |            |     save a file using the name of a |
     |            |     file that already exists, the   |
     |            |     E Editor will not display a     |
     |            |     message asking whether you want |
     |            |     to replace the existing file.   |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | TO SAVE    | 1.  Press ESC to get to the         |
     | THE FILE   |     E Editor command line.          |
     | IN A       |                                     |
     | DIFFERENT  | 2.  Type:                           |
     | DRIVE OR   |                                     |
     | DIRECTORY  |           file drive:\dir\filename.e|t
                                   _______________________
     | AND EXIT:  |                                     |
     |            |     where drive:\dir is the new     |
                              __________
     |            |     drive and directory where you   |
     |            |     want to store the file, and     |
     |            |     filename.ext is the name you    |
                        ____________
     |            |     want to give the file.  The     |
     |            |     name can be the same name or a  |
     |            |     new name.                       |
     |            |                                     |
     |            |     REMEMBER:  If you attempt to    |
     |            |     save a file in a directory that |
     |            |     contains a file with the same   |
     |            |     name, you are not prompted and  |
     |            |     asked whether you want to       |
     |            |     replace the existing file.      |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
  86  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TIP:  You can save a modified version of a file
     without losing the original version.  For example,
     if you have a file named MEMO.TXT, you can keep the
     original file and save a modified version as
     MEMO_2.TXT.
 
 
  EDITING MULTIPLE FILES
 
     One advantage you have with the E Editor over other
     text editors is the ability to open and edit more
     than one file at a time.  This ability to edit
     multiple files means, for example, that you can
     create a new file and copy (or move) information
     from an existing file into the new file.  Or, you
     can edit multiple new files, multiple existing
     files, or any combination of new and existing files.
     The files are placed into memory in a type of
     invisible ring, and you can switch between all files
               ____
|    in the ring by pressing F11 or F12 on an enhanced
|    keyboard.  If you do not have an enhanced keyboard,
|    you can select" Previous file" or "Next file" from
|    the Options menu.  Or, you can press CTRL+N to see
|    the next file or press CTRL+P for the previous file.
 
     TO EDIT MORE THAN ONE FILE AT A TIME: Open a file
     from the DOS command prompt by typing the E command
     from the DOS command prompt.
 
     Here are some sample commands you might type:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  87
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
       C:\>e report.txt  In this first example, the
                         E Editor loads the file
                         REPORT.TXT you created earlier
                         in the chapter into the
                         E Editor.
 
|      C:\>e report.txt dInathis second example, two
|                        files are loaded into the
|                        E Editor.  Use F11 or F12 on an
|                        enhanced keyboard to switch
|                        between files that are loaded
|                        for editing.
 
       C:\>e *.c         In this third example, all the
                         files with the C extension are
                         loaded into the E Editor.
 
 
     From the E Editor command line, the equal sign ("=")
     substitutes the current file's directory and saves
     keystrokes if you are editing several files in
     another directory.  File names must be separated by
     spaces.  For example:
 
         Your current directory is C:\EDIT
         The current file is C:\MYDOC\PROG\JIM.DOC
         You issue the command: EDIT =MIKE.TXT
         The E Editor loads C:\MYDOC\PROG\MIKE.TXT
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  88  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  PRINTING A FILE
 
|    You can use the E Editor PRINT command or press F5
|    to print an open file or just the marked text within
|    the file.  In either case, the printer must be
|    connected to or redirected through your printer
|    port.  You can specify which printer port you want
|    to use by editing the E.INI file.  Refer to
|    information about the E.INI file in the online PC
                                                    __
|    DOS 7 Command Reference.
     _______________________
 
     TO PRINT A FILE:
 
     1.  Edit the file you want to print.  (You can use
|        REPORTS.TXT as a file you want to print.)
 
     2.  At the E Editor command line, type: "
             print "
 
|        or press F5.
         __
 
     3.  Press ENTER.
 
|        NOTE:  If your file has marked text, the
|               following message is displayed:
 
|                     Print marked area or entire file (M/F)?
 
|               Type the applicable letter designator and
|               press ENTER.
 
         The readiness of the printer is tested first to
         avoid having to wait for a device time-out in
         case the printer is offline.  You might see the
         message:
 
               Printer not ready
 
         which means the printer is turned off, offline,
         or perhaps out of paper.  Make sure the printer
         is ready and then repeat the PRINT command.
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  89
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  USING CURSOR MOVEMENT KEYS TO MOVE AROUND IN THE TEXT FILE
  __________________________________________________________
 
     When you load an existing file into the E Editor,
     your file appears on the screen and the cursor is
     placed in the top, far-left position in the text.
     To view a different part of the file, you have to
     move the cursor.
 
 
     Summary of Cursor Movement Keys
 
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CURSOR      | ACTION                             |
     | MOVEMENT    |                                    |
     | KEY         |                                    |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | UP ARROW    | Moves cursor one line up.          |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | DOWN ARROW  | Moves cursor one line down.        |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | LEFT ARROW  | Moves cursor one character to the  |
     |             | left.                              |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | RIGHT ARROW | Moves cursor one character to the  |
     |             | right.                             |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | HOME        | Moves cursor to column 1 of the    |
     |             | current line.                      |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | END         | Moves cursor to end of the current |
     |             | line.                              |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | PAGE UP     | Shifts view to page above current  |
     |             | page.  The cursor stays at same    |
     |             | position on screen.                |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | PAGE DOWN   | Shifts view to page below current  |
     |             | page.  The cursor stays at same    |
     |             | position on screen.                |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+HOME   | Moves cursor to top line of file.  |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
 
 
 
  90  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CURSOR      | ACTION                             |
     | MOVEMENT    |                                    |
     | KEY         |                                    |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+END    | Moves cursor to bottom line of     |
     |             | file.                              |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | TAB         | Moves cursor to next tab stop.     |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | SHIFT+TAB   | Moves cursor to previous tab stop. |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+PAGE   | Moves cursor to top of screen.     |
     | UP          |                                    |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+PAGE   | Moves cursor to bottom of screen.  |
     | DOWN        |                                    |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+LEFT   | Moves cursor to beginning of word  |
     | ARROW       | left of cursor.                    |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+RIGHT  | Moves cursor to beginning of word  |
     | ARROW       | to right of cursor.                |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
|    | ENTER       | Defined by the user in the E.INI   |
|    |             | file.                              |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
|    | CTRL+ENTER  | Defined by the user in the E.INI   |
|    |             | file.                              |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | ESC         | Moves cursor back and forth        |
     |             | between text and E Editor command  |
     |             | line.                              |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | ALT+E       | Moves cursor to end of marked      |
     |             | block.                             |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | ALT+Y       | Moves cursor to beginning of       |
     |             | marked block.                      |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+F5     | Moves cursor to beginning of a     |
     |             | word.                              |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  91
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CURSOR      | ACTION                             |
     | MOVEMENT    |                                    |
     | KEY         |                                    |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+F6     | Moves cursor to end of a word.     |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+F      | Moves cursor to next found text.   |
     | (repeat     |                                    |
     | FIND)       |                                    |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
|    | CTRL+N      | Moves cursor to the next active    |
|    |             | file in the ring.                  |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
|    | CTRL+P      | Moves cursor to the previous       |
|    |             | active file in the ring.           |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
     | CTRL+Q      | When in .ALL file, positions       |
     |             | cursor on corresponding line in    |
     |             | original file.  If not in .ALL     |
     |             | file, you are placed there and the |
     |             | cursor is moved down one line.     |
     +-------------+------------------------------------+
 
     NOTE:  You can also scroll by holding down an arrow
|           key.  For additional information about the
|           .ALL file and the ALL command, see "Searching
|           for Text Using the ALL Command" on page 119.
 
 
  PERFORMING BASIC EDITING TASKS
  ______________________________
 
     In addition to entering text, there are basic
     features that most text editors perform, such as:
 
     o   Inserting or replacing text.
     o   Connecting or breaking a line of text.
     o   Adding a blank line.
     o   Deleting all or only part of a line.
     o   Deleting characters, words, or lines of text
         without marking them first.
     o   Restoring a deleted line.
     o   Setting tabs.
 
 
  92  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   Setting margins.
     o   Saving keystrokes in a macro.
 
 
  INSERTING OR REPLACING TEXT
 
     The E Editor has two modes for entering text:
     insert mode and replace mode.  Press the INSERT key
     to alternate between modes.
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | TO INSERT  | Position the cursor at the point    |
     | TEXT:      | where the next text is to start and |
     |            | type it in.  Existing text moves to |
     |            | the right to make room for what you |
     |            | type.                               |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | When you start the E Editor, it is  |
     |            | automatically in insert mode.  At   |
     |            | the bottom right-hand corner of the |
     |            | E Editor screen, you see the word   |
     |            | "Insert."  Press the INSERT key if  |
     |            | you want to change to replace mode. |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | In insert mode, the cursor is a box |
     |            | shape.                              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | TO REPLACE | Press the INSERT key to replace     |
     | TEXT:      | characters instead of inserting     |
     |            | them.  At the bottom right-hand     |
     |            | corner of the E Editor screen, you  |
     |            | now see the word "Replace."         |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | Position the cursor at the point    |
     |            | where the next text is to start and |
     |            | type it in.  Existing text is       |
     |            | overwritten when you type.  Press   |
     |            | the INSERT key again to resume      |
     |            | inserting.                          |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | In replace mode, the cursor is an   |
     |            | underscore.                         |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  93
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CONNECTING OR BREAKING A LINE OF TEXT
 
|    The way to break lines at a certain point in the
|    text is to split (breaking) them.  Other times you
|    might want to join (connecting) two or more shorter
|    lines into one line of text.  The E Editor allows
|    you to split or join a line by selecting "Split
|    line" or "Join lines" from the Edit menu, or using
|    the E Editor command line as follows:
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | TO CONNECT | Position the cursor at the point    |
|    | LINES:     | where you want to split the line    |
     |            | and press ALT+S.  The text after    |
     |            | the point where you put the cursor  |
     |            | is now on the next line.            |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | TO BREAK   | Position the cursor at the end of   |
|    | LINES:     | the line where you want the text to |
     |            | continue or be connected and press  |
     |            | ALT+J.  The line of text just below |
     |            | the cursor is now brought up to     |
     |            | join the line the cursor is on.     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
|    NOTE:  You can also split a line by pressing ENTER
|           at any spot within the text line if you are
|           in STREAM mode.  Refer to STREAM mode under
|           E.INI in the online PC DOS 7 Command
                                ________________
|           Reference.  All the words following the
            _________
|           cursor are moved to the next line.  If you
|           are at the end of a line or on the first
|           character of a line and press ENTER, a blank
|           line is inserted.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  94  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| ADDING OR DELETING LINES OF TEXT
 
|    Basic tasks you can perform using a text editor are
|    to add a line or to delete all or part of a line of
|    text.
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | TO ADD A   | Move the cursor to the end of the   |
|    | BLANK LINE | line and press ENTER.  This is the  |
|    | IN STREAM  | default.                            |
|    | MODE:      |                                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | TO ADD A   | Position the cursor anywhere in the |
|    | BLANK LINE | line just above the row where you   |
|    | IN ADDLINE | want to add the line and press      |
|    | MODE:      | ENTER.                              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | TO ERASE   | Position the cursor anywhere on the |
|    | TO THE END | line to the left of what you want   |
|    | OF THE     | to erase and press CTRL+E.  The     |
|    | LINE:      | text to the end of the line is now  |
|    |            | erased.                             |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | TO DELETE  | Place the cursor in any column on   |
|    | A LINE:    | the line to be deleted and press    |
|    |            | CTRL+BACKSPACE simultaneously.      |
     |            |                                     |
|    |            | The line is deleted from the screen |
|    |            | and the lines below it move up to   |
|    |            | fill the gap.  Continuing to press  |
|    |            | CTRL+BACKSPACE deletes multiple     |
|    |            | lines.                              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
  RESTORING A DELETION
 
|    Press F9 if you incorrectly type a change to a line
     and you want to restore its original contents.
 
|    NOTE:  The contents are restored only for the
|           current line you are editing and only if you
|           have not:
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  95
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|           o   Moved the cursor from the current line.
|           o   Pressed ENTER.
 
|    The UNDO command does not restore deleted lines or
|    changes to multiple lines.
 
 
| RECOVERING DELETED LINES OR LINE BLOCKS
 
|    If you delete a line or block of lines (using
|    CTRL+BACKSPACE or ALT+D), you can recover the
|    deletion by pressing CTRL+U.  The default for the
|    number of lines that can be restored is set at 50.
|    This number can be changed by editing the E.INI
|    file.  For more information about the E.INI file,
|    see the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                    __________________________
 
 
  DELETING UNMARKED CHARACTERS, WORDS, OR LINES
 
     You can delete text one character at a time, one
     word at a time, one line at a time, or several lines
     at a time in blocks at one time.
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | TO DELETE  | Place the cursor on the character   |
     | A          | you want to delete and press        |
     | CHARACTER: | DELETE.                             |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | The character is deleted from the   |
     |            | screen and the text to the right of |
     |            | the cursor shifts to the left to    |
     |            | fill the gap.                       |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | To delete multiple characters,      |
     |            | repeat the steps for each character |
     |            | you want to delete.                 |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  96  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | TO         | Press BACKSPACE.                    |
     | BACKSPACE  |                                     |
     | OVER A     | The character to the left of the    |
     | CHARACTER: | cursor is deleted from the screen   |
     |            | and the text to the right of the    |
     |            | cursor shifts to the left to fill   |
     |            | the gap.                            |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | By pressing the BACKSPACE           |
     |            | repeatedly, characters continue to  |
     |            | be deleted.                         |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | TO DELETE  | Position the cursor at the          |
     | A WORD:    | beginning of the word to be deleted |
     |            | and press CTRL+D.                   |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | The word is deleted from the screen |
     |            | and the text to the right of the    |
     |            | cursor shifts to the left to fill   |
     |            | the gap.  Repeat the steps to       |
     |            | delete multiple words.              |
     |            |                                     |
     |            | A text editor assumes a "word" to   |
     |            | be a string of characters from the  |
     |            | point where your cursor is          |
     |            | positioned up to and including the  |
     |            | first following space.              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
     NOTE:  If you have multiple characters, words or
            lines to delete, you might find it easier to
            mark words, lines, or blocks for deletion
            instead (see "Marking Text Using Key
            Combinations" on page 102).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  97
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SETTING TABS
 
     NOTE:  The changes to Tabs and Margin settings
            described in this section apply only to the
            current session.  The Tab and Margin settings
            revert to the default values when you leave
            the session.
 
     Use the TAB key to move the cursor across the screen
     and insert text at set points.
 
     TO CHANGE THE TAB SETTINGS:
 
     1.  Press ESC to move your cursor to the command
         line.
 
     2.  Type the TABS command on the E Editor command
         line.
 
         If you only type "tabs", the current tab
         settings are displayed.  The tabs are preset to
         every eighth column across the screen.  For
         example:
 
               tabs 1 9 17 25 33
 
|    3.  Change the tab setting with the TABS command
         using the following format:
 
               tabs  [t1 [t2 [t3 ... t32] ] ]
 
         For example, you can reset tabs for specific tab
         stops by typing the following at the E Editor
         command line:
 
               tabs  4 17 39 47 ... 55
 
         and then pressing ENTER.
 
         or
         __
 
 
 
 
 
  98  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         You can type the TABS command followed by a
         number to set the tabs to every fourth column
         across the screen:
 
               tabs 4
 
         In this example, the tabs are set at 1 5 9 13
         ... 125.
 
 
  SETTING MARGINS
 
     TO SET NEW MARGINS:
 
     1.  Press ESC to move your cursor to the command
         line.
 
     2.  Type the MARGINS command on the E Editor command
         line.
 
         If you only type "margins", the current margin
         settings are displayed.  For example:
 
               margins 1 254 1
 
|    3.  Change the margin setting with the MARGINS
         command using the following format:
 
               margins  [left margin[right margin[new paragraph margin]]]
                         ___________ ____________ ____________________
 
         For example, you could type margins similar to:
 
               margins 1 70 5
 
         and press ENTER.
 
         To put the cursor back in the text area, press
         ESC.  As you continue typing, the E Editor keeps
         your text within the new margin settings.
 
         Notice that your previously entered text is not
         automatically reflowed to the new margin
         settings.
 
 
                                   Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  99
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     4.  Press ESC to move your cursor to the command
         line.
 
 
  SAVING KEYSTROKES IN A MACRO
 
     You can record and play back any sequence of
     keystrokes.  Such a recorded sequence constitutes a
     temporary macro that can be repeated numerous times.
               _____
     If you find yourself entering the same key sequence
     more than twice, record them instead.
 
     TO RECORD A SEQUENCE OF KEYS:
 
     1.  Press CTRL+R.
 
     2.  Type your sequence of keys.
 
         Virtually any key can be recorded, including
         ESC, to switch to the E Editor command line.  As
         you are recording the keys, the key operations
         are also taking place in addition to being
         recorded and saved.
 
     3.  Do one of the following when prompted:
 
         CTRL+R    Finishes the recording of keystrokes.
 
         CTRL+T    Completes the recording and
|                  immediately runs the saved sequence.
|                  This shortcut eliminates having to
                   press CTRL+R a second time before
                   pressing CTRL+T.
 
         CTRL+C    Cancels saving the keystroke sequence.
 
     TO REPLAY THE SEQUENCE AT ANY OTHER TIME:
 
     Press CTRL+T.
 
     Unless you have changed keystroke recordings, made a
     new recording, or left the E Editor, the keystroke
     recording is retained.
 
 
  100  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    NOTE:  You can save your macro when you exit the
|           E Editor and have it loaded the next time you
|           start the E Editor by setting the MACROPATH
|           option in the E.INI file.  Refer to the
|           online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more
                   __________________________
|           information about the E.INI file.
 
 
  SELECTING TEXT
  ______________
 
     You begin most editing operations by selecting a
     block of text.  In a single line, you can select any
     amount of text, from a single character to the
     entire line.  You can also select several lines or
     the entire file at once.
 
     In the E Editor, selecting a section of the text is
     called marking the text.  When this is done
            _______
     correctly, you see the area you have marked
     highlighted on your screen.  To copy, move, or
|    delete a section of text, first mark the text before
     you can perform functions on it.
 
     Unmarking the text removes the highlighting and the
     _________
     text is no longer selected.
 
|    NOTE:  There are two ways to mark text.  You can use
|           the mouse or you can use key combinations
 
 
| MARKING TEXT USING THE MOUSE
 
|    The following type of marking is possible when using
|    the mouse:
 
|    WORD MARK                Use the right mouse button
|                             and click on the word you
|                             want marked.
 
|    LINE MARK                Hold down the right mouse
|                             button and drag the mouse
|                             pointer across the lines of
|                             text you want to mark.  An
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  101
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|                             entire line, from column 1
|                             to column 255, is marked.
 
|    TEXT MARK                Ensure that the SCROLL LOCK
|                             key is off.  Hold down the
|                             left mouse button and drag
|                             the mouse pointer across
|                             the lines of text you want
|                             to mark.  The mark proceeds
|                             only to the end of the
|                             line.  It does not go all
|                             the way across the screen
|                             unless your line of text
|                             projects out that far.
 
|    RECTANGULAR BLOCK MARK   Press the SCROLL LOCK key
|                             so that it is on.  Hold
|                             down the left mouse button
|                             and drag it across the area
|                             you want to mark.  Only a
|                             rectangular area of text is
|                             blocked.
 
|    NOTE:  Double clicking on a marked area with the
|           left mouse button unmarks the marked area.
 
 
| MARKING TEXT USING KEY COMBINATIONS
 
     Four types of marks are recognized in the E Editor:
 
     WORD MARK                Marks the entire word
                              regardless of where you
                              place your cursor on the
                              word.
 
|    LINE MARK                An entire line from column
|                             1 up to and including
|                             column 255 is marked.
 
                              NOTE:  Use line mark if you
                                     are going to copy or
                                     move text and then
 
 
  102  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
                                     insert the text
                                     elsewhere in the
                                     file.  Only the line
                                     mark moves the
                                     existing text down
                                     to let you insert
                                     the text.  With line
                                     mark, no text shifts
                                     to the right.  You
                                     are not required to
                                     add blank lines
                                     before you insert
                                     the moved or copied
                                     block of text.
 
|                             This is the recommended
|                             method for marking
|                             paragraphs if you are not
|                             using the mouse.
 
|    TEXT MARK                Marks a single space or
|                             multiple spaces that
|                             include text, numbers, or
|                             symbols.  The marked area
|                             proceeds from where you set
|                             your cursor to begin the
|                             mark to where you set your
|                             cursor to end the mark.  If
|                             you cross multiple lines,
|                             the marked area follows the
|                             path of the line and goes
|                             only as far-right as the
|                             text on that line.
 
|    RECTANGULAR BLOCK MARK   A strictly rectangular area
|                             of text.
 
     TO MARK A LINE OF TEXT:
 
     1.  Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys
         to move the cursor anywhere on the line you want
         to select or line mark.
                      _________
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  103
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  Press the line combination keys ALT+L.
 
     TO MARK MULTIPLE LINES OF TEXT:
 
     After you mark a line, move the cursor to another
     line and press the line combination keys (ALT+L)
     again.  All lines between the first mark and the
     second mark are then marked.
 
|    TO MARK A RECTANGULAR BLOCK OF TEXT:
 
     1.  Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys
|        to move the cursor to the upper-left character
         of the text you want to select or block mark.
                                           __________
 
     2.  Press ALT+B.
 
|    3.  Move the cursor to the lower-right character of
         the text you want to block mark.
 
     4.  Press ALT+B again to complete the block mark.
 
     The text you have marked is now highlighted.
 
     TO MARK A WORD:
 
     1.  Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys
         to move the cursor anywhere on the word you want
         to select or word mark.
                      _________
 
|        You can mark only one word when you use the
|        following key combination.  You must unmark the
|        word or use the delete edit process to mark
|        another word.
 
     2.  Press the word combination keys ALT+W.
 
|    TO MARK TEXT:
 
|    1.  Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys
|        to move the cursor to the item (character,
|        number, or symbol) you want to select or text
                                                  ____
|        mark.
         ____
 
 
  104  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    2.  Press the text combination keys ALT+Z.  The text
|        is highlighted.
 
|    TO MARK MULTIPLE ITEMS:
 
|    1.  Use the arrow keys or other cursor movement keys
|        to move the cursor to the first character of the
|        string (characters, numbers, or symbols) you
|        want to select.
 
|        A multiple text mark can span lines.  Unlike the
           __________________
|        block mark, this type of a mark is not a
|        strictly rectangular shape.  This type of mark
|        wraps around lines.
 
|    2.  Press the text combination keys ALT+Z.
 
|    3.  After you mark one item (a character, number, or
|        symbol), place the cursor on the last item you
|        want to mark and press the mark text keys ALT+Z.
|        All text from the beginning to the end is
|        marked.
 
     After you have marked text, you can revise the range
     of the mark by placing the cursor at a different
     position and again pressing the combination key you
     last used.  If the cursor is outside the range of
     the marked area, the marked area will be expanded to
     include the new position.  If the cursor is within
     the marked area, it will be construed as a new end
                                                    ___
     of the area mark.
 
 
  UNMARKING TEXT
 
     You can clear marked text from the E Editor window
     by pressing ALT+U.  Any marked text is no longer
     highlighted.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  105
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Summary of key combinations for marking and unmarking text:
 
     Following is a table which summarizes the key
     combinations you would use to mark and unmark text.
 
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+B        | Block mark for rectangles or      |
     |              | lines.                            |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+L        | Line mark for one or more lines.  |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+W        | Word mark.                        |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+Z        | Text mark for sentences, phrases, |
     |              | or characters.                    |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+U        | Unmark.                           |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
 
 
  USING KEY COMBINATIONS TO MANIPULATE TEXT
  _________________________________________
 
     You can perform any type of operation on the marked
     text that you want (such as copy, move, delete, or
|    reflow).
 
     TO MANIPULATE AN AREA OF TEXT:
 
     1.  Mark the text you wish to copy, move, delete, or
         reflow by pressing the key combinations in the
         previous summary.  The E Editor highlights the
         area to show you what you have marked.
 
     2.  For copying or moving, select the destination
         for the highlighted text by moving the cursor to
         the destination position.
 
     3.  Press a key combination, such as ALT+C (copy) to
         perform the operation.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  106  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  DELETING TEXT
 
     You use the DELETE command to delete a block of text
     and reposition the text once the deletion is made.
 
     TO DELETE TEXT:
 
     1.  Mark the text you want to delete.
 
         Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations"
         on page 102 for instructions on how to select
         text if you do not know how to mark it.
 
     2.  Press ALT+D.
 
         The text is deleted and the text to the right of
         the cursor shifts to the left to fill the gap.
 
 
  COPYING TEXT
 
|    You use the E Editor copy command to copy and
     reposition a block of text.
 
     TO COPY A BLOCK OF TEXT:
 
     1.  Mark the block of text you want to copy.
 
         Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations"
         on page 102 for instructions on how to select
         text if you do not know how to mark it.
 
     2.  Select the destination for the highlighted text
         by moving the cursor to the destination
         position.
 
     3.  Press ALT+C.
 
         The block of text is copied to the new location,
         and it is not removed from its original
         location.
 
     TO COPY A BLOCK OF TEXT INTO ANOTHER FILE:
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  107
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     1.  Load the two files you are going to copy text
         between (target and source files).
 
         For information on how to edit more than one
|        file at a time, see page 87.
 
     2.  In the file that has the text you want to copy,
         mark the block of text.
 
         Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations"
         on page 102 for instructions on how to select
         text if you do not know how to mark it.
 
     3.  Select the destination for the highlighted text
         by switching to the second file (F10) and moving
         the cursor to the destination position.
 
     4.  Press ALT+C.
 
         The block of text is copied to the new location,
         and it is not removed from its original
         location.
 
     You can copy the marked text into a file as many
     times as you want by repeating the COPY command
     (ALT+C).  The text remains in the buffer, a
                                       ______
     temporary storage area, until you change what is
     marked.
 
 
  MOVING TEXT
 
     You can move a block of text.  This procedure is
     useful if you want to rearrange the order of text in
     a file.
 
     TO MOVE A BLOCK OF TEXT WITHIN THE SAME FILE:
 
     1.  Mark the block of text you want to move.
 
         Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations"
         on page 102 for instructions on how to select
         text if you do not know how to mark it.
 
 
  108  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  Move the cursor to the position where you want
         to move the text using the arrow keys.
 
     3.  Press ALT+M.
 
         The block of text is deleted from the original
         location and moved to the new destination.
 
     TO MOVE A BLOCK OF TEXT INTO ANOTHER FILE:
 
     1.  Load the two files you are going to transfer
         text between (target and source files).
 
         For information on how to edit more than one
|        file at a time, see page 87.
 
     2.  In the file that has the text you want to move,
         mark the block of text.
 
         Refer to "Marking Text Using Key Combinations"
         on page 102 for instructions on how to select
         text if you do not know how to mark it.
 
     3.  Select the destination for the highlighted text
|        by switching to the second file (CTRL+N or F12
|        on an enhanced keyboard) and moving the cursor
         to the destination position.
 
     4.  Press ALT+M.
 
         The block of text is moved to the new location,
         and it is removed from its original location.
 
     When you move a block of text, the text is not
     removed from the buffer; it remains there until you
     move another block of text to the buffer.  You can
     insert text from the buffer into a file as many
     times as you want by repeating the MOVE command
     (ALT+M).
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  109
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  REFLOWING TEXT
 
     The E Editor allows you to reflow text to fit with a
|    new area between margin settings or in an area you
|    define.
 
 
     Adjusting a Paragraph to the New Margins
 
     The E Editor recognizes a blank line as the end of a
     paragraph.  Therefore, you can reflow text in a
     paragraph to adjust to new margin settings.  Before
     you can adjust a paragraph to new margins, you must
     first set the margins.  See "Setting Margins" on
|    page 99 for more information.
 
     If a paragraph is not followed by a blank line or an
     end-of-file indicator, you must mark the paragraph
     before you can reflow text.
 
     TO REFLOW TEXT TO REVISED MARGIN SETTINGS:
 
     1.  Move the cursor to the beginning of the
         paragraph.
 
     2.  If the paragraph is not terminated with a blank
         line or end-of-file indicator, mark the area
         using combination keys.
 
         The E Editor highlights the text you have
         marked.
 
     3.  Press ALT+P to adjust the marked paragraph to
         the current margin settings.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  110  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Reflowing Marked Text
 
     Pressing the ALT+R combination keys lets you reflow
     a section of text to a defined space.  It is
     typically used to reformat a special paragraph (such
     as an indented paragraph) without changing the
     margins.
 
     TO REFLOW MARKED TEXT:
 
|    1.  First mark the text to be reformatted (with any
|        type of mark).
 
|    2.  Press ALT+R.
 
|        You are prompted to mark the new block--the
|        space into which you want the block reflowed.
 
|    3.  Move the cursor to the upper-left character of
|        the block of text you want to reflow and press
|        ALT+B.
 
|    4.  Move the cursor to the lower-right character of
|        the block of text you want to reflow and press
|        ALT+B.
 
|    5.  Press ALT+R and the text is reflowed.  The space
|        where the text came from is filled with blank
|        spaces.
 
|        ALT+P reflows a marked paragraph to the new
|        margin settings.
 
     In other words, with a block mark, ALT+P behaves as
     if you marked a block, pressed ALT+R, and remarked
     the same block.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  111
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Summary of Text Operation Keys:
 
     After you have marked text, you can manipulate it by
     pressing the following key combinations:
 
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
|    | ALT+A        | Copies text to a new location and |
|    |              | fills the old position with       |
|    |              | blanks.                           |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+C        | Copies the text to the new        |
     |              | location by inserting it and      |
     |              | pushing aside existing text.      |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+D        | Deletes marked text.  The space   |
     |              | formerly occupied is discarded.   |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
|    | ALT+O        | Copies text to a new location;    |
|    |              | overlays the existing text rather |
     |              | than pushes it aside.             |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+M        | Moves marked text from one        |
     |              | location to another location and  |
     |              | discards the space previously     |
     |              | occupied by the text.             |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+F        | Fills an entire marked area with  |
     |              | a character you specify.  The     |
     |              | character can be a graphic; see   |
     |              | "Entering Control and Graphic     |
     |              | Characters" on page 137 for       |
     |              | information on how to enter a     |
     |              | graphic character.  To end this   |
     |              | operation, press ESC.             |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  112  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
|    | ALT+P        | Reflows a marked paragraph to the |
|    |              | new margin settings.  If a block  |
|    |              | of text is marked, reflows only   |
|    |              | the marked text to the new margin |
|    |              | settings.  See "Adjusting a       |
|    |              | Paragraph to the New Margins" on  |
|    |              | page 110 for details.             |
     |              |                                   |
|    |              | If the text is not marked, the    |
|    |              | paragraph following the cursor is |
|    |              | reformatted.                      |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+R        | Reflows the marked text into a    |
     |              | new defined area.  See "Reflowing |
     |              | Marked Text" on page 111 for      |
     |              | details.                          |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+F7       | Shifts marked text to the left.   |
     |              | If you have text next to the left |
     |              | column of the marked area, it     |
     |              | will overlay any text in the      |
     |              | far-left column of the marked     |
     |              | area.                             |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+F8       | Shifts marked text to the right.  |
     |              | All text to the right of the left |
     |              | edge boundary is shifted right.   |
     |              | The far-left marked column is     |
     |              | filled with blank spaces.         |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+E        | Moves the cursor to the end of    |
     |              | the marked text.  Except for      |
     |              | line-marked text, this is the     |
     |              | far-right character of the last   |
     |              | line.  For line-marked text, the  |
     |              | cursor column is unchanged.       |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  113
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
     | ALT+Y        | Moves the cursor to the start of  |
     |              | the marked text.  Except for      |
     |              | line-marked text, this is the     |
     |              | far-left character of the first   |
     |              | line.  For line-marked text, the  |
     |              | cursor column is unchanged.       |
     +--------------+-----------------------------------+
 
     Some operation keys do not work with all combination
     keys, as shown in the following table.
 
     The top heading gives the marking keys.  The left
     column shows the operation keys.  At the
     intersection of any row and column is a description
     of where the cursor should be placed to define the
     destination.  If no such description is given (as at
     the intersection of ALT+L and ALT+A), the operation
     is not allowed.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  114  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
|    | OPERATION    | ALT+L     | ALT+B OR  | ALT+Z     |
     |              |           | ALT+W     |           |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
     | Adjust       |           | Top-Left  |           |
     | (ALT+A)      |           | Corner    |           |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
     | Copy (ALT+C) | Line      | Top-Left  | At Line   |
     |              | Above     | Corner    |           |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
     | Delete       | Any       | Any       | Any       |
     | (ALT+D)      | Position  | Position  | Position  |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
     | Overlay      |           | Top-Left  |           |
     | (ALT+O)      |           | Corner    |           |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
     | Move (ALT+M) | Line      | Top-Left  | Top-Left  |
     |              | Above     | Corner    | Corner    |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
     | Reflow       | Any       | Any       | Any       |
     | (ALT+P)      | Position  | Position  | Position  |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
     | SHIFT        | Any       | Any       |           |
     | (ALT+F7/F8)  | Position  | Position  |           |
     +--------------+-----------+-----------+-----------+
 
 
  USING E EDITOR COMMANDS
  _______________________
 
     In addition to pressing keys or combinations of
     keys, you can use the E Editor command line to
     perform many functions of the E Editor.
 
     Enclosing an E Editor command in quotes when you
     invoke the E Editor lets you specify a command that
     takes effect immediately upon loading the E Editor.
     You can specify file names before the quoted
     command.  For example, to start the E Editor, open a
     file named REPORT.DOC, and move the cursor to the
     bottom of the file, type:
 
           C> e report.doc 'bot'
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  115
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Remember to press ESC to move from the window area
|    of the E Editor to the command line.  Press ESC
     again to return to the window area of the E Editor.
 
 
  FINDING TEXT
 
     To find a word, a phrase, or a combination of
     characters in a file, use the / (search) or L
     (locate) command.  The text can be a word, a phrase,
     or any combination of characters and spaces.
 
     NOTE:  To make sure the entire file is searched, go
            to the top of the file before you begin your
            search.
 
     You need to be specific about limiting your searches
     so you find only separate occurrences, such as
     searching for "let" and finding these letters in the
     word "letters."  If you searched for "lett", you are
     limiting the search to a more specific search
     pattern.
 
     To find a word or phrase, use the following format:
 
           /findword/ [options]
            ________   _______
 
     or
     __
 
           L/findword/ [options]
             ________   _______
 
     If you do not specify any options, the / (search) or
     L (locate) command will do the following:
 
     o   Search the entire file (not only the marked
         area) in the forward direction.
 
         For example, the search starts at the current
         line and proceeds toward the end of the file.
 
     o   Search but ignore case.
 
 
 
 
  116  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         For example, the E Editor finds both Brown and
                                              _____
         brown.
         _____
 
     o   Search left-to-right through lines.
 
     Change the search options if you need to.  When the
     E Editor searches for text, it starts at the current
     cursor position and selects the first occurrence of
     the text.  You can specify the following search
     options:
 
     -       Search from current line backwards to top of
|            file (or if the M option is chosen, to top
|            of marked area).  Search is left-to-right.
 
     +       Search forward from current line to bottom
             of file.
 
     M       Search within the marked text area only.
 
|    A       Search the current file, including the
|            marked area.
 
     C       Search but ignore case.
 
     E       Search but match the search pattern's case
             exactly.
 
     R       Search from right to left through lines.
 
     F       Search from left-to-right through lines.
 
     TO FIND TEXT:
 
     1.  Return to the top of the file and type a /
         (search) or L (locate) command.
 
         For example, if you want to find "help" as a
         separate word, you would type:
 
               /help /
 
         or
         __
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  117
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
               L/help /
 
         Make sure you include the space after the word
         "help" because the E Editor finds all
         occurrences, such as the help in helpless if you
                                  ____    ________
         do not add the space in your search pattern.
         The second / is normally not required if you do
         not have options listed.  Because you are
         limiting your search to help followed by a
                                 ____
         space, the second / is required to add the
         space.
 
     2.  Press ENTER.
 
         If no occurrences of the text are found, you see
         the "String not found" message.
 
|    3.  To search for the next occurrence of the
|        specified text, press CTRL+F.  Only the file in
|        the active editor window is searched.
 
|        or
         __
 
|    4.  To make a global search, press CTRL+G.  All the
|        files in the editor's ring are searched.
 
     The / (search) or L (locate) command leaves the
     cursor in the text area, not on the E Editor command
     line.
 
     The / (search) or L (locate) command continues to
     search through the file each time you press CTRL+F
     until it reaches the end of the file.
 
     Here is an example of the / (search) or L (locate)
     command:
 
           /finalize/e
 
     The E option means to search but match the case
     exactly.  After you press ENTER, the E Editor
     searches for the word "finalize", ignoring any words
 
 
 
  118  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     it might find that have uppercase letters in it,
     such as "Finalize".
 
     Any search string delimiter (not only the slash /)
     can be used after the LOCATE command.  You need this
     if the search string itself contains a slash.  When
     used with the slash delimiters (/), the command does
     not require a blank between the C and the /.
     However, if you are using a different delimiter, a
     blank space is required between the L and the
     delimiter.  The same is true of the C (change)
     command.
 
           L $/$
 
     In the last example, '$' is the delimiter and '/' is
     the string for which to search.
 
     Multiple options can be given at one time.
 
           /helper/-re
 
     If contradictory options are given (such as /rf),
     only the last option is the one remembered.
 
     In this example, the E Editor searches for the word
     "helper" from the current line backwards in the
     file, searches from right to left in the lines, and
     finds only the word "helper" and matching
     capitalization exactly while it is searching.
 
 
  SEARCHING FOR TEXT USING THE ALL COMMAND
 
|    The ALL command creates a file called .ALL that
     shows all occurrences of a search pattern you
     designated for the file you are in.  The occurrences
     matching the pattern are listed by line number.  You
     can move from occurrence to occurrence by pressing
     CTRL+Q combination.
 
|    To find a word or phrase, use the following format:
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  119
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|          all /findword [/[e]]
                ________
 
|    The / can be any delimiter and" e" indicates to
|    match case exactly.
 
|    TO USE THE ALL COMMAND TO SEARCH IN A FILE:
 
     1.  Open up the file you want to search.
 
|    2.  Type the following command if you want to find
|        the word "expert" in the opened files:
 
|              all /expert
 
     3.  Press ENTER.
 
|        If no occurrences of the word are found, you see
|        the message:
 
|              String not found
 
         If the word is found:
 
         o   The .ALL file is created, showing the line
             number and contents of the line where the
             word is found.
 
         o   You are placed in the .ALL file with the
             cursor blinking on the first occurrence of
             the word.
 
     4.  Press CTRL+Q and you are switched from the .ALL
         file to the original file.  The cursor is placed
         on the first occurrence of the word in the
         original file.
 
         Each time you press CTRL+Q, you are switched
         between the two files.
 
     5.  Save and quit out of your original file as
         usual.  The .ALL file still appears on your
|        screen.  You cannot save it.  When you quit a
|        file, it disappears as though it never existed.
 
 
  120  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SEARCHING FOR AND REPLACING TEXT
 
     To find a word or phrase, use the following format:
     you can search for and replace a set of characters
     in a file at the same time using the C (change)
     command.  The C (change) command begins at the
     cursor location and continues to the end of the
     file.  To make sure that you search for and replace
     the entire file, move the cursor to the top of the
     file before you begin to search and replace text.
 
     To find a word or phrase and replace it with other
     text, use the following format:
 
     1.  Type a C (change) command using the following
         format:
 
               c/oldtext/newtext/ [options]
                 _______ _______   _______
 
         For example, if you are trying to find "mail"
         and replace it with "letters", you would type:
 
               c/mail /letters /
 
         The "C" is the shortened form of the C (change)
         command.
 
         Make sure you specify the spaces where necessary
         because the C (change) command changes all
         occurrences.  If the spaces were not specified
         in the preceding example, the mail in mailbox
                                       ____    _______
         would then become lettersbox if you do not add
                           __________
         the space in your search pattern.
 
|        One option is available with the C (change)
         command that is not available with the L
         (locate) command.  If you want to make all the
         changes, without being prompted, add an asterisk
         (*) similar to the example that follows:
 
               c/mispeled/misspelled/*
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  121
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         If you do not specify options, the C (change)
         command will do the following:
 
         o   Change the entire file (not only the marked
             area) in the forward direction.
 
             For example, the change starts at the
             current line and proceeds toward the end of
             the file.
 
         o   Search but ignore case.
 
             For example, the E Editor finds both Brown
                                                  _____
             and brown.
                 _____
 
         o   Search left-to-right through lines.
 
         Change the options if you need to.  The E Editor
         starts at the current cursor position and
         changes the first occurrence of the text.  You
         can specify the following change options:
 
         *       Make all the changes, without being
                 prompted.
 
         -       Change from current line backwards, to
|                top of file (or if the M option is
|                chosen, to top of marked area).  Search
|                is left-to-right.
 
         +       Change forward from current line to
                 bottom of file.
 
         M       Change within the marked text area only.
 
|        A       Change the current file, including the
|                marked area.
 
         C       Change but ignore case.  (This is the
                 default for the CHANGE command).
 
 
 
 
 
  122  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         E       Change but match the search pattern's
                 case exactly.
 
         R       Search from right to left through lines.
 
         F       Search from left-to-right through lines.
 
     2.  Press ENTER.
 
     3.  If the text is not found, you see the message
         "String not found".  If the text is found, you
         see the message "Yes/No/Last/Go/Quit?" near the
         bottom of the screen.  Type:
 
         Y       To make the change for this one item and
                 search for the next occurrence.
 
         N       To skip the change and search for the
                 next occurrence.
 
         L       To replace this last one and then stop.
 
         G       To go ahead and replace the remaining
                 occurrences without prompting for each
                 occurrence.
 
         Q       To stop making any further changes and
                 discontinue the search.  You can also
                 press ESC.
 
         From the E Editor command line:
 
         Press CTRL+F To find the next occurrence of the
                      specified text.
 
         or
         __
 
         Type "C"     To repeat the same C (change)
                      command without having to retype
                      the C (change) command.  You are
                      immediately asked
                      "Yes/No/Last/Go/Quit?".
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  123
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         or
         __
 
     4.  Press ESC to put the cursor back in the text
         area.
 
     The C (change) command leaves the cursor in the text
     area, not on the E Editor command line.
 
     The C (change) command continues to search through
     the file each time you press CTRL+F until it reaches
     the end of the file.
 
     Here are some examples of C (change) commands:
 
|    In the following example, you are prompted to answer
     each time the word "bills" is found whether you want
     to make the change, not change this instance but
     search for the next occurrence, replace this one and
     stop, or replace this one and all the rest without
     prompting.
 
           c /bills/invoices/
 
     Any search string delimiter (not only the slash /)
     can be used after the C (change) command.  You need
     this if the search string itself contains a slash.
     When used with the slash delimiters (/), the C
     (change) command does not require a blank between
     the C and the /.  However, if you are using a
     different delimiter, a blank space is required
     between the "C" and the delimiter.  The same is true
     of the L (locate) command.  Typing:
 
           c $/$\$
 
     changes  / to \
 
     Multiple options can be given at one time.
 
           /helper/-re
 
     If contradictory options are given (such as /rf),
     only the last option is the one remembered.
 
 
  124  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     In this example, the E Editor searches for the word
     "helper" from the current line backwards in the
     file, searches from right to left in the lines, and
     finds only the word "helper" and matching
     capitalization exactly while it is searching.
 
 
  DRAWING LINES
 
     You can use graphics characters to draw boxes and
     diagrams.  The DRAW command can be typed at the
     E Editor command line:
 
           draw
 
     NOTE:  You can also press F6.
 
     To select drawing mode, you must issue the DRAW
     command with one of these arguments:
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |    DRAW    | RESULT                              |
     |   OPTION   |                                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      1     | Draws a thin, single line           |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      2     | Draws a thin, double line           |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      3     | Draws a dotted line                 |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      4     | Draws a thick line                  |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      5     | Draws a double, thin line           |
     |            | horizontally; single, thin line     |
     |            | vertically                          |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      6     | Draws a double, thin line           |
     |            | vertically; draws a single, thin    |
     |            | line horizontally.                  |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | /character | Uses any character that follows the |
        _________
     |            | slash (/) to form a box.            |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  125
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     If you type the DRAW command without any arguments,
     the visual representations:  "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B,
     or /any char" appear at the bottom of the screen as
     a reminder.  For example:
 
|          draw 2
 
     You are now in draw mode, which means that the
|    cursor acts like a paint brush:  everywhere you move
     the cursor, a double line (because you typed "2") is
     drawn.
 
     Draw any shape with the cursor using the arrow keys
     (LEFT, RIGHT, UP, and DOWN).  While in the drawing
     mode, you can stop drawing the double line and type
     in text or move the cursor to another location
     without drawing anything (in other words, lift the
|    paint brush) by pressing the INSERTkey.  This key
     suspends the drawing without exiting from draw mode.
 
     To begin drawing again, simply press the INSERT key
     again.  Pressing any key besides those on the
     numeric key pad ends draw mode.
 
     You can draw figures with characters other than the
     line graphics characters provided.  For example, if
     you want to draw figures composed of the left
     parentheses, you would type at the E Editor command
     line:
 
|          draw /(
 
     This process works with any character on the
     keyboard, as long as you precede the character with
     a slash (/).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  126  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CREATING BOXES AROUND TEXT
 
     You can use graphics characters to draw boxes.  The
     BOX command can be typed at the E Editor command
     line:
 
           box
 
     To create a box, you must issue the BOX command at
     the E Editor command line with one of these
     arguments:
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | BOX OPTION | RESULT                              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    |      C     | Creates a box comment using C       |
|    |            | language syntax.                    |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    |      P     | Creates a box comment using Pascal  |
|    |            | language syntax.                    |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      A     | Creates a box comment using         |
     |            | Assembler syntax.                   |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      E     | Erases the box around the marked    |
     |            | area.                               |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    |      R     | Reflows text in the marked area.    |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     |      B     | Places spaces on all sides of the   |
     |            | marked area, creating a box of      |
     |            | blank spaces.                       |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
     If you type the BOX command without any arguments,
     the visual representations for:  "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
     B, /x", P, C, A, E, R, and S appear at the bottom of
         _
     the screen as a reminder.
 
     For example, for a double line, you could type:
 
           box 2
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  127
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  COMBINING FILES
 
|    Three E Editor commands can be used to pull text
     from one file and place it into a different file:
     GET, PUT, and APPEND.
 
     The E Editor allows you to have multiple files open
     at one time.  You can mark text in one file and
     insert that text into another file you have open.
 
     For example, you just finished a note summarizing
     your monthly activities in which you listed some
|    statistics you want to put in a second file.  You do
|    not want to insert the entire note; you want only
     the statistical information pulled into a second
     file.
 
     TO USE THE GET COMMAND TO INSERT ANOTHER FILE INTO
     AN OPENED FILE:
 
     1.  Open the file you want to pull information into.
 
         For example, open a file named NEWFILE.TXT by
         typing the following:
 
               e c:\newfile.txt
 
     2.  Place the cursor on a line above where you want
         to insert the file you want to get.
 
         Because this is a new file, place the cursor at
         the top of the file.
 
     3.  Press ESC to get to the E Editor command line.
 
     4.  Type the GET command using the following format:
 
               get filespec
                   ________
 
         Substitute the full path and file name of the
         file you want to insert.  For example, to pull
|        the entire C:\REPORTS.TXT file into the
 
 
 
  128  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        C:\NEWFILE.TXT file, type the following at the
         E Editor command line:
 
               get c:\reports.txt
 
     5.  Press ENTER.
 
         The entire file is pulled into the NEWFILE.TXT
         file, following the line where the cursor is
         placed.
 
     TO APPEND TEXT TO THE BOTTOM OF A FILE:
 
|    The APPEND command works the same way the PUT
|    command works, appending the text to the bottom of a
|    file.
 
     TO USE THE PUT COMMAND TO INSERT A FILE OR PART OF
     THE FILE INTO ANOTHER FILE:
 
     1.  Open a file that contains information you want
         to put into another file.
 
         For example, open a file named NEWFILE.TXT by
         typing the following:
 
               e c:\newfile.txt
 
     2.  Mark the text you want to put into another file
|        by using the line-mark keys combination ALT+L.
         If you do not mark any text, the entire file
         will be inserted.
 
     3.  Press ESC to get to the E Editor command line.
 
     4.  Type the PUT command using the following format:
 
               put filespec
                   ________
 
         Substitute the full path and file name of the
         file you want to insert the marked text into.
         The file can be a file that already exists or a
         new file.
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  129
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         For example, to pull the marked text from the
         file C:\NEWFILE.TXT into the C:\REPORTS.TXT
         file, type the following at the E Editor command
         line:
 
               put c:\reports.txt
 
         and press ENTER.
 
         The marked text or the complete opened file
         (NEWFILE.TXT) is always written to the file
         specified in the PUT command (REPORTS.TXT).
 
     Only the marked text is inserted into the
     REPORTS.TXT file.  If the file already exists, the
|    information can be placed only at the bottom of the
     file; the file is not overwritten.
 
     If you use the PUT command to insert an entire file,
     you do not have to open or mark the text first.
 
     For convenience, filespec can be omitted if you want
                      ________
     to repeat a PUT to the same file.  PUT commands
     without a filespec reuse the last-specified name.
               ________
 
     If you do not move the cursor and do another PUT
     command, the text from the second PUT command is
     inserted immediately following the text inserted
     from the first PUT command.
 
     TO PRINT USING THE PUT COMMAND:
 
     You can print a marked block of text by issuing "PUT
     prn".  The readiness of the printer is tested first
     to avoid having to wait for a device time-out in
     case the printer is offline.  The PRINT command
     allows you to print only marked text.
 
|    If no text is marked, the entire current file will
|    be printed.
 
     TO USE THE EQUAL SIGN TO REPEAT THE FILE NAME:
 
 
 
  130  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     You can use the equal sign ("=") as a shorthand for
     either the current file's directory or file name.
     Remember that the equal sign is shorthand for "same
     path as last specified" at the DOS command prompt,
     or "same path as current file's" at the E Editor
     command line.
 
     For example, you are currently editing a file named
     REPORT1.TXT located in the C:\REPORTS subdirectory.
     You want to edit REPORT2 in the same subdirectory.
     At the E Editor command line, type:
 
           e =report2.txt
 
     The file's path and file name can be seen as
     "C:REPORTS\REPORT2.TXT" near the bottom left-hand
     part of the screen.
 
 
  ADDING AND MULTIPLYING NUMBERS
 
     If you need to add columns or rows of numbers, the
     E Editor provides both an ADD and a MULTIPLY
     command.  See "Calculating Mathematical Expressions"
     on page 132 for the proper format.
 
     TO ADD OR MULTIPLY A COLUMN OR ROW OF NUMBERS:
 
     1.  Mark the text you wish to add or multiply.
 
         You can do this by pressing ALT+B once at the
|        top left-hand corner of the column and again at
|        the bottom right-hand corner of the column of
         numbers.  When you finish marking the end of the
         text, the text is highlighted to show you the
         column of text you have marked.
 
     2.  Press ESC to get to the E command line at the
         bottom of your screen.
 
     3.  Type "add" or type "mult" depending on the type
         of operation you want to perform.
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  131
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     4.  Press ENTER.
 
     To return the cursor to the text area, press ESC.
 
 
  CALCULATING MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS
 
|    If you need to add, subtract, multiply, or divide
|    hex, octal, binary, or decimal numbers, the E Editor
|    provides a set of MATH commands that compute an
|    arithmetic expression of the following format:
     _____________________
 
|          arithmetic expression: arith term arith operator arith term
           ___________________________________________________________
 
|          arith term: decimal number
|                    | binary number
|                    | hex number
|                    | octal number
|                    | '('     arithmetic expression ')'
 
|          arith operator: '+'
|                        | '-'
|                        | '*'
|                        | '/'
 
|    Binary  (base 2) numbers must be preceded by the
|    letter "b".  Hexadecimal (base 16) numbers must be
     preceded by the letter "x", (for example, "x10 =
     16").  Octal (base 8) numbers must be preceded by
     the letter "o" (for example, "o12 = 10").
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  132  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +---------------------+----------------------------+
     | MATH COMMAND        | WHAT IT DOES               |
     +---------------------+----------------------------+
     | math arithmetic     | The MATH command computes  |
            __________
     | expression          | the expression and appends |
       __________                __________
     |                     | the result as a decimal    |
     |                     | number.                    |
     +---------------------+----------------------------+
     | mathx arithmetic    | The MATHX command computes |
             __________
     | expression          | the expression and appends |
       __________                __________
     |                     | the result as a            |
     |                     | hexadecimal number.        |
     +---------------------+----------------------------+
     | matho arithmetic    | The MATHO command computes |
             __________
     | expression          | the expression and appends |
       __________                __________
     |                     | the result as an octal     |
     |                     | number.                    |
     +---------------------+----------------------------+
|    | mathb arithmetic    | The MATHB command computes |
             __________
|    | expression          | the expression and appends |
       __________                __________
|    |                     | the result as a binary     |
|    |                     | number.                    |
     +---------------------+----------------------------+
 
     Try some of the following MATH commands.  If your
     cursor is not on the highlighted E Editor command
     line, press ESC.
 
|          math     -10 + 40
|          mathx    -xff + 10
|          mathb    b10 + b01
|          matho    o11 * (xff - 10)
|          math     32000 + 32000
 
|    The above examples would yield 30, xFF0B, b11,
|    o4235, and 64000, respectively.  All numbers,
|    answers, and intermediate results are limited to the
|    range -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 for octal,
|    hexadecimal, and binary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  133
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    NOTES:
 
|    1.  For decimal numbers the range is 19 significant
|        digits.  For example, you could have the number
|        1 (and eighteen zeros).  Of course, the zeros
|        would not be displayed in an actual calculation.
 
|    2.  Use the PC DOS ACALC command from the E Editor
|        command line for many more functions.  Refer to
|        the ACALC command in the online PC DOS 7 Command
                                         ________________
|        Reference for more information.
         _________
 
 
  CUSTOMIZING THE E EDITOR
  ________________________
 
     You can use commands to change the way the E Editor
     window appears.
 
 
| CHANGING TO A NON-OVERLAPPING (TILED) WINDOW
 
     The E Editor provides two styles of windowing.  In
     the tiled (non-overlapping) window style, which is
         _____
     how the E Editor window normally appears, the
     windows do not overlap.  This allows changes to your
     file to be shown immediately in neighboring views of
     the same file.
 
     You can see this with a quick experiment:  Press
     CTRL+H to split the screen into two horizontal views
     of the same file and type.
 
     Tiled windows cannot be resized or moved around the
     screen because this might cause one window to
     overlap another.  Tiled windowing also has the
     interesting characteristic that each window or tile
                                                    ____
     contains the same ring of files as the other tiles
     or windows.  Simply press CTRL+W when you are in the
     text area to alternate between the tiles.  Each tile
     keeps track of its own cursor position so that you
     can edit two places in the same file without having
     to page up or page down.
 
 
 
  134  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CHANGING TO AN OVERLAPPING (MESSY) WINDOW
 
     In messy (overlapping) desktop, the windows can
        _____
     overlap.  You use the SIZE and DRAG commands to
     select the window's size and position.
 
|    To acquire a messy window mode, edit the E.INI file.
|    Refer to information about the E.INI file in the
|    online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more
            __________________________
|    information.
 
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
     | KEYS OR       | HOW IT CUSTOMIZES THE WINDOW     |
     | COMMAND       |                                  |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
     | CTRL+A        | Selects next tiled window        |
     |               | configuration.  There are four   |
     |               | different window arrangements    |
     |               | you can use if you have          |
     |               | specified tiled windows.  You    |
     |               | can view all four window         |
     |               | configurations by continuing to  |
     |               | press CTRL+A to view each window |
     |               | configuration.                   |
     |               |                                  |
|    |               | NOTE:   CTRL+A can be used only  |
|    |               |        in tiled windows.         |
     |               |                                  |
     |               |     One window zoomed to fill    |
     |               |     the screen.                  |
     |               |     Two equal windows positioned |
     |               |     vertically.                  |
     |               |     Four windows divided into    |
     |               |     four equally sized windows.  |
     |               |     Two equal windows positioned |
     |               |     horizontally.                |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
     | CTRL+H        | Selects two horizontal,          |
     |               | window-tile configuration.       |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | CTRL+N        | Switches to next file when you   |
|    |               | have multiple files open.        |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  135
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
     | KEYS OR       | HOW IT CUSTOMIZES THE WINDOW     |
     | COMMAND       |                                  |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | CTRL+P        | Switches to previous file when   |
|    |               | you have multiple files open.    |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
     | CTRL+V        | Selects two vertical,            |
     |               | window-tile configuration.       |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
     | CTRL+W        | Switches to next window.         |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | CTRL+Z        | Switches to one fully-zoomed,    |
     |               | window-tile configuration.  In   |
     |               | the messy desktop configuration, |
     |               | this expands the current window  |
     |               | to full screen.                  |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | F10           | Jumps to the E Editor menu.      |
|    |               | Then the arrow keys can be used  |
|    |               | to highlight menu selections and |
|    |               | access the menu for each choice. |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | F11           | Switches to previous file when   |
|    |               | you have multiple files open.    |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | F12           | Switches to next file when you   |
|    |               | have multiple files open.        |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | SIZE command  | Resizes a window.  It is used    |
            _______
|    |               | only for the messy desktop       |
|    |               | window configuration.            |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
|    | DRAG command  | Moves a window.  It is used only |
            _______
|    |               | for the messy desktop window     |
|    |               | configuration.                   |
     +---------------+----------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  136  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  ENTERING CONTROL AND GRAPHIC CHARACTERS
 
     You can enter PC graphic characters (those with
     extended ASCII codes greater than 127) with
     ALT+keypad numbers.
         ______
 
     For example, to enter the symbol for the Greek
     character pi (represented by the code 227):
 
|    1.  Press ALT and continue holding the key down.
|    2.  Type "227" on the numeric keypad.
|    3.  Release ALT.
 
     Graphic symbols with codes less than 32 might be
     harder to enter because they conflict with control
     characters recognized by the E Editor.  You might
     want to enter the character with code 12 because you
     like the looks of the graphic symbol or because you
     wish to send that control code to a printer.  Code
|    12 is the same as CTRL+L, which is recognized as
|    formfeeding by printers.  You cannot type it simply
     by pressing CTRL+L because a CTRL+L is recognized by
     the E Editor as a special action (copy the current
     line of text to the command line).
 
     In such a case, you can force the E Editor to accept
     the code without evaluation by prefacing it with
|    ALT+X.  Press ALT+X first, followed by CTRL+L and
|    then press ENTER.
 
     NOTE:  ALT+X is only necessary if the key has
            already been defined.  But pressing ALT+X is
            always safe.  If you are unsure whether the
            key is predefined, press ALT+X first.
 
     You can also follow ALT+X with an extended key such
     as F1, but this is seldom useful.  Extended keys are
     represented on the computer by two characters, a
     null (ASCII zero, which looks like a blank) with
     another character.  For instance, F1 gives you a
     null with a semicolon.
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  137
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     The E Editor cannot handle the following graphic
     characters, as they have special control meanings:
 
           Tab                x'09'
           Line Feed          x'0A'
           Carriage Return    x'0D'
           End of File        x'1A' (only following a CR/LF)
 
 
  USING SYNTAX-DIRECTED EDITING FEATURES
 
|    If you have a REXX or C programming background, you
|    can use the E Editor to develop code because
|    E Editor provides syntax-directed editing for REXX
|    and C files.
 
|    NOTE:  For this to be automatic, edit the E.INI file
|           and change the EXPAND parameter from the
|           default of OFF to ON.
 
     When ENTER or the spacebar is pressed, the E Editor
     looks at the first word in the line and enters the
     rest of the structure if it understands it.
 
|    Structure expansion can be effected on the following
|    statements:
 
|        REXX (use spacebar)
|            IF
|            WHEN
|            DO
|        REXX (press ENTER)
|            SELECT
|            DO
|            THEN DO
|            ELSE DO
|            /*
|        C
|            FOR
|            IF
|            WHILE
|            DO
|            SWITCH
 
 
  138  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|            MAIN
|        C (press ENTER)
|            FOR
|            CASE
|            DEFAULT
|            BREAK
|            SWITCH
|            MAIN
|            DO
|            ¤
|            /*
 
     Typical syntax-directed editing features can be
     demonstrated by the following sequence:
 
|    1.  Type "e newfile.c"
 
|        This example uses the file name of NEWFILE.C.
|        Remember that the file's extension must be .C or
|        .BAT for syntax-directed editing to work.
 
|        NOTE:  For REXX expansion to work when you have
|               a .BAT file, the first line must have a
|               comment that begins with /*.
 
|    2.  Type "main" and press the spacebar.
 
|    3.  Enter the main statement.
 
|    4.  Type "if" and press the spacebar.
 
|    This sequence edits a new file called NEWFILE.C.
|    Pressing the spacebar in both instances above
|    inserts the remainder of the MAIN and IF structures.
 
|    NOTE:  When automatic syntax expansion is OFF, you
|           can force expansion to occur by pressing
|           CTRL+X.
 
     Box comments can also be created easily, according
     to the syntax particular to the language.
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  139
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Summary of E Editor Commands
 
|    A summary of the E Editor commands and the tasks
|    that can be performed by them from the E Editor
|    command line is provided in the online PC DOS 7
                                            ________
|    Command Reference.  Refer to the E command for this
     _________________
|    summary.
 
 
  COMPARING A TEXT EDITOR AND A WORD PROCESSING PROGRAM
  _____________________________________________________
 
     A text editor allows you to create, edit, and print
       ___________
     memos, letters, and special files (such as
     AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS) that customize DOS.
 
     A text editor, sometimes referred to as an editing
     tool, differs from a word processing program in the
     following ways:
 
     o   Files you create by using the text editor are
         unformatted text files, such as ASCII text
         files, which means they do not contain any
         special formatting characters.  If you save such
         a file when using a text editor, the special
         characters of the word processing program may
         lose their formatting function.
 
         Because DOS batch programs and files, such as
         AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS, must be unformatted
         text files, text editors are a useful tool for
         customizing your system.
 
|    o   When you reach the end of a line using a text
|        editor, you must press ENTER to move the cursor
|        to the next line because there is no "word wrap"
|        feature associated with a text editor.  A line
|        of text can be up to 255 characters long.
 
|        NOTE:  There are things you can do to overcome
|               this problem and others associated with
|               most text editors by using the
|               flexibility built into the E Editor.  For
|               instance, you can set margins or you can
 
 
  140  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|               use the default margins of the E Editor
|               which are 1 and 254.  When your line of
|               text reaches 254 it automatically wraps
|               to the next line.  This chapter helps you
|               take advantage of this type of E Editor
|               flexibility.
 
     o   Unlike word processing programs that always
         place files in a specific directory, you must
         specify the exact location (full path) where you
         want to place the file when using a text editor.
 
     o   A text editor can have its own command line
         within the program.  This command line is not
         the same command line as the DOS command prompt.
|        Other editors' command lines allow you to type
|        editor commands used only for performing tasks
|        within the text editor.  However, the E Editor
|        also allows you to type DOS commands at the
|        E Editor command line.
 
|    Although not designed to be a word processor, the
|    flexibility of the E Editor allows it to be modified
|    to make it "act" more like a word processing
|    program, such as:
 
|    o   Set the margins before you start typing (for
|        example, type "margins 10 70").  The text then
|        "word wraps" when it reaches the right margin
|        you have set.  Setting margins eliminates your
|        having to press ENTER at the end of each line of
|        text; press ENTER only to start a new paragraph.
 
     o   Use the AUTOSAVE feature to automatically get
         temporary backup versions of your files.
 
|    o   Make menu selections using a mouse for
|        performing editing tasks.  You can select items
|        from the menu by doing one of the following:
 
|        -   Using the mouse to click on a selection
|        -   Pressing F10
|        -   Pressing ALT
 
 
                                  Chapter 4.  Working with the Text Editor  141
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   You can load up to 35 files into the E Editor
|        and toggle back and forth to work on them as
|        though these files were in a ring.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  142  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHAPTER 5.  CONNECTING COMPUTERS
  ________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    Using the InterLnk utility programs (INTERLNK.EXE
|    and INTERSRV.EXE) and a cable, you can easily
     connect one computer to another computer to:
 
     o   Transfer files between computers.
     o   Use one computer to run programs located on
         another computer.
     o   Access information without having to copy files
         from one computer to another using diskettes.
 
     Assume you regularly gather information in the field
     using your laptop computer to record the
     information.  When you return to the home office,
     you need to transfer the information to a database
     on your desktop computer.  Using the InterLnk
     program, you can directly add the information you
     have gathered to the database on your desktop
     computer and print out the new information without
     copying files to and from diskettes.
 
 
  UNDERSTANDING WHAT THE INTERLNK PROGRAM DOES
  ____________________________________________
 
     InterLnk is specifically designed to let you
     exchange files between any two types of computers
     (for example, laptop to desktop or desktop to
     desktop) that can be connected by cables.  InterLnk
     consists of two, separate file-transfer utility
     programs:
 
     o   INTERLNK.EXE
     o   INTERSVR.EXE
 
|    NOTE:  You can run INTERLNK on OS/2 2.1 as a client.
|           For more information, refer to "Using
|           INTERLNK on OS/2" on page 157.
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        143
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CLIENT AND SERVER RELATIONSHIP
 
     Before you begin using these two programs, INTERLNK
     and INTERSVR, you need to understand the client and
     server relationship.
 
     CLIENT         The computer you use to enter
                    commands is called the client.  After
                                           ______
                    a connection is made to the server
                    computer, the client computer
                    presumes that the server computer's
                    drives and printers are its own,
                    giving it accessibility to additional
                    information, files, and printers.
 
                    The client runs the INTERLNK.EXE
                    program.
 
     SERVER         The computer connected to the client
                    is the server, which is dedicated to
                           ______
                    serving the client.  The server
                    computer runs the file-transfer
                    program.
 
                    The server runs the INTERSVR.EXE
                    program.
 
     Using the InterLnk program, you can create a
     client/server relationship between two computers.
 
     Once a connection is made to the server computer,
     you can do the same things with the server
     computer's drives and printers that you can do with
     your own computer, the client.  If you connect a
     laptop to a desktop computer, the laptop is
     generally the client.
 
     After you connect your computers and start the
     InterLnk program, you can use a laptop or other
|    computer (as the client) to access data on both it
|    and your desktop computer.  The screen of the
     desktop computer (the server) displays the status of
     the connection.  You use the desktop computer
 
 
  144  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     keyboard only to break the connection between the
     two computers.
 
     Suppose the laptop computer has three drives:  a
     diskette drive (A) and two hard disk drives (C and
     D).  The desktop computer also has three drives:
     two diskette drives (A and B) and a hard disk
     drive (C), similar to the following:
 
            LAPTOP DRIVES              DESKTOP DRIVES
                  A                           A
                  C                           B
                  D                           C
 
     With the InterLnk program connecting the two
     computers, drives on the desktop computer (the
     server) appear as additional drives on the laptop
     computer (the client).  In addition to drives A, C,
     and D, the laptop computer now includes drives E, F,
     and G. which have been redirected from the desktop
                            __________
     computer.
 
     For example, if you typed the following command on
     the laptop computer, you see displayed a list of
     files located in the root directory of a diskette
     inserted into drive A of the desktop computer:
 
           dir e:\
 
     A list similar to the illustration is displayed on
     your computer's screen:
 
                 This Computer           Other Computer
                   (Client)                 (Server)
                   E:    equals             A:
                   F:    equals             B:
                   G:    equals             C:
 
     This list displays how the drives were redirected.
     You see "E equals A" displayed.  "E equals A" means
     that drive E of the client (laptop) is redirected to
     drive A of the server (desktop).
 
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  145
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     The server's drives A, B, and C are now presumed to
     be the client's drives E, F, and G.  If you make
     drive E your current drive on the laptop computer,
     any commands you type on the laptop are carried out
     on the drive A of the desktop computer.
 
|    Note that the InterLnk program assigns the drive
     letters, starting after the last drive letter, and
     does not fill in any missing drive letters such as
     the missing drive B, as is the case with most laptop
     computers.
 
 
| CLIENT DEVICE DRIVER (INTERLNK.EXE)
 
     INTERLNK is a single device driver performing either
     serial or parallel communication.  This program
     redirects server drives and printers, meaning that
     the drives and printers from both computers can be
     controlled from one computer keyboard.
 
     When you connect your computers and start INTERLNK
|    and INTERSVR on the server, the server displays the
     way your drives are mapped.  You can change which
     drives and printers have access by redirecting or
     remapping the server drives to the client drives.
     You can access only six drives at one time.  If the
     drive or printer you need to access is not one of
     the six currently listed, you will need to redirect
     the drives or printers so the drive or printer is
     one of the six.
 
     INTERLNK does not require any special switches or
     parameters for most configurations.  Serial and
     parallel communications support and printer support
     are installed by default.  Hardware ports and
     interrupt levels are set up automatically.  INTERLNK
     loads itself into upper memory when upper memory
     blocks are available from DOS, unless you have set
     up the RAMBoost program to optimize your upper
     memory blocks.
 
 
 
 
  146  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    For more information about INTERLNK, see your online
|    PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
     __________________________
 
 
| INTERLNK SERVER PROGRAM (INTERSVR.EXE)
 
     INTERSVR is a dedicated, full-screen program, used
     for communicating with the client computer through
     serial and parallel lines.  The server allows use of
     local drives and attached printers by the client
     computer.
 
     The server program provides an interactive user
     interface and a command line option to do the
     following:
 
     o   Exclude certain drives from the server.
 
         Refer to "Excluding Drives from Redirection" on
         page 153.
 
     o   Sequence the offering of drives.
 
         For example, if you have five drives (A through
         E, of which A and B are empty diskette drives on
|        the server computer) and the client has only
         three drives available, the normal sequencing
         would map or assign the letters A, B, and C.  To
               ___
         ignore drives A and B, you can type the
         following on the server to sequence the drives:
 
               intersvr c: d: e:
 
     While the server does not require any interaction
     after it is started, it provides the following types
     of feedback:
 
     o   Current state of drive mappings and printer
         redirection
     o   Drives that are offered
     o   Current baud rate (speed of data transmission)
     o   Drive activity
 
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  147
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   Port you are connected to (a COM port means DOS
         searches only for serial ports; an LPT port
         means DOS searches only for parallel ports)
 
     NOTE:  Network drives cannot be redirected by this
            program.
 
     For a list of the options available with INTERSVR,
|    see your online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                     __________________________
 
 
  ESTABLISHING THE CONNECTION BETWEEN COMPUTERS
  _____________________________________________
 
     The following hardware, software, and available
     memory requirements must be met before you can use
     INTERLNK:
 
     o   Two computers running DOS Version 5.02 or
         higher.  Running this version of DOS ensures
         that both the INTERLNK.EXE and INTERSVR.EXE
         files are available.
 
         If you do not have DOS Version 5.02 or higher on
         one of the computers, refer to "Remote Copying
         of INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNK.EXE Files" on
         page 153.
 
     o   An available serial or parallel port on each
         computer.  Your cable connection must be
         serial-to-serial or parallel-to-parallel; if you
         have an available serial port, the second
         computer must also have an available serial
         port.
 
         CAUTION:
         PLUGGING A PARALLEL CABLE INTO A SERIAL
         CONNECTOR OR VICE VERSA WILL DAMAGE YOUR
         COMPUTER SYSTEM.
 
     o   A type of connecting serial or parallel cable,
         such as:
 
         -   A 3-wire, serial cable
 
 
  148  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         -   A bidirectional parallel cable
 
         -   A 7-wire, null-modem, serial cable (only
             used for the remote installation)
 
             Refer to "Reviewing Cable Specifications" on
|            page 155 for specific details on how to wire
             the pin connections for serial and parallel
             cables.  The file-transfer utility programs
             support serial links using a null-modem
             cable, as well as serial and parallel links
             that use cables provided with FastLynx(**),
             LapLink(**), and Brooklyn Bridge(**)
             products.
 
 
     o   16K of free memory on the client computer and
         130K of free memory on the server computer.
 
     o   The INTERLNK.EXE device driver statement in your
         CONFIG.SYS file on the designated client
         computer.  Instructions on how to add this
         statement are given later in this chapter.
 
 
  INCLUDING INTERLNK IN YOUR CONFIG.SYS FILE
  __________________________________________
 
     On the client computer, use a text editor, such as
     the E Editor provided with DOS, and add the
     following device driver statement to your CONFIG.SYS
     file:
 
           device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe
 
     By default, you are allowed to redirect three drives
     from the server.  To redirect more than three, you
     must add the /DRIVE switch to specify a number other
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) FastLynx is a trademark of the Rupp Corporation, LapLink is a trademark
      of Traveling Software, Inc., and Brooklyn Bridge is a trademark of Fifth
      Generation Systems, Inc.
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  149
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     than three or to specify no drives at all if you
     want to redirect only printers.  For example, if you
     wanted to redirect four drives, type:
 
|          device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe /drives:4
 
     If you are using a RAM drive, place the
     DEVICE=INTERLNK.EXE statement after the
     DEVICE=RAMDRIVE.SYS line to prevent INTERLNK from
     redirecting these drives first.
 
     After you have added the device driver statement in
     your CONFIG.SYS file, restart the client computer by
     pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL.  Restarting the client
     computer loads INTERLNK.
 
 
  RUNNING THE INTERLNK PROGRAM
  ____________________________
 
     Before you start the InterLnk program, make sure you
     have physically connected your computers by
     attaching the appropriate cables to the ports,
     either serial-to-serial or parallel-to-parallel.
 
     TO START THE INTERLNK PROGRAM:
 
     1.  On the server computer, type the following at
         the DOS command prompt for a serial connection:
 
               intersvr
 
|        Or, type the following on the server computer at
         __
         the DOS command prompt for a parallel
         connection:
 
|              intersvr /lpt:1
 
|        You see a screen displaying the server drives
|        similar to the following:
 
 
 
 
 
 
  150  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
                     This Computer           Other Computer
                       (Server)                 (Client)
                     ======================================
 
                       A:              equals   D:
                       B:              equals   E:
                       C:              equals   F:
                       D:              equals   G:
                       LPT1:           equals   LPT2:
 
         If you are running Windows, you will see a
         __________________________
         task-swapping message; if you are running DOS,
                                ______________________
         you will not see this message.  Press ENTER to
         continue or press F3 to quit.
 
     2.  On the client computer, make sure you have added
         the device driver statement in your CONFIG.SYS
         file (see "Including INTERLNK in Your CONFIG.SYS
         File" on page 149).
 
         INTERLNK attempts to load this program into
         upper memory blocks if they are available; if
         they are not available, it loads into
         conventional memory.  By default, INTERLNK
         remains in memory whether or not it finds
         another computer to connect with unless you
         specify the /NOSCAN switch.
 
     3.  Verify that the InterLnk program is loaded and
         view the status of the connections by typing the
         following at the DOS command prompt of the
         client computer:
 
               interlnk
 
|    You see a screen displaying the drives that are
     connected similar to the following:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  151
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
                 This Computer           Other Computer
                   (Client)                 (Server)
                 ======================================
 
                   D:    equals             A:
                   E:    equals             B:
                   F:    equals             C:
                   G:    equals             D:
                   LPT2: equals             LPT1:
 
     You are now able to access the drives of the server
     computer as though they were located on your client
     computer.  If you need different drives than the
     ones currently accessed, redirect the drives.
 
     When you are finished, press ALT+F4 on the server.
|    The server returns to the DOS command prompt and the
     client no longer has access to the server's drives.
 
 
  REDIRECTING DRIVES
  __________________
 
     If a device was assigned when you started INTERLNK,
     you can redirect the device on the client by using
     the INTERLNK command and specifying the server drive
     you want to redirect it to.  Suppose that client
     drive D is redirected to server drive A, and the
     other drives are redirected as in the following
     example:
 
                 This Computer           Other Computer
                   (Client)                 (Server)
                 ======================================
 
                   D:    equals             A:
                   E:    equals             B:
                   F:    equals             C:
                   LPT2: equals             LPT1:
 
|    To redirect client drive D to server drive C, type
|    the following at the client workstation:
 
|          interlnk d=c
 
 
  152  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    To cancel the redirection of client drive D, do not
|    specify a server drive, as follows:
 
|          interlnk d=
 
 
  EXCLUDING DRIVES FROM REDIRECTION
  _________________________________
 
     On the server computer, if you want to exclude a
     drive from redirection and make it unavailable to
     the client system, add the /X switch followed by the
     letter of the drive you want to exclude, such as:
 
           intersvr /x:d
 
 
  BREAKING THE CONNECTION BETWEEN COMPUTERS
  _________________________________________
 
     To break the INTERLNK connection between computers
     and stop the server, press ALT+F4 on the keyboard of
     the server computer.
 
     To restart the server, type:
 
           intersvr
 
 
  REMOTE COPYING OF INTERSVR.EXE AND INTERLNK.EXE FILES
  _____________________________________________________
 
     If, for some reason, you do not have DOS Version
     5.02 or later installed on one of your computers,
     you will need to copy the INTERLNK.EXE and
     INTERSVR.EXE program files to the computer that does
     not have these files before you can run the InterLnk
|    program.  Although you need only the INTERLNK.EXE
     file for the client computer and the INTERSVR.EXE
     for the server computer, both files can reside on
     each computer.
 
     TO COPY FILES REMOTELY:
 
     1.  If the server computer is connected to the
         client computer by a 7-wire null-modem serial
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  153
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         cable, type the following at the server computer
         command prompt:
 
               intersvr /rcopy
 
         The INTERLNK Remote Installation screen is
         displayed.
 
     2.  Specify the serial port of the other computer by
         using the direction arrows until you highlight
         the COM (serial) port you will use and press
         ENTER.
 
     3.  Type on the client computer the MODE command you
         see displayed on the server computer.  For
         example, you might type something similar to:
 
               mode com1:2400,n,8,1,p
 
         which specifies a configuration for the serial
         port you have selected of 2400 baud, no parity,
         8 bits, and 1 stop bit.  The P parameter tells
         the program to keep trying to configure the port
         until a confirmation message is received that it
         has been reconfigured.
 
     4.  Press ENTER.
 
     5.  Instruct DOS to accept the input from the COM1
         port by typing:
 
               ctty com1
 
         The program is uploaded and sends a program
         which then receives the INTERSVR.EXE and the
         INTERLNK.EXE files automatically.
 
     Also, you can copy the INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNK.EXE
     files to a diskette and then copy the files to the
     other computer, placing the files in the \DOS
     directory.
 
 
 
 
  154  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  REVIEWING CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
  ______________________________
 
     The file-transfer utility programs support serial
     links using a null-modem cable, such as LapLink or
     FastLynx cable.  These programs interact directly
     with the serial port hardware instead of the
|    computer's BIOS to make the connection.  In most
|    cases, for these programs the connecting cable is a
     serial cable.  However, if the parallel ports on
     both systems are bidirectional, you will be able to
     use a parallel cable.  You can create your own
     serial or parallel cable using the wiring tables
     below.
 
     If you want to use a serial port to transfer your
     data, then you must use the null-modem cable.
     Connect the null-modem cable to the serial port on
     your computer.
 
     To use the file-transfer utility programs, you need
     the following:
 
     o   Two computers with DOS 5.02 or higher installed
         on each computer.
 
         If you do not have DOS Version 5.02 or higher on
         one of the computers, refer to "Remote Copying
         of INTERSVR.EXE and INTERLNK.EXE Files" on
         page 153.
 
     o   A null-modem cable to connect to the serial
         ports of your computers or a parallel cable to
         connect to the parallel ports of your computers.
 
 
  SERIAL CABLE
 
     There are two kinds of physical RS-232 ports used by
     DOS--9 pin (DB9) and 25-pin(DB25).  Use the
     following table to wire the pin connections for a
     serial cable.
 
 
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  155
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | 9 PIN | 25 PIN |        | 25    | 9 PIN  |       |
     |       |        |        | PIN   |        |       |
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | pin 5 | pin 7  | <------|-pin 7 | pin 5  | Ground|Ground
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | pin 3 | pin 2  | <------|-pin 3 | pin 2  | Transm|t-Receive
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | pin 7 | pin 4  | <------|-pin 5 | pin 8  | RTS-CT|
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | pin 6 | pin 6  | <------|-pin   | pin 4  | DSR-DT|
     |       |        |        | 20    |        |       |
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | pin 2 | pin 3  | <------|-pin 2 | pin 3  | Receiv|-Transmit
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | pin 8 | pin 5  | <------|-pin 4 | pin 7  | CTS-RT|
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
     | pin 4 | pin 20 | <------|-pin 6 | pin 6  | DTR-DS|
     +-------+--------+--------+-------+--------+-------+
 
     NOTE:  The ground wire is connected to the same pin
            on both ends.  The last three wires are the
            reverse of the prior three.
 
 
  PARALLEL CABLE
 
     Use the following table to wire the pin connections
     for a parallel cable.
 
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | 25 PIN         |                | 25 PIN         |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 2          | <-------->     | pin 15         |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 3          | <-------->     | pin 13         |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 4          | <-------->     | pin 12         |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 5          | <-------->     | pin 10         |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 6          | <-------->     | pin 11         |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
 
 
  156  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 15         | <-------->     | pin 2          |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 13         | <-------->     | pin 3          |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 12         | <-------->     | pin 4          |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 10         | <-------->     | pin 5          |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 11         | <-------->     | pin 6          |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | pin 25         | <-------->     | pin 25         |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
 
     NOTE:  Pin 25 to pin 25 is the ground-to-ground
            connection for this cable-wiring table.
 
 
| USING INTERLNK ON OS/2
 
|    INTERLNK can be run only on OS/2 as a client.
 
|    TO SET UP THE INTERLNK ENVIRONMENT ON OS/2 2.1:
 
|    1.  Insert a blank diskette into drive A of the
|        computer running DOS.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type the following
|        command to format the diskette:
 
|              format  a: /s
 
|    3.  Use a text editor to create a CONFIG.SYS file on
|        the diskette in drive A.  The CONFIG.SYS file on
|        the diskette should contain the following lines:
 
|              DEVICE=FSFILTER.SYS
|              DEVICE=INTERLNK.EXE
 
|        You may need to include additional parameters
|        with INTERLNK.EXE.  See the online PC DOS 7
                                            ________
|        Command Reference for more information.
         _________________
 
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  157
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Copy the INTERLNK.EXE file from your DOS
|        subdirectory to the same diskette already
|        inserted into drive A.
 
|    5.  Take the diskette from the computer running DOS,
|        and insert it into drive A of the computer
|        running OS/2 2.1.
 
|    6.  Copy the FSFILTER.SYS file from the \OS2\MDOS
|        subdirectory of your boot drive (generally drive
|        C:) to the diskette in drive A.
 
|    7.  At the OS/2 command prompt, type the following
|        command to create a DOS image file:
 
|              vmdisk a: c:\pcdos.img
 
|        The name of the file must have the extension IMG
|        (such as the example PCDOS.IMG).  The PCDOS.IMG
|        file can be located on any drive.
 
|    The following scenario is a representation only.
|    Your desktop may not be set up exactly as is
|    described here.  However, you can use the steps
|    presented as a guide to what needs to be done to
|    create a PC DOS icon by copying another icon and
|    linking it to a DOS sessions program.
 
|    TO CREATE A PC DOS IMAGE FILE:
 
|    1.  From your OS/2 desktop, double-click on the OS/2
|        System icon.
 
|    2.  Double-click on the Command Prompts icon.
 
|    3.  Use mouse button 2 (right mouse button) and
|        click on the DOS Window icon.
 
|    4.  Click on Copy.
 
|    5.  On the notebook page, enter the name you want
|        for the icon's new name (for example, PC DOS).
 
 
 
  158  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    6.  Click on Copy.
 
|    7.  Click on OK to create the icon.
 
|    8.  On the OS/2 desktop, click on the new PC DOS
|        icon you just created.
 
|    9.  Click on the arrow to the right of Open.
 
|    10. Click on Settings.
 
|    11. While on the notebook page, click on the Session
|        tab.
 
|    12. Click on the DOS Settings push button.
 
|    13. While in the notebook page for Settings: click
|        on "COM_DIRECT_ACCESS" and then select the value
|        "On".
 
|    14. Then click on "DOS_START_UP_DRIVE", enter an
|        image name and path in the Value field.  and
|        then click on the Save button.
 
|        NOTE:  Enter the same path where you placed the
|               PCDOS.IMG file earlier in this procedure.
 
|    15. Close the Settings notebook page by
|        double-clicking on the title bar icon in the
|        top-left corner.
 
|    16. Close all windows that are still open on the
|        OS/2 desktop.
 
|    17. Go to the computer running PC DOS and start the
|        server by typing the following at the DOS
|        command prompt:
 
|              intersvr
 
|    18. Double-click on the PC DOS icon to get your DOS
|        session.
 
 
 
                                          Chapter 5.  Connecting Computers  159
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    The server and the client are now connected.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  160  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHAPTER 6.  MAKING MORE MEMORY AVAILABLE
  ________________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    RAMBoost is the memory management tool provided with
|    PC DOS.  Its purpose is to determine the optimal
|    memory location for every device driver,
|    terminate-and-stay resident (TSR) program, and other
|    programs you have designated for your system.  It
|    performs this process by analyzing your computer's
|    existing configuration and automatically
|    reconfiguring programs to load above 640K after
|    restarting your system.  When RAMBoost is through
|    processing, you should have the maximum compatible
|    amount of contiguous free memory available for your
|    DOS and Windows applications.
 
|    If you are having trouble running your programs
|    because there is not enough memory, you might need
|    to run RAMBoost.  For most users, this simply means
|    typing "ramsetup" at the DOS command prompt and
|    following the directions given through the online
|    RAMBoost program.  When you have provided the
|    information RAMBoost needs to run, it takes care of
|    everything else during its processing.
 
|    Of course, the more you understand about your system
|    and memory, the more you will appreciate all that
|    RAMBoost can do for you.  For a detailed discussion
|    about memory and additional RAMBoost tips and
|    techniques, see "Learning RAMBoost Tips and
|    Techniques" on page 180.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        161
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| DETERMINING YOUR SYSTEM'S MEMORY TYPE
  _____________________________________
 
|    Before running RAMBoost, you should determine what
|    type of memory your system has and which programs
|    are currently loaded into memory.  Use the MEM
|    command with the /C switch or use the QCONFIG
|    command.  For example, if you used the MEM command,
|    you might type the following at the DOS command
|    prompt:
 
           mem /c /p
 
     The /C switch provides you with a list of programs
     and classifies their memory into types of memory,
     such as conventional or upper memory.  It is the
     upper memory blocks that are used by RAMBoost to
     free conventional DOS memory.  The /P switch pauses
     the information at the end of each screen of
     information.
 
     If you want to use the QCONFIG command, a more
     complete description of the QCONFIG command can be
     found in "Analysis of Your Computer's Memory" on
     page 183.
 
 
  UNDERSTANDING HOW RAMBOOST WORKS
  ________________________________
 
     RAMBoost manages the area of memory of your computer
     from 640K to 1024K, called upper memory blocks
     (UMBs).  RAMBoost runs invisibly on your computer,
     optimizing available memory automatically each time
     your computer's system configuration changes.  If
     you add or remove programs from your CONFIG.SYS or
     AUTOEXEC.BAT files, RAMBoost automatically detects
|    the change.  When the system is rebooted, RAMBoost
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  162  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    automatically reoptimizes and rearranges the
|    remaining drivers in upper memory.
 
|    RAMBoost works in conjunction with a memory manager.
|    A memory manager (such as EMM386, Quarterdeck
|    QEMM(**), and Qualitas 386MAX(**)) makes the open
|    areas in your upper memory blocks available for
|    loading memory-resident programs and device drivers
|    (referred to as "loading high").  Loading programs
|    high makes more DOS conventional memory available
|    for your applications.  The amount of upper memory
|    RAMBoost makes available is determined by the
|    expanded memory specification (EMS) manager used
|    with it.
 
     Because the open space in upper memory is usually in
     several pieces of different sizes, programs can fit
     in some areas but not in others.  RAMBoost arranges
     your memory-resident programs, device drivers, and
     other DOS resources such as those specified in the
     CONFIG.SYS file (for example, FILES and BUFFERS)
     into upper memory.  This increases the amount of
     memory available for DOS to run applications.
|    RAMBoost does this by creating a profile of your
|    memory usage and by automatically arranging the
|    programs in your upper memory blocks.  This provides
|    the maximum compatible amount of free conventional
|    memory.  See "Learning RAMBoost Tips and Techniques"
|    on page 180 for more information about memory types.
 
|    You configure RAMBoost once.  Then, each time you
|    start your computer, RAMBoost analyzes your
|    computer's resident programs and device drivers,
|    selects the optimal loading configuration, and loads
|    them into upper memory blocks.
 
|    IMPORTANT:
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Quarterdeck QEMM is a trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems.
 
  (**) Qualitas 386MAX is a trademark of Qualitas, Inc.
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  163
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    RAMSETUP must be run for each configuration that you
|    want to optimize in a multiple configuration setup.
|    This way, an .INI profile file is generated for each
|    separate configuration.
 
|    Your system needs to be rebooted twice for each
|    configuration.  The first time RAMBoost locks in the
|    configuration in the Learn mode; and the second
|    time, it makes it active.  See page 170 for more
|    information.
 
     If you are familiar with memory-management
     techniques, you can customize RAMBoost's performance
|    by manually editing the settings in the profile .INI
|    files.  The two primary .INI files are RAMSETUP.INI
|    and RAMBOOST.INI.  Additional .INI files are
|    generated when RAMBoost detects multiple
|    configurations.  For more information about the .INI
|    files associated with RAMBoost, see the online PC
                                                    __
|    DOS 7 Command Reference.
     _______________________
 
 
  RAMBOOST SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
 
|    The following items are required to use RAMBoost
|    Setup (run RAMSETUP).  RAMBoost Setup is flexible in
|    that it works with many memory managers.
 
|    o   A minimum of 512KB available extended memory.
 
|    o   A 80386SX-based or higher processor.
 
     o   For upper memory block support, at least 640K
         and an EEMS/EMS 4.0 memory manager are required.
         Use one of the following EEMS/EMS 4.0 memory
         managers:
 
         -   HIMEM.SYS and EMM386.EXE provided with DOS
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager-386 is a trademark of Quarterdeck
      Office Systems
 
 
  164  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         -   Quarterdeck Expanded Memory Manager-386(**)
         -   Qualitas BlueMAX(**) and 386MAX
         -   Helix(**) Netroom(**)
 
         Refer to "Compatibility with Memory Managers and
         Other Programs" on page 189 for compatibility
         information.
 
 
| CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS.
 
     You use the RAMSETUP.EXE program to configure
     RAMBoost.  When loaded, RAMBoost automatically
     checks for the existence of memory managers, such as
     HIMEM.SYS and EMM386.EXE, on your system.  Then, it
     scans upper memory to configure itself with the
     optimal parameters for managing upper memory.
 
     You need to take the following into consideration
     before you configure RAMBoost:
 
|    o   Ensure that you load all the software you
|        normally run in your daily routines that
|        activate your adapter cards (for example, a
|        sound blaster card).  RAMBoost Setup scans the
         upper memory area looking for unused adapter
         memory.  If you do not have your adapter
         activated, RAMBoost Setup might incorrectly use
         the adapter memory space.
 
     o   If you are using QEMM386, 386MAX, or Netroom,
         you must install it according to its
         installation instructions before you activate
         RAMBoost.  You must also make sure it provides
         upper memory blocks (UMBs).
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) BlueMAX is a trademark of Qualitas, Inc.
 
  (**) Helix and Netroom are trademarks of Helix Software Company
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  165
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   When installing RAMBOOST in a multiple
|        configuration environment, it is necessary to
|        configure each MENUITEM prior to allowing
|        RAMBOOST to run an optimization process.
 
|        1.  Boot your system and load the first MENUITEM
|            to be optimized.
 
|        2.  Start the RAMSETUP program and configure the
|            first MENUITEM.  When configured, allow
|            RAMSETUP to reboot your system.
 
|            Do not load the same MENUITEM.  Loading the
|            same MENUITEM forces a premature Learn
|            process that would need to be re-optimized
|            later.
 
|        3.  Load the next MENUITEM to be configured for
|            RAMBOOST optimization.
 
|        4.  Start RAMSETUP, configure the MENUITEM, and
|            then allow RAMSETUP to reboot your system.
 
|        5.  Continue this procedure with each MENUITEM
|            of your multiple configuration.
 
|        When you have configured each MENUITEM (as
|        needed), reboot your system.  As each MENUITEM
|        is loaded, RAMBOOST is ready to perform as
|        intended.  It will learn and optimize each
|        MENUITEM as it is loaded without the extra Learn
|        modes.
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | Information on using RAMBoost with PCMCIA is     |
|    | TBD.                                             |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
     TO CONFIGURE RAMBOOST:
 
     STEP 1
 
 
  166  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     1.  From the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               ramsetup
 
         and then press ENTER.
 
|        RAMBoost Setup reads the RAMSETUP.INI and
|        RAMBOOST.INI profile and configuration files and
|        displays a window.  Which window is displayed
|        depends on whether EMM386 is installed in
|        memory.
 
|        NO EMM386 OR EQUIVALENT STATEMENT INSTALLED
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
|        EMM386 STATEMENT OR EQUIVALENT INSTALLED
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  167
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         Any of the following scenarios are possible,
         depending on what programs exist in your
         CONFIG.SYS file when RAMBoost Setup is run:
 
|        SCENARIO 1
 
|        o   If RAMBoost Setup detects that you have no
|            memory manager installed but finds the DOS
|            memory manager on your computer, select OK
|            on the window that is displayed.  RAMBoost,
|            EMM386, and HIMEM (if it was not present)
|            are installed into your CONFIG.SYS file.
 
|        SCENARIO 2
 
|        o   If RAMBoost Setup detects that you have
|            installed a memory manager other than the
|            one in DOS, select OK on the window that is
|            displayed.  RAMBoost is installed into your
|            CONFIG.SYS file.
 
|        SCENARIO 3
 
|        o   If RAMBoost Setup detects that you have an
|            EMM386 statement in your CONFIG.SYS file,
 
 
  168  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|            you have the option of letting RAMBoost
|            comment out (places the REM command in front
|            of the statement) the statement and install
|            a new EMM386 statement that optimizes your
|            system.  Select OK.  Your system is rebooted
|            and RAMSETUP is restarted automatically.
 
|            You can select and use the Advanced button
|            to make changes to your memory situation.
|            After making your changes, you must select
|            "Keep" and then select "Reboot".
 
|            NOTE:  Use Advanced only if you are very
|                   familiar with upper memory concepts
|                   and management.
 
|            A second possibility exists for this
|            scenario.  You could get a message screen
|            that reads:
 
|                  RAMSETUP will not install because there is only xxx amount
                                                                   ___
|                  of memory available.
 
|            When this occurs, you have the following
|            options:
 
|            -   Select "OK" to let RAMBoost Setup
|                uninstall your current EMM386 and
|                install an EMM386 statement that
|                optimizes your system.
 
|            -   Select "Advanced" so that you can
|                manually allocate the stated xxx amount
                                              ___
|                of upper memory needed.  After making
|                the change, select "Keep" and then
|                select "Reboot".
 
|        SCENARIO 4
 
|        o   If RAMBoost Setup cannot find a memory
|            manager on your computer, it informs you
|            that you must install one.
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  169
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        SCENARIO 5
 
|        o   If you use multiple configurations and you
|            want to dictate how RAMBoost Setup is to
|            handle your configurations, RAMBoost Setup
|            detects the multiple configurations and
|            displays a window.  When you select
|            "Reorganize", RAMBoost Setup rearranges the
|            commands in your common section as well as
|            includes any statements it determines are
|            needed for optimal compatibility with each
|            configuration.
 
|            You can change or limit what RAMBoost will
|            do to each configuration by making changes
|            in the appropriate .INI file.  For more
|            information, see the online PC DOS 7 Command
                                         ________________
|            Reference.
             _________
 
|            If you select "Reorganize", the old
|            CONFIG.SYS is saved as CONFIG.SAV.
 
|        After RAMBoost Setup installs RAMBoost in your
|        CONFIG.SYS file, a window is displayed that
|        allows you to reboot (restart) your computer or
                       ______
|        exit.
 
|        If you select "Exit", RAMBoost will be activated
|        the next time you start your computer.  Be
|        careful not to change your CONFIG.SYS or
|        AUTOEXEC.BAT in the meantime.
 
|    STEP 2
 
|    2.  Select "Reboot" to activate RAMBoost.
 
         RAMBoost restarts your computer twice before
         RAMBoost is activated.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  170  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     THE FIRST REBOOT:
|    RAMBoost Setup loads all your memory-resident
|    programs as usual and keeps a record of how much
|    memory is used and how the programs are placed in
|    memory.
 
     After restarting your computer, you see the
     following:
 
           RAMBOOST will automatically load in 3 seconds.  Choose:
 
           'Y' to continue.
           'N' to prevent RAMBOOST from loading.
 
           Load RAMBOOST  [Y/N] ?
 
           RAMBOOST is loaded in LEARN mode.
 
     THE SECOND REBOOT:
|    RAMBoost actually arranges the programs to fill your
|    upper memory as much as possible.  You should then
     find a noticeable increase in conventional memory
     available for running applications.  You now see
     displayed on the last line:
 
           RAMBOOST is loaded in ACTIVE mode.
 
|    This message is followed immediately by the display
     of the DOS command prompt signifying that RAMBoost
     is loaded.
 
|    After this, each time you start your computer,
|    RAMBoost is loaded.  Whenever you restart your
     computer, if RAMBoost determines that one of the
     system files it tracks has been altered (such as
     your AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS files) or some other
     special condition has changed, RAMBoost
     automatically enters LEARN mode to optimize your
     computer's new configuration.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  171
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  LEARN MODE
 
     During Learn mode, RAMBoost is working to determine
     the optimal location for every object loaded since
     (and including) the loading of RAMBoost.  This can
     be a long process.  A feature of RAMBoost is a
     progress bar that shows the current status of Learn.
 
     The progress bar indicates the actual percentage of
     the possible combinations that have been looked at.
 
|    RAMBoost defaults to a default timer type of
|    "elapsed", meaning you get only the progress bar and
|    a message indicating how much time has elapsed.
|    However, you can change the timer type in the
|    RAMSETUP.INI file to "eta".  See the online PC DOS 7
                                                 ________
|    Command Reference for more information.
     _________________
 
|    When the timer type is set to "eta", the time
|    display provides an estimate of how much longer the
|    processing will take.  This estimate is based on how
|    long it has taken to process the current fraction of
|    the job.
 
 
  ANALYZING YOUR COMPUTER'S MEMORY AFTER RUNNING RAMBOOST
 
     After RAMBoost is loaded, you might want to do the
     following to verify that you do have more
     conventional memory available:
 
|    o   View your CONFIG.SYS file.  Lines similar to the
         following are placed in this file if you
         successfully loaded RAMBoost:
 
               device=c:\dos\emm386.exe noems ram x=a000-b0ff i=b100-b7ff x=b800-bfff ...
               device=c:\dos\ramboost.exe load
 
         The "i=" and "x=" are INCLUDE and EXCLUDE
         statements.  The "..." means that, although more
         of these statements are normally included in
         this DEVICE statement, they are all not listed
         for this example.
 
 
  172  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   Save the output by typing:
 
               mem /c > filename.ext
                        ____________
 
         where filename.ext is the name of the output
               ____________
         file (for example, SAVE2.OUT).  The MEM command
         is preferred in this case rather than QCONFIG,
         because it gives more details about your
         programs' upper memory.
 
         You should see information similar to the
         following:
 
|          Modules using memory below 1Mb:
 
|            Name           Total       =   Conventional   +   Upper Memory
|            --------  ----------------   ----------------   ----------------
|            IBMDOS       11088   (11K)      11088   (11K)          0    (0K)
|            SMARTDRV     31024   (30K)       2448    (2K)      28576   (28K)
|            HIMEM          768    (1K)        768    (1K)          0    (0K)
|            EMM386        3392    (3K)       3392    (3K)          0    (0K)
|            RAMBOOST     10688   (10K)        320    (OK)      10368   (10K)
|            ANSI          3648    (4K)         48    (0K)       3600    (4K)
|            DPMS          1552    (2K)       1552    (2K)          0    (0K)
|            STACHIGH     16169   (16K)         48    (0K)      16112   (16K)
|            COMMAND       2656    (3K)        272    (0K)       2384    (2K)
|            DOSKEY        1152    (1K)          0    (0K)       1152    (1K)
|            IBMAVSH       5424    (5K)          0    (0K)       5424    (5K)
|            MOUSE        17280   (17K)          0    (0K)      17280   (17K)
|            FREE        702816  (686K)     635408  (621K)      67400   (66K)
 
 
|    o   Print the output from the MEM command after you
|        have run RAMSETUP.
 
|    o   Compare the two printed outputs (before and
|        after running) if you printed or saved the
|        output from the MEM command before running
|        RAMSETUP.
 
|    For the majority of individuals, running RAMBoost
|    should give you more conventional memory than you
|    had prior to running it.  If it does not, you might
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  173
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    have to manually manipulate the upper memory blocks
|    or run RAMBOOST OPTIMIZE 1.  See the online PC DOS 7
                                                 ________
|    Command Reference for information about editing your
     _________________
|    RAMBOOST.INI file.
 
 
| REVIEWING WHAT RAMBOOST CHANGES
 
|    RAMBoost Setup modifies your CONFIG.SYS file.  Some
     of the following changes might be noted:
 
     o   A RAMBOOST.EXE statement is placed in your
         CONFIG.SYS file.
 
|    o   An EMM386 statement is created if you choose to
|        have RAMBoost Setup comment out (using the REM
|        command) any previous EMM386 statement.  Or, a
|        new EMM386 statement is created if one was not
|        already present.
 
|    o   The DEVICEHIGH statements have become DEVICE
|        statements, because RAMBoost now controls your
|        upper memory blocks.
 
|    o   For multiple configurations and single
|        configurations, the following changes are made:
 
|        -   The AUTOEXEC.BAT file is backed up to a file
|            named AUTOEXEC.CPS.
 
|        -   The CONFIG.SYS file is backed up to a file
|            named CONFIG.CPS.
 
|        -   For multiple configurations only, an .INI
|            file is created for each possible
|            configuration in which RAMSETUP was run,
|            matching the name of the CONFIG variable
|            currently active.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  174  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  USING ADVANCED FEATURES
  _______________________
 
     Use these advanced features only if you are very
     ________________________________________________
     familiar with upper memory concepts and management.
     ___________________________________________________
 
     RAMBoost runs by itself with minimal user
     interaction.  It is possible, however, to customize
     the way RAMBoost uses the upper memory blocks of
     your computer.
 
     There are two ways you can work with advanced
     RAMBoost features:
 
     o   Using the Upper Memory Usage Editor
|    o   Editing the appropriate .INI file
 
 
  THE UPPER MEMORY USAGE EDITOR
 
|    The Upper Memory Usage Editor is an advanced feature
|    of the RAMBoost memory manager.  The Upper Memory
|    Usage Editor allows you to:
 
     o   View your current upper memory usage
     o   Make changes to your upper memory usage
 
|    You can use the Upper Memory Usage Editor to reserve
|    upper memory blocks for devices that might not
|    identify their upper memory usage during RAMBoost's
|    setup and installation.  These devices can be
     network or special video boards.  You can also use
     the editor to make more upper memory blocks
     available.  For example, if you know of an available
     region of upper memory blocks that appears
     unavailable, you can use the editor to change the
     status of the blocks from allocated to available.
 
     TO START THE UPPER MEMORY USAGE EDITOR:
 
     1.  From the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               ramsetup
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  175
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  Then press ENTER.
 
         If RAMBoost Setup detects that you have the DOS
         memory manager installed, RAMBoost Setup
         provides you with an Advanced option button.
 
     3.  Select "Advanced".
 
         The following table shows status symbols for
         each block:
 
         +---------------+------------------------------+
         |  THIS SYMBOL  | INDICATES                    |
         +---------------+------------------------------+
         |      - -      | An available memory block.   |
         +---------------+------------------------------+
         |      . .      | An occupied memory block.    |
         +---------------+------------------------------+
         |       RO      | A block allocated for ROM.   |
         +---------------+------------------------------+
         |       VI      | A block allocated for video  |
         |               | RAM.                         |
         +---------------+------------------------------+
         |       EM      | A block allocated for the    |
         |               | EMS frame.                   |
         +---------------+------------------------------+
         |       AD      | A block allocated for        |
         |               | adapter RAM.                 |
         +---------------+------------------------------+
 
     TO CHANGE THE CURRENT MEMORY USAGE OF A BLOCK:
 
     1.  Select the block you want to change, using the
         mouse or pressing the TAB key to activate the
         editor and then using the arrow keys.
 
     2.  Select the function key that corresponds to the
         type of memory specification you want to apply.
 
         Refer to "Function Keys" on page 177 for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
  176  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     3.  Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have modified
         upper memory to your satisfaction.
 
|    4.  Select OK to save the changes.
 
     FUNCTION KEYS:  The following table shows the
     function keys you can use in the Upper Memory Usage
     Editor.
 
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | FUNCTION | DESCRIPTION                           |
     | KEY      |                                       |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F1 HELP  | Provides online help.                 |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F2 AVAIL | Makes the selected memory blocks      |
     |          | available for another use.            |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F3 EXIT  | Exits from the program.               |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F4 ROM   | Changes selected memory-block usage   |
     |          | to ROM.                               |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F5 VIDEO | Changes selected memory-block usage   |
     |          | to video RAM.                         |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F6 EMS   | Changes selected memory-block usage   |
     |          | to EMS frame.                         |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F7 ADAPT | Changes selected memory-block usage   |
     |          | to RAM adapters.                      |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | F8 DEC   | Switches between the display of       |
     |          | memory-block addresses in decimal and |
     |          | hexadecimal characters.               |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  177
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  USING THE OPTIONS EDITOR
 
     This dialog box lets you set the number of XMS
     (extended memory specification) handles, DMA support
     and the size of your DMA (direct memory access)
     buffer.  The default values are correct for most
     PCs.  You can also enable or disable EMS (expanded
     memory specification) memory and specify whether
     your computer is equipped with a Weitek coprocessor.
 
     These options correspond to command-line options for
     the DOS memory manager, EMM386.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  178  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | OPTION   | DESCRIPTION                           |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | XMS      | Specifies the number of extended      |
     | Handles  | memory handles EMM386 can use, from 2 |
     |          | to 255.  If you use many programs     |
     |          | simultaneously that use extended      |
     |          | memory, you may need to increase this |
     |          | number.                               |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | DMA      | Specifies how many kilobytes of       |
     | Buffer   | memory to reserve for Direct Memory   |
     |          | Access (DMA).  This should be the     |
     |          | largest DMA transfer that occurs      |
     |          | while EMM386 is active, and it can be |
     |          | from 16 to 256.  The default value is |
     |          | optimized to work on most PCs.        |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | Enable   | Enables EMM386 to access expanded     |
|    | EMS      | memory by designating a memory area   |
|    |          | for page swapping, which is required  |
|    |          | for expanded memory orientation.  You |
|    |          | can enable EMS if a program you use   |
|    |          | requires it.  If you do not need it,  |
|    |          | you will have more available upper    |
|    |          | memory if you leave it disabled.      |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
     | Weitek   | Enables support for the Weitek        |
     |          | coprocessor.  If your computer uses   |
     |          | this coprocessor, enable this         |
     |          | feature.                              |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
 
     TO USE THE OPTIONS EDITOR:
 
     1.  Select "Options" from the Upper Memory Usage
         Editor menu.
 
     2.  Make any necessary adjustments and select OK to
         save your settings.
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  179
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  THE RAMBOOST CONFIGURATION FILE
 
|    The RAMBoost configuration file is an editable ASCII
|    text file.  It contains all the necessary parameters
|    for RAMBoost to manage your system.  The profile is
|    named RAMBOOST.INI.  When RAMBoost needs to consult
|    or edit this profile, it searches for it in the
|    \DATA subdirectory below the directory from where
|    RAMBOOST.EXE resides.
 
|    If you have multiple configurations, a profile .INI
|    file exists for each possible CONFIG variable that
|    CONFIG.SYS might generate.  To change the parameters
|    for a particular configuration, make your change in
|    the applicable .INI file.
 
     The RAMBOOST.INI file has eight sections.  Each
     section begins with a section header and contains
     specific assignments relevant to the operation of
     RAMBoost.  The sections are:
 
     o   System                  o   Learn
     o   PIF.Advice              o   Learn.PIF
     o   Completion Triggers     o   Learn.UMB
     o   Text                    o   PIF
 
|    For more information about customizing .INI files,
|    see the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                    __________________________
 
 
| LEARNING RAMBOOST TIPS AND TECHNIQUES
  _____________________________________
 
|    To appreciate how RAMBoost works and perhaps answer
|    some of the questions associated with this program,
|    the following topics are discussed:
 
|    o   Memory types
|    o   Using the QCONFIG command to help analyze your
|        system
|    o   What to do when something goes wrong
|    o   How to handle Learn loops
|    o   Considerations for disk caches
|    o   Resolving problems
 
 
  180  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Additional tips and techniques as well as an
|    explanation of how to edit your RAMBOOST.INI file
|    are provided in your online PC DOS 7 Command
                                 ________________
|    Reference.
     _________
 
 
  COMPARISON OF MEMORY TYPES
 
     The five most common types of memory are described
     as follows:
 
     o   CONVENTIONAL DOS MEMORY
         _______________________
 
         The 80286-based or higher processors, which
         power personal computers and run the DOS
         operating system, have a 1024K (1 megabyte)
         address space when operating in real mode.  Real
                                                     ____
         mode means these processors are running as fast
         ____
         8086-based computers.  The lower 640K of this
         memory is designated as system memory and is
         called conventional DOS memory (also known as
                _______________________
         base memory).  This is the memory that DOS uses
         ___________
         to process programs.
 
     o   RESERVED MEMORY AREA OR UPPER MEMORY BLOCK (UMB)
         ________________________________________________
 
         The upper 384K in the 1MB address space is known
         as the Upper Memory Block and is used by video
                __________________
         adapters, network hardware, ROM BIOS, and other
         memory-mapped hardware.  This space, however, is
         never completely filled.  Memory is mapped into
         this region between 640K and 1MB through the
         means of an upper memory manager (known as a
         platform).  It is used for loading TSRs, DOS
         ________
         tables, and network software to free as much
         conventional DOS memory as possible.  It is
         these upper memory blocks that are used by
         RAMBoost to free conventional DOS memory.
 
     o   HIGH MEMORY AREA (HMA)
         ______________________
 
         The high memory area is the first 64K minus 16
         bytes of extended memory located just above 1MB.
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  181
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
     o   EXTENDED MEMORY (XMS)
         _____________________
 
         Extended memory is addressed above 1024K and
         cannot be accessed when the processor is in real
         mode.  Therefore, it cannot be used by standard
         programs running under DOS.  On 80286-based and
         80386-based or higher machines, some programs
         (mostly RAM disks and disk-caching programs)
         switch the processor to protected mode and
         access this space.  Protected mode is a special
                             ______________
         mode of operation that 80286-based or higher
         computers have to be in to access extended
         memory.  Extended memory can never be used on
         8088-based and 8086-based machines, because
         these processors do not support protected mode
         or memory above 1MB.
 
 
  182  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         The Extended Memory Specification (XMS) method
         allows DOS programs to make use of the
         additional extended memory found in 80286-based,
         80386-based, and 80486-based or higher machines
         in a consistent, machine-independent fashion.
         XMS/HMA can add almost 64K of memory that some
         DOS programs can access directly for storing a
         portion of its code segment; or, as XMS/EMA, it
         can provide DOS-extender programs (such as
         Windows 3.0 or later) with a standard and
         consistent method for storing data (or inactive
         code) in extended memory.
 
     o   EXPANDED MEMORY (EMS)
         _____________________
 
         Expanded memory uses a 64K window (of
         bank-switched memory), typically in the address
         space between 640K and 1024K.  Application
         programs must be written specifically to switch
         blocks of memory in and out of this window.  The
|        program itself uses conventional memory and
|        accesses this expanded memory only to store
|        data.
 
 
  ANALYSIS OF YOUR COMPUTER'S MEMORY
 
|    To find out what kind of memory your system has, how
|    much you have available for your programs, or where
|    your adapters are located use the QCONFIG command.
|    QCONFIG is a utility used to query information about
     your computer system.
 
     The QCONFIG program is machine independent and can
     be run on any processor from a 8088-based to a
     80486-based processor.
 
     TO QUERY INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM:
 
     1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               qconfig
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  183
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         You can use the /P switch (type "qconfig /p") or
         the MORE command (type "qconfig | more") to view
         the information one display screen at a time.
         QCONFIG examines your system and displays an
         analysis on the screen similar to the following:
 
           .
           .
           .
           Fixed Disk 1    :   379 MB  =   388096 KB  =  397419304 bytes
           Logical Drive C :  Size  15312K =   14.9M    Avail  3920K =   3.8M
                           :  Total Units  3828  Avail Units  980 Total Sectors 30624
                           :  Sectors/Unit  8  Bytes/Sector 512
                           :  Local Drive - File System is FAT
           .
           .
           .
           Total Memory    :  16000 KB  = 15.6 MB
           Conventional    :    640 KB   Free:   611 KB
           Extended Memory :  15360 KB   Free:     0 KB
           Expanded Memory :   2416 KB   Free:  2048 KB   Page Frame Address:  C000
           XMS Memory      :   1984 KB   Free:  1984 KB
           EMS Version     : 4.0
           XMS Version     : 2.0
           .
           .
           .
 
     2.  Redirect the information displayed to an output
         file by typing:
 
         "qconfig /o"
              This option directs output of the
              information displayed on the screen to a
              file named QCONFIG.DAT
 
         or
         __
 
         "qconfig /o"filename.ext
                     ____________
              This option directs output of the
              information displayed on the screen to a
              text file (filename.ext) where you give the
                         ____________
              file a name of your own choice.  Do not put
 
 
  184  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
              a space between the "o" and the
              filename.ext.
              ____________
 
     3.  Print the information so you can have it
         available if you need to contact a service
         representative or need to use it to compare
         subsequent memory information data.
 
|    For more information about the QCONFIG command, see
|    the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                __________________________
 
 
| WHAT TO DO WHEN SOMETHING GOES WRONG
 
|    If a program does not execute correctly after
|    running RAMBoost, or worse, it hangs your system,
|    reboot you computer and cancel RAMBoost by typing
|    "n" at the "Load RAMBOOST" prompt.  Generally, the
|    problem is a program that RAMBoost moved out of
|    conventional memory that should not have been moved.
 
|    TO CORRECT THE PROBLEM OF PROGRAMS BEING
|    ACCIDENTALLY MOVED OUT OF CONVENTIONAL MEMORY:
 
|    1.  Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
 
|              ramboost pif
 
|        and press ENTER.  A report is generated that
|        identifies the programs that RAMBoost moved into
|        high memory.
 
|    2.  Print out the report or note which programs were
|        loaded high.
 
|    3.  Edit your RAMBOOST.INI file to lock your
|        programs low.  Do this one program at a time and
|        reboot after each edit.  To force RAMBoost to
|        load a program in low conventional memory, an
|        edit is made to the (PIF.ADVICE) section of the
|        RAMBOOST.INI file or, in the case of multiple
|        configurations, the .INI file that matches the
|        CONFIG variable.
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  185
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  When your system no longer hangs, edit the
|        RAMBOOST.INI file.  Remove the programs you
|        locked low that did not correct the problem so
|        that they will be loaded high.  Do this one
|        program at a time and reboot after each edit.
 
|        NOTE:  There are times when a combination of
|               programs loading high may be the cause of
|               your problem.  This is why you reverse
|               the status of a program from locked low
|               to being loaded high by RAMBoost one
|               program at a time.
 
 
| HANDLING LEARN LOOPS
 
|    There may be occasions when RAMBoost continually
|    reboots your system, refusing to switch from the
|    Learn mode to the Active mode.  When this occurs, it
|    is a good possibility that there is a memory
|    allocation problem.
 
|    It is possible that the Learn loop is occurring
|    because RAMBoost does not have enough memory to
|    optimize the system using the Graphical User
|    Interface.
 
|    TO EDIT YOUR RAMBOOST.INI TO ALLOW ENOUGH MEMORY TO
|    OPTIMIZE THE SYSTEM:
 
|    1.  Start your computer and bypass the running of
|        RAMBoost by typing "n" when prompted to load
|        RAMBoost.
 
|        You must do this before it times out or RAMBoost
|        will load automatically.
 
|    2.  Change your directory until you are in the
|        C:\DOS\DATA directory.
 
|    3.  Edit your RAMBOOST.INI file by typing:
 
|              e ramboost.ini
 
 
  186  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Find "optimizerui=ramsetup.exe oui" within the
|        [System] section.
 
|    5.  Change "ramsetup.exe oui" to "ramsetup.out oui".
 
|    6.  Save your change and exit from the editor.
 
|    7.  Reboot your computer.
 
|    RAMBoost will now use the Text User Interface
|    instead of the Graphical User interface and your
|    problem should be fixed.
 
 
| CONSIDERATIONS FOR DISK CACHES
 
|    There may be times you are using a disk cache that
|    has a delayed write-to-disk process.
 
|    TO CHANGE THE RESET-DELAY VALUE FOR DISK CACHING:
 
|    1.  Change your directory until you are in the
|        C:\DOS\DATA directory.
 
|    2.  Type "e ramboost.ini" to edit your RAMBOOST.INI
|        file.
 
|    3.  Find "resetdelay" option within the [System]
|        section.
 
|    4.  Change the default value to 5.
 
|    5.  Save your change and exit from the editor.
 
|    6.  Reboot your computer.
 
|    Generally, this takes care of most situations.
|    There may be cases (such as using multiple caches or
|    Stacker compression with another cache) where
|    changing the value of "resetdelay" to 5 is still not
|    sufficient.  In these cases, try a higher setting
|    (no higher than 15).
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  187
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| PROBLEM RESOLUTION
 
|    RAMBoost is a powerful tool but it is usually
|    involved in the most complex process of the
|    computer:  optimal memory usage.  Every system is
|    different, and this presents a challenge for
|    resolving problems.  Depending on the complexity of
|    your configuration, you might receive a FRAME= error
|    or some other error.
 
|    Common problems that might occur that you can
|    resolve include:
 
|    1.  CD-ROM does not work after upgrading
         ____________________________________
 
|        This could happen if you installed your CD-ROM
|        after running RAMSETUP and RAMBoost is loaded.
 
|        TO RUN RAMSETUP AGAIN TO CORRECT THIS PROBLEM:
 
|        a.  Restart your computer by pressing
|            CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
|        b.  Type "n" when you see this prompt:
 
|                  Load RAMBOOST?
 
|        c.  Type "ramsetup" at the DOS command prompt.
 
|        d.  When prompted to remove the EMM386 line,
|            choose not to remove the line and to
|            continue using the current EMM386 statement.
 
|        e.  Let RAMBoost Setup restart your computer and
|            reconfigure.  It must be in Learn mode the
|            first time.  It then resets and, the second
|            time, RAMBoost comes up in Active mode.
 
|    2.  System hangs after loading RAMBoost
         ___________________________________
 
|        Generally this indicates that there is a
|        conflicting device driver or TSR.  See "What To
 
 
 
  188  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        Do When Something Goes Wrong" on page 185 for
|        more details.
 
 
  COMPATIBILITY WITH MEMORY MANAGERS AND OTHER PROGRAMS
 
|    The following sections describes RAMBoost's
|    compatibility with the following memory managers and
|    other programs.
 
|    o   Helix Netroom386
|    o   Qualitas 386MAX and BlueMAX
|    o   Quarterdeck QEMM-386
|    o   DESQview and enhanced Windows
 
|    For example, if you use QEMM with Stealth, the upper
|    limit is approximately 225K.  If you use the EMM386
|    provided with DOS, the upper limit varies from 64KB
|    to 220KB, depending on the BIOS, peripherals, and
|    the careful use of INCLUDE parameters.  You will see
|    the INCLUDE parameters (for example, "i=b100-b7ff")
|    and EXCLUDE parameter (for example, x=a000-b0ff) in
|    your CONFIG.SYS file after your have configured
|    RAMBoost using EMM386 as the memory manager.
 
 
|    Helix Netroom386
 
|    Ensure that the following statement exists in your
|    CONFIG.SYS file before starting RAMBoost:
 
|           device=c:\netroom\rm386.sys ems=c800-efff frame=none
 
|    This statement assumes that you are not using EMS.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  189
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Qualitas 386MAX and BlueMAX
 
|    The following statement should exist in your
|    CONFIG.SYS file before starting RAMBoost:
 
|           device=c:\max\386max.sys include=b000-b800 ems=512
 
|    If you do not need EMS, change the EMS parameter to
|    read "ems=0".  Making this change increases the
|    upper memory available to RAMBoost by 64KB.
 
|    If RAMBoost Setup detects 386MAX (Version 7 or
|    above) or detects BlueMax (Version 6.02 or above),
|    it adds the NO58 parameter to the MAX profile.  If
|    you install one of these versions after RAMBoost is
|    loaded, you either need to edit the MAX profile
|    manually or run RAMSETUP again.
 
|    NOTE:  Any version of 386MAX or BlueMAX prior to the
|           version listed above should not include the
|           NO58 parameter in the MAX profile.
 
|    RAMBoost Setup deletes from the CONFIG.SYS file two
|    incompatible BlueMAX or 386MAX (Version 7) devices,
|    both named EXTRADOS.MAX.  These files are no longer
|    necessary, as RAMBoost provides similar function.
 
 
|    QEMM-386
 
|    If QEMM-386 is already installed, you should see the
|    following statement in your CONFIG.SYS file:
 
|          device=c:qemm\qemm386.sys ram x=f000-ffff st:m
 
|    If you do not need EMS, add the NOEMS parameter to
|    this statement in your CONFIG.SYS file.  Making this
|    change increases the upper memory available to
|    RAMBoost by 64KB.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  190  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    RAMBoost Setup deletes the following incompatible
|    QEMM (Version 7) devices from the CONFIG.SYS file:
 
|    o   DOS-UP.SYS
|    o   DOSDATA.SYS
 
 
|    DESQview and Enhanced Windows
 
|    RAMBoost does not automatically reset from the
|    DESQview DOS box or the enhanced Windows
|    environment.
 
|    NOTE:  If RAMSETUP is run from within one of the
|           environments, you must restart your computer
|           upon exiting the DESQview DOS box or Windows.
|           This is the only way RAMBoost can optimize
|           memory.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                  Chapter 6.  Making More Memory Available  191
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  192  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
                                          PART 2.  USING THE DOS OPTIONAL TOOLS
                                          _____________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
|    CHAPTER 7.  USING THE PC DOS SHELL   . . . . .   195
 
     CHAPTER 8.  USING CENTRAL POINT BACKUP   . . .   229
 
|    CHAPTER 9.  USING STACKER COMPRESSION  . . . .   293
 
|    CHAPTER 10.  USING PCMCIA SUPPORT  . . . . . .   371
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        193
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  194  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CHAPTER 7.  USING THE PC DOS SHELL
  __________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
     Through the use of color and graphics, PC DOS Shell
     offers a visual way of working with DOS. Information
     is set up in different areas on your screen, making
     it easy to find.  For example, when you first run
     the PC DOS Shell, the following information is
     displayed on your screen:
 
     o   The disk drives available on your system
     o   The directory structure or tree for the current
         disk drive
     o   A list of files in the current directory
     o   A list of programs that you can run
 
     You can use PC DOS Shell to perform many of the same
     file-management and disk-maintenance tasks that you
     perform from the command line.  For example, you can
     use the commands on the File menu to create
     directories, copy files, and view the contents of a
     file.  You can use the Disk Utilities group to
     perform disk-maintenance tasks, such as formatting
     and copying disks.  You can also use the PC DOS
     Shell to organize and start programs, and to switch
     between them.
 
 
  INSTALLING PC DOS SHELL AFTER INSTALLING DOS
  ____________________________________________
 
     If you did not choose to use the PC DOS Shell for
     file-management and disk-maintenance tasks at
     initial setup, you can still install PC DOS Shell
     using DOS Setup with the /E switch.
 
|    The PC DOS installation diskettes contain everything
     you need to install PC DOS Shell.  You might want to
|    refer to Chapter 1, "Installing PC DOS 7" on page 3
|    before you begin the installation of additional
|    optional tools.
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        195
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    TO INSTALL PC DOS SHELL USING THE /E SWITCH:
 
|    1.  Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS
                    ______________
|        installation diskettes into drive A or B.
 
     2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               a:setup /e
 
         or
         __
 
               b:setup /e
 
         The /E switch allows you to return to the
         optional tools selection menu without having to
         do a complete reinstallation of DOS.  Only the
         necessary files for the optional tools will be
         installed.
 
     3.  After Setup for DOS begins, follow the
         instructions displayed on the screen.  Make sure
         you specify the same "Install to PATH" as you
         did when you did the initial DOS installation.
 
         At the Optional Tools screen, you should see
         "NO" next to PC DOS Shell.
 
|    4.  Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until you
|        highlight Central Point CPBackup.
 
     5.  Select other optional tools you want to install
         either by highlighting the name of each optional
|        tool and pressing ENTER to select each item if
|        you are using the keyboard, or clicking on the
|        item if you are using a mouse.
 
     6.  After you select the optional tools you want to
         install, move the cursor to highlight the
         following:
 
|              Options correct. Continue Setup.
 
 
 
 
  196  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         and press ENTER to accept the optional tool
         selections.  Or, if you are using a mouse, just
         click on this line.
 
     7.  Continue to follow the instructions on the
         screen until you have completed the installation
         of the optional tools.
 
 
  STARTING THE PC DOS SHELL
  _________________________
 
     PC DOS Shell is automatically set up to run whenever
     you start your system, and the PC DOS Shell appears
     on your screen whenever you start DOS.  If the
     command prompt appears instead, you can start the PC
     DOS Shell from there.
 
     WARNING:  IF YOU START A TERMINATE-AND-STAY-RESIDENT
     (TSR) PROGRAM BEFORE STARTING PC DOS SHELL, DO NOT
     QUIT THE TSR PROGRAM BY USING ITS EXIT PROCEDURE
     WHILE YOU ARE STILL IN THE PC DOS SHELL.  INSTEAD,
     YOU MUST FIRST LEAVE THE PC DOS SHELL AND THEN QUIT
     THE TSR PROGRAM.
 
     TO START THE PC DOS SHELL FROM THE COMMAND PROMPT:
 
     1.  Type:
 
               dosshell
 
     2.  Then press ENTER.
 
         The PC DOS Shell window is displayed.
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | Artwork with the "PC DOS Shell" title is TBD.    |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  197
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SELECTING ITEMS FROM LISTS OR MENUS
  ___________________________________
 
     There are three ways to select items from lists or
     to select menu choices:
 
     o   Using a mouse
     o   Using a keyboard
     o   Using mnemonic selection
 
|    You can use mnemonic selection with the PC DOS
|    Shell.  Mnemonics are characters that appear
             _________
|    highlighted or underlined on the menu bar or list of
|    menu items.  Make a selection by typing the single
|    character displayed in a different color or
|    different highlighting.  If your menu bar does not
|    display a highlighted character, press ALT.
 
     To access the menu bar, you must press ALT followed
|    by the highlighted letter in the menu choice.  For
     example, to access the File menu, you would press
     ALT+F to get the list of menu items.
 
 
  STARTING A PROGRAM
  __________________
 
     Programs can be started from the Main group of PC
     DOS Shell by double-clicking on the program name or
     by using the TAB key to move the cursor to the Main
     group and then using the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW
     until the program name is highlighted.  Then press
     ENTER.
 
|    Ways to start a program from PC DOS Shell include:
 
     o   From a program group, choose a program item.
 
         For example, Disk Utilities and Main are two
         program groups available with PC DOS Shell.
         From the Main group you could start Central
         Point Scheduler by selecting the program--by
         highlighting it and then pressing ENTER if you
         are using the keyboard, or double-clicking on
         the item if you are using a mouse.
 
 
  198  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   From a file list, choose a program file or a
         file associated with that program.
 
         From the list of files in a specific directory,
         you can start the program by selecting any file
         with an extension of .BAT, .EXE, or .COM.  For
         example, to start the E Editor, select the
         program by highlighting the E.EXE file and then
|        pressing ENTER if you are using the keyboard, or
|        double-clicking on the item if you are using a
         mouse.
 
     o   From the File menu, select "Run".  Type the name
         of the program file in the Run dialog box, and
         then select OK.
 
|        For example, type "qconfig" to start the QCONFIG
|        program.
 
|    o   From the Main group, double-click on "Command
|        Prompt" and type the name of the program at the
         DOS command prompt.
 
         -   Do not type "dosshell" to return to the PC
             DOS Shell because the program is already
             running.
         -   To return to the PC DOS Shell, you must type
             "exit" and then press ENTER.
 
 
  GETTING HELP
  ____________
 
|    PC DOS Shell online help provides a quick way to get
     information about PC DOS Shell basics and how to use
     menus, commands, dialog boxes, dialog box options,
     and procedures.
 
     You can get help in three ways:
 
     o   By pressing F1.
     o   By selecting the Help button that appears in
         most dialog boxes.
     o   By using the Help menu.
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  199
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO REQUEST HELP ON A MENU:
 
     1.  Press ALT.
 
|    2.  Use the RIGHT ARROW or LEFT ARROW to highlight
|        the menu you want help on.
 
     3.  Press F1.
 
         A Help window containing information about the
         selected menu appears.
 
     TO REQUEST HELP ON A COMMAND:
 
|    MOUSE       1.  Click on the menu that contains the
     _____
|                    command you want help on.
 
|                2.  Use the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW to
|                    highlight the command you want Help
|                    on, and press ENTER.
 
                 3.  Press F1.
 
                     A Help window containing information
                     about the selected command appears.
 
 
     KEYBOARD    1.  Press ALT to select the menu bar.
     ________
 
                 2.  Use the RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW
                     to highlight the menu that contains
                     the command you want help on, and
                     press ENTER.
 
                 3.  Use the DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW to
                     highlight the command you want Help
                     on, and press ENTER.
 
                 4.  Press F1.
 
 
     TO REQUEST HELP ON A DIALOG BOX OPTION:
 
 
 
  200  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     1.  Open the dialog box you want help on.
 
     2.  Select a command button or option using the TAB
         or the arrow keys.
 
     3.  Press F1.
 
         For example, if you have selected "Search For"
         in the Search File dialog box and you press F1,
         the PC DOS Shell displays the following Help
         window:
 
 
  GETTING HELP ON A RELATED PROCEDURE
 
     Often Help refers you to a related procedure.  For
     example, if you requested Help on the Color Scheme
     dialog box, this Help contains a reference to the
     procedure for changing colors.
 
     Within Help, related procedures are displayed in a
     different color or in reverse video, depending on
     the color scheme you have selected.
 
     TO VIEW A RELATED PROCEDURE:
 
     MOUSE           Double-click on the related
     _____
                     procedure.
 
                     A Help window containing information
                     about the related procedure appears.
 
 
     KEYBOARD    1.  Press TAB until the related
     ________
                     procedure is selected.
 
                 2.  Press ENTER.
 
                     A Help window containing information
                     about the related procedure appears.
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  201
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  USING THE HELP MENU
 
     You can use the commands on the Help menu to view an
     index of Help topics; information on the keys you
     can use with the PC DOS Shell; basic skills for
     working with the PC DOS Shell commands and
     procedures; and information about using the Help
     system.
 
     TO USE THE HELP MENU:
 
|    MOUSE           From the Help menu, click on the
     _____
                     Help category you want.
 
                     Either information about the subject
                     or a list of topics related to the
                     subject appears.
 
 
 
|    KEYBOARD    1.  Press ALT+H.
     ________
 
                 2.  Press the highlighted letter for the
                     Help category you want.
 
                     Or, press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
                     to select the Help category you
                     want, and then press ENTER.
 
                     Either information about the subject
                     or a list of topics related to the
                     subject appears.
 
 
     NOTE:  If you have not used Help before, select
     "Using Help" from the Help menu to learn more about
     the type of information available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  202  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  HELP MENU OPTIONS
 
     The following items are available from the Help
     menu:
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | Index      | Provides a list of all the PC DOS   |
     |            | Shell Help topics.                  |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | Keyboard   | Lists keys and key combinations you |
     |            | can use with the PC DOS Shell.      |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Shell      | Provides an introduction to using   |
|    | Basics     | the PC DOS Shell.                   |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | Commands   | Explains all the PC DOS Shell       |
     |            | commands.  This information is      |
     |            | organized according to the menu in  |
     |            | which the command appears.  You can |
     |            | get the same information by         |
     |            | selecting a command and then        |
     |            | pressing F1.                        |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | Procedures | Provides step-by-step instructions  |
     |            | for performing tasks in the PC DOS  |
     |            | Shell.                              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | Using Help | Provides an introduction to using   |
     |            | the PC DOS Shell Help.              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
     | About      | Displays copyright and version      |
|    | Shell      | information about PC DOS Shell      |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
     If you selected "Shell Basics" from the Help menu,
     the following help window demonstrates the type of
     information you would see:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  203
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  LEAVING THE PC DOS SHELL
  ________________________
 
     You can leave the PC DOS Shell and move to the
     command prompt in two ways.  You can quit the PC DOS
     Shell temporarily, in which case you can work at the
     command prompt while the PC DOS Shell is still in
     your system's memory.  Or you can quit the PC DOS
     Shell and remove it from your system's memory before
     you switch to the command prompt.
 
     TO LEAVE THE PC DOS SHELL TEMPORARILY:
 
     o   Press SHIFT+F9.
 
         Or, select "Command Prompt" from the Main group
         __
         on the program list.
 
     o   To return to the PC DOS Shell, you must type
         "exit" and then press ENTER.
 
         NOTE:  Do not type "dosshell" to return to the
                PC DOS Shell because the program is
                already running.
 
     If Task Swapper is enabled, you can switch back to
     the PC DOS Shell without quitting Command Prompt by
     pressing CTRL+ESC.  Note that Command Prompt is
     still running and listed in the Active Task List.
 
     If you made changes to a directory such as adding or
     deleting files, the changes will not be displayed in
     the file-list area until you update the directory.
 
     TO UPDATE A DIRECTORY:
 
     1.  Select the directory that you want to update.
 
     2.  Press CTRL+F5.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  204  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO QUIT THE PC DOS SHELL:
 
     1.  If there are programs displayed in the Active
         Task List, you must quit each program before
         leaving the PC DOS Shell.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Exit", which is
         equal to pressing ALT+F4 as noted on the File
         menu next to Exit.
 
         Or, press F3.
         __
 
         If you try to quit the PC DOS Shell while you
         still have programs listed in the Active Task
         List, the Exiting Error dialog box appears.  The
         dialog box tells you that you cannot quit the PC
         DOS Shell without first quitting all programs
         that you have running.
 
     3.  Select OK to close the dialog box.
 
 
| CUSTOMIZING THE PC DOS SHELL
  ____________________________
 
|    Before you begin customizing the PC DOS Shell,  make
|    sure that the PC DOS Shell is installed on your
     computer and that you know how to use it.
 
     You can customize the PC DOS Shell in several ways.
     You can change the screen colors or change the way
     information is displayed in the PC DOS Shell window.
     You can also organize your programs into groups and
     display the groups graphically, making it easier to
     find and use your programs.  When you add a program
     item to a group, you can further customize the
     program by creating your own Help text, controlling
     the memory needed to run the program, and defining
     application shortcut keys.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  205
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHANGING SCREEN COLORS
  ______________________
 
     There are several color schemes available for PC DOS
     Shell.
 
     TO CHOOSE A COLOR SCHEME:
 
     1.  From the Options menu, select "Colors".
 
         The Color Scheme window appears.
 
     2.  To select the scheme you want, click on the
         scroll arrows until the color scheme you want
         comes into view and then click on that color
         scheme.  Or use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key
         to select the color scheme you want.
 
     3.  If you want to see what the selected color
         scheme looks like on your screen, select
         "Preview".
 
     4.  Select OK to implement the color scheme.
 
 
  SWITCHING BETWEEN TEXT AND GRAPHICS MODE
  ________________________________________
 
     The appearance of the PC DOS Shell on your screen
     depends on what type of display adapter you have and
                             _______________
     the screen mode you are using.  A display adapter
         ___________
     determines the screen display's capabilities, such
     as resolution and screen mode.  The screen mode
     controls the size and shape of the images that
     appear on your screen.
 
     There are two types of screen modes:  text and
     graphics.  All display adapters support text mode,
     which is the mode the PC DOS Shell uses the first
     time you start it.  Only some display adapters
     support graphics mode.
 
     Within text or graphics mode, you usually have a
     choice of how many lines you want displayed.  For
     example, if you choose to view 50 lines instead of
 
 
  206  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     25 lines (the default), you see more information on
     your screen at once, but the words and symbols
     appear smaller.
 
     TO CHANGE THE SCREEN MODE:
 
     1.  From the Options menu, select "Display".
 
         The Screen Display Mode window appears.
 
     2.  Select the screen mode you want.
 
     3.  If you want to see what the selected screen mode
         looks like on your screen, select "Preview".
 
     4.  Select OK to implement the screen mode.
 
         The PC DOS Shell appears in the screen mode you
         selected.
 
 
  ORGANIZING PROGRAMS
  ___________________
 
     You can organize programs into program groups to
     suit your needs.  When you create a program group,
     you give it a title, which appears in the program
     list.  In the default view, Program/File Lists, the
     program list appears in the lower-left corner of the
     PC DOS Shell window.  To work with a group, you
     choose its title.
 
 
  ADDING AND DELETING GROUPS
 
     You can add groups to the Main group, the Disk
     Utilities group, or a group you have created.  For
     example, you might use three programs to keep track
     of your finances--one to maintain your checkbook,
     one to estimate taxes, and one to track your monthly
     bills.  You might add a group named Accounts and put
     these account programs into it.
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  207
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     When you create a group, you must give it a title.
     You can also give it a password that a user must
     know to view the group, and a Help message that
     provides information on the group and its program
     items.
 
     TO ADD A GROUP:
 
     1.  Make sure you have selected "Program/File Lists"
         on the View menu.
 
|        Whatever is currently selected appears greyed
|        out.  If the mnemonic character for
|        "Program/File Lists" is highlighted or
|        underscored, then type "F" to select.
 
     2.  Press TAB to move to the program-list area of
         your screen.  Or click anywhere inside the
         program-list area.
 
     3.  If the group to which you want to add the new
         group is not open, open it by double-clicking
         the group name.  Or use the UP ARROW or DOWN
         ARROW key to select the group and then press
         ENTER.
 
         For example, double-click on the Disk Utilities
         group icon under Main, which is the program-list
         area.
 
     4.  From the File menu, select "New".
 
         The New Program Object window appears.
 
     5.  Select "Program Group".
 
     6.  Select OK.
 
         The Add Group window appears.
 
     7.  In the Title field, type a title for the new
         group.
 
 
 
  208  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     8.  If you want the group to have a Help message,
         type up to 255 characters (including blanks) in
         the Help Text field.
 
         For example, you might type a Help message that
         reads, "Use the programs in this group to
         perform statistical operations."  When you
         select this group and press F1, the PC DOS Shell
         displays the message. The message appears
         exactly as you have typed it and is formatted to
         fit in the Help window. If you want a line break
         to appear in the text, type "&caret.m" (a caret
         followed by the letter M) at the point where you
         want the new line to start.
 
     9.  If you want the group to have a password, type
         the password in the Password field.
 
     10. Select OK.
 
     TO DELETE A GROUP:
 
     1.  Select the group you want to delete.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Delete".
 
         Or, press DEL.
         __
 
         The Delete Item window appears.
 
     3.  Select OK.
 
     When you delete a group, the PC DOS Shell removes
     the group name from the program list and deletes the
     group's password and Help message.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  209
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHANGING THE CONTENTS OF A GROUP
 
     You can change the contents of a group by adding
     program items, copying program items from another
     group, reordering items, and deleting items.
 
 
     Adding a Program Item
 
     When you add a program item to a group, you give it
     a title and specify the command that starts the
     program.  In addition to assigning titles and
     startup commands, you can associate a variety of
     other information with a program item.  For more
     information, see "Working with Properties" on
     page 214.
 
     TO ADD A PROGRAM ITEM TO A GROUP:
 
     1.  Make sure you have selected "Program/File Lists"
         on the View menu.
 
     2.  Press TAB to move to the program-list area of
         your screen.  Or click anywhere in the
         program-list area.
 
     3.  If the group to which you want to add the new
         item is not open, open it by double-clicking the
         group name.  Or, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
         key to select the group and then press ENTER.
 
     4.  From the File menu, select "New".
 
         The New Program Object window appears, with New
         Program Item already selected.
 
     5.  Select OK.
 
         The Add Program window appears.
 
     6.  In the Program Title field, type the
         program-item title that you want to appear in
         __________________
         the program list.
 
 
  210  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     7.  In the Commands field, type the startup command,
                                         _______________
         the command that starts the program.  If the
         command is not in the current directory or in a
         directory specified by the PATH environment
         variable, or if it is not an internal command,
         you must include the complete path of the file
         in the command.
 
         You can include more than one command in this
         field.  For more information about startup
         commands, see "Specifying a Startup Command" on
         page 215.
 
     8.  Specify optional information you want to
         associate with the program item.  You can
         specify the following:
 
         o   A startup directory, which the PC DOS Shell
             changes to before starting the program.
 
         o   An application shortcut key, which (after
             you have started a program) you can use to
             switch to the program from other programs or
             from the PC DOS Shell.
 
         o   Pause after exit, which prompts you to press
             any key to return to the PC DOS Shell after
             the program has finished running.
 
         o   A password, which will be required before
             starting the program item.
 
             For more information about these options,
             see "Working with Properties" on page 214.
 
     9.  If you want to specify other options, select
         "Advanced".
 
         The Advanced window appears.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  211
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         For information about the options in the
         Advanced window, see "Specifying Advanced
         Properties" on page 223.
 
     10. Select OK.  If you select "Advanced", you return
         to the Add Program window when you select OK.
         You must then select OK in that field, also.
 
 
     Copying a Program Item to Another Group
 
     To copy a program item to another group, you select
     "Copy"  For example, if you have an spreadsheet
     program item in your Account group, you can also put
     it in your Tax group.  You can copy a program item
     to as many groups as you like.
 
     TO COPY A PROGRAM ITEM FROM ONE GROUP TO ANOTHER:
 
     1.  Select the program item you want to copy.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Copy".  Instructions
         appear in the status bar.
 
     3.  Open the group you want to copy the program item
         to.
 
     4.  If the group you are copying to has a password,
         type the password when the Password window
         appears and select OK.
 
     5.  Press F2.
 
 
 
  212  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Reordering Items in a Group
 
     To move a program item or group title from one
     position in a group to another, use the REORDER
     command.
 
     TO REPOSITION A PROGRAM ITEM OR GROUP TITLE:
 
     1.  Select the program item or group title you want
         to reposition.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Reorder".
         Instructions appear in the status bar.
 
     3.  Double-click on the new location.
 
         Or move the selection cursor to the new
         location, and then press ENTER.
 
         The selected program item or group title moves
         to the new location.
 
 
     Deleting a Program Item from a Group
 
     You can delete a program item that you no longer
     need.  Deleting a program item from a group does not
     delete the program file from the directory that
     contains it.
 
     TO DELETE A PROGRAM ITEM FROM A GROUP:
 
     1.  Select the program item you want to delete.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Delete".
 
         Or, press DEL.
         __
 
         The Delete Item window appears.
 
         If the program item has a password associated
         with it, you will see a warning message, but you
         can still delete the program item.
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  213
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     3.  Select OK.
 
 
  WORKING WITH PROPERTIES
  _______________________
 
     A property is a piece of information that you
       ________
     associate with a program item. You can specify
     numerous properties for each program item.
 
     The following two properties are required:
 
     o   Program-item title
     o   Startup command
 
     These properties are optional:
 
     o   Startup directory
     o   Application shortcut key
     o   Pause after exit
     o   Password
     o   Additional advanced properties
 
     For information about creating program items, see
     "Adding a Program Item" on page 210.
 
     After you create a program item, you can change its
     properties by using the PROPERTIES command.
 
     TO CHANGE THE PROPERTIES OF A PROGRAM ITEM:
 
     1.  Select the program item.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Properties".
 
         If the program item has a password, the Password
         window appears.  Type the password, and select
         OK.
 
         The Program Item Properties window appears.  The
         Program Title field and the Commands field show
         the properties that have been specified for the
         program item you selected, along with any
         optional properties.
 
 
  214  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         The Program Item Properties window is the same
         as the Add Program window, which is displayed
         when you create a program item.
 
     3.  Type the information for the properties you want
         to change.
 
     4.  Select OK.
 
 
  SPECIFYING A STARTUP COMMAND
 
     When you create a program item, you must type a
     startup command in the Commands field of the Add
     Program window.  If the command is not in the
     current directory or in a directory specified by the
     PATH environment variable, or if it is not an
     internal command, you must include the complete path
     of the program file.  For example, if you are
     creating a program item named WordPerfect and the
     path for WordPerfect is C:\WP\WP.EXE, you would type
     that path in the Commands field.
 
     You can also specify additional commands, run batch
     programs, and include replaceable parameters for the
     program.  The following sections describe how to
     include these options.
 
 
     Specifying Additional Commands
 
     PC DOS Shell carries out each command in the order
     it appears in the Commands field.  Each command must
     be separated by a semicolon (;).  There must be one
     or more spaces on each side of the semicolon. Text
     in the Commands field cannot exceed 255 characters.
 
     For example, suppose you want to put an abbreviated
     list of the files in a directory into a text file,
     load the file into your text editor, edit the file,
     save it under a different name, and delete the
     original file when you are finished. If you are
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  215
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     using the E Editor, your startup command might look
     like this:
 
           dir /b  > tmp.txt ; c:\dos\e.exe tmp.txt ; del tmp.txt
 
     In this example, the PC DOS Shell first stores the
     names of files in the current directory in a file
     named TMP.TXT. Then it runs the E Editor, loading
     the TMP.TXT file. When you quit the E Editor, the
     TMP.TXT file is deleted, and you return to the PC
     DOS Shell.
 
 
     Running Batch Programs in a Startup Command
 
     You can run batch programs by including CALL
     commands in the startup command.  For example,
     suppose you want to run a batch program named
     PREP.BAT before you start WordPerfect, and one
     called POST.BAT after you quit WordPerfect. You
     would type the following in the Commands field:
 
           call prep ; wp ; call post
 
     For information about batch programs, see -- Heading
     'DOS10' unknown --.
 
 
     Using Replaceable Parameters
 
     A parameter is additional information you give a
       _________
     program when you start it.   For example, when you
     start E Editor from DOS Shell, the File to Edit
     window appears. You can specify a filename in the
     Text field.  If you type "recipes.txt", for example,
     E Editor loads the file RECIPES.TXT as soon as it
     starts.
 
     Many programs accept parameters in this manner.  If
     the program item you add to a program group accepts
     parameters, you can include these parameters in the
     Commands field.
 
 
 
  216  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     If you want to be able to specify a different
     parameter whenever you run the program item, you can
     put a replaceable parameter in the Commands field.
     Each time you select the program item, PC DOS Shell
                              ____________
     displays a window that prompts you to fill in the
     value for the replaceable parameter before the
     program starts.
 
     In the Commands field, you indicate a replaceable
     parameter with the percent sign (%) followed by a
     numeral (1 through 9).  For example, if you want the
     PC DOS Shell to prompt you for a filename when you
     start WordPerfect, you might type the following in
     the Commands field:
 
           c:\wp\wp.exe %1
 
     The "%1" in this example indicates that you want the
     PC DOS Shell to prompt you to type a value in place
     of "%1" every time you select the program item for
     WordPerfect. the PC DOS Shell will prompt you by
     displaying a prompt window.
 
     TO INCLUDE A REPLACEABLE PARAMETER IN A STARTUP
     COMMAND:
 
     1.  Select the program item.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Properties"
 
         If the program item has a password, the Password
         window appears.  Type the password and select
         OK.
 
         The Program Item Properties window appears.
 
     3.  In the Commands field, specify the command and
         indicate the replaceable parameters by typing a
         percent sign (%) followed by a numeral (1
         through 9) for each.
 
     4.  Select OK.
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  217
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         A Program Item Properties or Add Program window
         appears for each replaceable parameter you have
         specified.
 
         The information you type in this window will
         create a customized window for the program item
         that you are adding or changing.
 
         Type the information that you want to appear in
         the window.  Each time you select the program
         item, PC DOS Shell displays the information you
         have typed.
 
         The Window Title you supply will appear at the
         top of the window.  The Program Information you
         supply will appear under the title.  You can
         type up to 106 characters in the Program
         Information field.  The Prompt Message you
         specify will appear to the left of the field
         where you specify the parameter value.
 
         If you specify a value in the Default Parameters
         field, the value will appear in the prompt
         window. You can accept the default parameter or
         change it. Specify a default parameter value if
         you plan to use that value frequently when you
         run the program. For example, if you are working
         on a project that often requires you to use a
         particular document, you might type that
         document's name as the default parameter for a
         text editor.
 
         There are two special parameters that you can
         use in the Default Parameters field to
         automatically set a default parameter.  The %F
         parameter (a percent sign followed by the letter
         f) sets the default filename to the filename
         currently selected in the file list. The %L
         parameter (a percent sign followed by the letter
         L) sets the default parameter to the parameter
         that was specified the last time the program
         item was run.
 
 
 
  218  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         If you want the PC DOS Shell to prompt you for a
         file to load when you start a text editor, you
         can specify values such as the following in the
         Program Item Properties window:
 
     Each time you select the program item, the PC DOS
     Shell will prompt you with a prompt window.
 
     USING THE SAME REPLACEABLE PARAMETER MORE THAN
     ONCE:  You can use the same replaceable parameter
     more than once in a Commands field.  For example,
     suppose you create files by using WordPerfect, and
     you store them in C:\EDIT\WP. Suppose that as you
     create these files, you always back them up on a
     disk in drive A. To load a file into WordPerfect and
     then back up the file (onto a disk in drive A) after
     you have edited it, you would type the following in
     the Commands field:
 
           c:\edit\wp\wp.exe %1 ; copy %1 a:
 
     USING MORE THAN ONE REPLACEABLE PARAMETER:  You can
     include up to nine different replaceable parameters
     in the Commands field.  For example, suppose you
     want the PC DOS Shell to prompt you for a file to
     load with WordPerfect and for a backup directory to
     copy the file to when you finish editing.  You would
     include two different replaceable parameters in the
     Commands field, as in the following example:
 
           c:\wp\wp.exe %1 ; copy %1 %2
 
     If you add this command in the Commands field, you
     will be prompted to provide the name of the file you
     want to edit in addition to the directory to which
     you want to copy the file. Then you can edit your
     WordPerfect document.
 
     For each replaceable parameter, the PC DOS Shell
     prompts you for information to appear in the prompt
     window, as described previously.
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  219
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SPECIFYING A STARTUP DIRECTORY
 
     You can specify which directory you want DOS to
     change to before it starts a program that is in a
     program group.  For example, if you keep budget
     spreadsheets in a directory named C:\FILES, you need
     to make sure the PC DOS Shell changes to that
     directory before starting your spreadsheet program.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  220  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO SPECIFY A STARTUP DIRECTORY:
 
     1.  Select the program item whose properties you
         want to change.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Properties".
 
         The Program Item Properties window appears.
 
     3.  In the Startup Directory field, type the drive
         and path of the directory you want the PC DOS
         Shell to change to before it starts the program,
         as in the following example:
 
 
  SPECIFYING AN APPLICATION SHORTCUT KEY
 
     If you have started a program but are not currently
     working with it, you can use a key combination to
     switch quickly to it from another program or from
     the PC DOS Shell. The shortcut key must have the
     form CTRL+character, SHIFT+character, or
               _________        _________
     ALT+character, where character is a letter, number,
         _________        _________
     or function key on your keyboard. (Exceptions are
     noted later in this section.) You can use any
     combination of the CTRL, SHIFT, and ALT keys with
     the character.
 
     TO SPECIFY AN APPLICATION SHORTCUT KEY:
 
     1.  Select the program item you want.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Properties"
 
         The Program Item Properties window appears.
 
     3.  In the Application Shortcut Key field, specify
         the key combination by pressing and holding down
         CTRL, SHIFT, or ALT, and then pressing a
         character.
 
     For example, suppose you have a program item named
     My Editor in the Main group and that you have
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  221
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     enabled Task Swapper.  You could assign CTRL+E as
     the shortcut key for My Editor.  If My Editor is on
     the Active Task List, you can press CTRL+E to switch
     back to it from another program or from the PC DOS
     Shell.
 
     The name of the shortcut key will appear next to the
     program-item title in the Active Task List.
 
     The following key combinations are reserved and are
     not available as application shortcut keys:
 
     CTRL+M                      SHIFT+CTRL+M
     CTRL+I                      SHIFT+CTRL+I
     CTRL+H                      SHIFT+CTRL+H
     CTRL+C                      SHIFT+CTRL+C
     CTRL+[                      SHIFT+CTRL+[
     CTRL+5 (on the keypad)      SHIFT+CTRL+5 (on the
                                 keypad)
 
 
  SPECIFYING WHETHER TO PAUSE AFTER A PROGRAM ENDS
 
     You can specify whether the PC DOS Shell should
     pause after you quit a program that is in a program
     group. By default, the PC DOS Shell prompts you to
     press a key to return to the PC DOS Shell after you
     quit such a program.
 
     TO ELIMINATE THE PAUSE AFTER YOU QUIT A PROGRAM:
 
     1.  Select the program item you want.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Properties"
 
         The Program Item Properties window appears.
 
     3.  Clear the Pause After Exit option by clicking on
         the "X".
 
         Or, press TAB until you select the option, and
         __
         then press the SPACEBAR to clear it.
 
 
 
  222  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     4.  Select OK.
 
 
  SPECIFYING A PASSWORD
 
     If you want the PC DOS Shell to prompt you for a
     password before it starts a program item, you can
     specify the password in the Program Item Properties
     window.
 
     TO SPECIFY A PASSWORD FOR A PROGRAM ITEM:
 
     1.  Select the program item.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Properties"
 
         You see the Program Item Properties window.
 
     3.  In the Password field, type the password you
         want.
 
     4.  Select OK.
 
 
  SPECIFYING ADVANCED PROPERTIES
 
     When you select "Advanced" in the Add Program or
     Program Item Properties window, another window
     appears in which you can specify additional
     properties. The Advanced window looks like this:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  223
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Adding Help Text
 
     You can add a Help message of up to 255 characters
     to any program item. This Help message is displayed
     if you press F1 when the program item is selected.
     the PC DOS Shell displays the message exactly as you
     have typed it and formats it to fit in a Help
     window. If you want to begin a new line of text,
     type "&caret.m" (a caret followed by the letter M)
     at the point where you want the new line to start.
 
     If you do not want the program item to have a Help
     message, leave the Help Text field blank.
 
 
     Specifying Conventional Memory
 
     Use the Conventional Memory KB Required field to
     specify how many kilobytes of conventional memory
     must be free in order to start a program. This
     property is useful for programs with specific memory
     requirements.
 
     Regardless of what you type in the Conventional
     Memory KB Required field, when you start a program,
     the PC DOS Shell gives it all available conventional
     memory.  The number you type in this field
     determines how much memory must be available before
     the PC DOS Shell starts the program; it does not
     limit how much conventional memory the program
     receives.
 
     If the PC DOS Shell cannot provide as much memory as
     you specify, a message appears, telling you there is
     not enough memory to run the program.
 
     If Task Swapper is not enabled, the PC DOS Shell
     ignores any conventional-memory specification.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  224  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Specifying Extended Memory
 
     Use the XMS Memory options to specify how much
     extended memory to give to a program that uses
     memory according to the Lotus/Intel/Microsoft/AST
     Extended Memory Specification (XMS) standard. If
     Task Swapper is not enabled, the XMS memory
     specifications are ignored.
 
     A description of each XMS Memory option follows.
     Before using these options, you must have extended
     memory set up on your system. For more information,
     see the discussion about extended memory in
     Chapter 6, "Making More Memory Available" on
     page 161.
 
     KB REQUIRED    Specifies how many kilobytes of
                    extended memory must be free in order
                    to run a program.
 
     Leave this setting blank for most programs.
     Specifying a value significantly increases the time
     it takes to switch to and from a program.  Specify a
     value only if a program requires a certain amount of
     extended memory in order to run.
 
     If you run a program that requires extended memory,
     and the PC DOS Shell cannot provide as much memory
     as you specify, a message appears when you try to
     start the program, telling you there is not enough
     memory.  However, if Task Swapper is not enabled,
     the memory specification is ignored.
 
     KB LIMIT       Specifies the maximum amount (in
                    kilobytes) of extended memory that
                    the PC DOS Shell can give to a
                    program.
 
     This option is useful for limiting a program's
     access to extended memory because some programs take
     all available extended memory whether they need it
     or not.  If Task Swapper is not enabled, the KB
     Limit specification is ignored.
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  225
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Leave this setting blank to prevent a program from
     gaining access to any extended memory.
 
     Setting this option to -1 gives the program all the
     extended memory it requests (up to the maximum
     amount available). Set this option to -1 only if the
     program requires large amounts of extended memory.
 
 
     Using Video Mode
 
     Video Mode has two options:  text and graphics.  Use
     text mode unless you are having trouble switching to
     a program.
 
     Usually the memory reserved by text mode is enough,
     but you might need more memory if you are using a
     CGA monitor. Graphics mode requires more memory than
     text mode. Use text mode for all program items if
     you have a high-resolution graphics (VGA or EGA)
     monitor or a monochrome monitor.
 
 
     Reserving Shortcut Keys
 
     Use the Reserve Shortcut Keys option when you want a
     program to use shortcut keys typically used by Task
     Swapper (ALT+TAB, ALT+ESC, and CTRL+ESC).  If you
     want to reserve a shortcut key for a program, select
     it in the Reserved Shortcut Keys area of the
     Advanced window.
 
     For example, suppose you have a text editor that
     typically uses the ALT+TAB shortcut key to insert a
     special character. If you want to maintain that
     function while your text editor is running under PC
     DOS Shell, you need to select the shortcut key for
     the program.  When you select this key, it is no
     longer reserved for the PC DOS Shell.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  226  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Preventing Program Switching
 
     If you want to prevent a program from switching to
     another program or to the PC DOS Shell, select the
     Prevent Program Switch option from the Advanced
     window. If you select this option, you must quit the
     program to return to the PC DOS Shell.
 
 
  CHANGING GROUP PROPERTIES
 
     A program group must have a title associated with
     it. It can also have Help text and a password. You
     can change any of these properties for all groups
     except the Main group.
 
     TO CHANGE GROUP PROPERTIES:
 
     1.  Select the appropriate group.
 
     2.  From the File menu, select "Properties"
 
         If the group has a password, the Password window
         appears.  Type the password and select OK.
 
         The Program Group Properties window appears.
 
     3.  Change the title, Help text, or password.
 
     4.  Select OK.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Chapter 7.  Using the PC DOS Shell  227
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  228  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHAPTER 8.  USING CENTRAL POINT BACKUP
  ______________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
     The Central Point Backup(**) program (CPBackup)
     provides protection against data loss by allowing
|    you to make a backup copy of data.  This backed up
|    copy ensures that you can restore data quickly if
|    the need ever arises.  With CPBackup, you can do the
|    following:
 
|    o   Back up an entire disk, specific files and
|        directories, or only files that have changed
|        since your last backup.  The backup can be
|        processed to diskettes, tape, hard disk, or a
|        network volume.
 
|    o   Compare data on your backup media to your
|        original hard disk data to ensure that the data
|        is restorable.
 
|    o   Restore your entire backup or only selected
|        files and directories.  The restoration can be
|        done on the computer you backed up from or to a
|        different computer.
 
|    o   Back up your data to a network directory.
 
 
  INSTALLING CENTRAL POINT BACKUP AFTER INSTALLING DOS
  ____________________________________________________
 
     If you did not select Central Point Backup for DOS
     or Central Point Backup for Windows at initial
     installation, you can still install these optional
     tools by rerunning DOS Setup.
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Central Point Backup is a trademark of Central Point Software, Inc.
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        229
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    The PC DOS installation diskettes contain everything
|    you need to install Central Point Backup on your
     system.
 
     During Setup, DOS checks whether your computer has
     Windows 3.1 installed.  If you do not have Windows
     3.1 installed and want to use the optional tools
     provided with DOS for Windows, you should make sure
     you install in this order:
 
     1.  Install DOS as you normally would, selecting the
         optional tools you want from the list provided.
         You will not see any of the optional tools for
         Windows listed.
 
     2.  After you have installed DOS, install Windows
         3.1 as you normally would.
 
     3.  Install DOS again using the /E switch after DOS
         and Windows have been installed.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  230  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    TO INSTALL CENTRAL POINT BACKUP USING THE SETUP /E
|    SWITCH:
 
|    1.  Insert the Setup Diskette of the PC DOS Setup
                    ______________
|        diskettes into drive A or B.
 
     2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               a:setup /e
 
         or
         __
 
               b:setup /e
 
         The /E switch allows you to return to the
         optional tools selection menu without having to
         do a complete reinstallation of DOS.  At this
         point, only the necessary files for the optional
         tools are installed.
 
     3.  After Setup for DOS begins, follow the
         instructions displayed on the screen.  Make sure
         you specify the same "Install to PATH" as you
         did when you did the initial DOS installation.
 
         At the Optional Tools screen, you will see "NO"
         next to Central Point Backup.
 
     4.  Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until you
         highlight Central Point Backup.
 
         You can also select any of the other optional
         tools, such as Central Point Backup for Windows,
         that you want to install by highlighting each
         tool and then pressing ENTER for each item.
 
         You now see "YES" next to all the optional tools
         you selected.
 
     5.  Move the cursor to highlight the following:
 
|              Options correct. Continue Setup.
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  231
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     6.  Press ENTER to accept the optional tool
         selections.
 
     7.  Continue following the instructions on the
         screen until the optional tools are installed.
 
 
  CONFIGURING CENTRAL POINT BACKUP
  ________________________________
 
     The following procedure assumes you already have
|    Central Point CPBackup installed on your computer by
|    using the PC DOS Setup diskettes.  See "Installing
     Central Point Backup after Installing DOS" on
     page 229 if the program is not installed.  During
     configuration, the program guides you through the
     process and saves your choices in a file called
     CPBACKUP.CFG.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  232  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO START CONFIGURING CPBACKUP FROM THE DOS COMMAND
     PROMPT:
 
     Type "cpbackup" and press ENTER.
 
|    The first time you use CPBackup, a Welcome screen is
|    displayed.  Each subsequent time a selection screen
|    is displayed which allows you to specify:
 
|    o   Backup
|    o   Restore
|    o   Compare
 
|    TO START CONFIGURING CPBACKUP FROM PC DOS SHELL:
 
|    If available in your Main program group of PC DOS
|    Shell, double-click on "Central Point Backup" if you
|    are using a mouse.  Or, if you are using a keyboard,
|    press the TAB key until you highlight Main.  Use the
|    UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to highlight Central Point
|    Backup, and then press ENTER.
 
     TO START CONFIGURING CENTRAL POINT BACKUP FOR
     WINDOWS:
 
     You can start Central Point Backup for Windows by
     double-clicking on the Central Point Backup icon
     located in the IBM Tools program group.
 
|    The first time you use CPBackup, you must configure
         __________
|    the program to work optimally with your system.
 
|    You start with a Welcome screen and proceed to
|    specify the following:
 
|    o   Type of tape drive (none, QIC 40/80-FDC, or
|        SCSI).
 
|        SCSI is defined as Small Computer System
         ____
|        Interface and FDC is defined as Floppy DISK
                       ___
|        Controller.
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  233
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        To configure a SCSI tape drive, insert a tape
|        cartridge into your SCSI tape drive before
|        configuring.  This allows CPBackup to determine
|        the size of the tape you use.
 
|    o   Equipment (based on previous selections you are
|        allowed to specify the hardware options
|        available for performing the backup.)
 
|    o   Drive and media type
 
|        Drive type is the physical type of disk drive
         __________
|        (hardware) in your computer.  Media type is the
                                       __________
|        diskette or tape you use for the backup.
 
|    If at any time you need help, press F1.
 
 
| PERFORMING THE CONFIDENCE TEST
 
|    After designating the configuration of the system
|    you use for your backups, you need to perform a
|    confidence test.
 
|    CPBackup tests your computer for the speed setting
|    that gives you the best performance and reliability.
|    This eliminates guessing whether your computer
|    supports high-speed backups.  Run this test on every
|    computer, especially if you change the system
|    environment in any way (such as adding or removing
|    drives or using different media).  That way, you can
|    be sure that CPBackup always works with your current
|    configuration.
 
|    To skip the confidence test, select "Skip" on the
|    Backup Confidence Test screen.  CPBackup sets the
|    speed to High automatically.
 
|    WARNING:  SKIPPING THE CONFIDENCE TEST CAN RESULT IN
|    UNRELIABLE BACKUPS.
 
 
 
 
 
  234  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| UNDERSTANDING THE RESULTS OF THE CONFIDENCE TEST
 
|    CPBackup always tests your system at high speed
|    first.  If the test fails, it repeats automatically
|    at medium speed.  However, at times, some computers
|    fail the high-speed test in such a way that prevents
|    testing at medium speed.
 
|    TO CHANGE THE BACKUP SPEED IF YOUR COMPUTER FAILS
|    THE HIGH-SPEED SETTING:
 
|    1.  Turn your computer off and then back on to reset
|        the hardware.
 
|    2.  Type "cpbackup" at the DOS command prompt.
 
|    3.  Select "Backup Speed" from the Configure menu.
 
|    4.  Select "Medium".
 
|    5.  Select "OK".
 
|    6.  Select several files to back up for the test.
 
|    7.  Select "Start Backup".
 
|        When the test is complete, a message window
|        informs you of the results.  The backup speed is
|        set automatically to the fastest speed as
|        determined by the test.
 
|    8.  Select "Compare" when the backup is complete.
 
|        If all files compare, your computer can do safe,
|        reliable backups at the chosen speed.
 
|    9.  Select "Save as Default" from the File menu to
|        save the new information.
 
|    The confidence test only checks the drive and media
|    you selected.  If you change the drive or media you
|    use for backing up, test the new drive and media
|    combination.  Some systems can run at high speed
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  235
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    with one type of media but might need to use medium
|    or low speed with other media to be reliable.
 
|    If you have difficulties with the confidence test
|    during the initial configuration process and have
|    since corrected the problem, you can run the test
|    again by selecting choices from the Configure menu.
 
|    TO RERUN THE CONFIDENCE TEST:
 
|    1.  Select "Choose Drive and Media" from the
|        Configure menu and select a setting.
|    2.  Select "Backup Speed" from the Configure menu.
|    3.  Select "Test".
|    4.  Select "OK" when the test is complete.
|    5.  Select "Save as Default" from the File menu to
|        save the new information.
 
 
  VIEWING THE MAIN CENTRAL POINT BACKUP WINDOW
  ____________________________________________
 
     After you have configured CPBackup, the next time
     you load CPBackup the main Central Point Backup
     window appears.
 
     Central Point Backup has an extensive online help
     facility for your use.  If at any time you need
     help, press F1.
 
     When you select Backup, Restore, or Compare from the
     main Central Point Backup window, the following
     Express window appears:
 
     CPBackup defaults to this Express Window.  This
     Express feature simplifies your backup, compare, or
     _______________
     restore procedures with a simple "point-and-click"
     interface.
 
     Buttons let you perform certain menu options
     quickly.  All of the button commands also appear on
     the menus.  At the Beginner and Intermediate user
     levels, some of these buttons are dimmed, meaning
                                       ______
     the default value is used and cannot be changed.
 
 
  236  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CHANGING THE USER LEVEL
  _______________________
 
     If you want to change the user level from Advanced
     user, use the following procedure.  The default user
     level is Advanced.
 
     TO CHANGE THE USER LEVEL:
 
     1.  Select "User Level" from the Configure menu.
 
     2.  Select the level you want.
 
         BEGINNER:           If you are not concerned
                             with options you are not
                             familiar with or just want
                             to do a backup as easily as
                             possible, use the Beginner
                             level.  Central Point Backup
                             automatically defaults to
                             the options that reflect the
                             highest degree of safety,
                             security, and ease of use
                             for the Beginner level.
 
         INTERMEDIATE:       If you want to perform
                             backups as quickly and
                             easily as possible, but need
                             additional control over file
                             selection and backup
                             methods, then use the
                             Intermediate level.
 
|        ADVANCED:           For maximum control over all
|                            aspects of your backup, use
|                            the Advanced level.  If you
|                            are familiar with previous
|                            versions of Central Point
|                            Backup, use the Advanced
|                            level.
 
     3.  Select the check box to password-protect the
         user level so it cannot be changed without the
         proper password.
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  237
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         An "X" appears, indicating that password
         protection is on.
 
     4.  Select "OK" to continue or "Cancel" to retain
         the current user level.
 
     The following table shows the commands available in
     each level:
 
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | MENU COMMAND            | BEGINN|RINTERME|IADVANC|D
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     |   File menu             |       |        |       |
         _________
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Load Setup              | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Save Setup              |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Save Setup As           |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Save as Default         | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
|    | Print history           |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Exit                    | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     |   Action menu           |       |        |       |
         ___________
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Start Backup            | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Backup From             | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
|    | Select Files for Backup |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Schedule Backups        |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Restore                 | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Compare                 | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     |   Options menu          |       |        |       |
         ____________
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
 
 
 
  238  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | MENU COMMAND            | BEGINN|RINTERME|IADVANC|D
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Backup Method           |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Reporting               | X     | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Compress                |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Data Encryption         |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Verify                  |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Media Format            |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
|    | Auto Compare            |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Format Always           |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Error Correction        |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Virus Detection         |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Save History            |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Overwrite Warning       |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Time Display            |       |        | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Selection Options       |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Display Options         |       | X      | X     |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
 
     The Configure, Tape Tools, and Help menus remain the
     same for all user levels.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  239
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  MAKING A BACKUP
  _______________
 
     This section explains how to do a full backup of
     your hard drive using the default settings of
                               ________________
     CPBackup.
 
|    The following procedure assumes that CPBackup is
|    installed and that you have configured it to match
|    your system.
 
     You can start CPBackup by:
 
|    o   Selecting Central Point Backup from the PC DOS
|        Shell.
     o   Typing the command at the DOS command prompt.
 
     TO START CPBACKUP:
 
     1.  From the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               cpbackup
 
     2.  Press ENTER and the main Central Point Backup
         window appears.
 
     3.  Select "Backup".
 
 
  BACKING UP ALL FILES
 
     CPBackup performs a quick scan of each local hard
     drive when you select it.  This scan identifies
     problems that could potentially interrupt the backup
     or cause data distortion.
 
     1.  Select a drive to back up in the Backup From
         list (also available as Backup From on the
         Action menu).
 
|        By default, all files on that drive are
         selected, as indicated by a checkmark to the
         left of the drive icon.  If you would rather not
         scan each drive when selected, you can turn off
 
 
  240  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         the scan by selecting "Drive Integrity" from the
         Configure menu.
 
         Or, select specific directories and files to
         __
         back up by choosing "Select Files for Backup".
 
|        When you choose this method, by default, all
|        files are unselected.  To apply your selection
|        filters, press F8 while displaying the directory
|        tree and file lists.  Refer to "Selecting Files"
|        on page 243 for more information.
 
     2.  Select a backup destination in the Backup To
         drop-down list box (also available as "Choose
         Drive and Media" from the Configure menu).
 
|    3.  Select "Start Backup" (also available from the
|        Action menu).  The Name Backup Set window is
|        displayed.
 
     4.  Type a descriptive name of up to 30 characters,
         press the TAB key, and type an optional
         password; then select "OK".
 
         Describe your backups uniquely.  This
         description is what appears in the History list,
|        Select Directory, or Search History files window
         when you do a compare or restore, and it can
         help you remember the correct history file to
         use.
 
         WARNING:  REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORD.  IF YOU
         ATTEMPT TO RESTORE A PASSWORD-PROTECTED BACKUP
         SET, THE PROGRAM ASKS YOU FOR THE PASSWORD.  IF
         YOU FORGET OR LOSE THE PASSWORD, YOU CANNOT
         RESTORE YOUR DATA.  THIS PASSWORD IS DIFFERENT
         THAN THE USER-LEVEL PASSWORD.  IT IS SPECIFIC TO
         EACH BACKUP, AND IS INTENDED TO PREVENT
         UNAUTHORIZED RESTORING OF YOUR DATA.
 
     5.  Insert the backup diskette or tape into the
         drive when prompted.
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  241
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         If you are using diskettes or fixed media for
         your backup, skip ahead to step 6.
 
         It is normal for the drive light to stay on
         continuously during a backup using high and
         medium speed.  You will not damage your disks by
         inserting or removing them when you are prompted
         to do so, even when the drive light is on.
 
         If you are using tape, do not remove the tape
         cartridge from the drive when the tape is
         moving.  Doing so can damage the tape.
 
|        When you are backing up to a tape, a list of all
|        the backups made to the tape appears in the Tape
|        Directory box.  The list contains the
|        descriptions entered at the beginning of each
|        backup.  The list also includes the date and
|        time of the backup, the size of the files on the
|        tape (in compressed format), and the original
|        sizes of the files.
 
|        If you are backing up to a SCSI tape, the Tape
|        Directory window contains a Catalog selection
|        button.
 
|        a.  Select "OK" to append to the tape, "Erase"
|            to overwrite the tape, or "Cancel".
 
|            If you are sharing a SCSI tape with other
|            users, select the "Catalog" button to scan
|            the tape for all backup sets and update the
|            tape directory on your hard disk.  See
|            "Synchronizing the Volume Tape Content (VTC)
|            Files" on page 284 for details.
 
         b.  Enter the tape password if you select
             "Erase" and if it is password-protected.
 
             This prompt for a password is a security
             measure to prevent deletion of other backups
             on that tape.
 
 
 
  242  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     6.  press ESC, after the backup begins, any time you
         want to pause or cancel the backup..
 
|        A window displays options to Resume, End, or
|        Quit the backup.
 
|        WARNING:  IF YOU ARE USING A SCSI TAPE, QUITTING
|        THE BACKUP RESULTS IN AN UNREADABLE TAPE.
|        PREVIOUS COMPLETE BACKUPS CAN BE RECOVERED FROM
|        THE TAPE.  THE CURRENT BACKUP CANNOT BE
|        RECOVERED.  THE TAPE MUST BE ERASED BEFORE
|        FUTURE BACKUPS CAN BE WRITTEN TO IT.  USE THE
|        END OPTION (NOT QUIT) SO THAT PROPER END OF DATA
|        MARKERS ARE WRITTEN TO THE TAPE.
 
         When the backup is complete, the backup
         statistics appear.
 
         Perform a comparison at this point to be
         ________________________________________
         absolutely sure your backed-up data matches the
         _______________________________________________
         original data exactly.
         ______________________
 
     7.  Select "Compare" to begin the comparison
         process.  See "Comparing Data" on page 262 for
         further details.
 
         If you are using a tape drive, you can have
         CPBackup perform an automatic comparison by
         selecting "Auto Compare" from the Options menu.
 
 
  SELECTING FILES
  _______________
 
|    You can use one of the following two ways to select
|    files:
 
     o   Automatically with file filter commands.
 
         For information about file filter commands,
         refer to page 244.
 
|    o   Manually from the directory tree.
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  243
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         For information about the directory tree, refer
         to page 250.
 
 
  SELECTING FILES AUTOMATICALLY
 
     There are several options that affect selected
     files:  the backup method, manual file selections,
     and the following automatic file selection filters,
     grouped under the command Selection Options from the
     Options menu.  These file filter commands are:
 
     o   Manual subdirectory inclusion
     o   Include/exclude files
     o   Attribute exclusions
     o   Date range selection
 
 
     Manual Subdirectory Inclusion
 
     This command is on by default.  This means any time
     you click a directory to select or deselect it (or
     press ENTER when the cursor is on it), all
     subdirectories are also selected or deselected.
 
 
     Including and Excluding Files
 
|    The Include/exclude files process is the only method
|    by which you can save file selections for future
|    backups.  Selecting "Include/exclude" displays a
|    text window where you can enter an unlimited number
|    of statements that list the drives, directories, and
|    files to include or exclude in a backup.  The
|    default is *.* (all files selected).
 
|    CPBackup processes the files on your drive by
|    looking at the include/exclude list.  The applicable
|    backup method is applied to the list of files and
|    then the files are backed up.
 
     TO INCLUDE AND EXCLUDE FILES:
 
 
 
  244  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    1.  Select "Selection options > Include/exclude
|        files" from the Options menu.  The
|        Include/Exclude Files window is displayed.
 
         These are the guidelines for using the list:
 
|        o   You can create an unlimited number of
|            include/exclude statements.  Each statement
|            can define only one specification.
 
         o   If you have multiple drives selected to back
             up, you can enter different specifications
             for each drive.
 
|        o   Check the Include Subdirectories box while
|            creating a specification if you want to back
|            up nested subdirectories contained in the
|            specification.  For example, if your \WORD
|            directory contained subdirectories named
|            \DATA and \LETTERS:
 
         +-----+----------------+-----------------------+
         | PATH|FILE INCLUDE    | WHAT IS BACKED UP     |
         |     | SUBDIRECTORIES?|                       |
         +-----+----------------+-----------------------+
         | C:\W|RD\*.* Yes      | All files contained   |
         |     |                | in \WORD, \WORD\DATA, |
         |     |                | and \WORD\LETTERS     |
         +-----+----------------+-----------------------+
         | C:\W|RD\*.* No       | Only files contained  |
         |     |                | in \WORD              |
         +-----+----------------+-----------------------+
 
         o   For multiple drive backups, each entry must
             begin with the drive letter it applies to;
             otherwise, the entry applies globally (to
             all selected drives).
 
         o   You can use DOS wildcard characters (* and
             ?).
 
|        o   If you do not specify a path, the root
|            directory is used by default.
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  245
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        o   If you do not specify a file, the
|            specification *.* is used by default.
 
     2.  Type the path of the directory you want to
         include or exclude in the Path text box.
 
     3.  Type the file specification for the group or
         type of file you want to include or exclude in
         the File text box.
 
     4.  Select "Include" or "Exclude".
 
     5.  Select "Include Subdirectories" if you want
         CPBackup to apply your designated file
         specification to all subdirectories of the
         directory you specified on the Path line.
 
     6.  Select "Check Path" to have CPBackup ensure that
         every path you have entered in the Path text box
         exists.  When you choose the "Add" or "Replace"
         buttons, the path of your entry is checked and
         if it is not valid, a message prompt advises you
         to enter the correct path.
 
     7.  Select "Log drives and apply selection filters"
         when you want CPBackup to log every drive
         referenced by your entries and want the
         include/exclude filters applied to your files.
 
     8.  Select one of the following:
 
         ADD         Adds the specification as a new
                     statement in the include/exclude
                     list.
 
         REPLACE     Replaces the highlighted statement
                     in the include/exclude list with the
                     new specification.
 
         DELETE      Deletes the highlighted statement in
                     the include/exclude list.
 
 
 
 
  246  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         CLEAR LIST  Deletes all statements in the
                     include/exclude list.
 
     9.  Select "OK" when you have finished creating
         include/exclude statements.
 
     WARNING:  DO NOT ENTER MAPPED DRIVE LETTERS AND
     SERVER\VOLUME NAMES IN THE SAME INCLUDE/EXCLUDE
     LIST.  ERRORS CAN OCCUR AND DRIVES MIGHT NOT BE
     LOGGED.
 
 
     Including and Excluding a Single File or Directory
 
     You can use function keys to automatically add
     include/exclude statements to the include/exclude
     list by doing the following:
 
     1.  Highlight a specific file or directory while
         displaying a selected drive's files and
         directories.
 
     2.  Perform one of the following:
 
         SHIFT+F6    Inserts an include statement in the
                     include/exclude list.
 
         SHIFT+F7    Inserts and exclude statement in the
                     include/exclude list.
 
|        All subdirectories of a directory are selected
|        by this process if you have the Manual
|        Subdirectory Inclusion selection turned on.
 
 
     Attribute Exclusion
 
     The Attribute exclusions command acts as a modifier
     to the Include/Exclude Files command.  For example,
     when you select a directory to back up and "Exclude
     Hidden Files" is marked, no hidden files in that
     directory are backed up.
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  247
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO EXCLUDE FILE ATTRIBUTES:
 
     1.  Select "Selection options > Attribute
         exclusions" from the Options menu.
 
     2.  Select the attributes you want to exclude and
         select "OK".
 
         HIDDEN FILES:  Hidden files (and directories)
         are usually a sign of copy-protection and can be
         position-sensitive on the hard disk.  This means
         if you copy the files off the diskette and onto
         another diskette, they probably will not work
         because of the copy protection.  In the event
         your hard disk crashes, you must reinstall the
         program from the original diskettes.
 
         SYSTEM FILES:  These are your DOS system files
         for example, IBMBIO.COM.  Because they are DOS
         system files, you probably do not need to back
         them up as they are also position-sensitive.
 
         If you are backing up a drive prior to changing
         DOS versions, do not back up the DOS files.  If
         you do, do not restore them.
 
         READ-ONLY FILES:  Files you can open and use but
         not modify in any way.
 
 
     Date Range Selection
 
     Date Range Selection modifies the include/exclude
     entries by letting you select files by date.  Files
     are selected if their dates are within the range set
     by the start and end dates you specify.
 
     TO SET A DATE RANGE:
 
     1.  Select "Selection options > Date range
         selection" from the Options menu.
 
     2.  Select "On".
 
 
  248  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         Date Range Selection is off by default.
 
|    3.  Type the range of dates as follows:
 
|              mm/dd/yyyy
 
|        CPBackup uses the date format that is standard
|        in your country.  For example, the United States
|        uses the format shown above.  Enter the date as
|        you would with the DOS DATE command.
 
     4.  Select "OK".
 
 
  SELECTING FILES MANUALLY
 
|    Manual file selections only apply to your current
|    backup session.  To save file selections in your
|    setup file for future backups, add your selections
|    to the Include/exclude list.
 
     If you are accustomed to displaying your hard
     drive's tree structure to select directories and
     files, you can pop up a directory tree from Express,
     or you can disable Express to use the tree
     exclusively.
 
|    To display the Tree List using the Express window:
 
|    1.  Select "Action" on the Action bar; then, select
|        "Select Files for Backup" from the Action
|        pull-down menu.
 
|        Or, click on "Select Files for Backup".
         __
 
|    By default, all files are unselected.  To apply your
|    selection filters, press the F8 function key while
|    displaying the directory tree and file lists.
 
     NOTE:  Displaying the tree is not available at the
            Beginner user level.
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  249
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     The Tree List lets you select directories and files
     by clicking on each with the mouse, or using the
     TAB, ENTER, UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, LEFT ARROW, and
     RIGHT ARROW to navigate around the tree and select
     files.
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | New artwork is needed for new function keys      |
|    | (Inc/ex and AplyFlt) - TBD.                      |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
     When a directory is active in the Tree List, the
     files contained in that directory appear in the File
     List on the right.  You can select or deselect
     individual files with the mouse by clicking, or with
     the keyboard.
 
|    If you press the F8 key while displaying the
|    directory tree and file lists, the Include/exclude
|    file specifications will overwrite your manual
|    specifications.
 
|    TO SELECT FILES OR DIRECTORIES:
 
|    1.  Select the directories and files you want to
|        back up with the mouse by clicking on them or by
|        using the keyboard:
 
         o   Use LEFT ARROW to move to the previous
             directory at the same level as the current
             directory.
 
         o   Use RIGHT ARROW to move to the following
             directory at the same level as the current
             directory.
 
         o   Scroll the lower-level directories with the
             UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW.
 
         The number of selected directories appears at
         the bottom of the Tree List and the number of
 
 
  250  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         selected files appears at the bottom of the File
         List if you are using the Express Interface.
 
|    2.  If you want to deselect all files and
|        directories, press SHIFT+F8 (ClrTree) while
|        displaying the directory tree and file lists.
 
|        For monochrome users, a bullet appears to the
|        left of each file that is selected.
 
     3.  Press ESC or F10 to return to the Express
         selection window.
 
 
     Disabling Express
 
     The directory tree always appears when you turn off
     the Express interface.  If you prefer, you can
     disable Express so the tree always appears.
 
     TO DISABLE EXPRESS:
 
     1.  Select "Express Interface" from the Configure
         menu.
 
         The Tree List appears for the currently selected
         drive.
 
         The number of selected directories in the Tree
         List and the number of selected files in the
         File List appears at the top if you are not
         using the Express Interface.
 
     2.  Select "Save as Default" from the File menu.
         This makes the Tree and File Lists always
         visible for future sessions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  251
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SELECTING DRIVES TO BACK UP
  ___________________________
 
     CPBackup displays all the storage devices it finds
     (such as hard drives, network drives, and
     Bernoulli(**) drives) in the Backup From list.  You
     can select multiple drives to back up at one time.
     A checkmark appears next to each selected drive in
     the Backup From list.
 
 
  SELECTING LOCAL DRIVES
 
     1.  Select the drive or drives you want to back up
         in the Backup From list box.
 
         Or, select "Backup From" from the Action menu.
         __
 
     2.  Select the drive or drives to back up.
 
         When Express is disabled, additional options
         appear:
 
         ALLOW SINGLE DRIVE BACKUPS:  When selected, all
         drive icons dim except for the currently
         selected drive.  The path box appears so you can
         type a specific path (for example, E:\ACCOUNTS).
         The drive letter appears in the path box if you
         select the drive icon first.
 
         ALLOW MULTIPLE DRIVE BACKUPS:  When selected,
         the path box disappears.  You can then select
         more than one drive to back up.
 
         You cannot specify a path when the drives are
         displayed as server volume names.
 
     3.  Select "OK".
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Bernoulli is a trademark of Iomega Corp.
 
 
  252  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  DISPLAYING MULTIPLE DRIVES WITH EXPRESS DISABLED
 
     The letters of the drives you have selected to back
     up appear in the Settings box when Express is
     disabled.
 
     The currently selected drive's directories appear in
     the directory tree window.
 
     o   Press F4 or + on your numeric keypad to display
         the next drive.
 
     o   Press SHIFT+F4 or - on your numeric keypad to
         display the previous drive.
 
     You will only see the next drive displayed with F4
     if you have more than one drive selected.
 
 
  MULTIPLE-DRIVE BACKUPS
 
     If your system consists of multiple drives, you
     might want to back up all of them during the same
     backup session.  CPBackup processes each drive of a
     multiple-drive backup as separate backup sets.
 
     For example, if you select drives C, D, and E to
     back up, CPBackup prompts you to insert diskette #1.
     After drive C is backed up and the history file is
     written, you are prompted again to insert diskette
     #1 of set #2 .  Do not insert diskette #1 of your
                     _________________________________
     just-completed backup.  Use a new diskette.  This
     ___________________________________________
     diskette becomes the first of the backup set for
     drive D.  This process repeats for each drive of a
     multiple-drive backup.
 
     Similarly, if you use tape, each drive creates a
     separate backup set on the tape.
 
     If you are using low speed, the Fixed or Removable
     Drive and Path options, and backing up multiple
     drives, each drive creates a subdirectory named
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  253
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     X_DRIVE on the destination media (where x=drive
     _                                       _
     letter) that contains the data for each drive.
 
 
  DISPLAYING NOVELL NETWORK DRIVES
 
     If you are connected to a Novell network, you can
     select how you want local and network volumes
     displayed in the Backup From list.  CPBackup
     defaults to displaying drives by drive letters.
 
     Many network volumes are mapped to a drive letter
     that is actually a specific path on a particular
     volume of a particular file server.  For example, if
     you map drive G to the directory
     NOVELL\SYS:ACCTS\RECEIVE, you access that directory
     whenever you type "G:" at the DOS command prompt.
 
     You can select to display the server and volume name
     instead of a drive letter.  By referencing network
     servers by name, you avoid confusion if the network
     drive mappings change.
 
     For example:
 
     +----------------+---------------------------------+
     | THIS DRIVE:    | INDICATES:                      |
     +----------------+---------------------------------+
     | Drive C        | Local DOS drive.                |
     +----------------+---------------------------------+
     | Drive G        | [SYS:ACCTS\RECEIVE] Mapped      |
     |                | drive.                          |
     +----------------+---------------------------------+
     | NOVELL\SYS:    | Single volume on a network      |
     | ACCTS          | drive.                          |
     +----------------+---------------------------------+
 
     Be careful when backing up and restoring files that
     appear as mapped drive letters.  If the mappings
     change after the files are backed up, the files
     might not be restored.
 
 
 
 
  254  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO SELECT TO DISPLAY THE SERVER AND VOLUME NAME
     INSTEAD OF A DRIVE LETTER:
 
     1.  Select "Novell Network > File Selection" from
         the Configure menu.
 
     2.  Select from the following:
 
         DRIVE LETTER:  Displays logical drive letters,
         assigned by the NetWare Map command to a network
         volume.
 
         SERVER\VOLUME:  Displays network drives as true
         network volumes, rather than as logical drive
         letters.
 
         If you want to back up an entire volume on a
         server, select the SERVER\VOLUME option, or make
         sure that the drive mapping for the backup is
         mapped to the root of the volume.  CPBackup
         allows up to 10 server volume drives in a setup
         file.
 
 
  VIEWING FILES
  _____________
 
     CPBackup features viewers for many popular
     applications.  The viewer automatically adjusts to
     display the correct file format (a spreadsheet
     display for spreadsheet files, for example).
     However, the viewer cannot let you edit the contents
     of the file.
 
     Viewing a file can be especially useful if you have
     multiple files with the same names in different
     directories, or you cannot remember the contents of
     a file. CPBackup can view word-processing files;
     spreadsheet files; database files; graphics files,
     and binary files, which contain executable code.
 
     TO VIEW SPECIFIC FILES:
 
     1.  Select the file you want to view.
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  255
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  Press F2 (QView).
 
|    Use the online help available for this optional tool
|    to see how to use the function keys when using the
|    Central Point Backup viewer.
 
 
  WORKING WITH SETUP FILES
  ________________________
 
     CPBackup comes with several preconfigured setup
     files.  One, named WEEKLY.SET, does a full backup of
     all files on the first hard drive of your computer
     system, which is usually drive C.  Other
     preconfigured setup files include SPREAD.SET, which
     backs up Lotus 1-2-3(**), Excel(**), and Quattro(**)
     files on your first hard drive; and WORDPROC.SET,
     which backs up many word-processing documents from
     applications such as Microsoft Word(**),
     WordPerfect(**), Lotus Write/Ami(**), and Lotus Ami
     Pro(**).  The database set, DATABASE.SET, backs up
     files with extensions .DB, .DBF, .NDX, .IDX, .PX,
     and .DTF.
 
     Select the setup file you want to use from the Setup
     Files drop-down list.  You can modify the setup file
     to further customize it for your system and backup
     needs.  If you make changes, select the "Save Setup"
     button to save the new information.
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Lotus 1-2-3, Write/Ami, and Lotus AmiPro are trademarks of Samna
      Corporation.
 
  (**) Quattro is a trademark of Borland International, Inc.
 
  (**) Microsoft is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
 
  (**) WordPerfect is a trademark of WordPerfect Corporation.
 
  (**) Excel is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
 
 
  256  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Follow steps 3 through 7, beginning in "Backing Up
     All Files" on page 240.
 
     Setup files offer a way to save your selections for
     future use without having to go through repetitious
     configurations.  You can load these setup files from
     the command line or from within CPBackup.
 
     NOTE:  You must have setup files to schedule
            unattended backups with the Scheduler.
 
     You can use setup files with all operations--backup,
     compare, and restore--to instantly configure
     CPBackup to the specifications contained in that
     setup file.  This is especially important if you
     want to compare or restore a backup where you might
     not remember all the details about the setup you
     used at the time.
 
     A setup file processes the files on your hard drive
     according to the criteria contained in that setup
     file.  Although you can always see all files and
     directories on your hard drive when the Tree List is
     displayed, only the highlighted ones are used during
     a backup, compare, or restore.
 
     The information contained in a setup file includes
     the settings for the following commands:
 
     o   Setup description
|    o   Backup from (all selected drives)
     o   Back up to (media size)
     o   Server/volume or Drive Mappings display
     o   Backup speed (high, medium, or low)
     o   Backup method (full, incremental, differential,
         full copy, separate incremental, or virus scan)
|    o   Reporting (to file, printer, or none)
|    o   All include/exclude statements
     o   Attribute exclusions
     o   Date range selections
     o   Overwrite warning (on or off)
     o   Compression
|    o   Display options
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  257
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   Error correction (on or off)
     o   Data encryption (on or off, and the type)
     o   Formatting options
     o   Save history (on or off)
     o   Verification option
|    o   Virus detection (on or off)
     o   Exit when complete
 
 
  DEFINING AND SAVING SETUP FILES
 
     The Save Setup commands let you define and save
     multiple backup types and options.
 
|    SAVE SETUP AS:  Saves the settings and
|    include/exclude statements you make during a backup
|    session with a specific file name and .SET as the
|    extension.
 
|    SAVE SETUP:  Saves all current settings and
|    include/exclude statements without prompting you for
|    a setup name (thus overwriting the current setup
|    file).  If there is not a current setup file, the
|    Save Setup command defaults to a setup file name of
|    Untitled.
 
     NOTE:  The Save Setup commands are not available at
            the Beginner user level.
 
|    If you save setup files with include/exclude file
|    statements, then another file with a .INX extension
|    is also saved with its parent .SET file.
 
     If you are backing up server\volumes to a QIC-format
     tape, be sure to turn on the Save History command.
     This ensures the name of the server\volume is saved
     with the backup information on your hard disk.
     Because of the QIC-format design, server\volume
     names cannot be saved on the tape itself.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  258  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SAVING SETUP FILES
 
     1.  Select "Save Setup" (also available as Save
         setup As from the File menu).
 
     2.  Enter the name to use for this backup
         configuration.
 
     3.  Enter a description of this setup file, using up
         to 32 characters.
 
     4.  Select "OK".
 
|    WARNING: WHEN YOU SAVE FILES, ALL THE MANUAL FILE
|    SPECIFICATIONS IN THESE FILES ARE LOST.  TO SAVE
|    YOUR CHANGES, YOU MUST USE THE INCLUDE/EXCLUDE
|    COMMAND TO ENTER ALL OF YOUR SPECIFICATIONS.
 
 
  LOADING SETUP FILES
 
     Load setup lets you select and load a previously
     saved backup configuration.  If you have saved setup
     files from previous versions of CPBackup, you can
     load and use them with this command.
 
     TO LOAD SETUP FILES:
 
     1.  Click on "Setup".
 
         Or, select "Load setup" from the File menu.
         __
 
     2.  Select the setup file to use for this session,
         and select "OK".
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  259
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  USING PRECONFIGURED SETUP FILES
 
     CPBackup includes several preconfigured setup files.
     One, named WEEKLY.SET, does a complete backup of all
     the files on the first hard drive of your computer
     system, which is usually drive C.  Another file,
     DAILY.SET, backs up only those files that have
     changed since the last full backup.
 
     The following table shows other preconfigured setup
     files:
 
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | PRESET FILE NAM| FILES BACKED UP|                |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | DATABASE.SET   | *.DB           | *.DTF          |
     |                | *.DBF          | *.RBF          |
     |                | *.NDX          | *.PX           |
     |                | *.IDX          |                |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | SPREAD.SET     | *.XL*          | *.CAL          |
     |                | *.WK*          | *.WQ*          |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
     | WORDPROC.SET   | *.DO*          | *.JW           |
     |                | *.STY          | *.SAM          |
     |                | *.WP*          | *.TXT          |
     |                | *.WRI          |                |
     +----------------+----------------+----------------+
 
     Use these setup files as a foundation to customize
     for your particular needs and system.  Be sure to
     save any modifications you make.
 
 
  SCHEDULING BACKUPS
 
     The Scheduler button and the Schedule Backups
     command use Central Point Scheduler, which is an
     application that lets you schedule backups without
     monitoring the procedure.  Scheduler can also be
     used whenever you want to schedule any program to
     run automatically at a specified time.  For example,
     you might want to run a program that has to be
 
 
  260  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     compiled.  You can set up a batch file first and
     then schedule it to run automatically when you are
     not using your computer.  This is especially useful
     for backing up to tape drives, removable cartridges,
     or to a network volume.
 
     NOTE:  The Schedule Backups command is not available
            at the Beginner user level.
 
     Scheduler provides a 15-second warning before it
     runs the scheduled backup in case you are in the
     middle of an application that you do not want
     interrupted.  When the backup is complete, Scheduler
     returns to the application you were running.
 
|    The memory-resident program, CPSCHED, must be
     _____________________________________________
|    resident in order to launch CPBACKUP at the
     ___________________________________________
|    scheduled time.  You can arrange to have CPSCHED
     ________________________________________________
|    load each time you start your computer by placing
     _________________________________________________
|    this statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  If you
     _________________________________________________
|    chose not to have CPSCHED automatically load, you
     _________________________________________________
|    must load CPSCHED prior to any scheduled backups.
     _________________________________________________
 
     To load CPSCHED, from the DOS command prompt, type:
 
           cpsched
 
     For complete instructions on how to schedule events,
     such as scheduling a backup, see -- Heading 'SCHE'
     unknown --.
 
     +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
     | These cross reference to sections not available  |
     | in this beta will be fixed when the entire book  |
     | is formatted.                                    |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  261
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Unattended Backups
 
     When you want the backup to run, be sure the
     computer is on, CPSCHED is loaded, and a tape is in
     the drive.  CPBackup performs the backup at the
     specified time and returns the machine to the state
     it was in prior to the backup.
 
     If the setup file used in the scheduled backup has a
     description, that description also becomes the
     description of that backup.  Otherwise, the backup
     has the name "Unattended Backup."
 
     o   If CPBackup is launched from a batch file and
         the backup progresses without interruption,
         control is returned automatically to the batch
         file to execute the next command.
 
     o   If CPBackup is launched from the command line
         with a setup file or from Scheduler, then
         Express is automatically disabled to conserve
         memory.  This means the directory tree and file
         list is always visible on screen.  Any automatic
         backup (scheduled or run from the command line)
         answers the default button in any window that
         appears.  At the beginning of tape backups, a
         window appears, showing the tape contents and
         offers options to "Append" or "Erase" the tape.
         For all backup methods, except "Full/Erase
         Tape", the default button is "Append", which is
         what happens in automatic tape backups.
 
 
  COMPARING DATA
  ______________
 
     After performing a backup, compare your hard disk
     data with the data contained on your backup media.
     This comparison is an extra measure of security so
     that you are sure the data contained on your backup
     disks or tapes matches the files on your hard drive
     and is restorable.
 
 
 
 
  262  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Use Compare whenever you make changes to your
     hardware configuration or backup settings, or when
     you use new media.
 
|    You can have CPBackup perform an automatic
|    comparison by selecting "AutoCompare" from the
|    Options menu.
 
 
  COMPARING YOUR BACKUP TO THE ORIGINAL DATA
 
     If you used a setup file when doing the backup, use
     the same setup file for the comparison, so all the
     settings are identical.  You have the opportunity to
     start a comparison immediately after a backup is
     complete.
 
     Compare saves a report of the comparison results
     automatically if you have turned on the Reporting
     command.
 
     TO COMPARE YOUR BACKUP TO THE ORIGINAL DATA:
 
     1.  Select "Compare" from the main selection window
         (or "Compare" from the Action menu).
 
|    2.  Select the setup file (if any) from the Setup
|        list used to create the backup you want to
|        compare to.  This is necessary if you are doing
|        a comparison at a time other than immediately
|        after a backup.
 
     3.  Select "History" and select the history file of
         the backup set containing the data you want to
         compare.
 
         Or, highlight the history file you want, press
         __
         the SPACEBAR to load the history file, and press
         ENTER to display the history tree.
 
         Or, use the "Retrieve History" button if the
         __
         history file you want to compare is not in the
         History list.
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  263
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         Double-click on a drive icon in the Compare To
         list to display a text box, and type a specific
         path to compare to or press ENTER.
 
     4.  Select "Start Compare".
 
         If you used a password when the backup was
         originally performed, you see a prompt to enter
         it now.  Also, if you encrypted the data, you
|        are prompted for the encryption key.  For online
         help about Data Encryption, select this item
         from the Options menu and then press F1 for
         online help.
 
     5.  Insert the first diskette or tape of your backup
                    _____
         set.  Continue to insert diskettes or tapes as
         prompted.
 
         At the conclusion of the comparison, the results
         are displayed.
 
 
  DISPLAYING THE COMPARED FILES
 
     If some of your files do not match, it is easy to
     see which ones they are.  The icons next to each
     mismatched file indicate why the file did not
     compare.  (See the symbol table that follows.)
 
     TO DISPLAY THE COMPARED FILES:
 
     Double-click on the history file you just compared.
 
     Or, press the TAB key until you get to the History
     __
     list and then press ENTER.
 
     Windows updates certain files every time you exit
     from Windows.  Therefore, if you back up with the
     Windows version of CPBackup, exit from Windows, and
     then use either version to compare the backup.  Some
     of the backed-up files from your Windows directory
     will never compare with the original files on the
 
 
 
  264  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     hard disk.  These files include most of the .GRP
     files, and some .INI files, including PROGMAN.INI.
 
     COMPARE SYMBOLS:  The symbol next to each file icon
     indicates how that file compared with the original
     file.
 
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     | SYMBOL| WHAT IT MEANS                            |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     |   =   | The backup file was identical to the     |
     |       | hard disk file.                          |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     |   x   | The backup file did not match the hard   |
     |       | disk file, although the date and time    |
     |       | stamps matched.                          |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
 
     The following symbols can appear (in addition to the
     above symbols) if you are doing a comparison at a
     time other than immediately after a backup
 
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     | SYMBOL| WHAT IT MEANS                            |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     |   <   | The backup file did not match the hard   |
     |       | disk file, and the date/time stamp was   |
     |       | older.                                   |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     |   >   | The backup file did not match the hard   |
     |       | disk file, and the date/time stamp was   |
     |       | newer.                                   |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     |   s   | The backup file matched the hard disk    |
     |       | file, but the date/time stamp was        |
     |       | different.                               |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
     |   -   | The backup file was missing from the     |
     |       | hard disk.                               |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  265
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     No symbol next to a file means that the file has not
     been compared (for example, if you are not comparing
     all files on your hard disk).
 
 
  RESTORING DATA
  ______________
 
     CPBackup can restore an entire hard disk or
     specifically selected files and directories.  You
     can restore files that were backed up on one machine
     to a different machine, or restore files to a
     previous state.
 
     All the restore functions available in Express are
     also available when Express is disabled.  For each
     command button of Express, there is a corresponding
     menu command on the Action menu when in Restore
     mode.  To perform a restore or search a history
     file, select the appropriate command from the Action
     menu.  To retrieve, rebuild, or print a history
     file, select "Choose directories" from the Action
     menu.
 
 
  FULL RESTORE
 
|    If you experience a hard disk crash and need to
|    reformat, you must install DOS and CPBackup again
|    before you can start your restore.
 
     If you are restoring multiple drives, you must
     restore each drive individually.  If you are
     restoring network volumes, see "Performing Network
     Backups" on page 269.
 
     It is important to restore your files using the same
     speed as the original backup.  For example, if you
     backed up your files using low speed, you must
     restore your files at that speed.
 
     If you are accustomed to using a mouse, reinstall
     your mouse drivers before running CPBackup.
 
 
 
  266  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO PERFORM A FULL RESTORE OF YOUR SYSTEM:
 
     1.  From the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               cpbackup
 
         and then press ENTER.
 
         Because this is the first time you are using
         CPBackup after installing it on your hard disk,
         you must configure it again.
 
     2.  Select "Restore" after configuration.
 
     3.  Select "Retrieve History".
 
         Or, if Express is disabled, select "Choose
         __
         Directories" from the Action menu.
 
     4.  When prompted, insert the last diskette or the
         requested tape of the backup set.
 
         The history file is read from the backup and the
         history name and backup date appear in the
         History drop-down list.
 
         To select the restore destination, double-click
         on a drive icon in the Restore To list box to
         display a text box.  Then, type a specific path
         to restore to, or press ENTER.
 
     5.  Select "Start Restore".
 
     6.  When prompted, insert the first diskette or tape
         of your backup set.
 
         The progress of the restore process appears on
         the screen.
 
     7.  Continue to insert disks or tapes until the
         restore is complete.
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  267
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     It is normal for the drive light to stay on
     continuously while restoring at high and medium
     speed.  You will not damage your disks by inserting
     or removing them when you are prompted to do so,
     even when the drive light is on.
 
     OVERWRITE WARNING:  If this warning is on, a window
     appears when the directory containing your newly
     restored CPBackup files is detected.  Select "Skip
     this file" and "Repeat for all Later Files" to avoid
     overwriting the files.
 
     Be especially careful if you are restoring a backup
     ___________________________________________________
     that might contain an older version of DOS than what
     ____________________________________________________
     is currently on your hard drive.
     ________________________________
 
     If you are restoring a directory with attributes
     that are different than the existing directory, an
     overwrite warning appears.
 
     If your backup method is incremental, you only need
     to do a single restore because all incremental
     backups are appended automatically to the parent
     full backup, and only the most current files are
     selected to restore.
 
 
  PRINTING A DIRECTORY FROM A HISTORY FILE
 
     Use the Print History command from the File menu to
     print the directory of a backup set to a disk file
     or to a printer.
 
|    If you send the directory to a file, you can view
|    the directory when the File List is displayed in
|    Backup mode.  The file is named YYMMDD.RPB.
 
     TO PRINT A DIRECTORY FROM A HISTORY FILE:
 
     1.  Select the history file you want to print from
         the History list.
 
     2.  Select "Print History".
 
 
  268  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  PERFORMING NETWORK BACKUPS
  __________________________
 
     Central Point CPBackup allows you to back up files
     between your personal workstation, Local Area
     Networks (LANs), and networks such as Novell
     NetWare.
 
 
  BACKING UP THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK
 
     If you are connected to a Local Area Network and
     have write access to the LAN, you can back up your
     workstation files to the LAN drives (if backups are
     permitted).
 
     Or, you can back up LAN drives the same way you back
     up your own workstation drives, by specifying the
     full path of the LAN drive.
 
     Before you back up files from a specified path, make
     sure that the Express Interface is disabled and
     there are no Novell Network Server/Volumes
     designated.  If the box does not provide a path,
     select "Allow Single Drive Backups" because you
     cannot specify a path with a multiple drive backup.
 
 
  BACKING UP WORKSTATION DATA
 
|    A workstation user can back up the data on a hard
|    drive to a directory on the network.
 
     TO BACK UP TO A NETWORK DIRECTORY:
 
     1.  Create a subdirectory named FULL on the network
         and do a full backup, either weekly or monthly,
         to that directory.  This subdirectory should be
         a subdirectory of your \HOME directory.
 
     2.  Create two subdirectories named DAILY1 and
         DAILY2 on the same volume.
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  269
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         Alternate daily differential or separate
         incremental backups to the two DAILY
         directories.
 
         By creating the three directories, you avoid the
         problem of overwriting the three files that
         CPBackup writes that contain your data and
         information about the backup.  These three files
         are:
 
         o   CPBACKUP.001, which contains your backed-up
             data.
         o   CPBACKUP.DIR, which contains the directory
             of the backed up data.
         o   CPBACKUP.INF, which contains boot record
             information.
 
         Normal network security is in effect during a
         backup.  This means each user must have rights
         to read from and write to the drive and
         directory specified.
 
     3.  Select the data you want to back up.
 
     4.  Click the "Backup To" drop-down list and select
         "Fixed Drive".
 
         or
         __
 
         Select "Choose Drive and Media" from the
         Configure menu and then select "Fixed Drive and
         Path".
 
     5.  Enter the path as a destination, and select
         "OK".
 
         To enter a server\volume name, turn on the
         Server\Volume option in the File Selection
         window, which is under "Novell Network" from the
         Configure menu.
 
     6.  Select "Save Setup" to save the settings for
         future use.
 
 
  270  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     7.  Select "Start Backup".
 
     You can use the Scheduler command to schedule a
     backup of your data to the network after you go home
     for the day.  See "Scheduling Backups" on page 260.
 
 
  BACKING UP NOVELL NETWORKS
 
     CPBackup can back up data to a network directory or
     to a SCSI device or QIC-02/36 tape device attached
     to the server.  You can display server\volumes by
     name or as drive letters mapped to specific paths.
 
     As a network supervisor, you can back up and restore
     the network data.
 
 
|    Retry on Busy File
 
|    If you are attempting to back up a file that is
|    locked or in use by someone else, you can instruct
|    CPBackup to keep trying to back up the file or skip
|    the file.
 
|    If you activate this option and, if during a backup
|    CPBackup encounters a busy file, the backup stops
|    for as long as the file is busy.  No other files are
|    backed up while CPBackup is in the retry mode.
 
|    TO ACTIVATE THE RETRY ON BUSY OPTION:
 
|    1.  Select "Novell Network - Retry on Busy" from the
|        Configure menu.  The Novell Network File Busy
|        window is displayed.
 
|    2.  Select one of the following:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  271
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        OPTION                     ACTION
 
|        RETRY EVERY n MINUTES      Specify how often you
                     _
|                                   want the busy file
|                                   accessed to back it
|                                   up.  This number must
|                                   be a whole number (1
|                                   - 600).  No decimal
|                                   points are accepted.
 
|        RETRY UNTIL NOT BUSY       Specifies that
|                                   CPBackup is to
|                                   continue trying to
|                                   access a busy file
|                                   until it is no longer
|                                   busy.  When the file
|                                   is no longer busy, it
|                                   is backed.
 
|        DO NOT RETRY               Specifies that busy
|                                   files be skipped by
|                                   CPBackup  This is the
|                                   default.
 
|        TOTAL RETRY TIME           Specifies how long
|                                   you want CPBackup to
|                                   continue to attempt
|                                   to backup a busy
|                                   file.  You can
|                                   specify 9 hours and
|                                   60 minutes.
 
 
|    Backing Up and Restoring Bindery Files and Trustee Information
 
|    Backing up and restoring bindery files and trustee
|    information is supported by SCSI tape drives only.
|    You must have administrative authority to perform
|    this function.
 
|    TO BACK UP BINDERY FILES AND TRUSTEE INFORMATION:
 
 
 
 
  272  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    1.  Select "Novell - Bindery Trustee" from the
|        Configure menu.  The Novell Network window is
|        displayed.
 
|    2.  Select one of the following:
 
|        SELECTION                               ACTION
 
|        BACK UP BINDERY INFORMATION             This
|                                                selection
|                                                effects
|                                                a back
|                                                up of
|                                                the
|                                                bindery;
|                                                the
|                                                database
|                                                that
|                                                contains
|                                                the
|                                                network
|                                                user
|                                                lists
|                                                and the
|                                                groups
|                                                they
|                                                belong
|                                                to on
|                                                the
|                                                network.
|                                                The
|                                                bindery
|                                                consists
|                                                of
|                                                permanent,
|                                                hidden
|                                                system
|                                                files
|                                                that are
|                                                always
|                                                located
|                                                in the
|                                                SYS:SYSTEM
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  273
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|                                                directory.
|                                                Refer to
|                                                the
|                                                documentation
|                                                that
|                                                comes
|                                                with
|                                                your
|                                                network
|                                                software
|                                                for more
|                                                information.
 
|        BACK UP TRUSTEE INFORMATION             This
|                                                selection
|                                                effects
|                                                a back
|                                                up of
|                                                the
|                                                assigned
|                                                rights
|                                                of every
|                                                selected
|                                                file.
 
|    3.  Select "OK"
 
|    TO RESTORE BINDERY/TRUSTEE INFORMATION:
 
|    1.  Select "Restore" on the Main CPBackup window.
|        The Restore window is displayed.
 
|    2.  Make adjustments using the choices on the
|        Restore window as needed.
 
|    3.  Select "Start Restore".
 
|        During Restore the catalog file of the backup
|        set is opened and checked for bindery, trustee
|        information, and directory information.  The
|        Novell Network window is displayed; prompting
|        for confirmation of the files that have been
|        found.
 
 
  274  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Select the files you want restored.
 
|    5.  Select "OK".
 
 
  TAPE DRIVE INFORMATION
  ______________________
 
     CPBackup supports a variety of tape drives, ranging
     from those that connect to a floppy controller card
     to multiple-gigabyte SCSI drives.  The most common
     type of tape drive for single-user PCs is the
     mini-cartridge drive, which encompasses the QIC
     standard as well as proprietary formats.
     Mini-cartridges are quarter-inch tapes, generally
|    known as DC-2000 or DC-2120, and can hold up to
     250MB of compressed data.
 
     Many drives that are sold as 120MB or 250MB capacity
     actually are referring to the capacity of the tape
     when data compression is used.  How much the data is
     compressed depends a great deal on the data itself.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  275
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  FLOPPY OR SECONDARY CONTROLLER CARD AND QIC DRIVES
 
     CPBackup is compatible with the following tape
     drives:
 
|    The following lists of tape drives represent those
|    that have been tested with this product.  If you do
|    not find your tape drive among these lists, it is
|    recommended that you check with your manufacturer to
|    ensure compatibility.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) Compaq is a trademark of Compaq Computer Corporation
 
  (**) Iomega is a trademark of Iomega Corp.
 
 
  276  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Aiwa TD803                  Irwin Accutrac A250
|    Aiwa TD811                  Irwin DC 2000 Series:  Model 2040 (40MB)
|    Alloy 120                   Irwin DC 2000 Series:  Model 2080 (80MB)
|    Alloy Retriever 40/60       Irwin SXe 120/250
|    Alloy Retriever 60e         Irwin SX 5540 and 5580
|    Alloy Retriever 125c        Mountain Filesafe FS-4000
|    Alloy Retriever 250c        Mountain Filesafe FS-8000
|    ArchiveXL 5580i             Mountain Filesafe TD-4000
|    Archive 5540                Mountain Filesafe TD-4340
|    ArchiveXL 5580e             Mountain Filesafe TD-4440
|    Backtrax 80MB               Mountain Filesafe TD-8000
|    CMS Tape 40/INT             Mountain 4400
|    CMS T2120AT                 Procom 80MB
|    Colorado DJ-10 (Jumbo 120)  Summit SE 120
|    Colorado DJ-20 (Jumbo 250)  Summit SE 250
|    Colorado KE-10              Sysgen Valuestor 250
|    Colorado KE-15              Tallgrass FS120
|    Colorado KE-15              Tallgrass FS300
|    Compaq(**)                  Tallgrass TG1140
|    Internal 40MB               Tallgrass FileSecure 80
|    Compaq Internal 80MB        Tecmar MiniVault 120i
|    EdisonTech 40MB             Tecmar MiniVault 120e
|    IBM PS/2 Internal Tape BackuTecmar MiniVault 250i
|    Identity 120                Tecmar MiniVault 250e
|    Identity 120e               Tecmar QT-40e
|    Identity 80i                Tecmar QT-40i
|    Insight 125/250             Tecmar QT-80e
|    Insight 80i                 Tecmar QT-80
|    Iomega(**) Tape 250MB       Wangtek 3040
|    Irwin 445                   Wangtek 3080
|    Irwin 485                   Wangtek FAD 3500
|    Irwin 745                   Well-Tech (Colorado drive for Toshiba(00) T5200)
|    Irwin 785
|    Irwin Accutrac A120
 
     If you use a tape drive that is connected to your
     high-speed floppy controller card, you cannot access
     the floppy drives during the tape backup.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  277
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SCSI TAPE DRIVES
 
     CPBackup is compatible with the following SCSI tape
     drives:
 
|    Archive Turbo Python (2.0GB)Tandberg 3620
|    Archive Python (2.0GB)      Tandberg 3640
|    Archive Viper 2060 (60MB)   Tandberg 3660 (150MB)
|    Archive Viper 2125 (125MB)  Tandberg 3820 (525MB)
|    Archive Viper 2150 (150MB)  Tandberg 4120 (1.0GB)
|    Archive Viper 2525 (525MB)  Tandberg 4220 (2.0GB)
|    Exabyte 8200Sx (2.0GB)      Teac MT-01 (250MB)
|    Exabyte 8200 (2.0GB)        WangDAT 1300 (2.0GB)
|    Exabyte 8500 (5GB)          WangDAT 3200 (2.0GB)
|    Exabyte 8505 (5GB)          Wangtek 5525ES (525MB)
|    Exabyte 850c (5GB)          Wangtek 7200HS (2.2GB)
|    Exabyte 4200 (2.0GB)
 
 
  TAPE FORMATTING (NON-SCSI)
 
     Formatting a tape is a process that is required only
     once; however, it is a good idea to purchase
     preformatted and certified tape cartridges.  This is
     not only more convenient for you, but also saves
     time during a backup.  CPBackup can format a tape
     during a backup, if necessary, but the time involved
     is considerable.  Use "Format" on the Tape Tools
     menu to format a tape before you use it.
 
     Every tape must have two things done to it before it
     is ready to use:
 
     o   FORMATTED (INITIALIZED):  Formatting lays out
         data tracks and maps them for the read/write
         mechanism.  This process is very similar to
         formatting a diskette.  Formatting a tape is not
         the same as erasing a tape.  Erasing deletes
         data from the tape; formatting lays out the data
         tracks that the data is stored on.
 
     o   CERTIFIED:  Verifies the tape by checking for
         bad blocks and locking them out (similar to DOS
 
 
  278  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
         locking out bad sectors on a diskette).  This is
         done last.
 
     An Irwin-formatted tape has one additional process
     done to it before it is formatted and certified:
 
     SERVO-WRITTEN:  Writes permanent information to the
     tape.  This information is precisely placed along
     the track so the tape drive's read/write mechanism
     is guided along the proper data tracks.  This is
     usually a one-time-only procedure.  If a tape ever
     needs to be servo-written again, bulk-erase the tape
     first.
 
     The following table shows the approximate time it
     takes to fully format various non-SCSI tapes.  The
     third and fifth columns refer to special tapes that
     can be formatted to greater capacity.  These tapes
     are marked "XL," which means they have extra length.
     If you buy a 40MB tape marked XL, you can format it
     to hold 60MB of data.  Similarly, if you buy an 80MB
     XL tape, you can format it to hold 120MB of data.
 
     +------+----------+----------+----------+----------+
     | PROCE|URE  40MB |  40MB XL |     80MB |  80MB XL |
     |      | NON-SCSI | NON-SCSI | NON-SCSI | NON-SCSI |
     |      |     TAPE |     TAPE |     TAPE |     TAPE |
     +------+----------+----------+----------+----------+
     | Servo|wri36emin |   54 min |   51 min |   76 min |
     | (Irwi|          |          |          |          |
     | only)|          |          |          |          |
     +------+----------+----------+----------+----------+
     | Forma|ted18 min |   27 min |   33 min |   50 min |
     +------+----------+----------+----------+----------+
     | Certi|ied18 min |   27 min |   33 min |   49 min |
     +------+----------+----------+----------+----------+
     | Total|:  36 min |   54 min |   66 min |   99 min |
     +------+----------+----------+----------+----------+
     | Total|   72 min |  108 min |  117 min |  175 min |
     | with |          |          |          |          |
     | servo|write:    |          |          |          |
     +------+----------+----------+----------+----------+
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  279
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     These times are based on a 500 Kbps (kilobits per
     second) data rate that a high-density diskette
     controller uses, such as those found in AT-class
     machines.  All times should be doubled if done at
     the 250 Kbps rate used by low-density diskette
     controllers, such as those found in XT-class
     machines.  All times should be halved if using a
     high-speed 1000 Kbps controller card.
 
     If you insert a blank tape, CPBackup first rewinds
     the tape and attempts to read the tape header.  If
     that is unsuccessful, the tape is retensioned and
     you have the opportunity to format the tape, insert
     a new tape, or cancel.
 
 
  QIC FORMAT AND FULL-SCREEN CPBACKUP FORMAT
 
     CPBackup supports the standard QIC-40/80 format for
     tapes and the proprietary Full-Screen CPBackup
     format.  There are some differences between the
     Full-Screen CPBackup format and QIC, which are
     summarized in the following table.
 
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | QIC                     | FULL-SCREEN CPBACKUP   |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Freely interchangeable  | Proprietary format can |
     | with other QIC format   | only be restored with  |
     | backup programs.        | CPBackup               |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Writes directory        | Writes directory       |
     | information at the      | information at the end |
     | beginning of the backup | of the backup.         |
     | set.                    |                        |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
 
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (*) Micro Channel is a trademark of IBM Corporation.
 
 
  280  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | QIC                     | FULL-SCREEN CPBACKUP   |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Supports all backup     | Supports all backup    |
     | methods but incremental | methods.               |
     | because of placement of |                        |
     | directory.              |                        |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | Might have to insert    | Only needs the         |
     | every tape of a         | specific tape of a     |
     | multiple-tape backup to | multiple-tape backup   |
     | restore a single file.  | to restore a single    |
     |                         | file.                  |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | If the first tape       | If last tape (where    |
     | (where directory is     | directory is stored)   |
     | stored) of a            | of a multiple-tape     |
     | multiple-tape backup is | backup is lost, but    |
     | lost, no data is        | the history is on the  |
     | recovered from any of   | hard disk, all data up |
     | the remaining tapes     | to the missing last    |
     | (even if a history file | tape is recovered.  As |
     | exists on the hard      | long as a directory    |
     | disk).  You cannot      | exists (on tape or     |
     | restore any data        | hard disk), all data   |
     | contained on tapes      | is recovered except    |
     | beyond the missing      | what was contained on  |
     | tape.  (Example:  If    | the missing tape.      |
     | tape #3 of a six-tape   |                        |
     | backup is lost, only    |                        |
     | the data on tapes 1 and |                        |
     | 2 can be restored.)     |                        |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
 
     There is no significant performance increase of one
     format over the other, and both formats use about
     the same amount of space on the tape (all things
     being equal such as method and compression).
 
     After a tape is formatted as QIC, it does not need
     to be reformatted as Full-Screen CPBackup because
     the low-level formatting is identical.  There is one
     exception to this--non-SX Irwin tape drives.  These
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  281
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     drives use special servo-writing (described
     previously) which is not QIC-compatible.  The Irwin
     SX series of tape drives is QIC-compatible.
 
     Be aware that using encryption on a backup set
     written to a QIC tape makes that backup set
     unrestorable by other QIC-compatible backup
     programs.
 
     If you are backing up server\volumes to a QIC-format
     tape, be sure the Save History command is on.  This
     ensures the name of the server\volume is saved with
     the backup information on your hard disk.  Because
     of the way QIC format was designed, server\volume
     names cannot be saved on the tape itself.
 
 
  TAPE CONTROLLER CARD TECHNICAL INFORMATION
 
     CPBackup supports various manufacturers' floppy and
     tape controller cards.  In many cases, the card is
     recognized and used with no information required
     from you.  However, some cards require special
     parameters to be set the first time you use CPBackup
     so the card is recognized for future backups.  This
     is saved in the default configuration file.  This
     section details the various cards that require this
     special information.
 
     Adapter cards connect between the primary diskette
     controller and the diskette and tape drives.
     CPBackup automatically detects the following cards
     when you select "Search" with the Define Equipment
     command.
 
     o   Archive XL20A
     o   Colorado AB-10
     o   Irwin 4251
 
     SECONDARY TAPE CONTROLLER CARDS SUPPORTED (MICRO
     CHANNEL):  It is not necessary to specify any
     address information for these cards:
 
 
 
  282  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   Irwin 4100MC
     o   Mountain MACH2 (Micro Channel(*))
     o   Tecmar MCA Floppy Tape Controller
 
     SECONDARY TAPE CONTROLLER CARDS SUPPORTED (ISA):
     The following tape controller cards, which are
     Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) must have the
     I/O port address, IRQ channel, and the DMA channel
     specified.
 
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | TAPE DRIVE              |  ADDR |   IRQ  |  DMA  |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Alloy FTFA Controller   |  340  |    3   |   2   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Colorado FC-10          |  180  |    3   |   2   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Colorado TC-15          |  180  |    3   |   2   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Compaq Expansion        |  370  |    6   |   2   |
     | Chassis #1075-70-001    |       |        |       |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
|    | Iomega PC10p            |  370  |    3   |   1   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
|    | Archive/Irwin 4100A/M   |  370  |    6   |   2   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Mountain MACH2          |  3E7  |    5   |   3   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Summit Accelerator      |  3E7  |    5   |   3   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Tecmar QT               |  300  |    3   |   1   |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
     | Wangtek Lightning       |  300  |    3   |   1   |
     | Thunderbolt             |       |        |       |
     +-------------------------+-------+--------+-------+
 
     The addresses listed are the factory settings of the
     cards.  If you have altered these settings in any
     way, you must specify the values you have set so
     CPBackup can recognize the card.
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  283
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     You can specify settings by entering the correct
     values in the Tape Configuration window, which you
     access with the Define Equipment command.
 
|    The Colorado FC-10 and TC-15 are jumperless
|    controllers and are not fixed at the rates shown in
|    the above table.  If CPBackup does not find your
|    tape driver, reconfigure and try one of the
|    following sets of value until it does find the tape
|    drive:
 
|    o   180-3-2
|    o   300-6-1
|    o   300-6-2
|    o   370-6-2
 
 
  SYNCHRONIZING THE VOLUME TAPE CONTENT (VTC) FILES
 
     During the SCSI configuration of CPBackup, a window
     appears.
 
     The options that appear in this window can vary,
     depending on the type of SCSI adapter card you have.
 
     A *.VTC (volume tape catalog) file is written to
     your hard disk after the backup process for each
     SCSI tape used, and is subsequently updated after
     each backup.
 
     When the Resync Volume Table before each Backup
     option is on, which is the default setting, the
     *.VTC file on your hard disk is updated with the
     *.VTC file on the tape before the tape directory
     appears on your screen.  This process is
     time-consuming because the tape must be rewound and
     searched for the last *.VTC file.
 
     If you use a tape for a single PC, and you are the
     only one using that tape, you can safely turn off
     the Resync Volume Table before each Backup option
     because your *.VTC files are always identical.
 
 
 
  284  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Turning off this option saves time by not having to
     rewind the tape and search for the last *.VTC file.
 
     However, if multiple users are backing up to the
     same tape, it is essential that the Resync Volume
     Table before each Backup option is on.  This ensures
     that the *.VTC file on each user's hard disk always
     displays the actual directory of the tape.
 
     If there is any doubt about the contents of a SCSI
     tape, select the "Catalog" button in the Tape
     Directory window, which automatically compares and
     updates the VTC files.
 
 
  BACKUP STRATEGIES
  _________________
 
     Backing up your data depends in good measure on how
     frequently that data changes.  Consider the
     following questions:
 
     o   How valuable are my files to me or my business?
     o   How many of my files change on a daily basis?
     o   How long would it take to replace those files if
         something happened to them?
 
     CPBackup offers several methods of backing up your
     data, depending on drive, media, and speed.
 
 
  DISKETTE BACKUP STRATEGY
 
     Make and use setup files for different backup
     methods, or use the WEEKLY and DAILY setup files
     that came with CPBackup.  Use at least two sets of
     backup disks so that you are never overwriting your
     last backup with the current backup.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  285
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Using a Preconfigured Setup File
 
     CPBackup ships with a preconfigured setup file
     (WEEKLY) that is set to back up all files on your
     first hard drive (usually C) and another one called
     DAILY that backs up only the changed files since the
     last full backup.
 
     TO BACK UP ONLY CHANGED FILES ON A WEEKLY BASIS:
 
     1.  Start CPBackup on Friday by typing:
 
               cpbackup weekly
 
     2.  Begin your backup using the first set of
         diskettes.
 
     3.  Label each diskette with its backup sequence
         number, name, and set number.
 
         For example, "#1, Friday backup, Set A".  The
         next diskette would be "#2, Friday backup, Set
         A", and so on.
 
     4.  Start CPBackup on Monday through Thursday by
         typing:
 
               cpbackup daily
 
         When prompted, insert the last diskette of your
         backup set (if doing an incremental backup).
         For example, if you used 25 disks for your
         Friday backup, you would insert diskette #25 of
         backup set A.  When prompted, insert additional
         diskettes as needed.
 
     5.  Label each diskette with its proper sequence
         number (#26 of Set A, #27 of Set A, and so on).
 
     Each day, you back up and append the changed files
     to the Friday full backup set.  By the end of
     Thursday's daily backup, you might have several
     disks beyond the original 25 you used on Friday.
 
 
  286  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Conversely, if you do a differential backup, you are
     prompted to insert a new diskette each day.  If the
     need to restore ever arises, you restore the full
     backup and the last differential diskette.
 
     TO BACK UP ON EVEN-NUMBERED WEEKS STARTING ON
     FRIDAY:
 
     Repeat the above steps, using the second set of
     diskettes.  Be sure to label these as Set B.
 
 
     Using Different Backup Methods
 
     For many people, a monthly full backup is
     sufficient, coupled with daily backups of the
     changed files.  Use one of the following methods,
     depending on your particular needs, every day:
 
     o   Do a daily differential backup to diskettes.
         Alternate between two sets of disks for safety.
         When the sets use more than six diskettes, do
         another full backup.  The differential method
         does not save multiple daily versions of the
         changed files.  It only saves the latest
         versions.
 
     o   Do a separate incremental backup on Monday
         (which starts a new backup set), followed by
         daily incremental backups to diskettes.  This
         keeps daily versions of the files that change
         but creates less backup sets than using separate
         incremental exclusively.
 
 
  TAPE BACKUP STRATEGIES
 
     A tremendous advantage to using a tape drive for
     your backup is its ability to totally automate your
     backups.  A simple strategy is to use at least two
     tapes so you are never writing over your last backup
     with the current backup.
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  287
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     TO BACK UP USING THE TWO-TAPE STRATEGY:
 
     1.  Schedule a weekly full backup using the WEEKLY
         setup file and Tape #1.
 
     2.  Schedule a daily backup using the DAILY setup
         file and Tape #1.
 
     3.  Use Tape #2 the second week, and continue
         alternating tapes each week.
 
     Another popular backup strategy, referred to as
     "Grandfather, Father, Son," uses 10 tapes and gives
     you a complete backup of 12 weeks' data.
 
     TO BACK UP USING THE TEN-TAPE STRATEGY:
 
     1.  Label the tapes as follows:
 
          1 - Monday                6 - 2nd Friday
          2 - Tuesday               7 - 3rd Friday
          3 - Wednesday             8 - 1st Month
          4 - Thursday              9 - 2nd Month
          5 - 1st Friday           10 - 3rd Month
 
 
     2.  Use tape 5 on the first Friday and back up your
         entire system.
 
     3.  On the following Monday, use tape 1, labeled
         Monday, to do a separate incremental or
         differential backup of the changed files.
         Repeat this every weekday using the
         appropriately labeled tape.
 
     4.  On the second Friday, use tape 6 (2nd Friday)
         for another full backup, and repeat the Monday
         through Thursday backups, using the
         corresponding tapes (you will overwrite these
         tapes).
 
     5.  Repeat step 4 for week 3, using tape 7 (3rd
         Friday).
 
 
  288  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     6.  Repeat step 4 for week 4, and use tape 8 (1st
         Month) on the fourth Friday.
 
     7.  Repeat steps 2 through 6, using tape 9 (2nd
         Month) on the fourth Friday of the second month,
         and tape 10 (3rd Month) on the fourth Friday of
         the third month.
 
     In subsequent months, recycle the three "Month"
     tapes, always overwriting the oldest tape.
 
     TO BACK UP USING THE COMBINED DISKETTES AND TAPES
     STRATEGY:
 
     Do full backups to tape, with subsequent
     differential or separate incremental backups to
     diskettes.  This saves the expense of purchasing a
     lot of tapes (as in the above strategy).
 
     Use this method if you are backing up to a removable
     cartridge, such as a Bernoulli or SyQuest drive, or
     to a directory on a network.
 
     TO BACK UP USING THE REMOVABLE MEDIA OR NETWORK
     BACKUP STRATEGY:
 
     1.  Create a subdirectory named FULL on the network
         or cartridge and do a full backup, either weekly
         or monthly, to it.
 
     2.  Create two subdirectories named DAILY1 and
         DAILY2 on the same drive.
 
         Alternate daily differential backups to the two
         DAILY directories.
 
     By creating the three subdirectories, you avoid the
     problem of overwriting the three files that CPBackup
     writes that contain your data and information about
     the backup.  These three files are:
 
     o   CPBACKUP.001, which contains your backed-up
         data.
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  289
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   CPBACKUP.DIR, which contains the directory of
         the backed up data.
     o   CPBACKUP.INF, which contains boot record
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  290  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| USING THE CPBDIR PROGRAM
  ________________________
 
     The CPBDIR program determines the number of disks
     and the correct order of a high- or medium-speed
     diskette backup (very helpful if you forgot to label
     the disks in their proper order) as well as
     information about how the backup was made.
 
     Use the DOS DIR command on low-speed disks to find
     out the diskette number and date of backup.  There
     will be two files on the diskette:
 
     o   CPBACKUP.INF
     o   CPBACKUP.nnn where nnn is the diskette number of
                  ___       ___
         the set.
 
     There will also be a CPBxxx.DIR on the last diskette
     of the set (this is the history file).
 
     CPBDIR is a stand-alone application that you run by
     typing the following at the DOS command prompt.  If
     you want to read a backup diskette from a different
     drive, type:
 
         cpbdir d:
                _
 
     where d is the drive letter of the drive where the
           _
     backup diskette is inserted.
 
     You must put a colon after the drive letter.
 
     CPBDIR then displays information from the backup
     diskette, such as the disk number of the backup set,
     media used, formatting, speed used, and if a
     directory exists on the diskette.  CPBDIR recognizes
     the following parameters:
 
     D    Is the drive the backup diskettes are in.
     _
 
     /X   Shows an extended list of information about the
          backup disk.
 
 
 
 
                                    Chapter 8.  Using Central Point Backup  291
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  292  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CHAPTER 9.  USING STACKER COMPRESSION
  _____________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    Stacker for Windows(* *) and DOS is the
|    award-winning data compression standard that
|    instantly and safely increases your disk capacity.
|    Stacker's patented LZS(* *) compression and new
|    Stacker SmartPack(* *) combine to give you more disk
|    space than any other data compression product.
 
|    Stacker transforms a typical 100MB disk into 250MB.
|    Other compression products only double your disk, at
|    best.  Stacker is the first to more than double your
|    disk and break through the 2 to 1 compression
|    barrier.
 
|    Stacker is the leading compression utility for any
|    version of DOS.  Stacker takes full advantage of
|    compression features built into PC DOS 7.  If you
|    have DoubleSpace or SuperStor/DS drives, or previous
|    Stacker versions, Stacker automatically converts
|    them and gives you even more extra space.
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | TBD to add infomation about DriveSpace drives.   |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
| (* *) LZS is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
 
| (* *) SmartPack is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
 
| (* *) Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        293
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| HOW STACKER WORKS
 
|    Stacker gives you more disk space by compressing
|    files so they take up less space.  Stacker's
|    patented data compression technique--Stacker
|    LZS--eliminates repetitive information from your
|    files.  And, Stacker SmartPack tightly packs your
|    files into spaces on your disk that DOS cannot
|    access without Stacker's help.
 
|    Unlike other compression products, Stacker monitors
|    your compression.  If your data compresses better
|    than 2.5 to 1, Stacker adjusts your actual
|    compression ratio to reflect the improvement, giving
|    you the most space possible.
 
|    After you set up Stacker and more than double your
|    disk space, you still use your computer just as you
|    did before.  The only difference is that you have a
|    great deal more space on your disk.
 
 
| WHAT'S NEW ABOUT STACKER COMPRESSION
 
|    Stacker now frees up more of your disk space and
|    makes it easy to monitor your drives from either the
|    Stacker DOS Toolbox or the new Stacker Windows
|    Toolbox.
 
|    Stacker:
 
|    o   Gives you the most disk space.  Stacker
         ______________________________
|        continues to improve upon its patented, Stacker
|        LZS technology to give you the most space
|        possible.
 
|    o   Lets you take Stacker Anywhere(* *) --You can
         ___________________________________
|        use data on compressed disks even if the
|        computer does not have Stacker.
 
  ---------------
 
| (* *) Stacker Anywhere is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
 
 
  294  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Instantly converts other compressed drives.  The
         ___________________________________________
|        resulting Stacker drives give you more space
|        than either DoubleSpace or Superstor/DS.
 
|    o   Uses less memory.  Stacker uses as little memory
         _________________
|        as possible.
 
|    o   Guards your data.  Every time you start up your
         _________________
|        system, Stacker runs AutoProtect to make sure
|        your data is in good condition.  Stacker
|        AutoSave backs up important file access
|        information.
 
|    o   Makes monitoring your drives effortless.
         ________________________________________
|        Stacker DOS Toolbox tools show you extra bytes,
|        free space, and fragmentation.  And, all
|        Stacker's tools are on an easy-to-use menu in
|        the Toolbox.
 
|    o   Shows how much data needs backing up.  The new
         _____________________________________
|        Backup Status gauge available only through the
|        Windows Toolbox keeps track for you.
 
|    o   Flashes or plays sounds to remind you of disk
         _____________________________________________
|        maintenance tasks.  Set up the Stacker Windows
         __________________
|        Toolbox to let you know when the disk is getting
|        full or when it's time to back up files or
|        optimize your disk.
 
|    o   Fine-tunes for Stacker MaxSpace (* *) or Stacker
         ________________________________________________
|        MaxSpeed (* *)  Choose from 10 tuning settings
         ______________
|        in the Windows Toolbox.  Then, even if you set
|        your computer for MaxSpeed, use the Optimize
|        tool's Full-MaxSpace method to recompress
|        occasionally and gain more space.
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
| (* *) Stacker MaxSpace is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
 
| (* *) Stacker MaxSpeed is a trademark of Stac Electronics.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  295
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| HOW TO GET STACKER HELP
 
|    Stacker includes comprehensive online help.  Help is
|    available at the press of a key or a click of your
|    mouse.
 
|    o   Need help during Stacker Setup?  Press F1 or
         _______________________________
|        click on "Help".
 
|    o   Need help using the Stacker DOS Toolbox?  Press
         ________________________________________
|        F1 to get context-sensitive help from any
|        screen.
 
|    o   Need help using the Stacker Windows Toolbox?
         ____________________________________________
|        Select "Toolbox Help" from the Help menu to see
|        the index of topics.  Or, press F1 to get
|        context-sensitive help on any dialog box or
|        screen.
 
|    o   Need help on general topics?  Double-click on
         ____________________________
|        the Stacker Help icon in the Stacker Windows
|        Program group.
 
|    For late-breaking information not included in this
|    guide, refer to the README.TXT file located in the
|    STACKER subdirectory where you installed PC DOS (for
|    example, C:\DOS\STACKER if you selected the default
|    directory).  In DOS, use a text editor such as the
|    PC DOS E Editor to view this document.  In Windows,
|    double-click on the Readme icon in your Stacker
|    Program Group.
 
 
| SETTING UP STACKER
  __________________
 
|    Setting up Stacker is easy.  All you have to do is:
 
|    o   Install Stacker files using the PC DOS Setup
|        program (SETUP).
|    o   Back up your data before you run the Stacker
|        Setup program.
|    o   Set up Stacker using the Stacker Setup program
|        (SSETUP).
 
 
  296  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| INSTALLING STACKER AFTER INSTALLING PC DOS
 
|    If you did not select Stacker Compression at the
|    initial installation of PC DOS 7, you can still
|    install these optional tools by rerunning DOS Setup
|    using SETUP /E.
 
|    The PC DOS Setup diskettes contain everything you
|    need to install Stacker on your system.
 
|    During Setup, DOS checks whether your computer has
|    Windows 3.1 installed.  If you do not have Windows
|    3.1 installed and want to use the optional tools
|    provided with DOS for Windows, you should make sure
|    you install in this order:
 
|    1.  Install DOS as you normally would, selecting the
|        optional tools you want from the list provided.
|        You will not see any of the optional tools for
|        Windows listed.
 
|    2.  After you have installed DOS, install Windows
|        3.1 as you normally would.
 
|        NOTE:  Windows and DOS contain several programs
|               that have the same name.  However, the PC
|               DOS programs have been updated after the
|               release of Windows 3.1.  If you install
|               Windows after installing DOS, check your
|               CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files to make
|               sure that you are using the programs
|               HIMEM.SYS, EMM386.EXE, and SMARTDRV.EXE
|               from the DOS directory and not from the
|               Windows directory.
 
|    3.  Install DOS again using the /E switch after DOS
|        and Windows have been installed.
 
|        The /E switch allows you to return to the
|        optional tools selection menu without having to
|        do a complete reinstallation of DOS.  At this
|        point, only the necessary files for the optional
|        tools are installed.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  297
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    TO INSTALL STACKER USING THE SETUP /E COMMAND:
 
|    1.  Insert the Setup Diskette of the PC DOS Setup
                    ______________
|        diskettes into drive A or B.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              a:setup /e
 
|        or
         __
 
|              b:setup /e
 
|    3.  After Setup for DOS begins, follow the
|        instructions displayed on the screen.  Make sure
|        you specify the same "Install to PATH" as for
|        the initial DOS installation.
 
|        At the Optional Tools screen, you will see "NO"
|        next to Stacker Compression.
 
|    4.  Either press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW until
|        you highlight Stacker Compression, and then
|        press ENTER, or click on the optional tool if
|        using the mouse.
 
|        You can also select any of the other optional
|        tools that you want to install by highlighting
|        each tool and then pressing ENTER for each item.
 
|        You now see "YES" next to all the optional tools
|        you selected.
 
|        NOTE:   Selecting Yes to install Stacker
|               Compression only copies the required
|               compression files to the DOS directory.
|               You must run Stacker Setup before
|               compressing your data (explained in
|               detail in "Starting the Stacker Setup
|               Program" on page 299).
 
|    5.  Move the cursor to highlight the following:
 
 
 
  298  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|              Options correct. Continue Setup.
 
|    6.  Press ENTER to accept the optional tool
|        selections.
 
|    7.  Continue following the instructions on the
|        screen until the optional tools are installed.
 
 
| BACKING UP YOUR DATA
 
|    Before setting up Stacker, back up your data.
|    Stacker is completely safe and does not harm your
|    data.  Still, before making any system change, it is
|    always a good idea to back up.  If you have a backup
|    routine, just follow it, but do a complete backup.
 
|    If you use a tape backup, do a file-by-file backup
|    (not an image backup).  Refer to Chapter 8, "Using
|    Central Point Backup" on page 229 for details on
|    backing up.
 
 
| STARTING THE STACKER SETUP PROGRAM
 
|    Start the Stacker Setup program (SSETUP) from DOS or
|    Windows and press ENTER as required in response to
|    the screens.  That's all there is to it.  When
|    Stacker finishes, continue working with your system
|    as you always did, but with more than double the
|    disk capacity.
 
|    Setting up Stacker is easy under either DOS or
|    Windows.  Even if you set it up under Windows,
|    Stacker still has to exit to DOS to perform its
|    work.  You start Stacker Setup differently,
|    depending on whether or not you have compressed data
|    previously on your disks.  If you have compressed
|    data, switch to the directory where your Stacker
|    files are located and type "setup" instead of using
|    the SSETUP command.
 
|    TO SET UP STACKER:
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  299
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    1.  Ensure you selected Stacker Compression when you
|        first installed PC DOS.
 
|        You can verify that you selected compression by
|        checking if you have a Stacker directory (for
|        example, if you selected the default directory
|        when installing PC DOS, the Stacker files are
|        copied to the C:\DOS\STACKER directory) until
|        you run Stacker Setup (SSETUP).  After running
|        Stacker Setup, the Stacker directory defaults to
|        C:\STACKER).
 
|        NOTE:  If you did not choose to install
|               compression when you first installed PC
|               DOS, refer to "Installing Stacker After
|               Installing PC DOS" on page 297 before
|               proceeding with Stacker Setup.
 
|    2.  From the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              ssetup
 
|    3.  Press ENTER.
 
|    4.  Follow the instructions on your screen.
 
|    If your computer has an LCD, gray-scale, or
|    monochrome monitor, type "ssetup /m" so you can
|    better read the screens.
 
|    If you are installing from Windows, you should
|    install from the Windows so that your Stacker
|    Windows group will be set up automatically for you.
|    From the Program Manager's File menu, select "Run".
|    In the Command Line field, type" ssetup" and press
|    ENTER.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  300  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Getting Help on Stacker Setup
 
|    Stacker Setup guides you through a series of
|    decisions.  If you're not sure which choice to make,
|    you can get help by pressing F1 or click on "Help"
|    from any of the screens.  If you are still not sure
|    about a Stacker Setup screen choice, accept
|    Stacker's default--simply press ENTER.
 
 
|    Choosing Express or Custom Stacker Setup
 
|    If earlier versions of Stacker or other types of
|    compressed drives are not detected when you run
|    Stacker Setup, you are asked to choose one of two
|    setup methods--Express or Custom.
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | Artwork is not final in this chapter - TBD.      |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
|    CHOOSE EXPRESS TO:
 
|    o   Set up Stacker quickly and easily.
 
|    o   Set up Stacker on all hard disks or partitions
|        larger than 5MB.
 
|    o   Let Stacker make the decisions for your system.
 
|    CHOOSE CUSTOM TO:
 
|    o   Set up Stacker on one disk or partition at a
|        time.
 
|    o   Compress only the free space left on the disk.
 
|    o   Control options such as whether or not to use
|        Expanded Memory Specification (EMS), the cluster
|        size of your Stacker drives, or how much space
|        to leave uncompressed.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  301
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Using an PC DOS Startup Diskette
 
|    One of the best precautions you can take to protect
|    your data from a system failure is to have a
|    bootable diskette that is Stacker-aware.  If your
                               _____________
|    system has compressed data files, all the files your
|    system needs for rebooting are available on this
|    diskette.
 
|    The Setup Diskette of the PC DOS Setup diskettes can
         ______________
|    be used as a startup diskette in the event of a
|    system emergency.  Keep this startup diskette in
|    case your system ever has a problem.  You will be
|    able to start your system from this disk; it will
|    know about Stacker and provide access to your data.
 
|    TO USE THE PC DOS STARTUP DISKETTE:
 
|    1.  Insert the Setup Diskette of the PC DOS Setup
                    ______________
|        diskettes into drive A.
 
|    2.  Reboot the system by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
|    3.  Answer No when queried whether to install DOS.
 
 
| UPGRADING STACKER AND GETTING THE BEST COMPRESSION
 
|    When you run Stacker Setup, it detects any earlier
|    versions of Stacker on your system and offers you
|    two options--Full Update or Quick Update.  Select
|    "Full Update".  It might take as long as a few
|    hours, but Full Update is a thorough upgrade for
|    your entire system and gives you the best
|    compression.
 
|    Choosing a Full Update:
 
|    o   First updates earlier Stacker files.
 
|    o   Then defragments the drive.
 
 
 
 
  302  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Recompresses the data using Stacker's improved
|        compression technology to give you up-to-date
|        optimum compression.
 
|    If you select "Quick Update", Stacker updates its
|    earlier files but does not defragment or recompress
|    any files on the drive.  To take advantage of
|    Stacker's compression, recompress the drive later to
|    improve compression.  To do so, you can use the
|    Stacker Optimizer tool through the Stacker Toolbox.
|    Just select "Full-MaxSpace".
 
 
| CONVERTING DBLSPACE DRIVES
 
|    If you have DBLSPACE drives compressed by PC DOS's
|    SuperStor/DS or Microsoft's DoubleSpace, Stacker
|    Setup automatically converts them to Stacker drives.
|    The drives must be mounted before Stacker can
|    convert them.  Refer to your original compression
|    product's documentation for mounting details.
 
|    Stacker and another compression program cannot both
|    work on the same system.  After you install Stacker,
|    you will not have access to the data on unmounted
|    drives compressed by other products.  You must first
|    mount the drives, temporarily or permanently, and
|    then run either DCONVERT or HCONVERT (for previous
|    versions of Stacker).  For information about these
|    commands, type "help" at the DOS command prompt
|    followed by the name of the command (for example,
|    "help dconvert").
 
|    During Stacker Setup, if it encounters mounted
|    drives compressed by other software, Stacker Setup
|    will list the drives it will convert.
 
|    NOTE:  For DBLSPACE converted to Stacker drives,
|           uncompressed drive letters start at letter H.
 
|    When you select "Convert", Stacker restarts your
|    computer, runs CHKDSK and offers to run a base-level
|    safety check to ensure none of your data was
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  303
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    corrupted by previous compression.  Press ENTER to
|    answer Yes.  Ensuring your data's safety takes only
|    about two seconds per megabyte.  If the safety check
|    finds any errors and offers to fix them, let it.
 
|    Running the safety check and fixing even minor
|    problems now helps you avoid major problems later.
|    After the safety check, Stacker Setup converts your
|    DoubleSpace or SuperStor/DS drives to Stacker
|    drives.
 
|    If you are converting compressed files from another
|    type of compression program,
 
|    Stacker Setup may display a message that there is
|    not enough space to convert the files.  Try moving
|    some files to another disk or drive and rerun
|    Stacker Setup.  If you get the same message, you may
|    need to make more space available on the
|    uncompressed portion of the drive.  See your other
|    compression program's documentation for information
|    about how to make more uncompressed space available.
|    Then rerun Stacker Setup.
 
|    Stacker's safety and compression features are now
|    installed on your computer.  To take advantage of
|    Stacker's compression, you will want to recompress
|    the data on the converted drive.  You can run the
|    Stacker Optimizer from the Stacker Toolbox and
|    select "Full-MaxSpace".  Until you have optimized
|    the drive, each time you start the computer, Stacker
|    reminds you to do so to get the best possible
|    compression and safeguards for your data.
 
 
| CONVERTING REMOVABLE DISKS
 
|    Stacker's Setup converts only mounted, fixed
|    DoubleSpace or SuperStor/DS (DBLSPACE) drives.
|    However, Stacker's DCONVERT program easily converts
|    a removable disk, such as a floppy disk, a
|    Bernoulli, or a SyQuest.
 
 
 
  304  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    For this example, let's assume that Drive G: is a
|    Bernoulli drive that was compressed with
|    SuperStor/DS.  In the conversion procedure, you will
|    check the drive for any pre-existing problems, run a
|    program called DCONVERT to convert the drive, and
|    then mount the new Stacker drive.
 
|    NOTE:  Because it is not yet a Stacker drive, Drive
|           G does not appear in Stacker's drive map.
 
|    The following procedure assumes you have already
|    installed Stacker.
 
|    TO USE THE DCONVERT PROGRAM TO CONVERT THE DRIVE AND
|    MOUNT THE NEW STACKER DRIVE:
 
|    1.  Check for any pre-existing problems.
 
|    2.  If you are in Windows, exit to DOS.  The
|        procedure works only under DOS.
 
|    3.  Insert the removable disk into its drive.
 
|    4.  Check the drive for any pre-existing problems.
|        For this example, at the DOS command prompt, you
|        would type:
 
|              chkdsk g:
 
|    5.  Press ENTER
 
|        Let the DOS CHKDSK utility fix any problems it
|        finds.
 
|    TO CONVERT THE DRIVE TO A STACKER DRIVE:
 
|    1.  Find the name of the compressed volume file by
|        typing:
 
|              dir g: /ah
 
|    2.  Press ENTER
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  305
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    3.  Look for a filename such as DBLSPACE.000. Note
|        the name to use in the next step.
 
|    4.  Type:
 
|              dconvert /c g:\dblspace.000
 
|        where DBLSPACE.000 is the drive to be converted
|        to a Stacker drive.
 
|    5.  Press ENTER.
 
|    CAUTION:
|    DO NOT INTERRUPT THE CONVERSION PROCESS!  IF YOU DO
|    NOT LET DCONVERT FINISH, YOU MAY LOSE DATA.
 
|    DCONVERT converts the drive into a Stacker drive.
|    The name of Stacker's "volume file" is STACVOL.DSK.
 
|    TO MOUNT THE DRIVE AS A STACKER DRIVE:
 
|    1.  Ensure the removable disk is in its drive.
 
|    2.  From the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              config
 
|    3.  Press ENTER.
 
|    4.  Allow the program to make changes to your
|        STACKER.INI file.
 
|    5.  Restart your computer.
 
|    TO RECOMPRESS YOUR DATA WITH THE STACKER OPTIMIZER:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              stac
 
|    2.  Press ENTER
 
|    3.  Click on "Stacker Optimizer".
 
 
  306  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Select the drive you want to recompress.
 
|    5.  Click on "Full-MaxSpace".
 
|        Stacker recompresses the data on the selected
|        drive.
 
 
| USING THE STACKER SCREEN SAVER
 
|    Stacker provides a special screen saver that you can
|    use with Windows 3.1.  You can install the Stacker
|    Screen Saver on your Windows desktop.
 
|    TO INSTALL THE SCREEN SAVER UNDER WINDOWS 3.1:
 
|    1.  In Windows Program Manager, double-click on the
|        Control Panel icon.
 
|    2.  From the Control Panel, double-click on the
|        Desktop icon.
 
|    3.  Under Screen Saver, click on the arrow, select
|        the Stacker screen saver, and click on OK.
 
 
| MONITORING YOUR DRIVES (FROM DOS OR WINDOWS)
  ____________________________________________
 
|    After Stacker is installed, you do not have to do
|    anything else.  But, if you want to check how a
|    drive is doing or modify Stacker settings, you can.
|    Stacker's Toolbox is your gateway to Stacker tools.
 
|    Using the Stacker Toolbox, you will learn how to:
 
|    o   Use the Stacker DOS Toolbox to perform Stacker
                 ___________________
|        tasks when you're not using Windows.
 
|    o   Use the Stacker Windows Toolbox to:
                 _______________________
 
|        -   Get drive information and perform Stacker
|            tasks.
|        -   Interpret the Toolbox gauges.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  307
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        -   View Stacker information about your files
|            and drives from the Windows File Manager.
 
|        Both the Stacker DOS Toolbox and the Stacker
|        Windows Toolbox are described in the following
|        sections.
 
 
| USING THE STACKER DOS TOOLBOX
 
|    The Stacker DOS Toolbox lets you monitor your
|    Stacker drives from DOS.  The Toolbox contains
|    Stacker's most commonly used tools.
 
|    TO USE THE STACKER DOS TOOLBOX:
 
|    1.  Change to your Stacker directory first if it is
|        not already in your path.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              stac
 
|        and press ENTER.
 
|    3.  Using the UP ARROW and the DOWN ARROW keys,
|        highlight the tool and press ENTER, or press the
|        highlighted letter of the tool.
 
|    4.  Follow the directions on the screen for choosing
|        options.  You can press F1 to get help at any
|        time.
 
|    The following table summarizes the tools in the
|    Toolbox.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  308  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | USE THIS   | TO DO THIS...                       |
|    | TOOL...    |                                     |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Compress   | Run Stacker Setup to compress       |
|    | Drive      | additional hard disks or diskettes. |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Compress   | Compress the available free space   |
|    | Floppy     | on diskette or other removable      |
|    |            | diskettes.                          |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Uncompress | Uncompress your Stacker drive and   |
|    |            | reverse the Stacker Setup process.  |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Check      | Check the integrity of your Stacker |
|    | Integrity  | drive and fix any errors.           |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Compression| Display compression and disk usage  |
|    | Report     | information.                        |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Stacker    | Defragment or recompress files on   |
|    | Optimizer  | your Stacker drive.                 |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    |            | Control the balance between how     |
|    | Stacker    | tightly and how quickly Stacker     |
|    | Tuner      | compresses data after Stacker       |
|    |            | Setup.                              |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Stacker    | Increase the Stacker drive size or  |
|    | Drive Size | make more compressed space.         |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    | Expected   | Change the expected compression     |
|    | Compression| ratio for your Stacker drive.       |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
|    |            | Assign a password to your Stacker   |
|    | Password   | drive for read/write or read-only   |
|    |            | access or remove an existing        |
|    |            | password.                           |
     +------------+-------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  309
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| USING THE STACKER WINDOWS TOOLBOX
 
|    The Stacker Windows Toolbox includes a drive bar, a
|    toolbar, and gauges that you can use to monitor your
|    drives and maximize their performance.  Select a
|    drive, select a tool, and follow the directions on
|    the screens.  That's all there is to it.
 
|    Stacker still determines the original settings for
|    the Toolbox gauges, but now you can have some
|    control over your compressed drives.  You can set
|    some preferences for each gauge so the Stacker
|    Toolbox can monitor your drives better and report
|    the information that you want to know.
 
|    TO OPEN THE STACKER WINDOWS TOOLBOX:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker Program Group, double-click on
|        the Toolbox icon to open it.
 
|    2.  Then click on any drive on the drive bar to see
|        information for that drive.
 
|    NOTE:  After you select a drive, the Details icon in
|           the toolbar and the Backup Status gauge
|           remain gray for a few seconds while Stacker
|           gathers new information.
 
|    Stacker Windows Toolbox gauges display dynamic
|    information about any drive you select from the
|    drive bar.  The gauges monitor and show the
|    Compression Rates and Extra Bytes available, Disk
|    Space used and free, Fragmentation level, and Backup
|    Status of the drive.  Compressed drives are shown in
|    blue letters; noncompressed drives are shown in
|    black letters.
 
|    NOTE:  If you need more information about areas on
|           the Stacker Windows Toolbox or about how
|           parts of the Toolbox work, press F1 or use
|           the Help menu from the menu bar.
 
 
 
 
  310  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Compression Ratio Gauge
 
|    The Compression Ratio gauge shows how well your data
         _________________
|    compresses.  Stacker analyzes the selected drive and
|    calculates the actual compression ratio, which
|    Stacker then uses to project the size of your
|    Stacker drive.  Depending on the types of files on
|    your drive, the actual compression ratio could
|    differ from that expected.
 
|    If you double-click on "Compression Ratio", the
|    Compression Ratio gauge changes to show how many
|    extra bytes you now have, compliments of Stacker.
|    If you recompress this drive later and the actual
|    compression ratio changes, the extra bytes will also
|    change to reflect the new actual compression ratio.
 
 
|    Disk Space Gauge
 
|    The Disk Space gauge shows the amount of disk space
         __________
|    used and free.  Even when minimized to an icon, the
|    Stacker Toolbox still displays dynamic disk space
|    information.
 
|    NOTE:  Some third-party utilities cannot project the
|           true amount of free space available on a
|           Stacker drive.  Stacker can.  It analyzes the
|           data on your drive and projects an accurate
|           size for the Stacker drive based on current
|           data.
 
 
|    Fragmentation Gauge
 
|    The Fragmentation gauge shows how fragmented the
         _____________
|    current drive is.  When there are not any large
|    blocks of space left on your disk, DOS splits files
|    and fits pieces into smaller spaces throughout the
|    disk.  When your drive becomes quite fragmented,
|    file access slows as DOS locates and collects all
|    the pieces to a file.
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  311
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Generally, the more blocks on the Fragmentation
|    gauge that are filled with color, the more
|    fragmented your disk is becoming.  To remedy this
|    condition, select the Optimize tool, then select
|    "Full" or "Full-MaxSpace".  Only the Full--MaxSpace
|    method of optimization achieves recompression.
 
|    NOTE:  Depending on whether you are working from the
|           DOS Toolbox or the Windows Toolbox, the
|           selections will vary.
 
 
|    Backup Status Gauge
 
|    The Backup Status gauge shows how much of your disk
         _____________
|    has been backed up.  Most backup procedures modify
|    the archive attribute of the files.  Using
|    drag-and-drop copying or the COPY command under
|    Windows File Manager does not change the archive
|    attribute.  Please use a backup utility such as PC
|    DOS's CPBACKUP.
 
|    NOTE:  When you back up a Stacker drive, you can
|           perform your standard backup procedure to
|           back up files on the Stacker drive.  If you
|           also want to back up the files on the
|           uncompressed drive, back up all files except
|           the hidden STACVOL file.  (The STACVOL file
|           actually contains your compressed data, which
|           was backed up during the regular backup
|           procedure.)
 
|    To see a map of your Stacker drives and their
|    corresponding uncompressed drives, at a DOS command
|    prompt type:
 
|          stacker
 
|    The location of the STACVOL file is in brackets.
 
|    For example, on a computer with drive C as the
|    Stacker drive, the uncompressed drive is typically
|    drive D [D:STACVOL.DSK=size].  You would back up all
                            ____
 
 
  312  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    the files on drives C and D except the file
|    STACVOL.DSK.
 
 
|    Toolbox Gauge Preferences
 
|    The Stacker Windows Toolbox gathers information and
|    updates gauges regularly.  Each gauge has different
|    settings because each monitors different
|    information.  You can accept Stacker's original
|    settings, or you can change any of them on a gauge's
|    Preferences screen.  When you change settings on a
|    gauge's Preferences screen, those settings affect
|    all your Stacker drives.
 
|    For any gauge, you can set:
 
|    o   How often the gauge updates.
 
|    o   When the gauge should flash a warning message or
|        play a sound to alert you, such as when your
|        disk reaches a certain level of fragmentation.
 
|    o   How the gauge will alert you--a flashing
|        message, a sound, or both.
 
|    TO VIEW OR CHANGE PREFERENCE SETTINGS FOR STACKER
|    WINDOWS TOOLBOX GAUGES:
 
|    1.  Double-click on any Stacker Toolbox gauge to
|        open its Preferences screen.
 
|    2.  Type your new settings.
 
|    3.  Click on OK to activate them.
 
|    When a gauge updates, you probably will not even
|    notice it on most computers.  However, if you are
|    using a slower computer or if you have more than one
|    Stacker Windows Toolbox running, you may notice a
|    brief delay in your applications each time a gauge
|    gathers information.  If this occurs, set a longer
|    time between updates.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  313
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    For example, in Disk Space Preferences, Stacker lets
|    you set a percentage of space as a buffer so you can
|    be alerted when your disk fills to that point.  As
|    you use your computer, data fills the drive.  When
|    the data fills to the buffer zone you set, the gauge
|    flashes a warning message to alert you.  The warning
|    flashes even if you have minimized the Stacker
|    Toolbox to an icon.
 
|    If you have a sound driver installed, you may also
|    want to select a sound to warn you when the disk has
|    reached the disk full zone.  You can use any .WAV
|    file, such as the ones in your Windows directory.
 
|    NOTE:  Stacker can only alert you when the Toolbox
|           is open.  It is a good idea to keep a
|           minimized Toolbox open on the desktop so
|           Stacker can alert you with a flashing message
|           or sound when necessary.
 
|    At any time, you can disable a gauge's warning or
|    sound on the Preferences screen.  Or, you can
|    disable them all directly from the Toolbox.  On the
|    toolbar, click on to disable sounds or to stop any
|    flashing messages.  When disabled, the button is
|    crossed out
 
 
|    Disk Space Details
 
|    The Disk Space Details button shows you more
|    compression information for the files on the
|    selected drive.  When you open the Stacker Toolbox,
|    this button is dimmed while Stacker gathers your
|    drive information.  When the Toolbox updates, this
|    tool becomes available.
 
|    Most users have many types of files on their
|    systems.  The actual compression you get depends on
|    what you have on your system.  Certain files, such
|    as games, programs, and ZIP files cannot compress
|    further.  However, other files, such as
|    spreadsheets, data files, and some kinds of
 
 
  314  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    graphics, compress amazingly well.  Stacker collects
|    your files and sorts them into four categories:
 
|    o   Precompressed data
|    o   Programs
|    o   Data
|    o   Free space
 
|    In the following example, 7% of the files are data
|    files that compress at 4.5 to 1.  The right column,
|    Available Bytes, shows you how much more of this
|    kind of data will fit.  Stacker assesses all these
|    ratios to determine your actual compression ratio.
 
 
|    Using the Stacker Menu in Windows File Manager
 
|    You can monitor compression from the Windows File
|    Manager as well as from the Stacker Windows Toolbox.
|    To do so, open the Windows File Manager.  Then, from
|    the Stacker menu, you can choose Selected Files, All
|    Files, or Disk Summary to view compression
|    information about the current drive.
 
|    The Selected Files view shows compression
|    information about files and directories you specify.
 
|    First select the files and directories in the
|    Windows File Manager window.  Then click on
|    "Selected Files" to see the compression information
|    for these files.
 
|    You can set the sort order of each column
|    separately.  For example, you might want the Type of
|    files view to be in Ascending order but see the
|    Compression Ratio in Descending order.
 
|    The All Files view shows how different types of
|    files are compressing on the current drive.  For
|    this view, you do not have to select any files.
|    Stacker automatically shows information about all
|    the files for the drive, grouped by extension.
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  315
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    You can also get this information from the Stacker
|    Toolbox.  From the toolbar click on "Report".  To
|    print the report, click on "Print".
 
|    The Disk Summary view presents an overview of space
|    used and free for the current drive.  It also lists
|    the expected and actual compression ratios.
 
 
| USING STACKER TOOLS
  ___________________
 
|    Stacker has a complete set of tools for compressing
|    additional data, improving your computer's
|    performance, and protecting your data.
 
|    o   Compressing your data whether it's on another
|        hard disk, a diskette, or another removable
|        drive.
 
|    o   Using a compressed diskette (or other removable)
|        on computers with or without Stacker by running
|        Stacker Anywhere.
 
|    o   Improving your Stacker drive's performance by
|        tuning, defragmenting, or recompressing.
 
|    o   Protecting your Stacker drives by ensuring the
|        safety of your data and limiting access with
|        passwords.
 
 
| COMPRESSING ADDITIONAL DRIVES
 
|    After installing Stacker, you can compress data on
|    another hard disk or on removables such as
|    diskettes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  316  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Compressing Hard Disks
 
|    When you set up Stacker, you may have left some
|    partitions uncompressed on your disk.  Or, perhaps
|    you have added another hard disk to your computer.
 
|    From DOS, you can use the Compress Drive command in
|    the Stacker DOS Toolbox to compress data on another
|    partition or on another hard disk.
 
|    TO COMPRESS ANOTHER HARD DISK:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose the
|        Compress Drive tool.
 
|    2.  Stacker Setup begins.
 
|    3.  When prompted, choose the drive to compress.
 
|    4.  To compress existing data on the disk, choose
|        Entire Drive.
 
|    5.  To create a new Stacker drive from the free
|        space on the disk, choose Free Space.  You will
|        have to specify how much free space to use on
|        the disk.
 
|    6.  Follow the instructions on the screen.
 
|    For an overview of the Stacker DOS Toolbox, see
|    "Using the Stacker DOS Toolbox" on page 308.
 
|    From Windows, select an uncompressed drive, if
|    necessary, to make the Compress tool available; then
|    choose the Compress tool.  After Stacker Setup
|    begins, Choose OK when prompted to exit Windows and
|    continue the steps above under DOS, starting with
|    step 3.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  317
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Adding New Drives
 
|    Here's what happens when you add another drive to
|    your system.  When DOS loads, it assigns drive
|    letters to recognized hardware, such as hard drives.
|    If you have one hard drive (C) and you compress it
|    with Stacker, and you add another drive, DOS assigns
|    it the next letter (D).
 
|    When you use Stacker to compress the data on a hard
|    disk, such as drive C, Stacker creates an
|    uncompressed drive that works in concert with the
|    original drive.  Stacker drive letter assignments
|    begin after the other DOS drive letter assignments.
|    Because letters C and D have been assigned, Stacker
|    drive letters adjust.  The next drive letter (E) is
|    assigned to the uncompressed drive that works with
|    drive C.  You still find your data on drive C, and
|    your new hard disk is drive D.
 
|    To see all your drive letters and their
|    corresponding Stacker drive letters, at the DOS
|    command prompt, type:
 
|          stacker
 
|    If you add a software-driven removable drive or one
|    that requires a specific drive letter, you will need
|    to modify Stacker's configuration.  See "Working
|    with Advanced Stacker" on page 336, for the
|    procedures.
 
 
|    Compressing Diskettes (Removables)
 
|    Use Stacker to compress your removable diskettes,
|    too.  Why be content with a standard 1.4MB diskette
|    when Stacker can turn it into a 3.4MB disk?  And,
|    you can use these disks anywhere, even on computers
|    that do not have Stacker.
 
|    Most users format several diskettes at a time.  It's
|    an easy step to compress them at the same time so
 
 
  318  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    you have several disks ready that have Stacker's new
|    super capacity.
 
|    You can use either the Stacker Windows Toolbox or
|    the Stacker DOS Toolbox to compress empty floppy
|    disks.
 
|    TO COMPRESS AN EMPTY DISKETTE:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose the
|        Compress Floppy tool and press ENTER
 
|    2.  Insert the empty diskette into the disk drive.
 
|    3.  Select the removable drive (usually A or B) to
|        let Stacker create and verify the drive.
 
|    4.  Press ENTER and you will see a message when the
|        Stacker drive is created successfully.
 
|    5.  Click on OK.
 
|    If you want to use Windows to compress an empty
|    diskette or a removable that already has data on it,
|    you can use the Stacker Windows Toolbox.  Insert the
|    empty diskette into the disk drive.  From the
|    Stacker Windows Toolbox, select the removable drive
|    (usually A or B) and choose the Compress tool.
|    Click on OK to let Stacker create and verify the
|    drive.  Choose OK to return to the Windows Toolbox.
|    Then click once more on the removable drive to
|    refresh the screen and see the new compression.
 
|    TO COMPRESS DATA ON A DISKETTE:
 
|    1.  Change to your Stacker directory.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              setup
 
|        Stacker might detect TSRs or OS/2 files and will
|        query for a response from you.  Depending on
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  319
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        what answer you provide, the system may need to
|        be rebooted before Stacker Setup lists the
|        drives you can compress.
 
|    3.  Insert the removable diskette into the diskette
|        drive.
 
|    4.  Select the drive where you inserted the
|        removable diskette.
 
|    5.  When Stacker Setup asks if you want to compress
|        the Entire Disk or just the Free Space, select
|        "Entire Drive", then select "Compress".  Answer
|        any additional screen prompts.
 
|        NOTE:  If you want to compress empty diskettes
|               using this procedure, select "Free
|               Space".
 
|    6.  When Stacker Setup finishes, restart your
|        system.
 
|    If you are using Windows, you must exit Windows
|    completely before beginning these steps.
 
|    After you compress a disk in a removable drive, you
|    can use either standard disks or Stacker disks in
|    that drive.  Stacker recognizes both formats.  For
|    more information about AutoMounting procedures, see
|    "Working with Advanced Stacker" on page 336.
 
|    The Stacker-compressed disk is slightly less than
|    3.4MB.  When you compressed the disk, Stacker put a
|    special program--Stacker Anywhere--onto the
|    uncompressed portion of the disk, which is why you
|    have a bit less than 3.4MB.  This program lets you
|    use the disk on non-Stacker systems.  Because you
|    already have Stacker on your system, you do not need
|    to use this program.  But, if you want to use the
|    disk on a computer that does not have Stacker, you
|    can use Stacker Anywhere to access your data.
 
 
 
 
  320  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Using Stacker Anywhere on Non-Stacker Systems
 
|    If you try to use a Stacker-compressed diskette on a
|    non-Stacker system, you will not see your data
|    files.
 
|    NOTE:  If you have Stacker on your system, use the
|           Stacker tools instead of Stacker Anywhere to
|           work with your data files.
 
|    MOUNTING A DRIVE:  First you need to mount the drive
|    so it can recognize Stacker's format.  How can you
|    mount a drive on a system that does not have
|    Stacker?  Use the Stacker Anywhere program that
|    Stacker conveniently loaded onto the disk during
|    compression.
 
|    TO MOUNT A STACKER ANYWHERE DISKETTE DRIVE UNDER
|    DOS:
 
|    1.  Change to the removable drive.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              stacker drive:
                       ______
 
|        Where drive: is the letter of the drive you want
               ______
|        to mount.
 
|    This is a temporary mount.  If you restart your
     __________________________
|    system, you will have to remount the drive.
 
|    When you use Stacker Anywhere to mount a drive under
|    Windows, the data on the disk is available only from
|    Windows.  If you try to view the data from a DOS
|    window, DOS reports that the drive is no longer
|    valid.  If you want the data to be accessible from
|    either Windows or DOS, mount the drive under DOS.
 
|    TO MOUNT A NON-STACKER DISKETTE DRIVE UNDER WINDOWS:
 
|    1.  Start Windows File Manager.
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  321
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    2.  Insert the Stacker removable diskette into the
|        disk drive.
 
|    3.  Click on the drive icon for that drive.
 
|        The Windows File Manager lists files on the
|        uncompressed portion of the drive, as shown in
|        the next figure.
 
|    4.  Double-click on STACKER.EXE to run the Stacker
|        Anywhere program.
 
|    5.  Click on OK to let Stacker Anywhere mount the
|        drive.
 
|    6.  Click on OK again.
 
|    7.  Reselect the drive icon to refresh the Windows
|        File Manager and access your data files.  Use
|        the disk as you would any other disk.
 
|    The STACKER.EXE file does not appear when the drive
|    is mounted.  Instead, you see your data files.
|    After you start Stacker Anywhere, it stays in memory
|    until you exit Windows.  You can mount and unmount
|    removable drives at any time during this Windows
|    session.  Use the icon that remains on the desktop
|    for easy access.
 
|    NOTE:  If the Compression Ratio gauge on the Stacker
|           Windows Toolbox shows 1.0 compression (none)
|           when you insert a compressed, removable
|           diskette, the drive is unmounted.  Either
|           perform a temporary mount or AutoMount the
|           drive to access the data on the disk.  For
|           information on how to perform either a
|           temporary or a permanent mount, refer to
|           "AutoMounting a Removable Diskette Drive" on
|           page 349.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  322  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    UNMOUNTING A DRIVE:  If you need to unmount a
|    Stacker Anywhere drive, the procedure will depend on
|    how you mounted the drive.  If you mounted the drive
|    from DOS, you must unmount the disk under DOS.
 
|    TO UNMOUNT A STACKER ANYWHERE DRIVE UNDER DOS:
 
|    1.  Change to the removable drive.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              exit
 
|    Each time you type "exit", Stacker Anywhere unmounts
|    the last drive it mounted.  This is a temporary
|    dismount.  If you restart your system, the drive
|    will be remounted.  For information on permanently
|    mounting a drive, refer to "AutoMounting a Removable
|    Diskette Drive" on page 349.
 
|    If you used Windows to mount it, you will need to
|    unmount it from Windows.
 
|    TO UNMOUNT A STACKER ANYWHERE DRIVE UNDER WINDOWS:
 
|    1.  Start Windows File Manager.
 
|    2.  Insert a compressed removable diskette into the
|        diskette drive, if necessary.
 
|    3.  Click on the drive.
 
|    4.  Press ALT+TAB until you see the Stacker Anywhere
|        icon.  Choose Unmount from the Stacker Anywhere
|        icon's menu.
 
|    5.  Click on OK.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  323
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Uncompressing a Stacker Drive
 
|    Stacker's Uncompress tool takes all your files out
|    of the Stacker drive, decompresses them, and places
|    them back on the uncompressed drive.
 
|    In the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose Uncompress.  When
|    you choose it, Uncompress first checks to ensure you
|    have enough space for your uncompressed data.  It
|    may ask you to remove some files to make room before
|    it can uncompress.
 
|    TO UNCOMPRESS A STACKER DRIVE:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox menu, use the UP
|        ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys
 
|    2.  Select "Uncompress" and press ENTER.
 
|        Stacker makes sure you have enough space for all
|        your uncompressed data and optimizes your disk
|        in preparation for decompressing the data.
 
|    3.  When the optimization is done, Stacker asks "Are
|        you SURE??" that you want to Uncompress.  Answer
|        Yes if you really want to uncompress and press
|        ENTER.
 
|        If this is the last Stacker drive, Stacker asks
|        if you want to remove Stacker from your system
|        configuration.  Select Remove Stacker to do so.
 
|    4.  Press ENTER to restart your system.
 
|    In the Stacker Windows Toolbox, the Uncompress Disk
|    tool appears only on the Tools menu.  When you are
|    using Windows, you can choose Uncompress and then
|    click on OK to leave Windows.  The process is the
|    same as under DOS.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  324  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| IMPROVING STACKER DRIVE PERFORMANCE
 
|    Stacker drives can get even better performance when
|    you maintain them in optimal condition.  In this
|    section, you will learn how to improve the speed and
|    responsiveness of your Stacker drive.
 
|    You will see how to:
 
|    o   Tune your system for the best balance between
|        compression and speed.
 
|    o   Optimize the Stacker drive by defragmenting it.
 
|    o   Recompress data while defragmenting it by
|        choosing Full-MaxSpace.  This process is
|        especially important if you have upgraded
|        Stacker or converted from another compression
|        product.  It ensures that you get the best
|        compression and all Stacker's safety features.
 
 
|    Tuning Your Compression
 
|    Stacker works by compressing and decompressing data
|    as you use it.  The Stacker Tuner controls the
|    balance between how fast Stacker works (MaxSpeed)
|    and how tightly it compresses data (MaxSpace).
 
|    Stacker Setup automatically sets the Tuner to
|    MaxSpace.  This gives you the maximum compression,
|    but Stacker's speed is a bit slower.  However, most
|    computers today are very fast.  You will probably
|    never notice any difference in speed.  If you
|    prefer, you can select a faster speed, but data will
|    not compress quite as well.
 
|    The Toolbox offers three tuning settings.  You can
|    use Stacker's compression, a middle setting, or the
|    fastest setting.  The tuning setting you choose
|    affects all Stacker drives on your system.
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  325
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | Artwork is for Windows version; should be DOS    |
|    | Toolbox - TBD                                    |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
|    TO CHANGE COMPRESSION TUNING:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose the Stacker
|        Tuner.
 
|    2.  Use the arrow keys to get the setting you want
|        and then select Continue.
 
|    NOTE:  If you have an older, slower computer, you
|           can lower the Tuner setting to increase
|           Stacker's speed.  Of course, this means that
|           you will not receive the best compression.
|           To keep the speed and also get maximum
|           compression, periodically choose
|           Full-MaxSpace from the Stacker Optimizer to
|           recompress all the data on the drive.
 
|    Changing the tuning affects your entire Stacker
|    configuration.  From this point on, any data you
|    write to your disk is compressed using this tuning
|    setting.
 
|    When you're not using DOS, you can choose the Tune
|    tool from the Stacker Windows Toolbox.  You can tune
|    to 10 compression settings.  Move the slider to the
|    setting you want or click on MaxSpace or MaxSpeed
|    and then click on OK.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  326  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Understanding What Fragmentation Is
 
|    When you save files, DOS organizes them and writes
|    them to the disk in areas called clusters.  DOS
                                      ________
|    tries to store each file in one continuous location.
|    As disks get full and file sizes change, however,
|    DOS might not be able to find large blocks of
|    contiguous space.  As a result, file access takes
|    longer while DOS locates and keeps track of all the
|    pieces.
 
|    Optimization reduces fragmentation on disks.  If a
|    disk is highly fragmented, optimization will speed
|    up file access and increase your disk's efficiency.
 
 
|    Optimizing a Stacker Drive
 
|    You can defragment a drive with quick or full
|    optimization or while recompressing the data.  A
|    quick optimization defragments the clusters, making
|    access quicker and easier.  A full optimization
|    defragments the files as well; it also compacts the
|    free space so that all the files are at one end of
|    the disk and all the free space is at the other.
|    Full optimization takes much longer, of course.
|    Choosing Full-MaxSpace tightly recompresses all the
|    data on the disk along with a full optimization.
 
|    NOTE:  Always use the Stacker Optimizer to
|           defragment your Stacker drives.  Do not use a
|           non-Stacker optimizer unless it has been
|           updated to work on Stacker drives.
 
|    TO OPTIMIZE YOUR STACKER DRIVE:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select "Stacker
|        Optimizer".
 
|    2.  Select one of the following:  "Quick Optimize",
|        "Full Optimize", or "Full-MaxSpace".
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  327
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        "Important:" Do not press CTRL+ALT+DEL or reset
|        your computer during optimization.  If you have
|        to quit, press F10 as indicated on the screen.
|        This leaves the disk in usable condition.
 
|        You will see messages on the screen as the
|        Stacker Optimizer analyzes the drive.  It
|        reports a fragmentation level and lets you
|        continue or exit.
 
|    3.  Select "Continue" or "Exit"
 
|        If you choose to continue, Stacker Optimizer
|        begins optimizing the drive.
 
|    To optimize your Stacker drive if you are using
|    Windows, select the drive. and then click on the
|    Optimizer tool.  Click on Quick, Full, or
|    Full-MaxSpace; then click on OK.  Follow the same
|    procedures as for DOS until you have to click on OK
|    to leave Windows so the Stacker Optimizer can
|    complete its work.
 
|    After Stacker Optimizer leaves Windows, you
|    ultimately see a drive map on the screen like the
|    following one.
 
|    The Stacker Optimizer moves data around as it
|    defragments the drive.  When it is finished, follow
|    the instructions on the screen.  DOS is able to find
|    data more quickly after optimization.
 
|    If you are not using Windows, you can choose Stacker
|    Optimizer from the Stacker DOS Toolbox.  Follow the
|    instructions on the screen.  The process is the same
|    as from Windows.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  328  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Recompressing Data
 
|    The Stacker Optimizer can recompress data as it
|    optimizes. Just choose Full-MaxSpace to get the very
|    best compression possible.  After defragmenting and
|    recompressing the data, Stacker recalculates how
|    much space is available, based on the current
|    status.  If you have converted from an earlier
|    Stacker drive format or another compression product,
|    optimizing with Full-MaxSpace gives the full
|    benefits of Stacker.
 
|    You will want to recompress a Stacker drive if you
|    have:
 
|    o   Converted from another compression product.
 
|    o   Chosen Quick Update when you upgraded from an
|        earlier Stacker version.
 
|    o   Used Stacker for several months without your
|        tuning set to MaxSpace.
 
|    TO RECOMPRESS DATA:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select the
|        Optimizer tool.
 
|    2.  Choose the drive to optimize and then select
|        "Full-MaxSpace".
 
|    3.  Follow the instructions on the screen.
 
|    If you are using Windows, select the drive and then
|    click on the Optimizer tool.  Click on
|    "Full-MaxSpace", and then click on OK to leave
|    Windows so the Optimizer can complete its work.
|    Follow the instructions on the screen.  It works
|    much as it does through DOS.
 
|    The Optimizer fully optimizes while recompressing
|    all the data so you get the most space possible.
|    Stacker returns you to Windows after it is finished.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  329
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| PROTECTING YOUR DATA
 
|    Like most computer users, you are concerned about
|    the safety of your data.  Stacker includes many
|    features that protect data from damage and help you
|    correct any problems that may occur.
 
|    This is how these safety features work:
 
|    o   AutoProtect looks for problems every time you
|        start up your system and fixes most of what it
|        finds.  Stacker automatically write-protects a
|        disk whenever it senses a problem.
 
|    o   Check verifies Stacker drives and repairs any
|        problems.
 
|    o   Passwords limit access to data on your Stacker
|        drives.
 
|    o   AutoSave, if using Windows, maintains a copy of
|        the Stacker drive header, which contains
|        essential information that lets Stacker find
|        your data.
 
 
|    Running AutoProtect
 
|    Stacker's AutoProtect feature adds an extra level of
|    protection for your data.  AutoProtect works when
|    you restart your system and while you use your
|    Stacker drive.
 
|    AutoProtect regularly scans your Stacker drive for
|    problems.  When it detects a problem, Stacker
|    immediately write-protects the drive to protect your
|    data from any further damage.  Just remember:  the
|    write-protection is there for you. Your data is
|    still safe; Stacker has write-protected it so you do
|    not risk losing data by making changes.
 
|    Stacker Setup inserts a command like this one in
|    your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
 
 
  330  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|          c:\stacker\check /wp
 
|    NOTE:  C:\STACKER is the default path where your
|           Stacker compression files are placed during
|           Stacker Setup--unless you specified another
|           path during Setup.  This chapter only refers
|           to the default Stacker Setup path in its
|           examples.
 
|    This command looks for write-protected Stacker
|    drives, makes any repairs it can, and removes the
|    write-protection.  If CHECK detects problems it
|    cannot handle, you will see messages that tell you
|    what to do.
 
 
|    Checking Your Stacker Drives
 
|    The same processes in your computer system that
|    cause DOS-related problems may also cause Stacker
|    drive problems.  It's a good idea to check your
|    drive regularly to prevent any potential problems.
 
|    Stacker's Check tool examines your data and drive
|    integrity.  When run under DOS, Check can correct
|    any problems that involve the Stacker structures on
|    the disk.
 
|    Checking drive integrity involves several steps:
 
|    o   Checking the file structures on the disk
|        (cluster and file allocation table (FAT)
|        integrity).
 
|    o   Repairing any errors found.
 
|    o   Checking the disk media (surface scan).
 
|    It's a good idea to run the Check tool every few
|    weeks to verify the Stacker structures and head off
|    trouble.  Check may recommend that you run DOS'
|    CHKDSK to solve DOS problems.  Running a disk repair
|    utility after running CHECK, especially if CHECK
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  331
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    detects any problems, can capture DOS problems as
|    well.
 
|    NOTE:  Under PC DOS 7, after CHKDSK tests a Stacker
|           drive, it runs CHECK to look for Stacker
|           structure problems.
 
|    Take time to correct any problems identified by
|    either CHKDSK or CHECK before doing anything else.
|    If Stacker write protects the Stacker drive to
|    protect data from further damage, restart your
|    computer or run CHECK again.  After it fixes
|    problems, CHECK removes the write protection.
 
 
|    Checking a Disk
 
|    Stacker works at the DOS level to repair your disk.
|    If Check detects any problems, it tells you how to
|    repair them.
 
|    TO CHECK THE DRIVE INTEGRITY:
 
|    1.  To open the Stacker DOS Toolbox, at a DOS
|        command prompt, type:
 
|              stac
 
|    2.  Click on "Check Drive Integrity" and follow the
|        instructions on the screen.
 
|    You will see messages on the DOS screen as Check
|    examines the Stacker structures.
 
|    If Check finds a Stacker problem, it suggests that
|    you run CHECK /F under DOS to make the repairs.
 
|    If using Windows, from the Stacker Windows Toolbox,
|    choose the drive.  Then choose the Check tool.
 
|    To make repairs, just exit to DOS and run Check
|    again to fix the Stacker drive.
 
 
 
  332  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Using Passwords
 
|    You can assign a password for your Stacker drive to
|    keep your data safe from other users.  Stacker
|    supports two types of passwords:
 
|    Read/write               Gives a user full access to
     __________
|                             the disk.
 
|    Read-only                Lets a user read and print
     _________
|                             data, but does not permit
|                             any changes or file
|                             deletions.
 
|    After you have password-protected your disk, keep
|    the password in a safe place.  Each time Stacker
|    mounts the drive (usually at startup), you enter the
|    password to gain access to the disk.
 
|    TO SET OR CHANGE A PASSWORD:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, choose the
|        Passwords tool.
 
|    2.  Enter the new password; and then confirm it by
|        entering the same password again.
 
|        The first password you assign is always a
|        read/write password.
 
|    3.  If the drive already has a read/write password,
|        a Read-Only field appears.  Check it to use a
|        read-only password.
 
|        If the Type Old Password field appears, you must
|        enter it before changing an existing password.
 
|    4.  Type your new password in the Type New Password
|        field, then type it once more in the Verify New
|        Password field.
 
|    5.  Click on OK to activate the password.
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  333
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    6.  Click on OK again to return to the Toolbox.
 
|    NOTE:  Do not forget your password.
 
|    If you're using Windows, from the Stacker Windows
|    Toolbox select the drive and then choose the
|    Password tool.  Click on "Set Password".
 
|    TO REMOVE A PASSWORD:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker DOS Toolbox, select "Passwords"
 
|    2.  Type the current password in the Password field
|        and press ENTER.
 
|    3.  Leave the Password field blank if you want to
|        remove the current password and press ENTER.
 
|    4.  Then leave the Password field blank again to
|        verify the removal and press ENTER.
 
|    If you are using Windows, from the Stacker Windows
|    Toolbox, select the drive and then click on the
|    Password tool.  Click on "Remove Password".  and
|    follow the same steps as for DOS.  When completed,
|    click on OK.
 
 
|    Running AutoSave
 
|    Each Stacker drive has a header that contains
|    detailed information about its structure.  Stacker
|    needs the information in the header to access data
|    on the drive.  When you start up your system,
|    Stacker can automatically save a copy of all Stacker
|    headers.  The AutoSave tool, a tool available only
|    by using the Windows interface, stores updated
|    versions of headers.
 
|    After you turn on AutoSave, it works in the
|    background while your computer is idle.  AutoSave
|    works only after there has been no keyboard or mouse
|    activity for a certain period of time.  When the
 
 
  334  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    time comes for saving a header, AutoSave makes sure
|    the computer is not in use, checks out the drive,
|    and saves a header.  If you use the computer during
|    this time, AutoSave stops immediately, giving you
|    full access to your computer.  When the computer is
|    idle again, AutoSave resumes.
 
|    To speed up the time it takes Stacker to save header
|    information at startup, edit your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
|    Move the line "C:\STACKER\CHECK /WP" so it follows
|    the SMARTDRV.EXE line.  You can change the frequency
|    or time of the AutoSave and, if you prefer, you can
|    configure the settings for each Stacker drive
|    individually.
 
|    TO CHANGE AUTOSAVE HEADINGS:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker Windows Toolbox, select the
|        Stacker drive.
 
|    2.  Click on the AutoSave tool.
 
|    3.  To enable AutoSave for that drive, click on
|        "Enable AutoSave".
 
|    4.  To change the interval, click on "Interval".
|        Then type or select how often Stacker should
|        save the header.
 
|    5.  To schedule AutoSave for a particular time,
|        click on "Scheduled" and enter the time to
|        AutoSave.
 
|    6.  To make the current setting the default, click
|        on "Set As Defaults".
 
|    7.  To change settings to the current default, click
|        on "Use Defaults".
 
|    8.  To let Stacker AutoSave interrupt processing to
|        display problems, check Enable Warning Messages.
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  335
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    9.  By default, AutoSave runs invisibly.  To display
|        the AutoSave icon continuously, uncheck Run
|        AutoSave Invisibly.
 
|    After AutoSave has saved a header, you can be sure
|    that your Stacker drive is in good condition.
 
 
| WORKING WITH ADVANCED STACKER
  _____________________________
 
|    After Stacker is installed, you may never have to
|    think about it again.  In certain situations, you
|    may have to go beyond the simple Stacker Toolbox.
|    You can tailor Stacker's configuration for your
|    system and learn how to:
 
|    o   Modify your Windows swap file size and location.
 
|    o   Change the Stacker drive size or expected
|        compression ratio if you change how you use
|        Stacker.
 
|    o   Examine or change Stacker's configuration to
|        take advantage of changes in your system.
 
|    o   Type advanced Stacker commands at the DOS
|        command prompt to monitor and maintain your
|        computer.
 
 
| ADDING A WINDOWS PERMANENT SWAP FILE
 
|    A Windows Permanent Swap File (WPSF) must remain
|    uncompressed.  Stacker now allows you to keep a
|    permanent swap file in an uncompressed area within
|    the compressed Stacker drive.  If you had a
|    permanent swap file when you installed Stacker,
|    Stacker Setup already reserved space for it on the
|    uncompressed drive.  You can put a permanent swap
|    file of up to 32MB within the Stacker drive if you
|    are using Windows 3.1 in Enhanced mode.
 
 
 
 
  336  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    TO BUILD A PERMANENT SWAP FILE ON A STACKER DRIVE
|    USING THE STACKER WINDOWS TOOLBOX:
 
|    1.  Select any Stacker drive.
 
|    2.  Click on the Configure tool.
 
|    3.  Click on "Change swap file settings".
 
|    4.  Click on "Change>>".
 
|    5.  Click on the Stacker drive to hold the swap
|        file.
 
|    6.  Click on "Permanent as the Type".
 
|    7.  Accept the recommended New Size or type a size
|        up to 32MB and choose OK.
 
|    For more information about Windows swap files, refer
|    to your Windows documentation.
 
 
| CHANGING STACKER DRIVE SIZE
 
|    After Stacker Setup, the Stacker drive (the STACVOL
|    file) contains all your data in compressed form.
|    The uncompressed drive still contains some
|    uncompressed data, such as system files, and it
|    holds the compressed STACVOL file.
 
|    The sizes of the STACVOL and the remaining space on
|    the uncompressed drive are fixed relative to each
|    other; if you make one larger, the other gets
|    smaller.
 
|    Making a larger Stacker drive:  If you move a
     ______________________________
|    permanent swap file to a Stacker drive, you may want
|    to enlarge the Stacker drive to reclaim the unused,
|    uncompressed space.
 
|    Making more uncompressed space:  If the STACVOL file
     _______________________________
|    is very large and there is little free space
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  337
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    available on the drive, move some files to another
|    disk or drive to free up space within the STACVOL
|    file.  You can then shrink the Stacker drive, which
|    results in more space on the uncompressed drive.
 
|    You will not have to change the size of a Stacker
|    drive very often; most users never have to.  If you
|    get a message indicating that there is not enough
|    compressed or uncompressed space to do something,
|    use the following procedure to make room.
 
|    TO CHANGE THE STACKER DRIVE SIZE:
 
|    1.  From the Stacker Windows Toolbox, select the
|        Stacker drive.
 
|    2.  Click on the Configure tool.
 
|    3.  Click on "Change Stacker drive size" and click
|        on OK.
 
|    4.  Click on OK to leave Windows and complete the
|        operation.
 
|    5.  To make the Stacker drive larger, choose
|        Increase Stacker drive size.
 
|    6.  To make the Stacker drive smaller, choose More
|        uncompressed space available.  If you chose to
|        make the Stacker drive smaller, Stacker must
|        first fully optimize the drive.
 
|    7.  When Stacker displays the acceptable size range,
|        type the size you want the final Stacker drive
|        to be.
 
|    8.  If you agree with the displayed results, choose
|        Perform changes on Stacker drive.  Otherwise
|        choose Modify settings or Exit.  Stacker changes
|        the Stacker drive.
 
|    9.  When prompted, press ENTER to restart your
|        system.
 
 
  338  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    After changing the Stacker drive size, Stacker
|    returns you to Windows.  If you're not using
|    Windows, you can change the Stacker drive size by
|    choosing "Change Drive Size" from the Stacker DOS
|    Toolbox.  The procedure is the same.
 
 
| CHANGING EXPECTED COMPRESSION RATIO
 
|    As you use your computer, data on your disk may
|    compress differently than it did when you first set
|    up Stacker.  This may result in an actual
|    compression ratio significantly better or worse than
|    the expected compression ratio.  Stacker Windows
|    Toolbox gauges and the Stacker Report show how the
|    expected and actual compression ratios compare.  If
|    the two ratios are far apart, some programs may not
|    be able to accurately project how much space is
|    available on the disk.
 
|    NOTE:  When you recompress by choosing Optimize,
|           Full-MaxSpace, Stacker analyzes the data and
|           adjusts your expected compression ratio if
|           you are getting better than 2.5 to 1
|           compression.
 
|    You can use the Stacker DOS Toolbox to change the
|    expected compression ratio to get more accurate free
|    space projections.  This process does not affect the
|    actual compression ratio on the disk.
 
|    TO CHANGE YOUR EXPECTED COMPRESSION RATIO:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              stac
 
|    2.  Click on "Configure Expected Compression".
 
|    3.  If you have more than one Stacker drive, choose
|        the drive to be changed.
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  339
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Press any key as prompted, so Stacker can
|        optimize the drive if necessary.
 
|        Stacker displays a range of valid compression
|        values, such as 2.1:5.5.
 
|    5.  Type the desired expected compression ratio (do
|        not include :1), and then press ENTER.
 
|        Stacker displays a projected result. You can
|        choose to change the expected compression ratio,
|        to modify your choices, or to exit without
|        making changes.
 
|    6.  To change the disk, choose Perform changes on
|        Stacker drive.
 
|    7.  When prompted, press any key to restart your
|        computer and put the changes into effect.
 
 
| HOW STACKER DRIVES ARE STORED
 
|    Each Stacker drive is actually a hidden file named
|    STACVOL.xxx stored on an uncompressed drive, where
             ___
|    xxx is DSK or a three-digit number.  If the STACVOL
     ___
|    file is 80MB in size, the Stacker drive it
|    represents typically holds at least 200MB of data.
|    Stacker Setup inserts the commands DOS needs to give
|    the STACVOL file a drive letter and handle it as a
|    disk drive.
 
|    Suppose you have a single hard disk, with drive
|    letter C.  After Stacker Setup compresses the data,
|    DOS acts as though you have two hard disks.  C is
|    the Stacker drive, containing all the original data.
|    D is the uncompressed drive; it contains any files
|    needed to start up your system and any other files
|    that must remain uncompressed.  Drive D also
|    contains the hidden STACVOL file.
 
|    NOTE:  Formatting the uncompressed drive that holds
|           a STACVOL file or deleting a STACVOL file
 
 
  340  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|           destroys all your data.  Back up your files
|           on another drive or disk before performing
|           such a critical function.
 
 
| IDENTIFYING DRIVE LETTERS
 
|    When Stacker Setup compresses data on a hard disk,
|    the compressed Stacker drive keeps the original
|    drive letter.  The associated, uncompressed drive is
|    assigned a new letter.  Stacker takes care of
|    organizing the drive letters so you do not have to.
|    All your data will still be on the drives where you
|    expect it to be.
 
|    However, if you are a more advanced user, you may
|    want to tailor your system's configuration.  You can
|    use the following method to determine the Stacker
|    drive letters and those of the uncompressed drives.
 
|    TO DETERMINE THE LETTERS OF STACKER DRIVES AND THEIR
|    ASSOCIATED, UNCOMPRESSED DRIVES:
 
|    1.  At a DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              stacker
 
|        A Stacker drive map such as this displays.
 
|          Drive A: was drive A: at boot time
|          Drive B: was drive B: at boot time    [Auto-mounting Stacker drive]
|          Drive C: was drive C: at boot time    [E:\STACVOL.DSK=174.6MB]
|          Drive D: was drive D: at boot time    [F:\STACVOL.DSK=26.7MB]
|          Drive E: was drive E: at boot time
|          Drive F: was drive F: at boot time
 
 
|    Some drives have information in brackets at the end
|    of the line.  For those lines, the first drive
|    letter is the Stacker drive.  In brackets at the end
|    of the line, the drive letter in front of the
|    STACVOL file is the uncompressed drive associated
|    with the Stacker drive.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  341
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Editing the STACKER.INI file
 
|    Stacker gets detailed information from the
|    STACKER.INI file and depends on the CONFIG.SYS file
|    for basic system configuration information.  To
|    tailor your configuration, you may need to edit both
|    files.
 
|    Stacker Setup creates STACKER.INI as a hidden file
|    in the root directory of your boot drive if it does
|    not already exist.  Other Stacker commands modify
|    the file as needed.
 
|    TO UNHIDE, EDIT THE FILE, AND MAKE THE STACKER.INI
|    FILE HIDDEN AGAIN:
 
|    1.  Change to the host drive and type the following
|        type the following to unhide the STACKER.INI
|        file:
 
|              attrib -r -s -h stacker.ini
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              e stacker.ini
 
|        This opens the STACKER.INI file using PC DOS's
|        E Editor.
 
|    3.  If you need to add a line, move the cursor to
|        the line preceding where you want to insert the
|        blank line, and press ENTER.
 
|    4.  Press F4 to exit the text editor and save the
|        changes if you have make any edits.
 
|    5.  Rehide the STACKER.INI file by typing:
 
|              attrib +r +s +h stacker.ini
 
|    6.  Restart your computer to put the changes into
|        effect.
 
 
 
  342  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    The STACKER.INI file provides configuration
|    information for the Stacker device drivers so they
|    can establish access to the Stacker drives.  A
|    STACKER.INI file contains two types of lines:
|    commands and drive specifications.
 
|    COMMANDS
 
|    o   Are usually near the top of the STACKER.INI
|        file; all start with /
 
|    STACKER.INI contains only the commands needed to
|    configure your Stacker system, each on its own line.
|    The order of the commands makes no difference, and
|    you can add commands to customize your Stacker
|    configuration.  Default settings do not appear.
 
|    If you add commands to STACKER.INI, enter each on a
|    separate line, usually near the top of the file.
|    For example, adding /Q--results in a list of the
|    Stacker drives during system startup.  You could add
|    it if you want to see detailed information whenever
|    you restart.
 
|    DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS
 
|    o   Begin with a drive letter and a colon; each
|        specification occupies a separate line; each
|        defines a different Stacker drive and specifies
|        its mounting status (SW-swapped, NS-not swapped,
|        or RP-replaced).
 
|    The following line is a typical drive specification
|    in a STACKER.INI file.
 
|          d:\stacvol.dsk,sw
 
|    It shows the STACVOL file name on the uncompressed
|    drive (D).  The SW indicates that the letter of the
|    uncompressed drive was swapped with that of the
|    Stacker drive.  The compressed Stacker drive that
|    holds all your data has the original drive letter.
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  343
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Stacker drives created from free space are mounted
|    not swapped (NS); removable drives are mounted
|    replaced (RP).  When Stacker mounts a drive
|    replaced, it uses a single drive letter for both the
|    uncompressed drive and the compressed Stacker drive.
|    Because of this "split personality," you can access
|    only one portion at a time--compressed or
|    uncompressed.
 
|    For a complete list of commands and more information
|    about modifying the STACKER.INI file, refer to the
|    PC DOS 7 Command Reference or see Stacker Help
     __________________________
|    included in the Windows Stacker program group.
 
|    Stacker relies on the STACKER.INI file for
|    configuration information for the device drivers.
|    Stacker Setup creates STACKER.INI as a hidden file
|    in the root directory of your boot drive if it does
|    not already exist.  Other Stacker commands modify
|    this file as needed.
 
 
|    Editing the CONFIG.SYS File
 
|    The CONFIG.SYS file sets up basic configuration
|    information for your system.  DOS knows nothing
|    about your Stacker drives until it reads the
|    CONFIG.SYS file.  Stacker's device drivers are
|    defined in the CONFIG.SYS file.
 
|    Your memory management choices affect the CONFIG.SYS
|    file.  You can put the Stacker driver and its
|    buffers into conventional memory (the first 640K),
|    but this may cause other DOS programs to run out of
|    memory.  You can free up conventional memory by
|    loading the entire Stacker driver into upper memory
|    or extended memory, if your system has the
|    capability.
 
|    Exactly how Stacker loads high depends on the
|    operating system and memory manager you use.  If you
|    use a memory manager provided by DOS, refer to
|    Chapter 6, "Making More Memory Available" on
 
 
  344  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    page 161  for further information about memory
|    management.  If you use a different memory manager,
|    check its documentation.
 
 
|    Loading Stacker High
 
|    In the CONFIG.SYS file, memory management commands
|    make upper memory (between 640KB and 1MB) available
|    if your system has the capability.  Operating
|    systems that take advantage of upper memory blocks
|    (UMBs) require that this area be enabled and
|    referenced correctly.  To do so, you need to use a
|    memory manager.
 
|    Drivers that use upper memory blocks access them via
|    DOS's DEVICEHIGH=keyword.  Other memory managers may
                      _______
|    use different keywords.
 
|    For PC DOS 7, there is only one DEVICEHIGH line--for
|    STACHIGH.SYS.
 
|          device=c:\dos\himem.sys
|          dos=high,umb
|          device=c:\dos\emm386.sys noems
|          .
|          .
|          .
|          DEVICEHIGH=C:\STACKER\STACHIGH.SYS
 
|    Most block device drivers should be loaded before
|    the STACHIGH.SYS line.  Block device drivers loaded
|    after this line will be assigned letters above all
|    the host drive letters.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  345
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Using DPMS with Stacker
 
|    Some of the latest computers load Stacker beyond
|    upper memory--into extended memory.  This is the
|    best way to minimize use of conventional or upper
|    memory.  If you have at least a 386 computer with
|    more than 1MB of RAM, Stacker uses Novell(**)'s DOS
|    Protected Mode Services (DPMS).  This allows most of
|    the Stacker driver to be stored in extended memory,
|    freeing conventional and upper memory for those
|    programs that cannot use DPMS.
 
|    Just as you needed a memory manager to control use
|    of the upper memory allocations, for DPMS you need a
|    special memory manager, such as HIMEM.SYS, to
|    control DPMS access.  The memory manager must
|    provide Virtual Control Program Interface (VCPI)
|    services and a DPMS server (such as Stacker's
|    DPMS.EXE).  Most memory managers provide VCPI
|    services.
 
|    With DPMS, about 17K of the Stacker device driver
|    resides in conventional memory if "DEVICE=" is used
|    for the STACHIGH.SYS line.  If you use "DEVICEHIGH="
|    instead, the 17K can move into upper memory blocks.
 
|    If your system uses DPMS, Stacker Setup adds another
|    line, the DPMS.EXE line, to your CONFIG.SYS file.
 
|          device=c:\dos\himem.sys
|          dos=high,umb
|          device=c:\dos\emm386.sys noems
|          .
|          .
|          .
|          device=c:\stacker\dpms.exe
|          devicehigh=c:\stacker\stachigh.sys
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
| (**) Novell is a trademark of Novell, Inc.
 
 
  346  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    The DPMS.EXE line precedes the STACHIGH.SYS
|    statement.  The logic is to enable the DPMS area
|    first; then tell Stacker to go high.  It is also
|    important to note that the DPMS statement must
|    follow any EMM386 statement.
 
|    Stacker Setup automatically uses DPMS when possible.
|    However, if STACKER.INI contains an /EMS, /UMB, or
|    /-DPMS switch, Stacker uses EMS instead.  Stacker
|    Setup adds the EMS switch only if DPMS cannot be
|    used and if you compressed a large drive (more than
|    400MB).  If your system cannot take advantage of
|    DPMS, you may be able to use EMS.  You can only use
|    one or the other--DPMS or EMS.  To use EMS, delete
|    any switches that enable DPMS.
 
 
|    Using EMS with Stacker
 
|    As with DPMS, using expanded memory (EMS) requires a
|    special memory manager.  When you run Express Setup,
|    Stacker automatically adds the /EMS switch if DPMS
|    cannot be used and you compress any large drives.
|    During Custom Setup, Stacker asks if you want EMS.
|    If you answer Yes, Stacker Setup adds the /EMS
|    switch.
 
|    Stacker cache buffers can reside in EMS.  The lines
|    in your CONFIG.SYS file should look something like
|    this:
 
|          device=c:\dos\himem.sys
|          dos=high,umb
|          device=c:\dos\emm386.sys ram
|          .
|          .
|          .
|          devicehigh=c:\stacker\stachigh.sys
 
|    Notice that the EMM386.SYS line says RAM instead of
|    NOEMS.  Use" DEVICEHIGH=" on the STACHIGH.SYS line.
|    In either case, there is no DPMS.EXE line.
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  347
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    NOTE:  Windows and DOS contain several programs that
|           have the same name.  However, the PC DOS
|           programs have been updated after the release
|           of Windows 3.1.  If you install Windows after
|           installing DOS, check your CONFIG.SYS and
|           AUTOEXEC.BAT files to make sure that you are
|           using the programs HIMEM.SYS, EMM386.EXE, and
|           SMARTDRV.EXE from the DOS directory and not
|           from the Windows directory.
 
|    After setting up Stacker in upper memory, it is a
|    good idea to run PC DOS's RAMBoost Setup or your
|    memory optimizer to let it reconfigure your upper
|    memory and account for Stacker.
 
|    Some software programs, such as QEMM(**) Stealth and
|    386MAX(**), do not work well with EMS enabled.  For
|    more information, check the Stacker Readme file
|    (README.TXT located in your Stacker directory).
 
 
| MOUNTING REMOVABLE STACKER DRIVES
 
|    With Stacker on your system, you can compress
|    removable disks as well as hard disks.  This holds
|    true for diskettes as well as others, such as
|    PCMCIA, Bernoullis(**), or SyQuests(**).  After you
|    compress a removable disk in one of your drives,
|    Stacker assumes you will want access to that data
|    later so it AutoMounts the drive by adding a line to
|    your STACKER.INI file.  This makes the drive
|    Stacker-aware.  It can read Stacker-compressed disks
|    in addition to standard ones.
 
  ---------------
 
| (**) QEMM is a trademark of Quarterdeck Office Systems.
 
| (**) 386MAX is a trademark of Qualitas, Inc.
 
| (**) Bernoulli is a trademark of Iomega Corp.
 
| (**) SyQuest is a trademark of Syquest Technology.
 
 
  348  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    For example, if you compress an empty diskette in
|    drive b, Stacker inserts the following line into
|    your STACKER.INI file:
 
|          b:\stacvol.DSK,rp
 
|    You can AutoMount your other removable drives, even
|    if you do not compress any disks at this time.  Or,
|    you can use Stacker Anywhere to mount the drive
|    temporarily when you need to access a compressed,
|    removable Stacker disk.  See "Using Stacker Tools"
|    on page 316 for the procedures.
 
 
|    AutoMounting a Removable Diskette Drive
 
|    When you plan to use compressed, removable
|    diskettes, AutoMount your removable diskette drives
|    to make them permanently Stacker-aware.  Then the
|    drive recognizes Stacker disks whenever you insert
|    them.  AutoMounting does not affect how the drive
|    reads a noncompressed disk.  If you insert a
|    standard, uncompressed disk, the drive reads the
|    usual data.
 
|    TO HAVE STACKER AUTOMOUNT DRIVE B:
 
|    1.  Exit Windows completely.
 
|    2.  Change to the host drive and type the following
|        to unhide the STACKER.INI file:
 
|              attrib -r -s -h stacker.ini
 
|    3.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              e stacker.ini
 
|        This opens the STACKER.INI file using PC DOS's
|        E Editor.
 
|    4.  Move the cursor to the end of the file and press
|        ENTER to get a new line, if necessary.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  349
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    5.  Type "b:"
 
|    6.  Press F4 to exit the text editor and save any
|        changes.
 
|    7.  Rehide the STACKER.INI file by typing:
 
|              attrib +r +s +h stacker.ini
 
|    8.  Restart your computer to put the changes into
|        effect.
 
|    You can add as many drive letters (each on a
|    separate line) as you have removable drives.
 
 
|    AutoMounting Software-driven Removable Drives
 
|    To AutoMount other removable drives, such as a
|    Bernoulli or a SyQuest, the procedure depends on how
|    the drive is driven and which DOS your system uses.
|    DOS readily recognizes hard drives and removable
|    drives that are "hardware-defined."
 
|    However, if you have a removable drive that is
|    software-defined by a device driver in the
|    CONFIG.SYS file (such as a Bernoulli), DOS and
|    Stacker do not "see" it when they load.  By the time
|    CONFIG.SYS loads the device driver, DOS has already
|    determined all drive letters.  You can edit your
|    STACKER.INI file to make the drive visible to DOS
|    and enable it to AutoMount.
 
|    TO AUTOMOUNT A DEVICE-DRIVEN REMOVABLE DRIVE:
 
|    1.  Exit Windows completely.
 
|    2.  Change to the host drive and type the following
|        to unhide the STACKER.INI file:
 
|              attrib -r -s -h stacker.ini
 
 
 
 
  350  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    3.  To open the text editor type the following at
|        the DOS command prompt:
 
|              e stacker.ini
 
|        Your current STACKER.INI file displays on
|        screen.
 
|    4.  On a separate line at the top of the file, type:
 
|              /auto
 
|        The /AUTO command ensures that AutoMount is
|        turned on.
 
|    5.  At the bottom of the file on a separate line,
|        type:
 
|              drive:
               _____
 
|        where drive is the letter of the drive you want
               _____
|        to mount.
 
|    6.  Save your changes and exit the E Editor
 
|    7.  Rehide the STACKER.INI file by typing:
 
|              attrib +r +s +h stacker.ini
 
|    8.  Restart your system.
 
 
|    Beginning Stacker Drive Letters at a Specific Letter
 
|    Certain drives require use of a particular drive
|    letter.  If you cannot reconfigure the drive to use
|    a different letter, you can have Stacker drive
|    letters begin at a specified letter.
 
|    For example, most CD-ROMs are assigned drive letters
|    by the MSCDEX.EXE program through AUTOEXEC.BAT,
|    after Stacker drive letters have been assigned.  If
|    your computer has only one hard disk but uses
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  351
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    letters D and E for other devices, you can tell DOS
|    to start assigning new drive letters with drive F.
 
|    TO ASSIGN DRIVE LETTERS STARTING WITH A SPECIFIC
|    LETTER:
 
|    1.  Change to the host drive and type the following
|        to unhide the STACKER.INI file:
 
|              attrib -r -s -h stacker.ini
 
|    2.  At a DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              e stacker.ini
 
|    3.  At the point in the file where the commands are
|        listed, press ENTER to add a blank line, and
|        then type:
 
|              /bd=drive
                   _____
 
|        where drive is the first drive letter you want
               _____
|        to be assigned to Stacker drives.
 
|    4.  Save the STACKER.INI file and exit the editor.
 
|    5.  Rehide the STACKER.INI file by typing:
 
|              attrib +r +s +h stacker.ini
 
|    6.  Restart your computer.
 
 
| COMMAND SUMMARY
  _______________
 
|    If you prefer to work from the DOS command prompt,
|    Stacker provides a full set of commands that help
|    you monitor and maintain Stacker drives on your
|    computer.
 
|    To get detailed syntax information about each
|    command, at the DOS command prompt type "help"
|    followed by any one of the the Stacker commands
 
 
  352  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    briefly described in the following table.  The PC
                                                    __
|    DOS 7 Command Reference lets you know when to use
     _______________________
|    each command and provides examples of the more
|    complex commands.
 
|    For quick help on Stacker commands, type the command
|    name followed by /?, such as "check /?" to see
|    syntax information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  353
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
|    |                  COMMAND SUMMARY                 |
                        _______________
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | CHECK | Detects any Stacker problems on the      |
|    |       | disk.  Use /F to repair.  To check       |
|    |       | Stacker drive C and repair any problems, |
|    |       | type:                                    |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       check c: /f                        |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       | Also reports spaced used and free on a   |
|    |       | Stacker drive.                           |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | CONFIG| Rebuilds your computer's configuration   |
|    |       | in STACKER.INI to make it consistent     |
|    |       | with the actual status of your system.   |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | CREATE| Creates an empty Stacker drive using     |
|    |       | free space on the disk.  To create a     |
|    |       | Stacker drive in drive B, type:          |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       create b:                          |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       | Suppose RAM disk E is created in         |
|    |       | CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT.  To convert  |
|    |       | the RAM disk to a Stacker drive, add     |
|    |       | these lines to the end of AUTOEXEC.BAT:  |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       create e: /b                       |
|    |       |       stacker e:                         |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | DCONVE|TConverts a DoubleSpace or SuperStor/DS   |
|    |       | compressed disk to a Stacker drive       |
|    |       | automatically after running Stacker      |
|    |       | Setup.  To convert an unmounted          |
|    |       | compressed disk in drive D, type:        |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       dconvert /c d:\dblspace.000        |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
  354  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
|    |                  COMMAND SUMMARY                 |
                        _______________
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | HCONVE|TUpdates an earlier Stacker drive to use  |
|    |       | Stacker 4.0's and higher compression.    |
|    |       | For example, to convert a removable      |
|    |       | diskette in drive A compressed by an     |
|    |       | earlier version of Stacker, type:        |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       hconvert /c a:\stacvol.dsk         |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | PASSWD| Sets read/write and read-only passwords  |
|    |       | for Stacker drives.  To assign password  |
|    |       | XDET6 to drive D, type:                  |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       passwd D:.XDET6                    |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       | The Stacker Toolbox help provides        |
|    |       | complete details.                        |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | REMOVD|VDeletes the STACVOL file and all the     |
|    |       | data from your Stacker drive.            |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | REPORT| Gives graphic information on the         |
|    |       | compression status of the disk and its   |
|    |       | files.                                   |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | SDEFRA| Runs the Stacker Optimizer to defragment |
|    |       | or recompress a Stacker drive.  It can   |
|    |       | also change the size of a Stacker drive, |
|    |       | resulting in a corresponding change to   |
|    |       | its uncompressed drive.                  |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | SDIR  | Displays compression ratios for the disk |
|    |       | or files specified.  To see the          |
|    |       | compression ratios for the Stacker       |
|    |       | files, type:                             |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       sdir /c c:\stacker\*.*             |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | SETUP | Used when you want to creates more       |
|    |       | Stacker drives.                          |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  355
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--------------------------------------------------+
|    |                  COMMAND SUMMARY                 |
                        _______________
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | SSETUP| Completes the initial setup of Stacker   |
|    |       | compression.                             |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | STACKE| Displays the status of all drives at     |
|    |       | boot time.  To list them, type:          |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       stacker                            |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       | Mounts or unmounts a Stacker drive.  To  |
|    |       | mount a diskette compressed by Stacker   |
|    |       | in drive B, type:                        |
     |       |                                          |
|    |       |       stacker b:                         |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | SYSINF| TBD                                      |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | TUNER | Adjusts the balance between compression  |
|    |       | and speed using the Stacker tuner.       |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
|    | UNCOMP| Decompresses all the data stored in the  |
|    |       | Stacker drive, storing it on the         |
|    |       | original uncompressed drive.  Then it    |
|    |       | deletes the STACVOL file.  Requires      |
|    |       | enough disk space to hold the            |
|    |       | uncompressed data.                       |
     +-------+------------------------------------------+
 
 
| TROUBLESHOOTING
  _______________
 
|    +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
|    | This section will eventually be placed in the    |
|    | Troubleshooting section of the PC DOS User's     |
|    | Guide, with only a cross reference to it in this |
|    | chapter.                                         |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
  356  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    A few general procedures can solve virtually any
|    problem you might have with a Stacker drive.  When
|    you need help, scan the first part of this chapter
|    to see the general troubleshooting tips and
|    procedures, including how to:
 
|    o   Run the DOS CHKDSK utility.
|    o   Remove attributes from STACVOL files.
|    o   Run other disk repair utilities.
 
|    The rest of this section includes specific
|    information in three categories.  Most topics
|    include reference to the tips and procedures for
|    details.
 
|    o   Troubleshooting during Stacker Setup
|    o   Computer startup problems
|    o   Issues while using Stacker
 
 
| TIPS AND PROCEDURES
 
|    Many problems with compressed data result from
|    errors in the DOS file system or defects in the hard
|    disk media.  When Stacker detects either type of
|    problem, it write- protects your disk to protect
|    your data and suggests how to fix the problem.
 
|    NOTE:  When all else fails, you can always start
|           your system using the PC DOS startup
|           diskette.  It gets you to a DOS command
|           prompt.  You cannot troubleshoot your machine
|           under Windows.
 
|    Running the Stacker CHECK program is always a good
|    first step.  "Using Stacker Tools" on page 316
|    details how to use CHECK.  If the Stacker drive is
|    corrupted, the CHECK.COM file may be damaged.  You
|    can run CHECK from the installation disk or from the
|    uncompressed drive.  CHECK is the only way to remove
|    write-protection from a Stacker drive.
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  357
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    How AutoProtect Secures Your Data
 
|    Stacker's AutoProtect feature runs every time you
|    start your computer.  It scans all Stacker drives on
|    the system and quickly checks the status of each.
|    AutoProtect can fix some problems immediately so you
|    never even know they existed.  Other problems may be
|    more serious. If AutoProtect cannot repair a problem
|    on a Stacker drive, Stacker write-protects the disk
|    so your data will not be damaged and then reports to
|    you. Stacker may suggest you run CHECK /F to correct
|    the problem.
 
 
|    Diagnosing and Repairing Stacker Drives
 
|    A Stacker drive is contained in a STACVOL file.  You
|    may have to remove hidden, system, and read-only
|    attributes from it to correct errors or to run a
|    surface scan.
 
|    TO REMOVE ATTRIBUTES FROM A STACVOL FILE:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, identify the full
|        STACVOL file name from a displayed message or by
|        typing:
 
|              stacker
 
|    2.  Change to the host drive and type the following
|        at the DOS command prompt:
 
|              attrib -r -s -h drive:stacvol.xxx
                               _____         ___
 
|        where drive: is the drive and xxx is the
               ______                  ___
|        extension of the STACVOL file.
 
|    Some disk repair utilities cannot work while a
|    Stacker drive is mounted.  You may have to unmount
|    the drive as well.
 
|    TO UNMOUNT A STACKER DRIVE:
 
 
 
  358  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              stacker -drive:
                        ______
 
|        where -drive: is the Stacker drive to be
                ______
|        unmounted.
 
|    When the computer restarts, Stacker remounts the
|    drive.
 
 
|    Running CHKDSK
 
|    You can solve some system problems by running the
|    DOS CHKDSK program.  Running CHKDSK also runs CHECK
|    on a Stacker compressed drive.  You can use CHKDSK
|    to make repairs.  Back up damaged files if you can
|    before running CHKDSK.
 
|    TO RUN CHKDSK:
 
|    1.  Change to the directory that contains DOS files.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              chkdsk drive:
                      ______
 
|        where drive: is the drive to be checked.  Run
               ______
|        CHKDSK for both the Stacker drive and its
|        uncompressed drive.
 
|    3.  If CHKDSK reports only errors with lost
|        allocation units, type:
 
|              chkdsk drive: /f
                      ______
 
|        Let it fix them.  If CHKDSK reports other
|        errors, use a complete disk repair utility to
|        fix them.  Exit CHKDSK and run your other
|        utility.  If you have no other disk repair
|        utility, try to back up any files reported as
|        damaged, then run CHKDSK again and let it fix
|        the error.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  359
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  CHECK runs after CHKDSK finishes.  If it offers
|        to do a disk surface test, type "Y" for Yes.
 
 
|    Disk Repair Utilities
 
|    A multipurpose disk repair utility can locate hard
|    disk errors, repair many, and block out areas of the
|    disk that are bad.  If Stacker has write protected
|    the drive, run CHECK /F to remove the write
|    protection.  You will have to run the disk repair
|    utility on the uncompressed drive that holds the
|    Stacker drive.  To do this, change the attributes of
|    the STACVOL file that holds your Stacker drive.
 
|    Type "STACKER" if you do not know the letter of the
|    uncompressed drive and the full name of the STACVOL
|    file.
 
|    TO RUN A DISK REPAIR UTILITY:
 
|    1.  Change to the uncompressed drive that contains
|        the STACVOL file.
 
|    2.  Make the STACVOL file accessible by removing its
|        attributes (see the procedure earlier in this
|        chapter on page 358).
 
|    3.  Unmount the Stacker drive by typing:
 
|              stacker -drive:
                        ______
 
|        where drive: is the mounted drive letter.
               ______
 
|    4.  Start your disk repair utility and follow its
|        instructions.
 
|    5.  Restart your computer.
 
|    When your computer restarts, Stacker reapplies the
|    attributes and mounts the Stacker drive.
 
 
 
 
  360  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| TROUBLESHOOTING DURING STACKER SETUP
 
|    Error messages during Stacker Setup always have
|    online help available.  Just press F1 when you get
|    the error.  The message and its help explain what to
|    do next.  Wherever it is always safe to stop Stacker
|    Setup, you will see an Exit button.  However,
|    Stacker provides safeguards in case Stacker Setup is
|    interrupted at some other point.
 
 
|    AutoRecover
 
|    Stacker AutoRecover keeps your data safe when
|    Stacker Setup is interrupted for some reason.
|    AutoRecover may complete the compression process or
|    it may remove Stacker compression from the disk,
|    depending on the stage in progress when Stacker
|    Setup was interrupted.
 
|    TO LET AUTORECOVER TAKE OVER:
 
|    1.  Remove any disk in drive A and restart your
|        computer.
 
|    2.  When Stacker Setup messages appear, follow the
|        instructions.  If it offers to decompress data,
|        let it.
 
|    3.  When the DOS command prompt returns, run a disk
|        repair utility or CHKDSK, and then restart your
|        computer.
 
|    4.  Run Stacker Setup again if necessary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  361
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| COMPUTER STARTUP PROBLEMS
 
|    When your computer runs, the Stacker driver controls
|    any Stacker drives.  If your computer does not start
|    normally, you may not be able to access to data on
|    Stacker drives.  If you have trouble starting, scan
|    this section to find out what to do.
 
 
|    Computer Won't Start Up
 
|    If your system will not start up at all on drive C,
|    the DOS system files might be missing or corrupted.
|    The PC DOS startup diskette contains those files.
|    All you have to do is copy them back to your drive
|    C.
 
|    IMPORTANT:  You might want to make a backup copy of
|    your Setup Diskette before beginning and not use
          ______________
|    your original Setup Diskette for this procedure.
                   ______________
 
|    TO RESTORE THE STACKER CONFIGURATION FILES:
 
|    1.  Insert the Setup Diskette from your PC DOS
                    ______________
|        installation diskettes into drive A and restart
|        your computer.
 
|    2.  Answer NO when queried if you want to install
|        DOS.
 
|    3.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              c:\stacker\config
 
|        Let it make suggested changes.
 
|        If your Stacker files are stored in a different
|        directory, use it instead.
 
|    4.  When the DOS command prompt returns, remove the
|        Setup Diskette and restart the computer again.
         ______________
 
 
 
 
  362  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    If the computer still does not restart from drive C,
|    you may have to restore the DOS system files as
|    well.
 
|    TO RESTORE DOS SYSTEM FILES:
 
|    1.  Insert your Setup Diskette into drive A and
                     ______________
|        restart your computer.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              c:\stacker\stacker
 
|        +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ------------------------+
         |                                              |
|        | Is the above directory correct as currently  |
|        | listed?                                      |
         |                                              |
         +----------------------------------------------+
 
|        This command lists your drive map.
 
|        If you specified for Stacker Setup to store the
|        files in a different directory, use that
|        directory instead.
 
|    3.  Identify the drive letter of the uncompressed
|        boot drive (in brackets at the end of the drive
|        C line).
 
|    4.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              sys drive:
                   ______
 
|        where drive: is the uncompressed drive letter.
               ______
 
|    5.  Remove the Setup Diskette and restart your
                    ______________
|        computer.
 
|    If your computer still will not start up from drive
|    C, you might have a problem with your DOS version.
|    Check the PC DOS 7 Command Reference for more
               __________________________
|    information.
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  363
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Computer Starts, But Cannot Access Compressed Data
 
|    When the computer appears to start up normally but
|    you cannot find your compressed data, it usually
|    means the Stacker drive was not mounted.  To verify
|    that the Stacker drives were not mounted, type:
 
|          c:\stacker\stacker
 
|    If no STACVOL files are listed, they were not
|    mounted.  DCONVERT does not mount the drive.
 
|    To mount a Stacker drive temporarily, type "stacker
|    drive:" where drive is the disk that contains the
     ______        _____
|    STACVOL file.
 
|    If you restart your computer, this drive will be
|    unmounted again.
 
|    NOTE:  If you see a message that there are no
|           available replaceable drives, edit the
|           STACKER.INI file (refer to "Editing the
|           STACKER.INI file" on page 342 if you need
|           information on how to edit this file) to add
|           RP=2.  If you already have a RP command,
|           increase its value by at least one.
 
|    To mount a Stacker drive permanently:
 
|    DCONVERT does not modify the STACKER.INI file.  To
|    cause a converted drive to be mounted when you
|    restart your system, edit the STACKER.INI file
|    (refer to "Editing the STACKER.INI file" on page 342
|    if you need information on how to edit this file)
|    and add a drive specification line.  For example,
|    you would type on a new line:
 
|          drive:\stacvol.dsk, sw
           _____          ___
 
|    When you restart your computer, the drive is mounted
|    along with any other drives specified in STACKER.INI
 
 
 
 
  364  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    NOTE:  The STACKER.INI file is a hidden file in the
|           root directory of the boot drive.
 
|    See "Using Stacker Tools" and "Working with Advanced
|    Stacker" for details on mounting removable Stacker
|    drives.
 
|    When you type "dir c:", you see files on the
|    uncompressed drive.  Several critical DOS and
|    STACKER files are stored here.  Stacker includes the
|    CONFIG command that you can use to rebuild basic
|    configuration files that mount existing Stacker
|    drives.
 
|    TO REBUILD THE STACKER CONFIGURATION:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, change to the usual
|        boot drive (usually drive C) and type:
 
|              c:\stacker\config
 
|        CONFIG searches for STACVOL files and builds the
|        entries needed to configure the basic system.
|        If you modified it earlier, you will have to do
|        it again.
 
|    2.  Restart your computer.
 
 
|    Write-Protected Stacker Drive
 
|    When an application exits improperly, a damaged
|    file, such as a temporary swap file, a holding file,
|    or a document, may be left behind.  This damage is
|    present whether or not Stacker is on your system.
 
|    The next time you restart your computer, Stacker's
|    AutoProtect notices the problem and tells you what
|    to do.  When CHECK /WP runs from your AUTOEXEC.BAT
|    file, it automatically repairs the damage, removes
|    the write protection, and restarts your computer.
|    If you are not sure if the disk is still
|    write-protected, run CHECK /F.  If any problems
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  365
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    remain, CHECK fixes them and removes
|    write-protection for you.
 
 
|    Detected a Restart While Stacker Optimizer Was Writing
 
|    The system was restarted while the Stacker Optimizer
|    was in the "Writing New Directories..." stage of
|    optimization.  The program must finish what it
|    started to put the STACVOL file in usable condition.
|    Your data is safe, but you cannot access it until
|    Stacker can mount the drive.
 
|    IMPORTANT:  Do not restart your computer while the
|    Stacker Optimizer is running.  If you must interrupt
|    it, press F10 to exit safely.
 
|    TO LET STACKER OPTIMIZER CONTINUE:
 
|    1.  Determine the STACVOL file name (use the STACKER
|        command, if necessary).
 
|    2.  Insert the Setup Diskette and change to that
                    ______________
|        drive (or change to the Stacker installation
|        drive and directory), and type:
 
|              sdefrag /restore=drive:\stacvol.xxx
                                ______         ___
 
|        where drive: is the uncompressed drive and xxx
               ______                               ___
|        is the file extension of your STACVOL file (most
|        likely DSK).
 
|    3.  Let Stacker Optimizer continue working.  When
|        finished, it restarts your computer and mounts
|        the Stacker drive.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  366  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Detected a Restart While Stacker Optimizer Was Optimizing Files
 
|    The system was restarted while Stacker Optimizer was
|    in the "Optimizing files..."  stage of optimization.
|    Stacker write-protected the Stacker drive to protect
|    your data.  You will have to let the Optimizer
|    repair the Stacker drive, then restart to remove the
|    write-protection.
 
|    TO COMPLETE STACKER OPTIMIZER AND REMOVE THE
|    WRITE-PROTECTION:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              sdefrag drive:
                       ______
 
|        where drive: is the Stacker drive.  The SDEFRAG
               ______
|        command repairs the drive and restarts your
|        computer.
 
|    2.  Run CHECK /F, then run Stacker Optimizer again.
 
 
|    Unable To Repair FATs, #139 (SDEFRAG)
 
|    If SDEFRAG is not able to repair the Stacker drive
|    in the above situation, you will get this message.
|    It means that both copies of the File Allocation
|    Table (FAT) have been corrupted.  You will lose some
|    data following this procedure, but it's the only way
|    to save the remaining data on your disk.
 
|    TO CLEAN UP THE FAT AND GET RID OF DAMAGED FILES:
 
|    1.  At a DOS command prompt, make the Stacker drive
|        current and type:
 
|              check /=a  /f
 
|        USE THE /=A PARAMETER WITH CAUTION.
 
|    2.  When CHECK offers to repair the drive, let it.
 
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  367
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    3.  When CHECK offers to delete files, respond "No".
 
|    4.  Restart your computer and run CHECK /F again.
|        Let it delete any files still reported as
|        damaged.  Then use your most recent backup to
|        restore missing files.
 
 
| OTHER STACKER PROBLEMS
 
|    This section explains how to deal with some problems
|    that occasionally occur while using Stacker:
 
|    o   Stacker Optimizer and 32K clusters
|    o   Errors while running Stacker Optimizer (SDEFRAG)
|    o   CD-ROM drive letter changes
 
 
|    Stacker Optimizer and 32K Clusters
 
|    If you use drives with 32K clusters, Stacker
|    Optimizer may need more memory (more than the 600K
|    needed in previous Stacker versions).  If you do not
|    have that much conventional memory available, run
|    Stacker Optimizer with a special option.  Using this
|    option affects speed, but allows you to run Stacker
|    Optimizer using less memory.
 
|    TO RUN STACKER OPTIMIZER IN LESS MEMORY:
 
|    1.  Exit Windows completely.
 
|    2.  From a DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              sdefrag /buffer=nnn
                               ___
 
|        where nnn is a value between 256 and 4096,
               ___
|        inclusive.  By default, SDEFRAG normally runs at
|        /buffer=4096.
 
|    The following examples show how much memory you can
|    save with various values.
 
 
 
  368  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    sdefrag               21K memory saved
|    /buffer=3072
|    sdefrag               42K memory saved
|    /buffer=2048
|    sdefrag            78.75K memory saved
|    /buffer=256
 
 
|    Read, Write, and Media Errors While Optimizing
 
|    When you run the Stacker Optimizer, SDEFRAG reads,
|    writes, and verifies every bit of data on your
|    Stacker drive.  In the process, it may come across
|    disk surface errors or inconsistencies in the file
|    and directory structures on the disk.  It cannot
|    continue until these are fixed.  Depending on your
|    system and the exact problem, you may see any of
|    these message numbers:  109, 110, 112, 118, 120,
|    170.  They all indicate that the Stacker Optimizer
|    found an error on your disk while attempting to
|    read, write, verify, or decompress a file.  The
|    problem may be in the file allocation table (FAT) or
|    on the disk itself. It's a good idea to back up your
|    data if you have not done it recently.  If the
|    message indicated a read error (109 or 120),
|    however, you will not be able to back up until you
|    correct the problem.
 
|    There are two steps to finding and fixing the
|    problem.  First run a surface scan utility on the
|    uncompressed drive to deal with media problems.
|    Then run a read scan on the Stacker drive to deal
|    with any resulting data problems.
 
|    TO IDENTIFY AND CORRECT THE PROBLEM:
 
|    1.  Repair the uncompressed drive using a utility
|        such as Central Point's PC Tools. DiskFix.
 
|        Message 170 indicates a serious problem.  First
|        run a tool such as Central Point PC Tools
|        DiskFix.  If it finds a problem and offers to
|        fix it, let it.  If it does not find any
 
 
                                     Chapter 9.  Using Stacker Compression  369
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        problems, however, you will have to run
|        Calibrate, which takes more time but is more
|        thorough.
 
|    2.  Run CHECK /F to find and repair data structure
|        problems on the Stacker drive.
 
|    3.  When CHECK asks if it should do a surface scan,
|        let it.
 
|    If you prefer, you can use Norton Disk Doctor or
|    another utility to do a read scan of the Stacker
|    drive.  You will have to add a command to the
|    STACKER.INI file first.
 
|    TO SCAN THE STACKER DRIVE WITH ANOTHER UTILITY:
 
|    1.  Use the PC DOS E Editor to add the /R command to
|        the beginning of your STACKER.INI file.
 
|    2.  Restart your computer, then run a disk repair
|        utility such as Norton Disk Doctor or PC Tools
|        DiskFix on the Stacker drive.
 
|    3.  Remove the /R switch (it's only for diagnostic
|        use) and restart your computer.
 
|    4.  Use Check Drive Integrity in the Stacker DOS
|        Toolbox and follow the instructions.  Let CHECK
|        delete any damaged files.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  370  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CHAPTER 10.  USING PCMCIA SUPPORT
  _________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    A computer having Personal Computer Memory Card
|    International Association (PCMCIA) support provides
|    sockets into which you can insert credit card-sized
|    devices called PC Cards.  PC Cards let you extend
                    ________
|    the capabilities of your computer by adding
|    functions, such as:
 
|    o   Communications (FAX/Modems, Token Ring,
|        Ethernet, 3270, and 5250)
|    o   Memory (SRAM and Flash)
|    o   Rotating media (ATA disk drives)
|    o   Solid state disk drives
 
|    PC DOS provides PCMCIA support through Phoenix Card
|    Manager Plus Version 3.01 from Phoenix Technologies,
|    Ltd.  This product is referred to as PCM Plus.  This
|    latest version provides user friendly menu
|    interfaced utilities for the setup, configuration,
|    and maintenance of your system.  Your specified
|    configuration is stored in an initialization file,
|    PCM.INI, which may be modified through these
|    utilities.
 
|    NOTES:
 
|    1.  You can also edit the PCM.INI file in a limited
|        way using a text editor such as the E Editor
|        supplied with PC DOS.  (Refer to the online PC
                                                     __
|        DOS 7 Command Reference  for more information
         _______________________
|        about the PCM.INI file.)
 
|    2.  For prior DOS versions of Phoenix PCMCIA, the
|        command-line switches previously specified are
|        no longer part of the command-line syntax.
|        Everything is specified through the PCM
|        utilities which modify the PCM.INI file.
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        371
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    This latest version of PCMCIA provides the following
|    features:
 
|    o   An uninstall program that backs up and
|        deactivates your prior system files when
|        necessary.  This ensures that the majority of
|        conflicts are avoided when installing this new
|        version of PCMCIA over an existing PCMCIA
|        system.
 
|    o   A Setup program which enables the novice user to
|        quickly and easily install PCMCIA while also
|        providing a full range of customizing features
|        for the sophisticated user.
 
|    o   Support for PC DOS multiple-configurations.
 
|    o   Support for Microsoft's Flash File System II
|        (FFSII) device driver.
 
|        NOTE:  The MS Flash device driver is not
|               supplied with PC DOS.  You cannot use
|               this interface without the device driver.
|               The interface driver is included in PC
|               DOS so that if you have obtained
|               Microsoft's Flash Support you can use it
|               with the PC DOS PCMCIA support.
 
|    o   Easy-to-use information and configuration
|        utilities for managing PC Cards in both PC DOS
|        and Windows environments.
 
|    o   Hot insertion and removal of PC cards without
|        the need to reboot.
 
|    o   Support for Power Management.
 
|    o   Support for the largest number of PCMCIA cards:
|        Flash Memory, SRAM Memory, Fax/Modem, ATA, hard
|        disks, SCSI, LAN, and other I/O Cards.  See
|        "Configuring PC Cards after the Original
|        Installation" on page 403  for information about
 
 
 
  372  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        configuring these cards after PCM Plus is
|        initialized on your system.
 
 
| CONSIDERATIONS BEFORE STARTING PCMCIA
  _____________________________________
 
|    All the files needed to run the PCMCIA application
|    with most PCMCIA cards are copied when you choose
|    the PCMCIA optional tool during install.  The
|    exception being the Flash File System.  As
|    mentioned, PC DOS includes an interface driver to
|    the MS Flash File System, so that if you obtain or
|    have this Flash File System you can use it with the
|    PCMCIA supplied with PC DOS.
 
|    To successfully activate PCMCIA, you need to:
 
|    o   Uninstall any prior version of PCMCIA (including
|        Phoenix).  This is automatically done for the
|        majority of PCMCIA programs by running PCMDINST.
 
|    o   Have access to the following information to help
|        you during the setup and configuration routines:
 
|        -   The number of PCMCIA sockets your computer
|            possesses including the number of sockets
|            associated with your docking bay station if
|            you have one.
 
|        -   The full path to your Windows directory.
|            This is the directory you installed Windows
|            to.  If you are uncertain, look for the
|            WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI files.  The directory
|            containing these files is your Windows
|            directory.
 
|        -   If you are using multiple configurations, be
|            aware that PCMCIA changes your CONFIG.SYS
|            file and installs itself in the
|            configuration that you have designated to
|            start when your turn on your computer.
 
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  373
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|            NOTE:  You must boot with the desired
|                   environment you want PCMCIA to run
|                   under.
 
|        -   If you are using a memory manager other than
|            EMM386, you must manually exclude UMB memory
|            for Card Services and ATA support and reset
|            the system.
 
|    NOTE:  If you did not specify the PCMCIA optional
|           tool during the initial install, you can
|           install it later by rerunning PC DOS Setup.
 
 
| SETTING UP PCMCIA (PCMDINST)
  ____________________________
 
|    TO BEGIN THE SETUP AND CONFIGURING PROCESS FOR
|    PCMCIA:
 
|    1.  Remove any cards from the sockets.
 
|    2.  Change to your DOS directory (for example,
|        C:\DOS) and type:
 
|              pcmdinst
 
|        NOTE:  This is generally done only once.  The
|               only other time you might have to use
|               "pcmdinst" is if PCMCIA were taken off
|               your system and you had to reinstall.
|               For future configuration changes, you
|               must use PCMSETUP.
 
|        A message is displayed indicating that your
|        current PCMCIA configuration will be
|        reconfigured and that your current system files
|        will be backed up.  Type "y" to answer Yes and
|        continue the process.
 
|        NOTE:
 
|               If you are using EMM386 in your
|               CONFIG.SYS file, it is commented out and
 
 
  374  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|               replaced by a generic one.  Copy any
|               excludes for cards from your old EMM386
|               line to the new one.  PCMSETUP adds the
|               excludes for Card Services and ATA
|               Support, as necessary.
 
|        PCMINST is automatically started, and the
|        Phoenix Card Manager Installation screen is
|        displayed.  This utility determines if your
|        system has a PCMCIA controller supported by PC
|        DOS.  If found, the controller type is displayed
|        in the PCMCIA Controller Found screen.
 
|        NOTE:
 
|               If the controller in the system is not a
|               supported controller, or if a prior
|               version of PCMCIA is found, an error
|               message is displayed and PCMINST aborts.
 
|    3.  Upon completion, PCMINST automatically starts
|        PCMSETUP so that you can continue to configure
|        your system.
 
 
| CONFIGURING YOUR PCMCIA SYSTEM (PCMSETUP)
  _________________________________________
 
|    NOTE:  The following steps are used each time you
|           need to reconfigure your computer.  To use
|           these steps independent of the initial
|           install, type "pcmsetup" from the directory
|           in which PCMCIA resides (for example,
|           C:\DOS\PCM).
 
|    1.  The PCMCIA SETUP screen is displayed.  Follow
|        the instructions on the screen.
 
|        NOTE:  If you have configured your system
|               before, the existing configuration
|               message is displayed.  Follow the
|               instructions on the screen.
 
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  375
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    2.  Press any key to continue.  The Socket
|        information screen is displayed.
 
|    3.  Verify the default number of sockets and press
|        ENTER.
 
|        NOTE:  If the number of sockets is not correct,
|               specify the correct value (including
|               sockets in a docking station).
 
|        The Windows screen is displayed with the "Yes"
|        selection highlighted.
 
|    4.  Press ENTER to select yes if you are going to
|        use PCMCIA cards under the Windows program.  A
|        default path statement screen is displayed.  If
|        the path shown is correct, press ENTER.  If it
|        is not correct, specify the correct path and
|        press ENTER.
 
|        or
         __
 
|        Select "No"  and press ENTER.
 
|        The Advanced Setup screen is displayed.
 
 
| DESIGNATING VALUES ON THE ADVANCED SETUP SCREEN
 
|    The Advanced Setup screen is displayed with default
|    values shown that apply to most system
|    configurations.  Unless you are very familiar with
|    memory management, accept the defaults.
 
|    The following information is provided to help you
|    make your selections.
 
|    1.  Specify values for the following if your cards
|        require values that are different than the
|        default values displayed:
 
 
 
 
 
  376  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        IRQ                   The default value is 10.
|                              You can accept this value
|                              and not change it.  Card
|                              insertion and extraction
|                              are recognized within the
|                              system through polling
|                              (instead of interrupts),
|                              which provides greater
|                              system compatibility.
 
|        CIS WINDOW ADDRESS    The default value shown
|                              relates to your systems
|                              current boot
|                              configuration.  The value
|                              can be different for each
|                              system.  Unless you
|                              understand memory
|                              management, accept the
|                              default value.
 
|                              If you need to manually
|                              specify this value, it
|                              requires a 4KB memory
|                              window; hence, you must
|                              have 4KB of free memory
|                              from the start address.
|                              For example, if you
|                              specify C000, you must
|                              have the range of
|                              C000-C0FF available.
 
|        TOKEN RING SPEED      The default speed is 4.
|                              If you do not have a Token
|                              Ring Network Card, accept
|                              the default.  If you do
|                              have a Token Ring Network
|                              card, choose 4 or 16
|                              depending on your network
|                              setup.
 
|        CARD SETTLE TIME      The default is 660
|                              representing milliseconds.
|                              This value specifies the
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  377
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|                              amount of elapsed time
|                              after a card is inserted
|                              before Card Services
|                              should access the socket.
 
|    2.  Press ENTER to accept all the values listed.
 
|        NOTE:  If you select a value which conflicts
|               with an existing driver or device, a
|               conflict warning is displayed.  You are
|               returned to the Advanced Setup screen.
|               You can:
 
|               o   Enter another valid value.
|               o   Exit PCMSETUP, resolve the conflict,
|                   reboot your computer after
|                   resolution, and then rerun PCMSETUP.
 
|               You must resolve the conflict before
|               continuing the configuration.
 
|        When there are no conflicting values, the Flash
|        File System screen is displayed.
 
 
| DESIGNATING VALUES FOR THE FLASH FILE SYSTEM
 
|    The Flash File System screen is displayed with YES
|    highlighted as the default.
 
|    1.  Press ENTER if you are using the MS Flash File
|        System.  Accepting YES indicates that you have
|        the MS-FLASH.SYS device driver.  This driver is
|        not supplied with PC DOS.  If you do not have
|        this file, contact your Service Representative
|        (not IBM).
 
|        or
         __
 
|        Select "No" and press ENTER.  Go to "Designating
|        Values for PCMCIA Modem/FAX Cards" on page 379.
|        If you obtain the MS Flash File System in the
|        future, rerun PCMSETUP and select YES.
 
 
  378  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    2.  If you accepted YES as the selection, a path
|        default screen is displayed.  The Flash File
|        System path defaults to the C:\DOS directory.
|        If this is correct, press ENTER.  If it is not
|        correct, type the correct path and press ENTER.
|        The Flash File System Information screen is
|        displayed with the default values that the
|        system has determined you need to use with your
|        Flash Card.
 
|        NOTE:  If the MS-FLASH.SYS file is not found in
|               the specified directory, a warning screen
|               is displayed.  When you escape from the
|               warning screen, you are moved forward to
|               the Communication Ports screen.
 
|    3.  Press ENTER to accept the defaults on the Flash
|        File System Information screen.  The
|        Communication Ports screen is displayed.
 
|    NOTE:  If you select a value which conflicts with an
|           existing driver or device, a conflict warning
|           is displayed.  You are returned to the Flash
|           File System Information screen.  You can:
 
|           o   Enter another valid value.
|           o   Exit PCMSETUP, resolve the conflict,
|               reboot your computer after resolution,
|               and then retry this configuration.
 
|           You must resolve the conflict before
|           continuing the configuration        .
 
 
| DESIGNATING VALUES FOR PCMCIA MODEM/FAX CARDS
 
|    The Communication Ports screen is displayed with YES
|    highlighted as the default.
 
|    1.  Press ENTER if you are going to use PCMCIA
|        Modem/FAX cards.  A Communication Ports screen
|        is displayed allowing you to specify the
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  379
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        communication port you want your computer to use
|        for the cards.
 
|        or
         __
 
|        Select "No" and press ENTER.  Go to "Designating
|        Values for ATA-type Cards."
 
|    2.  Select an available communication port and press
|        ENTER.  The ATA Socket screen is displayed.
 
 
| DESIGNATING VALUES FOR ATA-TYPE CARDS
 
|    The ATA Socket screen is displayed with YES
|    highlighted as the default.
 
|    1.  Press ENTER if you are going to use ATA-type
|        cards.  An ATA Socket screen is displayed with a
|        default value highlighted for the window
|        address.
 
|        or
         __
 
|        Select "No" and press ENTER.  Go to "Designating
|        a PCMCIA Card" on page 382.
 
|        or
         __
 
|    2.  Change the value and press ENTER.  An ATA Socket
|        screen is displayed with a default value
|        highlighted for the number of minutes to allow
|        for a drive to be inactive before powering down
|        the drive.
 
|        NOTE:  Unless you understand memory management,
|               you should accept the default value for
|               the ATA window address.  If you need to
|               manually specify this value, it requires
|               a 16KB memory window; hence, you must
|               have 16KB of free memory from the start
|               address.
 
 
 
  380  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    3.  Verify the default value (or change it) for the
|        number of minutes you want to allow a drive to
|        be inactive.  The lower the value, the fewer
|        minutes of inactivity allowed before the hard
|        disk is powered down.
 
|    4.  Press ENTER and an ATA Socket screen is
|        displayed starting with Socket 0 as the slot
|        into which the ATA card is to be inserted.
 
|    5.  When you select "Yes", an ATA Socket screen is
|        displayed that allows you to specify the number
|        of partitions the ATA drive is to have.
 
|        NOTE:  Most ATA hard disk drives (Type III
|               PCMCIA card) occupy two sockets.  Ensure
|               that you specify the correct socket
|               (slot) number.
 
|               or
                __
 
|               Select "No" and press ENTER.
 
|    6.  Specify the number of partitions the ATA drive
|        is to have and press ENTER.  The PCMCIA Card
|        Selection screen is displayed.
 
|        NOTES:
 
|        a.  Steps 5 and 6 are repeated for each socket
|            on your computer and docking bay.
 
|        b.  ATA cards can have 4 partitions.  Ensure
|            that you specify the maximum number of
|            partitions you are using or plan to use.
|            You can always change this value later by
|            rerunning PCMSETUP.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  381
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| DESIGNATING A PCMCIA CARD
 
|    You can choose to select one at a time, all, or none
|    of the card selections during PCMSETUP or wait until
|    you actually have the card.  If you wait, your
|    system will be dynamically configured using the PCM
|    or PCMWIN utilities.
 
|    NOTE:  An additional advantage to waiting is saving
|           memory.  If you configure for a card you do
|           not have, the unused configuration still gets
|           loaded and occupies memory.
 
|    o   TO WAIT:
 
|        1.  Press ENTER.  The SETUP Complete screen is
|            displayed with "Yes" selected.
 
|        2.  Press ENTER and you are returned to the DOS
|            command prompt.
 
|        3.  Restart your system by pressing
|            CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
|            NOTE:  If this is an initial Setup, your
|                   computer reboots automatically.
 
|    o   TO SELECT ONE OR MORE OF THE CARD SELECTIONS:
 
|        1.  Use the up or down arrow to highlight the
|            desired card.
 
|        2.  Press the Spacebar to select the card.  An
|            arrow appears to the left of your selection.
|            To deselect that card press the Spacebar
|            again and the arrow disappears.
 
|        3.  Press ENTER to confirm your choice.  The
|            Setup Complete screen is displayed with
|            "Yes" selected.
 
|        4.  Press ENTER and you are returned to the DOS
|            command prompt.
 
 
  382  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        5.  Restart your system by pressing
|            CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
|            NOTE:  If this is an initial Setup, your
|                   computer reboots automatically.
 
|    o   TO SELECT ALL THE CHOICES:
 
|        1.  Press F5 to select all the choices.
 
|        2.  Press ENTER to confirm your choice.  The
|            Setup Complete screen is displayed with
|            "Yes" selected.
 
|        3.  Press ENTER and you are returned to the DOS
|            command prompt.
 
|        4.  Restart your system by pressing
|            CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
|            NOTE:  If this is an initial Setup, your
|                   computer reboots automatically.
 
|    PCMSETUP updates the PCM.INI file, CONFIG.SYS,
|    WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI files as appropriate.  It
|    also adds the PCMCIA directory to your PATH
|    statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  The updates
|    are activated when you restart your system.
 
|    NOTE:  PCM.INI is an editable ASCII file.  You can
|           change values as needed by using the
|           E Editor.  Refer to the online PC DOS 7
                                           ________
|           Command Reference  for more information.
            _________________
 
|    During the install process, following a system
|    reboot, the following drivers were loaded into your
|    system:
 
|    CNFIGNAM.EXE     Used to specify which PCM Plus
|                     configuration should be accessed
|                     from the PCM.INI file.
 
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  383
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    PCMSS.EXE        Socket Services support.  Works at
|                     the BIOS level as an interface
|                     between the PCMCIA card socket and
|                     the Card Service program.
 
|    PCMCS.EXE        Card Services support.  Works at
|                     the operating system level to
|                     manage all PCMCIA cards, resources
|                     and client drivers.
 
|    PCMRMAN          Scans the system for resource
|                     status and availability.
 
|    PCMSCD.EXE       Super Client Driver support.
|                     Configures FAX/Modem cards, LAN
|                     cards, or other I/O cards.
 
|    PCMATA.SYS       Used for IDE hard disk emulation.
|                     Supports SRAM, rotating disk cards,
|                     or solid-state mass storage cards.
 
|    PCMFFCS.EXE      If Flash is selected, this driver
|                     is used to support the Microsoft
|                     Flash File System (FFS) protocol.
|                     Supports SRAM and Flash memory
|                     cards.
 
|    For more information about these drivers refer to
|    the online version of the PC DOS 7 Command
                               ________________
|    Reference.
     _________
 
 
| CONFIGURING PCMCIA
  __________________
 
|    After PCMCIA is installed and setup, it should
|    recognize the majority of the PCMCIA cards when you
|    insert them in your computer.  It dynamically
|    configures memory, modem, and ATA cards.  Most I/O
|    cards must be configured first before they can be
|    used.
 
|    To configure I/O cards, you can use PCM or PCMWIN,
|    the configuration programs provided with PCMCIA.
 
 
  384  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    These programs do not configure ATA or memory cards.
|    For ATA and memory cards you need to use PCMSETUP
|    for configuration.
 
 
| PCM - DOS CONFIGURATION UTILITY
 
|    TO USE THE PCMCIA CONFIGURATION PROGRAM:
 
|    1.  Insert the I/O PCMCIA card or cards into the
|        available slots.
 
|    2.  At the DOS command prompt, type the following
|        command and press ENTER:
 
|              pcm
 
|        The General Information Per Socket window is
|        displayed with information about the card
|        presently inserted in the designated socket.
 
|        If you have multiple cards inserted in slots,
|        use PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN to view the
|        information for each card.
 
|    3.  Check the Status line.
 
|        This line displays the current status of the
|        resident card.  If PCMCIA was able to configure
|        the card automatically, the status reads "Card
|        configured successfully."  If the program did
|        not recognize the card or the card has no CIS,
|        this line reads "Unconfigured".
 
|    4.  Go to "Using PCM Configure" on page 386  if you
|        need to:
 
|        o   Define an I/O card that PCMCIA cannot
|            recognize.
|        o   Assign a new set of configuration values to
|            an existing I/O card.
|        o   Edit an existing configuration for an I/O
|            card.
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  385
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    5.  To view additional information about the I/O
|        card, press ALT+V to access the menu for View.
|        Then, select" Advanced" or press the A key.
 
|        To exit the Advanced Information screen press
|        ESC.  You are returned to General Information
|        Per Socket screen.
 
|    6.  To exit the General Information Per Socket
|        screen, press ALT+V to access the menu for View.
 
|    7.  Select "Exit" and press ENTER or  press the X
                                       __
|        key.  You are returned to the DOS command
|        prompt.
 
 
|    Using PCM Configure
 
|    To use PCM Configure, leaving the card in the slot,
|    select "Configure"  from the Menu Bar on the General
|    Information Per Socket screen.  The menu associated
|    with this selection allows you to:
 
|    o   Add a card to the PCMCIA card list.
|    o   Edit the configuration values associated with a
|        card already listed.
 
|    TO ADD A PCMCIA CARD TO THE CARD LIST:
 
|    1.  Starting from the General Information Per Socket
|        screen.  press ALT+C.  The configure menu is
|        displayed.
 
|    2.  Select "Add Card to List"  and press ENTER.  The
|        Add New Card to List screen is displayed.  There
|        may be several card configuration possibilities.
|        The number of possibilities associated with the
|        card is identified by the value shown for
|        Config.  Number.
 
|    3.  Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to switch
|        between configurations.
 
 
 
  386  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Press ENTER when you find the configuration you
|        want to use.  A message prompt is displayed
|        asking you whether or not you want the system to
|        validate the configuration.
 
|    5.  Select "Yes"  or "No"  and press ENTER If you
|        selected Yes, PCMCIA tests the configuration for
|        conflicts and returns a message indicating no
|        conflicts or that a conflict exists.
 
|        If a conflict exists, it will be in one of the
|        following values:
 
|        o   Memory Window address range
|        o   I/O Window address range
|        o   IRQ level
 
|        You can make one of the following choices:
 
|        o   Select another configuration if one exists
|            that meets your needs.
 
|        o   Correct the value that is in conflict.
|            Check the documentation that came with your
|            card.  If you cannot find the value you
|            need, call the manufacture of the card.
 
|        If you selected No, a message prompt is
|        displayed asking you whether or not you want the
|        system to save the configuration.
 
|    6.  Select "No"  not to save the settings.  You are
|        returned to the General Information Per Socket
|        screen.
 
|        NOTE:  The configuration is applied immediately
|               by the system and, if saved, the
|               configuration information is written to
|               the PCM.INI file.
 
|    TO EDIT THE CONFIGURATION VALUES FOR A CARD YOU HAVE
|    ALREADY ADDED TO THE CARD LIST:
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  387
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    1.  Starting from the General Information Per Socket
|        screen, press ALT+C.  The Configure menu is
|        displayed.
 
|    2.  Select "Edit Config Parameters"  and press
|        ENTER.  The Edit Card Configuration screen is
|        displayed.  There may be multiple configurations
|        to choose from.
 
|    3.  Edit the following editable fields:
 
|        o   Memory Window
|        o   I/O Window
|        o   IRQ
 
|        Press the TAB key or use the UP ARROW and DOWN
|        ARROW to move into the editable fields and
|        scroll forward from field to field.  Use the
|        left and right arrow keys to move within the
|        input area of a field.  Press SHIFT+TAB or use
|        the UP ARROW to scroll backwards from field to
|        field.
 
|    4.  Press ENTER when you are finished making
|        changes.  A message prompt is displayed asking
|        you whether or not you want the system to
|        validate the configuration.
 
|    5.  Select "Yes"  or "No" and press the ENTER key.
|        If you selected Yes, PCMCIA tests the
|        configuration for conflicts and returns a
|        message indicating no conflicts or that a
|        conflict exists.
 
|        If a conflict exists, recheck your changes, make
|        corrections, and press ENTER to start the
|        process again.
 
|    6.  Select "No" not to save the settings or select
|        "Yes" to save the new values and press ENTER.
|        You are returned to the General Information Per
|        Socket screen.
 
 
 
  388  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        NOTE:  The configuration is applied immediately
|               by the system and, if saved,  the
|               configuration information is written to
|               the PCM.INI file.
 
 
|    Using the PCM Information Selection
 
|    Using PCM you can access a list of I/O cards and
|    their configuration sets that have been saved to the
|    PCM.INI file.  You can also access a list of PCMCIA
|    client drivers that are active.
 
|    To use this feature, start from the General
|    Information Per Socket screen and press ALT+I to
|    display the menu for Information.
 
|    TO REVIEW THE CARD LIST:
 
|    1.  Select "Card List" and press ENTER.  The Select
|        PC Card screen is displayed.
 
|        The card list displays all PCMCIA cards
|        currently enabled for use by PCMCIA together
|        with specific configuration information.  Not
|        all cards need to be listed in this database in
|        order to be used by PCMCIA.  Normally, LAN,
|        FAX/Modem, and other cards that use multiple
|        system resources should be added to the
|        configuration list.
 
|    2.  Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll and
|        highlight the card you want to view and press
|        ENTER.  The PreView PC Card Configuration screen
|        is displayed.
 
|    3.  Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll
|        through the configurations that have been
|        established for the card.
 
|    4.  Press ESC to return to the General Information
|        Per Socket screen.
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  389
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    TO REVIEW THE CLIENT INFORMATION:
 
|    1.  Select "Client Info"  and press ENTER.  The
|        Client Program Information screen is displayed.
 
|        The Client Program Information lists the PCM
|        client drivers currently loaded and provides
|        specific information on each client.  A client
|        driver is a device driver (such as PCMATA.SYS)
|        designed to support one or more PC Cards.
 
|    2.  Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to scroll
|        through the client information.
 
|    3.  Press ESC to return to the General Information
|        Per Socket screen.
 
 
|    Using the PCM Option Selection
 
|    The Option selection allows you to specify the use
|    of a displayed message to confirm PC card insertion
|    and removal while in PCM.  The default is enabled.
 
|    TO DISABLE THIS SELECTION:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+O when the General Information Per
|        Socket screen is active.  The "Message On Card
|        Events" message is displayed.
 
|    2.  Press ENTER.  The following message prompt is
|        displayed:
 
|              Card Events Disabled
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  390  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| WINDOWS CONFIGURATION UTILITY (PCMWIN)
 
|    The PCMCIA configuration process is handled in
|    Windows almost the same way as it is in PC DOS.
|    PCMWIN is installed automatically by PCMSETUP if
|    your computer has Windows installed and you select
|    Windows from the PCMSETUP program.  The installation
|    program inserts a PCMCIA program group into your
|    Program Manager and places the PCMWIN icon inside
|    that window.
 
|    NOTES:
 
|    1.  PCMWIN does not work in Windows standard mode.
|        It works only in 386 Enhanced mode.
 
|    2.  If you do not currently have Windows installed,
|        but install it at a later time, you need to
|        rerun PCMSETUP to activate PCMCIA for Windows.
 
 
|    Running PCMWIN
 
|    Running and configuring cards using PCMWIN is very
|    similar to running the PCM configuration program for
|    PC DOS.  Use your mouse to select menus and other
|    action items on a window.  For detailed task
|    oriented descriptions, see "PCM - DOS Configuration
|    Utility" on page 385.
 
|    An additional option is provided in PCM for Windows
|    configuration that is not available in PCM
|    configuration for PC DOS:
 
|    o   Associations
 
|    TO USE THE ASSOCIATIONS OPTION:
 
|    1.  Starting from the General Information Per Socket
|        screen, press ALT+O to display the menu for
|        Options.
 
|    2.  Select "Associations" and press ENTER.
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  391
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        The Associations window is displayed.  This
|        option only works with Windows applications.  It
|        enables you to specify an associated program
|        whenever the card is inserted.  For example,
|        most modem cards are used with a communication
|        program such as the Windows Terminal program.
|        Using this option, whenever the modem card is
|        inserted, the communication program is started.
 
|        The card number, manufacturer name, and the
|        model for this card are displayed in the first
|        three lines.  This information should be helpful
|        to ensure the proper association is used.
 
|    3.  To enable the start-up of the associated
|        program, click the Enable check box.  An X
|        appears to indicate that the association is
|        enabled.
 
|    4.  Use the TAB key or the mouse to move to the File
|        field.
 
|    5.  Type in the exact path and executable file to
|        start the associated program.
 
|        If you do not know the path or name of the
|        program, click on "Select File"  to browse
|        through your files until you locate the one you
|        need.  (Most executable files have an .EXE
|        extension.)
 
|    6.  Click on "Previous"  or "Next"  to edit or
|        create other card-program associations.
 
|    7.  When you are finished, click on "OK".
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  392  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| ADVANCED CONFIGURATION CONSIDERATIONS
  _____________________________________
 
|    PCMCIA also includes an assortment of utilities,
|    drivers, and adaptations to complement any PCMCIA
|    environment.
 
|    The subjects that come under this heading are:
 
|    o   Multiple Configurations Support
 
|    o   Advanced PCMCIA Utilities
 
|        -   PCMFDISK
|        -   PCMRMAN
 
 
| MULTIPLE CONFIGURATIONS SUPPORT
 
|    PCMCIA supports multiple configurations.  You can
|    use the multiple configurations option to select a
|    specific configuration when the system is booted.
|    For more information about multiple configurations
|    see Chapter 6, "Making More Memory Available" on
|    page 161 or refer to the online version of the PC
                                                    __
|    DOS Command Reference.
     _____________________
 
|    When you start PCMSETUP, it scans the CONFIG.SYS
|    file for the menu section.  If the multiple
|    configuration option is detected, PCMSETUP checks
|    the CONFIG variable in the environment to determine
|    the current configuration name.
 
|    NOTES:
 
|    1.  At startup, if you pressed F5 at the Startup
|        Menu to bypass startup files, an error message
|        is generated when you try to run the PCMCIA
|        installation program and it terminates.  Reboot
|        your system with a valid configuration in order
|        to run PCMCIA installation.
 
|    2.  To check all of the current configuration
|        settings on your system, type SET at the DOS
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  393
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        command prompt.  The configuration name appears
|        as CONFIG=configname, where configname is the
|        name you selected at boot time for a specific
|        configuration.  PCMCIA installs and sets up its
|        files for the current configuration only.  Any
|        other configuration environment is not edited.
 
|    3.  To install PCMCIA for a different configuration,
|        you need to boot your system using that
|        configuration and run the PCMCIA installation
|        program.  The PCMCIA initialization file
|        (PCM.INI) contains a section for each
|        configuration environment you install.
 
 
| ADVANCED PCMCIA UTILITIES
 
|    The following additional programs are available for
|    use when you install PCMCIA and should be used with
|    extreme caution:
 
|    o   PCMFDISK
|    o   PCMRMAN
 
 
|    PCMFDISK
 
|    PCMFDISK, like the DOS FDISK utility, sets the
|    partition table for ATA rotating disk and
|    solid-state mass-storage PCMCIA cards only.
 
|    PCMFDISK can be run from the DOS command prompt or
|    from within Windows under a DOS box.
 
|    WARNING:  PCMFDISK WILL DESTROY ALL DATA ON THE
|    DEVICE IF YOU CREATE NEW PARTITIONS.  YOU CANNOT USE
|    PCMFDISK ON SRAM PC CARDS FORMATTED FOR USE WITH
|    PCMATA.
 
|    During PCMSETUP you set the number of partitions to
|    allow on ATA cards.  All ATA cards have a minimum of
|    one and a maximum of 4 partitions.  You can use
|    PCMFDISK to optimize the settings from PCMSETUP.
 
 
  394  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    NOTE:  If you change the number of partitions to a
|           higher number than what you specified during
|           PCMSETUP, you must rerun PCMSETUP and reset
|           the number of partitions.  You can use the
|           Environment selection to view the number of
|           partitions that were set during the original
|           PCMSETUP.
 
|    After inserting the ATA PC Card, run PCMFDISK to set
|    (or reset) the following:
 
|    o   Number of partitions
|    o   Number of drive heads
|    o   The number of sectors per track
 
|    PCMFDISK calculates the resulting drive size.  This
|    utility can also be used to adjust partition
|    settings to enhance the performance of the disk.
|    Consult the documentation accompanying your ATA PC
|    Card for the optimum configuration.
 
|    TO RUN PCMFDISK:
 
|    1.  Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
 
|              pcmfdisk
 
|    2.  Press ENTER.
 
|        The Partition and Geometry screen is displayed.
 
|    This screen presents information on the current
|    partition(s) existing on the ATA card.  Information
|    on each partition is provided, including the:
 
|    o   Socket number where the card is located
|    o   System type
|    o   Partition size
|    o   Amount of the partition currently being used
|    o   Number of heads used by the partition
|    o   Number of cylinders used by the partition
|    o   Number of sectors used by the partition.
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  395
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    Below this information, the geometry for the total
|    ATA disk is provided.
 
|    Usually there is no reason to change the disk
|    geometry.  The default geometry has computed the
|    fastest access speed.  However, some ATA cards allow
|    you to change their geometry.
 
|    WARNING:  AFTER YOU CHANGE THE GEOMETRY, THE
|    PARTITION TABLE MIGHT BE INVALID AND NEED TO BE
|    RESET.  SOME ATA CARDS ALSO FAIL TO WRITE AND BECOME
|    UNSTABLE.  IF THIS IS THE CASE, THE ORIGINAL VALUES
|    SHOULD BE RETURNED.
 
|    To modify the Partition of the installed ATA card,
|    you can do one of several things:
 
|    o   Create a new partition.  You must delete the
|        existing partitions and then create the new
|        partition.
 
|    o   Add a new partition to existing partitions.  The
|        new partition is limited to the size of the disk
|        minus the existing partition size.  If the Usage
|        field on the Partition and Geometry screen shows
|        one hundred percent, there is no room on your
|        disk to add a new partition.
 
|    TO USE DELETE PARTITION:
 
|    1.  Press ALT-M to display the Modify menu.
 
|    2.  Select "Delete Partition"  and press ENTER.  You
|        are asked to confirm the deletion or abort the
|        process.
 
|        If more than one partition exists on the card,
|        the system deletes the last partition first.
|        For example, if two partitions exist on your
|        disk, Partition 2 is deleted before Partition 1.
 
|    3.  Press ENTER to confirm and continue the process.
 
 
 
  396  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        NOTE:  Any changes made to the partition table
|               using the Modify option are not committed
|               to disk until you use the Write Partition
|               option under the Save menu.
 
|    TO USE THE CREATE PARTITION OPTION:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+M to display the Modify menu.
 
|        Use this option to create a partition entry in
|        the first empty partition slot.  At most up to
|        four partition entries are allowed per ATA card.
 
|    2.  Select "Create Partition" and press ENTER.  The
|        Create Partition screen is displayed.
 
|    3.  Press ENTER to accept the partition size shown
|        in the highlighted field (this value reflects
|        the total size of the Megabytes remaining on the
|        disk),
 
|        or
         ___
 
|        Type in a new size and press ENTER.  The
|        Partition table is displayed with the new
|        partition table values.
 
|    4.  If you want to create another partition, repeat
|        steps 1 through 3.
 
|    NOTE:  Any changes made to the partition table using
|           the Modify option are not committed to disk
|           until you use the Write Partition option
|           under the Save menu.
 
|    TO USE THE SAVE OPTION:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+S to display the Save menu.
 
|        No modifications to the ATA disk's partition
|        tables become actual until you use the Write
|        Partition option.  This saves all the changes
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  397
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        you have made and deletes/creates a new
|        partition table for the disk.
 
|    2.  Select "Write Partition"  and press ENTER.  A
|        warning and confirmation message is displayed.
|        The warning indicates that if you go ahead with
|        the PCMFDISK process it is possible to lose all
|        of the data currently on the card.
 
|    3.  Select "Yes"  to confirm you want the process to
|        be completed.
 
|    4.  Exit to the DOS command prompt and format the
|        drive using the PC DOS FORMAT command.
 
|    5.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              format drive:  /u
                      _____
 
|        where drive is the drive letter.
               _____
 
|    TO EXIT FROM PCMFDISK:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+S to display the Save menu.
 
|    2.  Select "Exit"  and press ENTER.  You are
|        returned to the DOS command prompt.
 
|    PCMFDISK provides three areas of help under the Help
|    menu.  These include:
 
|    CONTENTS            A short overview of PCMFDISK and
|                        what it can change.
 
|    ABOUT PCMFDISK      The utility's version numbers.
 
|    ENVIRONMENT         Information about partitions and
|                        drive assignments that were set
|                        up by PCMSETUP.
 
 
 
 
 
 
  398  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    PCMRMAN
 
|    The PCMCIA Resource Management Utility (PCMRMAN)
|    performs two distinct functions:
 
|    o   As a standalone utility, it detects and displays
|        the resources used by PCM Plus, such as memory
|        and interrupts.
 
|    o   As a command-line utility, it can change the
|        current run-time values for the allocation of
|        some system resources.  For more information
|        refer to the online version of the PC DOS 7
                                            ________
|        Command Reference.
         _________________
 
|    WARNING:  THIS PROGRAM SHOULD BE USED WITH EXTREME
|    CAUTION.  WHEN USED IMPROPERLY IT CAN EFFECT
|    ADVERSELY THE WAY YOUR COMPUTER OPERATES WITH PCMCIA
|    CARDS.
 
|    TO RUN PCMRMAN AS A STANDALONE PROGRAM FROM THE DOS
|    COMMAND PROMPT:
 
|    1.  Remove any PCMCIA cards from your computer.
 
|    2.  Type this command at the DOS command prompt:
 
|              pcmrman
 
|        and press ENTER.
 
|        NOTE:  You can run this program from the DOS
|               command prompt, from within Windows at
|               the DOS box, or click on the "File Run"
|               option and type the command to start the
|               program.
 
|        The title screen appears.
 
|    3.  Press any key to continue.  A warning screen is
|        displayed.  Read this carefully before
|        continuing.
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  399
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Press any key.  The main PCMRMAN screen is
|        displayed.
 
|    USING DISPLAY:   Display allows you to see available
|    and unavailable values for Memory, I/O, and IRQ.
|    All the screens associated with these values are
|    read-only.  The main PCMRMAN screen actually shows
|    the memory ranges available and unavailable.
 
|    The two additional read-only screens are selectable
|    from the Display menu.
 
|    o   I/O Usage
|    o   IRQ Usage
 
|    TO USE THE DISPLAY MENU:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+D to display the Display menu.
 
|    2.  Select "I/O Range" or "IRQ Number" and press
|        ENTER.  The applicable screen is displayed.
 
|    USING MODIFY:  Modify allows you to change memory,
|    I/O, and IRQ values.  The changes you make are shown
|    immediately on the screen where the change is being
|    made.  However, the changes are not effective until
|    you save them to the PCM.INI file and restart your
|    computer.
 
|    TO USE THE MODIFY MENU:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+M to display the Modify menu.
 
|    2.  Select one of the resources to modify and press
|        ENTER.
 
|    TO MODIFY MEMORY RANGES:
 
|    1.  Select "Memory Ranges"  from the Modify menu.
|        The Upper Memory Usage screen is displayed with
|        a User Override column that has the first item
|        highlighted.
 
 
 
  400  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        Each memory range block listed is 4K in size and
|        the value shown reflects the beginning and
|        ending hexadecimal address.  If you have
|        installed a memory manager and PCMCIA, the
|        available ranges or levels have been selected
|        during this process.
 
|    2.  Press the Spacebar and the highlighted field
|        displays a new value.  Press the Spacebar until
|        you see the value you need.  There are three
|        values defined:
 
|        NONE        Allow the availability of this
|                    resource to be determined by whether
|                    or not the computer itself is using
|                    it.
 
|        EXCLUDED    This range has been specifically
|                    excluded from PCMCIA.
 
|        INCLUDED    PCMCIA has access to this range.
 
|    3.  When you have modified all the User Override
|        fields you require, press ENTER to accept these
|        changes.  The changes are shown on the screen.
 
|    TO MODIFY I/O RANGES:
 
|    1.  Select "I/O Ranges"  from the Modify menu.  The
|        I/O Usage screen is displayed along with the
|        Edit I/O Range window.
 
|    2.  Type in the new beginning and ending ranges you
|        want to modify and then specify the type of
|        modification desired.
 
|    3.  When the User Override field is highlighted, use
|        the Spacebar to change the value, if needed.
|        The values are:  None, Exclude, and Include and
|        have the same meaning as described for memory
|        ranges.
 
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  401
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  When you are finished modifying the I/O ranges,
|        press ENTER to confirm your choice.  The I/O
|        Usage screen changes to reflect your
|        modifications.
 
|    TO MODIFY IRQ NUMBERS:
 
|    1.  Select "IRQ Number"  from the Modify menu.  The
|        IRQ Usage is displayed with first line in the
|        User Override column highlighted.
 
|    2.  Press the Spacebar and the highlighted field
|        displays a different value.  Press the Spacebar
|        until you see the value you need.  The values
|        are:  None, Exclude, and Include and have the
|        same meaning as described for memory ranges.
 
|    3.  When you have modified all the User Override
|        fields you require, press ENTER to accept these
|        changes.  The changes are shown on the IRQ Usage
|        screen.
 
|    TO SAVE CHANGES YOU HAVE MADE TO THE MEMORY, I/O, OR
|    IRQ VALUES:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+F to display the File menu.
 
|    2.  Select "Save Configuration"  and a confirmation
|        message is displayed.
 
|    3.  Select "No"  to ignore changes made and return
|        to the main PCMRMAN menu.  Select "Yes"  to save
|        changes.  If you save a modified configuration,
|        the new values take effect as soon as the
|        computer is restarted.
 
|    TO EXIT FROM PCMRMAN:
 
|    1.  Press ALT+F to display the File menu.
 
|    2.  Select "Exit" and press ENTER.  You are returned
|        to the DOS command prompt.
 
 
 
  402  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CONFIGURING PC CARDS AFTER THE ORIGINAL INSTALLATION
  ____________________________________________________
 
|    The following provides guidelines for configuring
|    the following types of cards:
 
|    o   I/O Cards - FAX/Modem
|    o   I/O Cards - All others (LAN, Audio, SCSI, RS232,
|        and so on)
|    o   Memory Card - Flash
|    o   Memory Card - SRAM
|    o   ATA Drives (Rotating Hard Disk or Solid State
|        File drives)
 
 
| CONFIGURING FAX/MODEM I/O CARDS
 
|    Most FAX/Modem cards are automatically configured
|    through the PCM Plus Super Client Driver.  However,
|    PCM can be used to configure and add the card to the
|    card lists but the defined configuration overrides
|    the generic successful configuration.
 
|    TO CONFIGURE:
 
|    1.  Use PCM or PCMWIN.
 
|    2.  Insert the card.
 
|    3.  Select to add a card if it is not already added
|        through PCMSETUP.  A list of the preset
|        configurations is displayed; one of which is
|        displayed as being loaded.
 
|    4.  Select the configuration you want or build your
|        own by using TAB to move to the input fields and
|        then typing the values needed.  If all the
|        resources are available, the selected
|        configuration is successfully configured.
 
|        NOTE:  It is suggested that you accept the
|               automatic configuration rather than
|               choosing one other than the default or
|               building one manually.
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  403
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| CONFIGURING ALL OTHER I/O CARDS
 
|    All I/O cards with the exception of FAX/Modem I/O
|    cards must be configured with PCM or PCMWIN before
|    they can be used.  All resources that these cards
|    need must be made available prior to configuration.
|    If the resources (for example, memory, IRQ, I/O) are
|    not available when configuring, there might be a
|    system conflict and the card might not configure.
 
|    The resource requirements for your card are provided
|    by the PC Card Manufacturer.  Consult your PC Card
|    documentation for the resource requirements prior to
|    configuring.
 
|    Use the following guidelines to help ensure that the
|    needed resources are available for your card:
 
 
|    Memory
 
|    Most I/O adapters use upper memory windows for ROM
|    and or RAM addressing areas.  If you are using a
|    memory manager such as EMM386, the memory manager
|    makes use of all available upper memory space.  If
|    you do not exclude the memory range needed by your
|    PC Card, there is no memory available for the card
|    when you try to configure.
 
|    For instance, if you are using EMM386 and an IBM
|    Token Ring PC Card that requires the memory ranges
|    of D000-D1FF and D800-DBFF, the following excludes
|    need to be made on the EMM386 line in your
|    CONFIG.SYS:
 
|          device=c:\dos\emm386.exe noems x=c800-c8ff x=c900-ccff x=d000-d1ff x=d800-dbff
 
|    You can use the Advanced Editor associated with the
|    RAMBoost program to make these exclusions.  See
|    Chapter 6, "Making More Memory Available" on
|    page 161  for more information.
 
 
 
 
  404  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    A memory conflict could exist even if you are not
|    using a memory manager such as EMM386.  For instance
|    an adapter could be using the same memory you need
|    to use.  In this case, you could use PCMRMAN to help
|    identify what memory regions are available.  Simply
|    type at the command prompt:
 
|          pcmrman /map
 
|    A status of your systems resources is displayed.  If
|    you need to make adjustments for your memory ranges,
|    you can use a text editor (such as the E Editor
|    supplied with PC DOS) to make the change in your
|    CONFIG.SYS file.  Ensure that you reboot your system
|    after making a change in the CONFIG.SYS file to make
|    the change effective.
 
 
|    IRQ
 
|    Use PCMRMAN with the /MAP parameter to view the
|    resource status for PCM.  Verify that the IRQ you
|    plan to use is listed in the IRQ allocation section
|    under "Available".
 
|    If the IRQ you plan to use is not available, check
|    your PC Card manufacturer's documentation to see if
|    you can use any of the IRQ's that are available.  If
|    you still believe that the IRQ you want to use is
|    available, use the full screen PCMRMAN utility to
|    force the IRQ to become available.  See -- Heading
|    'IRQNUM' unknown --  for more information.
 
|    The following table provides the IRQ values that
|    have been assigned to devices:
 
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | IRQ      | ASSIGNED DEVICE                       |
|    | NUMBER   |                                       |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 0        | Timer Output                          |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  405
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | IRQ      | ASSIGNED DEVICE                       |
|    | NUMBER   |                                       |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 1        | Keyboard                              |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 2        | Route to Interrupt Controller 2, IRQ  |
|    |          | 8 to 15                               |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 3        | Serial Port COM2                      |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 4        | Serial Port COM1                      |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 5        | Parallel Printer Port 2               |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 6        | Floppy-disk controller                |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 7        | Parallel Printer Port 2               |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 8        | Real-Time Clock                       |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 9        | Software redirect to IRQ2 (INT OAH)   |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 10       | Reserved (default PC Card events)     |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 11       | Reserved                              |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 12       | Reserved                              |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 13       | 80x87 Math Coprocessor                |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 14       | Hard-Disk controller                  |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
|    | 15       | Some Hard-Drive/SCSI controllers      |
     +----------+---------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  406  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    I/O
 
|    Use PCMRMAN with the /MAP parameter to view the
|    resource status for PCM.  Verify that the I/O range
|    you plan to use is listed in the I/O allocation
|    section under "Available".
 
|    If the I/O range you plan to use is not available,
|    check your PC Card manufacturer's documentation to
|    see if you can use any other I/O that is available.
|    If you still believe that the I/O you want to use is
|    available, use the full screen PCMRMAN utility to
|    force the I/O range to become available.  See --
|    Heading 'IONUM' unknown --  for more information.
 
 
| CONFIGURING THE FLASH MEMORY CARD
 
|    If you are using the Microsoft Flash File System
|    support, you must select Flash in PCMSETUP.
 
|    If you are not using the Microsoft Flash File System
|    support, you must select "NO"  to Flash in PCMSETUP.
|    Consult your PC Card documentation on setting up
|    your Flash support drivers and configuring your
|    Flash Card.
 
 
| CONFIGURING A SRAM MEMORY CARD
 
|    If during installation, you said yes to ATA, your
|    SRAM card is automatically configured when you
|    insert it.
 
|    Use PCM or PCMWIN to view your SRAM card status.
|    Ensure that the card is not write protected.  If the
|    system returns a message that says the card
|    configured successfully, it is ready to use.  If
|    this message is not returned, check the following:
 
|    o   Ensure the socket you inserted the card in has
|        ATA support for your system.
 
 
 
                                         Chapter 10.  Using PCMCIA Support  407
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Ensure that you have selected ATA support during
|        PCMSETUP.  If not, rerun PCMSETUP.
 
|    o   Ensure that your card is formatted.  If it is
|        not formatted, use the DOS FORMAT command.
|        Refer to the FORMAT command in the online PC
                                                   __
|        DOS 7 Command Reference.
         _______________________
 
 
| CONFIGURING ATA DRIVES (ROTATING HARD DISK OR SOLID STATE)
 
|    If during installation, you said yes to ATA, your
|    ATA card is automatically configured when you insert
|    it.  If you did not have the ATA card, run PCMSETUP
|    and select "Yes" for ATA support.
 
|    Use PCM or PCMWIN to view your ATA card status.  If
|    the system returns a message that says the card
|    configured successfully, it is ready to use.  If
|    this message is not returned, check the following:
 
|    o   Ensure the socket you inserted the card in has
|        ATA support for your system.
 
|    o   Ensure that you have selected ATA support during
|        PCMSETUP.  If not, rerun PCMSETUP.
 
|    o   Ensure that your card is formatted.  If it is
|        not formatted, use the DOS FORMAT command.
|        Refer to the FORMAT command in the online PC
                                                   __
|        DOS 7 Command Reference.
         _______________________
 
|    NOTE:  If you would like multiple partitions on your
|           drive, use PCMFDISK to partition it.  See
|           "PCMFDISK" on page 394  for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  408  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| APPENDIX A.  MORE INFORMATION ABOUT INSTALLING
  ______________________________________________
 
 
 
 
 
|    This appendix provides installation procedures if
|    you want to perform something other than a standard
|    PC DOS installation.  That information, in addition
|    to what you need to know before you install, can be
|    found in "PC DOS Standard Installation" on page 22
|    and Chapter 1, "Installing PC DOS 7" on page 3,
|    respectively.
 
|    This appendix also provides more detailed
|    information about the options and choices you can
|    make during a PC DOS installation, such as whether
|    or not to back up your current DOS version.  Other
|    installation-related information is provided here
|    also.
 
 
| CHOOSING THE CORRECT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
  ___________________________________________
 
|    Table 2 on page 20 helps you choose the correct
|    procedure for the type of installation you want to
|    do.  Unique types of installations are detailed in
|    the following sections.
 
 
  INSTALLING DOS FILES ON A DRIVE OTHER THAN DRIVE C
 
     If you have previously partitioned your hard disk
     into logical drives, you can install the DOS
|    directory on any of those drives.  The files
|    required to run your operating system are copied to
     primary drive C.  All other files associated with
     the install are copied to the drive you specify.
 
     TO INSTALL PC DOS ON A DRIVE OTHER THAN DRIVE C:
 
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        409
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     1.  Follow the steps in "PC DOS Standard
         Installation" on page 22 until the optional
         tools screen is displayed.
 
     2.  In addition to selecting the tools you want to
         use, highlight "Install to Path:".
 
     3.  Press ENTER.
 
     4.  Type the drive and directory where you want to
         install PC DOS.
 
     5.  Press ENTER.
 
     6.  Continue until the installation is completed; PC
|        DOS is installed to the drive and directory you
|        specified in step 4.
 
 
| INSTALLING IF YOU HAVE NO HARD DISK
 
     It is possible to use the Setup Diskette as a
                               ______________
     "startup" diskette and not install PC DOS on a hard
     disk.  This is intended for those users with
|    computers without hard disks or when wanting to
|    start your computer with a minimal configuration.
 
|    You can still use many of the DOS commands (such as
|    FORMAT, FDISK, ATTRIB, DIR, and COPY) because these
|    files are located on the Setup Diskette.
                              ______________
 
|    TO USE THE STARTUP DISKETTE IF YOU HAVE NO HARD
|    DISK:
 
     1.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                    ______________
 
     2.  Turn the power for your computer on (cold boot)
                                              _________
         or, if it is already powered on, press
         CTRL+ALT+DEL (warm boot) to restart your
                       _________
         computer.
 
 
 
 
 
  410  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     3.  Type "N" when prompted whether you want to
|        install PC DOS.  (If you do not answer in 10
|        seconds, the default answer YES is assumed.)
 
|        The command prompt, A:\>, is displayed.
 
 
  INSTALLING PC DOS IF YOU HAVE OS/2 INSTALLED
 
     The following guidelines only apply if:
 
     o   You have installed the OS/2* Dual Boot system.
     o   You have installed OS/2 with Boot Manager
         active.
     o   You have installed OS/2 as a FAT file system.
 
     TO INSTALL IF YOUR SYSTEM ONLY HAS OS/2 INSTALLED AS
     A FAT FILE SYSTEM:
 
     1.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                    ______________
 
     2.  Restart your computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
|    3.  Follow the instructions on your screen.
 
|        You might receive a message informing you that
|        your system will be turned into a Dual Boot
|        system.
 
     NOTES:
 
     1.  After your installation is complete, first time
         users of the OS/2 Dual Boot feature need to
         refer to "Using OS/2 Dual Boot" on page 413 for
         information on how to use the OS/2 Dual Boot
         feature.
 
     2.  If you are using OS/2 Version 1.2 or lower,
         upgrade your version of OS/2 before installing
         PC DOS.
 
     TO INSTALL USING THE OS/2 BOOT MANAGER:
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  411
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     You must do the following within OS/2 before PC DOS
     can be installed.
 
     1.  Use OS/2 FDISK to set the DOS partition to
         installable while OS/2 is running.
 
|    2.  Shut down OS/2 by clicking mouse button 2
|        (normally the right mouse button) on an empty
|        area of the desktop.  Place the Setup Diskette
                                         ______________
|        into drive A, and then restart your computer by
|        pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
     3.  Follow the install instructions as they are
         displayed on your screen.
 
|    4.  At the screen that notifies you the installation
|        is complete, remove all diskettes from drive A,
|        and then restart your computer by pressing
|        ENTER.  The Boot Manager starts, allowing you to
         choose which system you want to start.
 
     TO INSTALL IF YOUR SYSTEM ALREADY HAS DUAL BOOT
     CAPABILITY:
 
|    1.  To get to the directory where the BOOT.COM file
|        is generally located, type the following while
|        at the drive C prompt (C:\>), assuming this is
|        located in the C:\OS2 directory:
 
|              cd\os2
 
|        The BOOT.COM file starts Dual Boot, and this
|        file must be in the OS/2 directory.
 
     2.  To move from the OS/2 operating system to the
         DOS operating system, type the following at the
         DOS command prompt in an OS/2 window:
 
               boot /dos
 
     3.  When your DOS version is finished loading,
         insert the the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                        ______________
 
 
 
  412  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     4.  Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
 
               a:setup
 
     5.  Follow the instructions on your screen.
 
     6.  After the PC DOS installation is done, you can
         return to OS/2 from the DOS operating system by
         typing the following at the prompt
 
               boot /os2
 
         assuming this is located in the C:\>OS2
         directory.
 
         NOTE:  BOOT.COM is an OS/2 file.  If your system
                does not have this file installed, you
                will have to retrieve it from your OS/2
                diskettes and install it in your OS/2
                directory.
 
 
     Using OS/2 Dual Boot
 
     After you have installed PC DOS to operate along
     with your OS/2 system, use the OS/2 Dual Boot
     feature to switch between the operating systems.
 
     Before you can use Dual Boot, you must switch to the
     directory that contains BOOT.COM which will start
     Dual Boot.  This file is generally located in the
     C:\OS2 directory.  To get to this directory, type
     the following:
 
           cd\os2
 
     To move from the OS/2 operating system to the DOS
     operating system, type the following at the DOS
     command prompt:
 
           boot /dos
 
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  413
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     To return to OS/2 from the DOS operating system,
     type the following at the DOS command prompt:
 
           boot /os2
 
 
| INSTALLING PC DOS ON A PS/1 COMPUTER
 
|    Follow the installation detailed in "PC DOS Standard
|    Installation" on page 22 if your PS/1:
 
|    o   Is not a four-quad system
         _________________________
 
|        Or, you can disable the four-quad system during
|        Setup by typing "setup /p" to start Setup.
 
|    o   Has compression installed
         _________________________
 
|        The four-quad system will not be enabled after
|        installation if you already have compression and
|        run Setup, or if you install compression after
|        running Setup.
 
|    o   Is a newer model PS/1
         _____________________
 
|    Use the following installation procedure if your
|    PS/1 is an older PS/1 model (Model FC0B or F830)
|    that uses a specific ROM chip.
 
|    NOTE:  Do not select the optional tool for
|           compression.
 
|    TO INSTALL DOS ON AN EARLIER VERSION OF PS/1 DOS
|    THAT HAS A ROM FOUR-QUAD SYSTEM:
 
     1.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                    ______________
 
     2.  At the Four-Quad screen, select "Your Software".
 
     3.  Select "Drive A".
 
     4.  Select "Setup".
 
 
 
  414  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     5.  Follow the instructions in "PC DOS Standard
         Installation" on page 22 to complete the
         installation.
 
|    Setup enables four-quad ROM systems by copying the
|    ROMSHELL.COM file from ROM memory and by copying the
|    RSSTUB.EXE file from the PC DOS installation
|    diskettes to the to the same directory specified for
|    "DOS install to path".  Setup also adds an RSSTUB
|    statement to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file
 
 
  INSTALLING PC DOS ON A COMPRESSED DRIVE
 
     Use the following procedures to install PC DOS on
|    systems where drives have been compressed using disk
|    compression programs.
 
|    Setup recognizes and allows you to install on drives
|    compressed using:
 
|    o   Any previous version of Stacker compression.
|    o   Novell's DR DOS 7.0's version of Stacker
|        compression.
|    o   All versions of DoubleDisk Gold except for
|        Version 6.0 (see the README.TXT file).
 
|        +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ------------------------+
         |                                              |
|        | The README.TXT does not currently include    |
|        | this information.                            |
         |                                              |
         +----------------------------------------------+
 
|    o   Microsoft's DoubleSpace(**) and DriveSpace(**).
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) SuperStor, SuperStor/DS, SuperStor PRO, and Addstor are trademarks of
      Addstor, Inc.
 
  (**) DoubleSpace and DriveSpace are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  415
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   SuperStor/DS(**) provided with PC DOS
|        Versions 6.1 and 6.3.
|    o   Addstor(**)'s SuperStor(**) 2.0 and SuperStor
|        PRO(**).
 
     TO INSTALL PC DOS ON A DRIVE THAT HAS BEEN
     COMPRESSED WITH A COMPATIBLE DISK COMPRESSION
     PROGRAM:
 
     1.  Start your system.
 
     2.  Run Setup by typing "a:setup".  Your compatible
         disk compression program will be recognized and
         handled accordingly.
 
     3.  Follow the install steps in "PC DOS Standard
         Installation" on page 22.
 
     TO INSTALL PC DOS ON A DRIVE THAT HAS BEEN
     COMPRESSED WITH SUPERSTOR PRO(**) WITH NO SWAPPABLE
     DRIVE SUPPORT INSTALLED:
 
     1.  Start your system with your current software.
 
     2.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A, and
                    ______________
         type:
 
               a:setup
 
     3.  When Setup is finished, insert the Setup
                                            _____
         Diskette into drive A again, and restart your
         ________
         system.
 
|    4.  Type "N" when prompted whether you want to
|        install PC DOS.  (If you do not answer in 10
|        seconds, the default answer YES is assumed.)
 
|        The command prompt, A:\>, is displayed.
 
|    5.  While at the a:\> prompt, type:
 
                sys c:
 
 
 
  416  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     6.  Remove the diskette and press CTRL+ALT+DEL to
         restart the system from the hard drive.
 
     7.  Modify the CONFIG.SYS file and move the
         SuperStor device drivers to the top of the file.
         Refer to your SuperStor documentation to
         determine what device drivers it is using.
 
|    8.  After rebooting, make sure IBMBIO.COM and
|        IBMDOS.COM files, or the compressed drive, get
|        updated.
 
|        NOTE:  When you install to a SuperStor PRO
|               compressed drive that has the files
|               IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM, they might not
|               be updated correctly.
 
|    9.  If you need to update these files, (assuming
|        drive C is the compressed drive and drive D
|        contains the uncompressed files used to start
|        your system), type:
 
|              attrib -s -h -r c:\ibmbio.com
|              attrib -s -h -r c:\ibmdos.com
|              del c:\ibmbio.com
|              del c:\ibmdos.com
 
|    10. Insert the Setup Diskette from the PC DOS
                    ______________
|        installation diskettes into the drive again and
|        type:
 
|              sys a: c:
 
|        The SYS command copies the COMMAND.COM file to
|        your hard drive.
 
     NOTES:
 
     1.  Before upgrading a compatible compression drive
         it is a good practice to ensure your hard disk
         has the latest compression program installed.
         For example, if you have a version of SuperStor
|        before Version 1.4, you need to upgrade.
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  417
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        An alternative method would be to contact your
|        IBM service representative to get the
|        ADD2SWP.EXE command and associated
|        documentation.
 
     2.  If you have compressed your drives using a
         non-compatible disk compression program, contact
         your software vendor.
 
 
| INSTALLING PENDOS
 
|    If you plan to select PenDOS optional tool, keep
|    these things in mind:
 
|    o   The proper hardware must be installed.
 
|        If you select PenDOS as an optional tool and
|        then select a tablet or mouse device, Setup will
|        modifies your CONFIG.SYS file and will add the
|        appropriate device statement.
 
|    o   The proper tablet driver is required for your
|        digitizer if you have an externally attached
|        digitizer.
 
|        -   If you have a pen tablet computer with a
|            self-contained digitizer, you should choose
|            that computer's tablet driver.
 
|        -   If you will be using your mouse as your
|            pointing device, select the Digitizing Pad
|            Emulation via Mouse tablet driver.
 
|    o   The digitizer must be connected to the proper
|        communication port on your computer if you have
|        an externally attached digitizer.  Refer to the
|        digitizer manufacturer's instructions for the
|        proper installation procedure.
 
|    o   PenDOS requires the EMM386 memory manager to
|        run.
 
 
 
  418  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Running RAMBoost Setup allows you to install the
|        EMM386 memory manager.  Be sure to select the
|        EMS option on the Advanced Option screen.
 
 
  PERFORMING THE LAN SERVER ADMINISTRATOR INSTALLATION OF PC DOS
  ______________________________________________________________
 
     The following information is intended for LAN
     administrators who will be installing PC DOS from a
     network server or a remote workstation.  If you are
     installing PC DOS in a single workstation that is
     not connected to a network, you do not need this
     information.
 
     Before you can install PC DOS across the network,
|    you must first create an administrator's directory
|    on the server that will contain all the DOS and
|    optional tool files from the PC DOS Setup diskettes.
 
 
| CREATING A LAN ADMINISTRATOR DIRECTORY
 
|    Running SETUP /A creates a LAN administrator
|    directory that allows for PC DOS installation across
|    the network by individual workstations.  The name of
|    the directory is specified by the LAN administrator.
|    After SETUP /A is completed, PC DOS can be installed
|    to a workstation using the SETUP program from this
|    directory.
 
     NOTES:
 
     1.  These instructions do not apply to Remote
         Initial Program Load (RIPL(**)) systems or
         medialess computers.  For RIPL systems, see your
         manufacturer's instructions about installing PC
         DOS images.
 
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) RIPL is a trademark of CTA, Inc.
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  419
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  If your server is running OS/2, run SETUP /A
         from a remote DOS workstation.  The workstation
         must have read/write access to the server.
 
     TO CREATE AN ADMINISTRATOR'S DIRECTORY:
 
|    1.  Make sure you have 8.2MB of disk space available
|        for the LAN administrator's directory before
|        beginning the installation.
 
|    2.  Insert the Setup Diskette into a drive on the
                    ______________
|        system server.
 
     3.  Start Setup by typing:
 
               n:setup /a
               _
 
         where n: represents the drive where the Setup
               _                                 _____
         Diskette is inserted.
         ________
 
     4.  Press ENTER and follow the instructions on your
         screen.
 
         When prompted to specify a directory, specify a
         directory other than the root directory.
 
|    5.  When queried how you want to install DOS to a
|        network, select "Create an Administrator
|        Directory".
 
|        This is the default option.  All the files on
|        the PC DOS installation diskettes are then
|        copied to the DOS7 directory unless you
|        specified your own directory name.
 
|        If you specify the name for the administrator's
|        directory, do not specify the DOS directory or
|        the DOSFILES directory.
 
|        The bundle files are not unpacked.  Refer to
|        "Working with Setup Bundle Files" on page 440
|        for complete information about bundle files
|        provided with PC DOS.
 
 
  420  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    6.  Mark the files in the subdirectory as read only.
 
|    7.  Share this subdirectory with workstations that
|        will be installing PC DOS across the LAN.
 
 
| CREATING A DIRECTORY FOR DOS FILES AND TOOLS
 
|    SETUP /A also provides the LAN administrator the
|    option of having a \DOSFILES subdirectory on the LAN
|    containing DOS files and optional tool files in an
|    unpacked format.
     ________
 
|    Setup does not allow you to select YES for both
|    options at the same time.  If you want to select
|    both options, you must run SETUP twice, selecting a
|    different option each time you run SETUP /A.
 
|    The LAN server installation cannot be performed from
     ____________________________________________________
|    the DOSFILES directory.
     _______________________
 
|    TO CREATE A DIRECTORY OF DOS FILES AND TOOLS:
 
|    1.  Make sure you have 15MB of disk space available
|        for the DOS files and tools directory before
|        beginning the installation.
 
|    2.  Insert the Setup Diskette into a drive on the
                    ______________
|        system server.
 
|    3.  Start Setup by typing:
 
|              n:setup /a
               _
 
|        where n: represents the drive where the Setup
               _                                 _____
|        Diskette is inserted.
         ________
 
|    4.  Press ENTER and follow the instructions on your
|        screen.
 
|        When prompted to specify a directory, specify a
|        directory other than the root directory.
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  421
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    5.  When queried how you want to install DOS to a
|        network, select "Copy all PC DOS files and
|        tools".
 
|        This option does not permit you to install PC
|        DOS to a workstation using the SETUP program in
|        this directory; this option will allow you to
|        copy the unpacked DOS files.
 
|    All DOS files and all optional tools files are
|    unpacked and copied to the default subdirectory on
|    the server, the \DOSFILES subdirectory.
 
|    Also, subdirectories for DATA, SYSTEM, STACKER, and
|    PCM (for PCMCIA support files) are created under
|    \DOSFILES.  For example, \DOS7\DOSFILES\DATA and
|    \DOS7\DOSFILES\STACKER would be created.
 
     TO INSTALL DOS FILES FROM A REMOTE WORKSTATION TO A
     SERVER:
 
     1.  Start your network software on the workstation
         and connect to the network server where the DOS
         files are to be copied.  The workstation must
         have read/write access to the server.
 
     2.  Insert the Setup Diskette into a drive on the
                    ______________
         workstation.
 
     3.  Start Setup by typing:
 
               n:setup /a
               _
 
         where n: represents the drive where the Setup
               _                                 _____
         Diskette is inserted.
         ________
 
     4.  Press ENTER and follow the instructions on your
         screen.  The DOS files are copied to the
         selected subdirectory on the server.
 
     5.  Mark the files in the subdirectory as read only.
 
 
 
 
  422  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     6.  Share the subdirectory with workstations that
|        will be using PC DOS files across the LAN.
 
 
  INSTALLING PC DOS AFTER THE LAN ADMINISTRATOR INSTALL
 
     NOTE:  If you do not have access to the server
            containing PC DOS or are not sure how to
            upgrade the network files, contact your LAN
            administrator.
 
     TO INSTALL PC DOS AFTER THE LAN ADMINISTRATOR HAS
     MADE IT AVAILABLE WITHIN THE LAN:
 
     1.  Start the workstation with your current version
         of DOS.
 
|        Avoid starting applications,
|        terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) programs, disk
|        caches, multitaskers, and task switchers when
|        installing PC DOS.
 
|        If you are running OS/2 with the Dual Boot
|        feature, type the following at the DOS command
         prompt:
 
               boot /dos
 
     2.  Start your network software; then connect to the
         server containing PC DOS.
 
         NOTE:  Upgrade your network files to work with
                PC DOS according to instructions from the
                LAN administrator.
 
     3.  Start Setup that is on the server.  For example,
         if the DOS files are located in a subdirectory
|        named DOS70 on network drive N, you would type:
 
|              n:\dos70\setup
 
         and then press ENTER.
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  423
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     4.  After installing PC DOS, restart your
         workstation.
 
     5.  Reconnect to the LAN server to ensure your LAN
         software upgrade was successful.  If you cannot
         start the LAN software or reconnect to the LAN
         server, see your LAN administrator.
 
 
| INSTALLING PC DOS FROM A CD-ROM
 
|    Installing PC DOS 7 from a CD-ROM requires:
 
|    o   A CD-ROM drive installed on your computer
|        system.  If this hardware is not already
|        installed, you will need to follow the hardware
|        manufacturer's installation documentation.
 
|    o   The proper statements for the CD-ROM support
|        utility are added to your AUTOEXEC.BAT and
|        CONFIG.SYS files.  Type "help mscdex" for
|        further information.
 
|    TO INSTALL DOS FROM A CD-ROM DRIVE:
 
|    1.  Ensure that MSCDEX is loaded, or type the
|        command at the DOS command prompt.
 
|    2.  Insert the CD-ROM disk in your CD-ROM drive.
 
|    3.
 
|              cdromdrive:setup
               __________
 
|        where cdromdrive is the CD-ROM drive letter.
               __________
 
|    If you are a LAN administrator and want to create a
|    LAN administrator's directory using a CD-ROM, the
|    procedure is similar to the LAN administrator's
|    procedure when using diskettes.  (see "Creating a
|    LAN Administrator Directory" on page 419).
 
 
 
 
  424  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    TO PERFORM A LAN ADMINISTRATOR'S INSTALLATION FROM A
|    CD-ROM DRIVE:
 
|    1.  Ensure that MSCDEX is loaded, or type the
|        command at the DOS command prompt.
 
|    2.  Insert the CD-ROM disk into the CD-ROM drive.
 
|    3.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              cdromdrive:setup/a
               __________
 
|    However, if you are a LAN administrator and have a
|    CD-ROM for the PC DOS installation, you do not need
|    to create a directory for DOS files and tools and
|    discussed in "Creating a Directory for DOS Files and
|    Tools" on page 421  These files are already
|    available in unpacked format in the
|    \PCDOS70\DOSFILES subdirectory.
 
 
| RERUNNING SETUP
  _______________
 
|    Rather than perform a complete installation of PC
|    DOS, you can rerun Setup instead.  Reasons to rerun
|    Setup include:
 
|    o   To install additional optional tools for DOS and
|        Windows.
 
|    o   To change the current time and date, country
|        support for international character sets,
|        keyboard layout for different countries, or ISO
|        fonts for VGA hardware.
 
|    o   To recover either a DOS file or an optional
|        tools file from your PC DOS installation
|        diskettes if, after installation, they have been
|        accidentally deleted or damaged.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  425
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| INSTALLING ADDITIONAL DOS AND WINDOWS OPTIONAL TOOLS
 
|    As you upgrade your equipment or as your needs
|    expand, you will want to rerun Setup to add any
|    optional tools you did not install initially.  You
|    can install PC DOS optional tools for DOS and
|    Windows (provided Windows is already installed) as
|    many times as is necessary using the /E switch.
|    When you rerun Setup using the /E switch, you save
|    time during installation because Setup does not
|    re-copy the DOS files.
 
|    WHEN YOU RERUN SETUP, BE SURE TO:
 
     o   Review the install steps that apply to your
         system.  (Use Table 2 on page 20 to guide you.)
 
|    o   Not re-select the optional tools you already
|        have installed.  Select only the new tools you
|        want to add.
 
|    o   Install to the same drive and path that contains
|        your current DOS directory when you rerun Setup.
|        or else you might have multiple sets of DOS
|        files on your computer, which might cause the
|        optional tool to not work correctly.
 
|    TO RERUN SETUP USING THE /E SWITCH:
 
     1.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A or B.
                    ______________
 
     2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               a:setup /e
 
         or
         __
 
               b:setup /e
 
|    3.  At the optional tools screen, either use the UP
|        ARROW to scroll to the optional tool you want to
|        add and press ENTER, or click on the optional
 
 
 
  426  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        tool if using a mouse.  The selection choice
|        changes from NO to YES.
 
|        It is not necessary to re-select options you
|        already have installed.  Using the /E switch
|        only allows you to add tools--it does not remove
|        or overwrite your current optional tools.
 
     4.  Verify that you have specified the same drive
         and path as where your current DOS directory is
         located.
 
|    5.  Either use the DOWN ARROW to scroll to the line
|        "Options correct. Continue Setup.", if you are
|        not already there, and then press ENTER, or
|        click on the line when using a mouse, if all the
|        options are correct.
 
|    6.  Continue to follow the instructions displayed on
|        the screen until installation is complete.
 
 
| ADDING ONLY OPTIONAL TOOLS FOR WINDOWS
 
|    If you want to install any of the optional tools for
|    Microsoft(**) Windows(**) Version 3.1 or higher or
|    Windows for Workgroups 3.11 or higher, it is easier
|    if you install Windows first.
 
|    However, if you do not install Windows first, you
|    can use the Setup /W switch to add just the optional
|    tools for Windows.  Keep in mind, however, that if
|    Windows is not installed before you run Setup using
|    the /W switch, the Windows .INI files will not be
|    updated properly.
 
|    Using SETUP /W causes Windows tools to be displayed
|    in the list of optional tools in addition to DOS
|    optional tools, whether or not you have Windows
|    installed already.  If you currently have Windows
|    installed on your system, the preferred method is to
|    use the /E switch so you can install both DOS and
|    Windows optional tools at one time.
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  427
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| RECOVERING FILES FROM THE SETUP DISKETTES
 
|    During installation, Setup copies all the DOS files
|    and all the files for the optional tools you
|    selected to your hard drive.
 
|    However, should you need to copy a file that might
|    have been deleted from your hard drive or damaged
|    after you have installed PC DOS, run Setup entirely.
|    The file that was deleted or damaged will be
|    restored.
 
|    However, if you know that the damaged or deleted
|    file is either:
 
|    o   An optional tool file
|    o   A DOS file pertaining to the operating system
 
|    you can save time by rerunning Setup instead of
|    running Setup entirely.
 
|    TO DETERMINE WHETHER A FILE IS A DOS FILE OR AN
|    OPTIONAL TOOLS FILE:
 
|    1.  Edit FILES.TXT file using the PC DOS E Editor by
|        typing:
 
|              e files.txt
 
|    2.  Search the FILES.TXT file by typing the
|        following at the E Editor command line:
 
|              L/filename
                 ________
 
|        where filename is the name of the deleted or
               ________
|        damaged file you are trying to search for.
 
|    3.  Look in the bundle column and note whether the
|        file is in the "DOS" bundle file or in a bundle
|        file for an optional tool, such as "COMPRESS"
|        for Stacker Compression files.  Refer to
|        "Working with Setup Bundle Files" on page 440
|        for an explanation of bundle files.
 
 
  428  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    4.  Follow the instructions that follow for either
|        recovering a DOS file or an optional tool file
|        from the Setup Diskette:
                  ______________
 
|        NOTE:  In addition to the file you want to
|               recover, all other files in either the
|               DOS bundle file or the specified optional
|               tool bundle file are copied also.
 
|    5.  If you want to recover a DOS file:
         __________________________________
 
|        a.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                        ______________
 
|        b.  Rerun Setup by typing:
 
|                  a:setup
 
|        c.  Follow the instructions on the screen.
 
|        d.  At the optional tools screen, do not select
|            any optional tools.  Make sure there is a NO
|            beside each optional tool.
 
|        If you want to recover an optional tool file
         ____________________________________________
|        diskettes:
         __________
 
|        a.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                        ______________
 
|        b.  Rerun Setup by typing:
 
|                  a:setup /e
 
|        c.  Follow the instructions on the screen.
 
|        d.  At the optional tools screen, select only
|            the appropriate optional tool.  Change the
|            YES to NO beside all the other tools except
|            for the optional tool that pertains to the
|            missing or damaged file.  This is the only
|            tool that should have YES next to it.
 
|    6.  Complete the installation.
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  429
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| UNINSTALLING AND RESTORING YOUR PREVIOUS VERSION OF DOS
  _______________________________________________________
 
|    If, in the future, you want to be able to uninstall
|    PC DOS 7 and restore your current version of DOS,
|    the Setup Uninstall process makes it easy.  You can
|    only use this process if you are upgrading your
|    version of DOS.
 
|    You must select "Back up previous DOS files" during
|    the initial installation of PC DOS.  You cannot
|    select this option if you are rerunning Setup.
 
     In most cases, there will be no reason to uninstall
     DOS; however, the option exists if you need it.  The
     backup diskettes that Setup creates contain your
     previous version of DOS, including copies of your
     previous CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files.
 
     You cannot use your backup diskettes if you have
     done any of the following after installing PC DOS:
 
     o   Repartitioned or reformatted your hard disk.
 
     o   Deleted or moved either of the two DOS hidden
         system files (IBMBIO.COM and IBMDOS.COM).
 
     o   Installed a disk compression program.  If you
         have done this, you must uncompress the drive
         before the Uninstall process can work.
 
     TO RESTORE YOUR PREVIOUS VERSION OF DOS:
 
     1.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                    ______________
 
     2.  Type the following at the DOS command prompt:
 
               a:setup /u
 
|    3.  Follow the instructions on your screen, using
|        your backup diskettes.
 
 
 
 
 
  430  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| VIEWING AND EDITING THE SYSTEM FILES DURING INSTALL
  ___________________________________________________
 
|    Immediately before the PC DOS installation is
|    completed, you can view or edit the changes Setup
|    has already made to your AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS
|    files.  Optionally, you can make additional changes
|    yourself.  Any edits made to these files will not be
|    put into effect until after a system reboot.
 
|    TO VIEW OR EDIT THE CHANGES TO THE SYSTEM FILES:
 
|    1.  While running Setup, follow the instructions on
|        the screen.
 
|    2.  When prompted whether you want to edit the
|        AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS changes during the
|        installation,
 
|        o   Press F1 for additional help if you are
|            unsure if you want to view or edit these
|            changes.
 
|        o   If you do not want to see the changes, leave
|            the selection as NO and make sure the
|            "Options correct. Continue Setup." line is
|            highlighted and then press ENTER, or click
|            on this line if using a mouse.
 
|        o   Use the UP ARROW to highlight the edit
|            changes line and then press ENTER, or click
|            on this line if using a mouse.  Your
|            selection will change to YES.
 
|        If you selected YES, the E Editor is activated
|        and three files are opened for you:
 
|        o   A help screen file explaining what you need
|            to do when you either view or edit the
|            remaining two files.
 
|        o   The AUTOEXEC.BAT file with comment lines
|            (REM) added.
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  431
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|        o   The CONFIG.SYS file with comment lines (REM)
|            added.
 
|        When SETUP changes the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
|        CONFIG.SYS files, comments are added to identify
|        what lines have been added, deleted, replaced,
|        or updated--similar to the following:
 
|               REM ===== PC DOS 7.0 - Add =====
 
|        NOTE:   If, after the SETUP program has
|               completed and the system has been
|               rebooted, you want to remove all the
|               comments that were added, insert the
|               Setup Diskette into drive A and use the
                ______________
|               SETUP /C command.
 
|        While viewing these files during Setup you
|        cannot issue any other DOS commands from the
|        E Editor command line; only E Editor commands
|        can be issued while viewing these system files
|        during Setup.
 
|    3.  Press CTRL+N, or F12 if available on your
|        keyboard, each time you want to alternate
|        between the three files.
 
|    4.  Do one of the following for each of the three
|        files:
 
|        o   View the file and then press F3 to close the
|            file after viewing.  If you press F3, be
|            sure you did not make any changes to the
|            file because your changes do not get saved.
|            Remember that any changes made by Setup were
|            already saved before being opened for you to
                           ______
|            view or edit them.
 
|        o   Edit the files, if necessary, and then press
|            F4 after editing to save your changes and
|            exit the file.
 
 
 
 
  432  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|            This allows you to modify the files before
|            Setup restarts the machine and the changes
|            Setup made to these files are put into
|            effect.
 
|    5.  Press F3 or F4 (depending on whether edits were
|        not made or were made to the file, respectively)
|        until you have closed all the files and exited
|        the E Editor.
 
|    6.  Press any key to restart your system.
 
 
| VIEWING THE README.TXT FILE
  ___________________________
 
|    PC DOS comes with a README.TXT file.  This file can
|    be found either on the Setup Diskette of the PC DOS
                            ______________
|    installation diskettes, or in the directory where
|    you installed DOS.
 
|    This file contains important information.  If you
|    have a PC DOS system, you can view or print this
|    file before installing PC DOS for additional
|    information about PC DOS.
 
|    When you want to look at the contents of a file, you
|    can use any text editor, use the E Editor'csq.s
|    BROWSE command, or use the MORE command.
 
|    TO USE THE MORE COMMAND TO VIEW A FILE:
 
|    1.  Type the following at a DOS command prompt:
 
|              more <readme.txt
 
|        This command puts the contents of README.TXT on
|        your display screen.
 
|    2.  Press ENTER to continue viewing the contents
|        online.
 
|    3.  If you want to stop viewing, press CTRL+C.
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  433
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    TO PRINT THE README.TXT FILE:
 
|    1.  Type the following command at the DOS command
|        prompt:
 
|              print readme.txt
 
|    2.  Press ENTER.
 
 
| WORKING WITH XDF-FORMATTED DISKETTES
  ____________________________________
 
|    Setup for PC DOS 7 uses a new format known as
|    eXtended Density Format that extents the capacity of
|    a standard 1.44MB diskette to approximately 1.86MB
|    and a standard 1.2MB to approximately
|    1.54B--increasing the capacity of the diskette by
|    almost 25% or 28%, respectively.
 
|    No special instructions are necessary to run Setup
     __________________________________________________
|    from XDF-formatted diskettes.  Setup is designed to
     ___________________________________________________
|    handled this special format.
     ____________________________
 
|    XDF-formatted diskettes are read-only; you cannot
|    write to, create a new file on, copy a file to, or
|    delete files from an XDF-formatted diskette.  For
|    these reasons, the label for each XDF-formatted
|    diskette is marked:
 
|          Diskette n
                    _
|          (XDF-formatted diskette)
 
|    Review the procedures first before attempting to do
|    any of the following tasks that involve using the PC
|    DOS installation diskettes, which are XDF-formatted
|    (other than installing).
 
|    o   Using DOS commands with XDF-formatted diskettes.
|    o   Viewing the contents of XDF-formatted diskettes.
|    o   Loading the XDF program.
|    o   Viewing the README.XDF file.
|    o   Formatting XDF-formatted diskettes.
 
 
 
  434  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    o   Making backup copies of the PC DOS installation
|        diskettes.
 
 
  USING DOS COMMANDS WITH XDF-FORMATTED DISKETTES
 
|    IF YOU ARE USING XDF-FORMATTED DISKETTES, KEEP IN
|    MIND:
 
     o   Certain DOS commands only work with
|        XDF-formatted diskettes (XDF and XDFCOPY)
 
         -   The XDF program is a
             terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program
             that supports XDF-formatted diskettes.  You
             can unload this TSR program by typing "xdf
             /u" at the DOS command prompt.  Unloading
             this TSR saves memory.
 
         -   The XDFCOPY command performs a function
|            similar to the DISKCOPY command.
 
|    o   There are certain DOS commands that, if used
|        with XDF-formatted diskettes, will not produce
|        the the same expected result as when you use
|        them with standard DOS-formatted diskettes (DIR
|        and FORMAT).
 
|        -   The DIR command can be used with
|            XDF-formatted diskettes to view the entire
|            contents of the diskette--but only when the
|            XDF program is loaded.  Without XDF being
|            loaded, the only file you see listed when
|            the DIR command is typed is a README.XDF
|            file.
 
|        -    Your original PC DOS installation diskettes
             are write-protected to prevent data loss.
             However, should you remove the write
             protection and use the FORMAT command on
             either the Setup Diskette or the
                        ______________
             XDF-formatted diskettes, the diskette
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  435
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
             returns to being a standard DOS-formatted
             diskette without data.
 
     o   Other DOS commands cannot be used with
|        XDF-formatted diskettes at all (DISKCOPY and
|        DISKCOMP).
 
|        -   XDFCOPY can be used to make backup copies of
|            the XDF-formatted diskettes as well as the
|            Setup Diskette.  However, you cannot use the
             ______________
|            DISKCOPY command with XDF-formatted
|            diskettes.
 
         -   The DISKCOMP command can only be used on the
             Setup Diskette.
             ______________
 
     Refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for
                         __________________________
     complete details when using these commands with
     XDF-formatted diskettes.
 
 
| MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SETUP DISKETTES
 
|    Use the XDFCOPY command to make backup copies of the
|    XDF-formatted installation diskettes; only use
|    DISKCOPY for the Setup Diskette.
                      ______________
 
|    NOTE:  Use DISKCOPY as you normally would for all
|           diskettes other than the PC DOS installation
|           diskettes.
 
     TO MAKE BACKUP COPIES OF YOUR PC DOS INSTALLATION
     DISKETTES:
 
     1.  Install PC DOS before you make backup copies.
 
     2.  When your installation has been completed,
         insert the Setup Diskette into your diskette
                    ______________
         drive.
 
|    3.  If you have only one diskette drive (drive A for
|        example), type:
 
 
 
  436  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|              diskcopy a: a:
 
|        and press ENTER
 
|        Or, if you have two diskette drives (drive A and
|        B for example), type:
 
|              diskcopy a: b:
 
|        and press ENTER
 
|    4.  Follow the instructions on the screen until the
|        diskette has been copied.
 
|    5.  Insert one of the XDF-formatted diskettes into
|        your diskette drive.
 
     6.  If you have only one diskette drive (drive A for
         example), type:
 
|              xdfcopy a: a:
 
         +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ------------------------+
         |                                              |
         | Known problems:                              |
         |                                              |
         | o   Do not use XDFCOPY if you have XDF       |
         |     loaded.                                  |
         | o   XDFCOPY handling high floppy letters,    |
         |     such as "xdfcopy a: b:" where "b:" is    |
         |     for a floppy drive.  Use "xdfcopy a: a:" |
         |     or "xdfcopy b: b:" during beta.          |
         |                                              |
         +----------------------------------------------+
 
         and press ENTER
 
         Or, if you have two diskette drives (drive A and
         B for example), type:
 
               xdfcopy a: b:
 
         and press ENTER
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  437
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     7.  Follow the instructions on the screen to
         complete XDFCOPY.
 
|        One progress bar appears, indicating the
|        progress as you copy from the source drive.
|        Then another bar appears, indicating the
|        progress as you copy to the target drive.
 
     8.  Insert an XDF-formatted diskette into the source
         drive.
 
|    9.  Repeat steps 5 to step 7 for each of the
         remaining XDF-formatted diskettes.
 
     10. Label your backup copies similarly to the way
         your original PC DOS installation diskettes are
         labeled to distinguish the standard
|        DOS-formatted diskette (the Setup Diskette) from
                                 __________________
|        the XDF-formatted diskettes.
 
 
  FORMATTING XDF-FORMATTED DISKETTES
 
|    When you use the DOS FORMAT /U command on a
     XDF-formatted diskettes, they become standard
|    DOS-formatted diskettes.  There is no command to
|    format a diskette to the XDF format.
 
 
| LOADING THE XDF PROGRAM
 
|    The XDF program is a terminate-and-stay-resident
|    (TSR) program that supports XDF-formatted diskettes.
|    Two DOS commands were designed to work with the
|    eXtended Density Format (XDF):  XDF and XDFCOPY.
 
|    When working with the XDF-formatted installation
|    diskettes, the DIR command requires that the XDF
|    program be loaded before you can view all the
                       ______
|    contents of the diskette.  If XDF is not loaded when
|    you use the DIR command, the only file you will see
|    listed is the README.XDF file.  See "Loading the XDF
|    Program" if you need to load XDF.
 
 
  438  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    You do not need to load the XDF program to use the
|    XDFCOPY command.
 
|    TO LOAD THE XDF PROGRAM INTO MEMORY:
 
|    1.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
|              a:\xdf
 
|    2.  Then press ENTER.
 
|    You should always unload this program to save
|    memory.  Type "xdf /u" at the DOS command prompt.
 
 
  VIEWING THE README.XDF FILE
 
|    Before you load the XDF program, the DIR command
|    only lists the README.XDF file.  After loading XDF
|    and typing the DIR command, you see the full list of
|    the diskette's contents.  Note, however, that after
|    XDF is loaded, the README.XDF file is no longer
|    visable until XDF is unloaded.  To see the
|    README.XDF file again, type "xdf /u"
 
 
  VIEWING THE CONTENTS OF XDF-FORMATTED DISKETTES
 
|    If the XDF program is loaded, you can use the DOS
|    DIR command (as you normally would to view the
|    contents of a diskette) on diskettes that are
|    XDF-formatted--  Should you see only the README.XDF
|    file, this indicates that the XDF program is not
|    loaded.  Type "help XDF" at the DOS command prompt
|    to find out more about the XDF command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  439
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
| WORKING WITH SETUP BUNDLE FILES
  _______________________________
 
|    When viewing the contents of any of the PC DOS
|    installation diskettes, note there might be large
|    files without extensions.  These files are called
|    bundle files.  A bundle file groups together files
     ____________
|    pertaining to the same optional tool (or it may
|    group together the DOS files pertaining to the base
|    DOS operating system).
 
|    There can be one or more bundle files with the same
|    bundle name on multiple diskettes.  For example, all
|    the files pertaining to AntiVirus are placed in one
|    or more bundle files named "AV"; all the files
|    pertaining to the DOS base system are placed in one
|    or more bundle files named "DOS."
 
|    Not all files are placed in bundles.  These files
|    are placed on the Setup Diskette.
                       ______________
 
|    To find out if a file is in a bundle or which bundle
|    the file is in, use the E Editor to look at the
|    information in the FILES.TXT file.
 
|    FILES.TXT lists the:
 
|    o   Name of the file
|    o   Bundle name
|    o   Number of the diskette where the bundle is
|        located
|    o   Size of the file
|    o   DOS subdirectory name, if any
|    o   Brief description of what the file is
 
|    Bundle files have been grouped together and
|    compressed using a special process known simply as
|    packing.  The Setup program unpacks and copies the
     _______
|    Setup files during your PC DOS installation.
 
|    When you need to recover a single file from your PC
|    DOS installation diskettes, the preferred method is
|    to rerun Setup.  Follow the instructions in
 
 
 
  440  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
|    "Recovering Files from the Setup Diskettes" on
|    page 428.
 
|    More experienced DOS users can use the UNPACK2
|    command to recover a file.  The UNPACK2 command
|    allows you to see what is in each bundle or unpack
|    and copy one or more files from a bundle file.  If
|    you use the COPY command to copy a bundle file to
|    your hard disk, the files will still be in a bundle;
|    therefore, use the UNPACK2 command instead.  Type
|    "help unpack2" for information about the UNPACK2
|    command.
 
|    WARNING:  DO NOT UNPACK ALL THE FILES FROM THE SETUP
|    DISKETTES USING THE UNPACK2 COMMAND; RUN SETUP
|    INSTEAD TO UNPACK, COPY THE FILES, AND PLACE THE
|    FILES IN THE DIRECTORY THAT DOS EXPECTS FOR PROPER
|    OPERATION.
 
 
  USING THE EMERGENCY STARTUP DISKETTE
  ____________________________________
 
|    The PC DOS Setup Diskette differs from the remaining
                ______________
|    installation diskettes.  The Setup Diskette is not
                                  ______________
|    an XDF-formatted diskette.  No special procedures
|    are needed to use this diskette (see "Working with
|    XDF-Formatted Diskettes" on page 434 if you are
|    working with PC DOS installation diskettes, other
|    than the Setup Diskette.
              ______________
 
|    Use the Setup Diskette to boot the computer when the
             ______________
|    hard disk is not accessible.  Many of the files
|    needed when you have system problems are on this
|    first diskette.  To view the list of files
|    considered to be emergency files, use the DIR
|    command.
 
     NOTE:  The files you need if your drives are
|           compressed with Stacker are also included on
            this startup diskette.
 
 
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  441
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ----------------------------+
     |                                                  |
     | The decision to include the two compression .BIN |
     | files is still TBD.                              |
     |                                                  |
     +--------------------------------------------------+
 
     TO USE THE Setup Diskette AS THE STARTUP DISKETTE:
                ______________
 
     1.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                    ______________
 
     2.  Turn the power for your computer on (cold boot)
                                              _________
         or, if it is already powered on, press
         CTRL+ALT+DEL (warm boot) to restart your
                       _________
         computer.
 
     3.  Type "N" when prompted whether you want to
|        install PC DOS.  (If you do not answer in 10
|        seconds, the default answer YES is assumed.)
 
|        The command prompt, A:\>, is displayed.
 
 
  PROBLEM DETERMINATION
  _____________________
 
     If you have trouble during installation, there could
     be a number of causes.  This section explains the
     most common problems.
 
 
     INTERLNK
 
     INTERLNK.EXE dated 11/11/92 from MS-DOS(**) reports
     incorrect information to Setup.
 
     TO REMOVE THE INCORRECT VERSION OF INTERLNK:
 
     1.  Insert the Setup Diskette into drive A.
                    ______________
 
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) MS-DOS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
 
 
  442  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  At the DOS command prompt, type:
 
               a:setup
 
|    3.  When Setup finishes, answer YES when prompted if
|        you want to edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS
|        changes.
 
|    4.  Press CTRL+N, or F12 if available on your
|        keyboard, until you you are viewing the
|        CONFIG.SYS file.
 
|    5.  Edit the CONFIG.SYS file and add "rem" to
|        comment out the INTERLNK.EXE driver:
 
|              rem device=c:\dos\interlnk.exe
 
|    6.  After editing the CONFIG.SYS file, press F4 to
|        save the changes and close this file.
 
|    7.  Press F4 until you have closed the file and
|        exited the E Editor.
 
|    8.  At the screen that notifies you the installation
|        is complete, remove all diskettes from drive A,
|        and then restart your computer by pressing
|        ENTER.
 
|        +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ------------------------+
         |                                              |
|        | Need to add a step to remove REM from        |
|        | INTERLNK line after reboot?  Assume they     |
|        | still want in CONFIG.SYS file?               |
         |                                              |
         +----------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  443
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  COMMON QUESTIONS REGARDING INSTALLATION
 
     Common questions you might have during Setup follow.
 
     HOW MUCH HARD DISK SPACE DO I NEED TO INSTALL THIS
     VERSION OF DOS?
 
     The answer to this question depends on the type of
     system and the optional tools you choose to install
     as follows:
 
|    o   DOS without Windows
 
|        -   PC DOS with PC DOS Shell requires 3.5MB of
|            uncompressed space.
|        -   PC DOS and all PC DOS optional tools (no
|            Windows tools) requires 13.2MB of
|            uncompressed space.
 
|    o   DOS with Windows (Version 3.1 or higher)
 
|        -   Windows requires 10MB of uncompressed space.
|        -   DOS and Windows optional tools requires
|            9.7MB of uncompressed space.
|        -   DOS, and all DOS and Windows optional tools
|            requires 18MB of uncompressed space.
 
         +--- NOTE TO REVIEWERS ------------------------+
         |                                              |
         | TBD to verify 6MB and 11MB numbers above.    |
         |                                              |
         +----------------------------------------------+
 
     WHAT IF THE SETUP PROGRAM DOES NOT RUN?
 
     Setup cannot successfully install PC DOS for one or
     more of the following reasons:
 
     o   There is insufficient space on your hard disk.
 
     o   Your primary DOS partition is too small or
         incompatible with Setup.
 
 
 
  444  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     o   You do not have a hard disk.
 
     MY PRIMARY DOS PARTITION IS TOO SMALL OR
     INCOMPATIBLE.  WHAT CAN I DO?
 
     You must repartition your hard disk before
     installing PC DOS if your hard disk has one of the
     following characteristics:
 
     o   You do not have enough space in your primary
         partition for the system files and not enough
         space for a minimal install on any logical
         drives.
 
     o   The size of the cluster or sector is
         incompatible.
 
             Try running SETUP /P
 
     o   There are more than four primary partitions.
 
     o   The primary DOS partition is not active.
 
     o   A disk-partitioning program that is not
         compatible with the automatic Setup program has
         been used to partition your hard disk.
 
     When you repartition your disk, you have the option
     of creating one large partition on your hard disk or
     multiple smaller partitions.
 
     WARNING: TO CHANGE THE SIZE OF A PARTITION OR REDUCE
     THE NUMBER OF PARTITIONS, YOU MUST DELETE THE
     EXISTING PARTITIONS AND CREATE NEW ONES.  THEREFORE,
     YOU MUST BACK UP THE FILES ON EVERY PARTITION YOU
     PLAN TO MODIFY SO THAT YOU DO NOT LOSE THE
     INFORMATION IN THOSE FILES.
 
     TO BACKUP YOUR FILES AND REPARTITION YOUR HARD DISK:
 
     1.  Backup your hard disk.  (Refer to the
         documentation that came with your current
         version of DOS.)
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  445
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  Remove the partitions from your hard disk, using
         the same program you used to create the
         partitions.
 
         If you created the partition by using the FDISK
         program supplied with DOS Version 3.3, use the
         same command to remove the partitions.
 
|    3.  Use FDISK to create a partition at least large
         enough for the PC DOS install.
 
     4.  Use the FORMAT command to format any other
         partitions you created.
 
     5.  Restore your files to the primary DOS partition.
         (Refer to the documentation that came with your
         current version of DOS.)
 
     6.  To complete the installation, follow the
         instructions found in "PC DOS Standard
         Installation" on page 22.
 
     WHAT SHOULD I DO IF MY COMPUTER DOES NOT RESTART?
 
|    If this happens and if the problem might be related
     to the settings in your CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT,
     you can temporarily bypass these files to restart
     your computer.
 
     1.  Start your computer.
 
     2.  Press F5 immediately after your computer
         displays the message
         "Starting PC DOS..."
 
     NOTES:
 
     1.  Any device that requires an installable device
         driver does not work because the installable
         device drivers are not loaded.  For example,
         programs that require expanded or extended
         memory are not able to run because no expanded-
         or extended-memory drivers are loaded.
 
 
  446  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     2.  PC DOS uses the default environment variables of
         PATH=C:\DOS, PROMPT=$P$G, and
         COMSPEC=C:\COMMAND.COM temporarily until you
         correct the problem and restart your computer.
 
     You can bypass selected CONFIG.SYS commands by
     having PC DOS prompt you for each command in the
     CONFIG.SYS file.
 
     TO CONFIRM EACH CONFIG.SYS COMMAND:
 
     1.  Start your computer.  Just after your computer
         starts, DOS displays the text "Starting PC
         DOS..."
 
     2.  Immediately press and release the F8 key.
 
         One at a time, PC DOS displays each command in
         your CONFIG.SYS file followed by a prompt.  For
|        example, when PC DOS reaches the" DOS=HIGH, UMB"
|        statement, it displays the following prompt:
 
|              DOS=HIGH, UMB  [Y,N,Esc]?
 
|        Respond by typing either "Y" for YES or "N" for
|        NO, for each command in your CONFIG.SYS file,
|        press ESC to cancel the CONFIG.SYS file
|        processing.
 
         When PC DOS finishes processing the CONFIG.SYS
         file, it displays the following prompt:
 
|              Process AUTOEXEC.BAT?  [Y,N,Esc]?
 
     3.  Type "Y" to run all the commands in your
         AUTOEXEC.BAT file, type "N" to bypass your
|        AUTOEXEC.BAT file completely, or press ESC to
|        cancel the CONFIG.SYS file processing.
 
     WHAT IS THE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF THE PATH VARIABLE?
 
     The PATH variable, like other environment variables,
     is limited to 127 characters.  Use the PATH command
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  447
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     to set your path variable to one or more
                 ____
     directories.  Whenever you type a command, PC DOS
     searches the directories in your path for the
     command or program you are trying to run.  The
     following is an example of the PATH command:
 
           path=c:\;c:\dos;c:\windows;d:\batfiles;d:\util
 
     The name of the variable (PATH) and the equal sign
     take up 5 of the 127 characters.  This means you can
     use 122 characters to specify directory names.  To
     use those 122 characters most efficiently:
 
     o   Remove any spaces from the PATH command.
 
     o   Remove seldom-used directories from the PATH
         command.
 
     o   Use short directory names.
 
     o   Use batch programs to set and reset the path
         according to your current needs.
 
     o   Use the SUBST command to substitute a drive
         letter for a long directory path, if necessary.
 
         You can then use that drive letter instead of
         the full path in the PATH command. You can use
         the SUBST command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. If
         you do, it must precede the PATH command.
 
     For example, to shorten a path named
     C:\USER\LINDA\FORMS to Q:, you would include the
     following command (before the PATH command) in your
     AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
 
           subst q: c:\user\linda\forms
 
     For more information about the PATH and SUBST
     commands, refer to the online PC DOS 7 Command
                                   ________________
     Reference, or type "help" followed by the command
     _________
     name.
 
 
 
  448  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     WHICH DEVICE DRIVERS SHOULD I USE?
 
     PC DOS includes several device drivers that you load
     by using the DEVICE command in your CONFIG.SYS file.
     Other products might also include some of these
     device drivers.  The following device drivers are
     examples of a few general-purpose device drivers
     supplied with PC DOS:
 
     o   HIMEM
     o   RAMDrive
     o   SMARTDRV
     o   EMM386
 
     If you already have SMARTDRV.SYS installed on your
|    system, Setup comments out (REMs) the statement in
|    your CONFIG.SYS file.  To use SMARTDRV.EXE, however,
|    you will need to add the SMARTDRV command statement
|    to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
 
     For more information about these and other device
     drivers, refer to the device drivers information in
     the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference.
                __________________________
 
     If these device drivers are in your CONFIG.SYS file
     before you install PC DOS, Setup modifies the file
     so that you are using the versions supplied with PC
     DOS.
 
     HOW DO I DETERMINE WHAT STACK SIZE TO USE IN MY
     CONFIG.SYS?
 
     You might need to experiment with the proper stack
     size for your system to avoid a stack size overflow.
     Refer to the STACKS command information in the
     online PC DOS 7 Command Reference for special cases.
            __________________________
 
|    I HAVE INSTALLED PC DOS AND WANT TO EXPAND DRIVE C:
|    TO BE LARGER THAN 32MB.  WHAT STEPS DO I NEED TO
|    TAKE?
 
     This can be accomplished by backing up your system
     to diskettes, formatting the hard disk,
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  449
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     repartitioning it, and then reformatting it.  Then,
     you can reinstall PC DOS along with the other files.
     The following list outlines the steps to take:
 
|    1.  Back up your entire system using Central Point
|        Backup (CPBACKUP).  To start CPBACKUP, type:
 
|              cpbackup
 
|        at the DOS command prompt and back up all the
         files on all your drives.
 
|    2.  Insert the Setup Diskette into your drive.
                    ______________
 
|    3.  Start up from the diskette by pressing
|        CTRL+ALT+DEL.
 
     4.  Run FDISK, delete all partitions and remake the
         desired number of partitions.
 
     5.  FORMAT C: and any other hard disk partitions.
 
     6.  Install PC DOS again.
 
     7.  Restore all files using the CPBACKUP program.
 
 
     I HAVE INSTALLED PC DOS AND PC TOOLS(**) FOR WINDOWS
     WILL NOT START FROM WINDOWS.  WHAT STEPS DO I NEED
     TO TAKE:
 
     1.  Edit the C:\WINDOWS\WIN.INI file.  Under the
         section (Extensions) - (IBM DOS6 Setup
         Modification), change the file name in the
         following line:
 
               set=c:\dos\winbackup.exe
 
         to
 
  ---------------
 
  (**) PC Tools is a trademark of Central Point Software, Inc.
 
 
  450  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
               set=c:\dos\wnbackup.exe
 
     2.  Edit the C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM.INI file.  Under the
         section (386ENH) - (IBM DOS 6 Setup
         Modification), change the directory name in the
         following line:
 
               device=c:\dos\system\cpbvxd.386
 
         to
 
               device=c:\cps\system\cpbvxd.386
 
     3.  Restart Windows.
 
     WHAT SHOULD I DO WHEN THE PROGRAM OR DEVICE DRIVER
     REPORTS THE WRONG VERSION OF DOS?
 
     Some programs or device drivers run only with
     specific versions of DOS.  If a message appears
     indicating a program or device driver does not run
     with DOS, contact your vendor to get an updated
     program or to find out whether the current version
     of the program or device driver is actually
     compatible with DOS.
 
     If the current version of the program or device
     driver is compatible with DOS, use the SETVER
     command to change the version number that DOS
     reports to the program or device driver.  When you
     use SETVER, the program or device driver interprets
     DOS as the version it is designed to use.  For
     example, if a program named MYAPP.EXE runs only with
     DOS 3.3 or earlier, you would type:
 
           setver myapp.exe 3.3
 
     DOS reports the changed version number to the
     program when you restart your computer.  If the
     program is compatible with DOS, the SETVER command
     eliminates the apparent incompatibility.  There must
     be a DEVICE command for the SETVER.EXE device driver
     in your CONFIG.SYS file in order for the SETVER
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  451
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     command to report a different version to a program.
     Also, make sure there is only one SETVER.EXE on your
     hard disk, because each SETVER.EXE contains a
     separate version table.
 
     For more information about the SETVER command, refer
     to the online PC DOS 7 Command Reference, or type
                   __________________________
     "help setver".
 
     WARNING:  CONTACT YOUR SOFTWARE VENDOR FOR
     INFORMATION ABOUT WHETHER A PROGRAM WORKS WITH DOS.
     IT IS POSSIBLE THAT IBM HAS NOT VERIFIED WHETHER THE
     PROGRAM WILL RUN SUCCESSFULLY IF YOU USE THE SETVER
     COMMAND TO CHANGE THE PROGRAM VERSION NUMBER AND
     VERSION TABLE.  IF YOU RUN THE PROGRAM AFTER
     CHANGING THE VERSION TABLE IN DOS, YOU MIGHT LOSE OR
     CORRUPT DATA, OR INTRODUCE SYSTEM INSTABILITIES.  IF
     YOU DO NOT CONTACT YOUR SOFTWARE VENDOR TO DETERMINE
     THE COMPATIBILITY OF A SPECIFIC PROGRAM WITH DOS,
     IBM IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE.
 
 
  MESSAGES DURING SETUP
 
     If you receive one of the following messages when
|    running SETUP, see the explanation that follows each
     message.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  452  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | MESSAGE                 | EXPLANATION            |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | "Your current operating | You might have         |
     | system on drive C is    | purchased the wrong    |
     | not recognized as being | version of DOS.  The   |
|    | DOS (3.3 or higher)."   | upgrade version        |
     |                         | requires a previous    |
     |                         | version of DOS to be   |
     |                         | installed before you   |
     |                         | can install this       |
     |                         | version.               |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
     | One or more of the      | Run Setup by booting   |
     | following incompatible  | off diskette or stop   |
     | TSR programs has been   | the conflicting TSR by |
     | detected.  Stop the     | editing them out of    |
     | program, or remove it   | your CONFIG.SYS and    |
     | from your CONFIG.SYS    | AUTOEXEC.BAT files.    |
     | and AUTOEXEC.BAT files  |                        |
     | and run Setup again.    |                        |
     |                         |                        |
|    | o   FASTOPEN 4.0        |                        |
|    | o   DESQVIEW            |                        |
     | o   TASK SWAPPER        |                        |
     | o   WINDOWS             |                        |
     +-------------------------+------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                            Appendix A.  More Information About Installing  453
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  454  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  APPENDIX B.  NOTICES
  ____________________
 
 
 
 
 
     References in this publication to IBM products,
     programs, or services do not imply that IBM intends
     to make these available in all countries in which
     IBM operates.  Any reference to an IBM product,
     program or service is not intended to state or imply
     that only IBM's product, program, or service may be
     used.  Any functionally equivalent product, program,
     or service that does not infringe any of IBM's
     intellectual property rights or other legally
     protectable rights may be used instead of the IBM
     product, program, or service.  Evaluation and
     verification of operation in conjunction with other
     products, programs, or services, except those
     expressly designated by IBM, are the user's
     responsibility.
 
     IBM may have patents or pending patent applications
     covering subject matter in this document.  The
     furnishing of this document does not give you any
     license to these patents.  You can send license
     inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of
     Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue,
     Thornwood NY 10594, U.S.A.
 
 
  TRADEMARKS AND SERVICE MARKS
  ____________________________
 
     The following terms, denoted by an asterisk (*) in
     this publication, are trademarks or service marks of
     the IBM Corporation in the United States or other
     countries:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        455
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     AS/400             Micro Channel    RISC System/6000
     CGA                OS/2             Screen Reader
     EGA                PC/AT            SpeechViewer
     DisplayWrite       PC DOS           THINKable
     IBM                PC/XT            VoiceType
     IBM PC             Personal System/2VGA
     IBM Token Ring     PhoneCommunicatorXGA
     Independence SeriesPS/2
                        PS/ValuePoint
 
     The following terms, denoted by a double asterisk
     (**) in this publication, are trademarks of other
     companies as follows:
 
     Ami Pro                     Lotus Development
                                 Corporation
     AST                         AST Research, Inc.
     Bernoulli                   Iomega Corp.
     BlueMAX                     Qualitas, Inc.
     Brooklyn Bridge             Fifth Generation
                                 Systems, Inc.
     Central Point Anti-Virus    Central Point Software,
                                 Inc.
     Central Point Backup        Central Point Software,
                                 Inc.
     Compaq                      Compaq Computer
                                 Corporation
     dBASE                       Borland International,
                                 Inc.
     Delete Sentry               Central Point Software
     DESQview                    Quarterdeck Office
                                 Systems
     DR DOS                      Digital Research, Inc.
     Excel                       Microsoft Corporation
     FastLynx                    Rupp Corporation
     Handwriter                  Communication
                                 Intelligence Corporation
     Helix                       Helix Corporation
     Hercules                    Hercules Computer
                                 Technology, inc.
     Intel                       Intel Corporation
     Iomega                      Iomega Corp.
     IPX                         Novell, Incorporated
 
 
  456  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     LapLink                     Traveling Software, Inc.
     Lotus                       Lotus Development
                                 Corporation
     Lotus 1-2-3                 Lotus Development
                                 Corporation
     LZS                         Stac Electronics
     Maynard                     Maynard Electronics,
                                 Inc.
     Microsoft                   Microsoft Corporation
     Microsoft Word              Microsoft Corporation
     MSCDEX                      Microsoft Corporation
     NCR                         NCR Corporation
     Netroom                     Helix Software Company
     NetWare                     Novell Incorporated
     Novell                      Novell Incorporated
     PC Card                     Personal Computer Memory
                                 Card International
                                 Association
     PCMCIA                      Personal Computer Memory
                                 Card International
                                 Association
     PenDOS                      Communication
                                 Intelligence Corporation
     Phoenix                     Phoenix Technologies,
                                 Ltd.
     QEMM                        Quarterdeck Office
                                 Systems
     Qualitas                    Qualitas, Inc.
     Quarterdeck Expanded        Quarterdeck Office
     Memory Manager              Systems
     Quattro Pro                 Borland International,
                                 Inc.
     RIPL                        CTA, Inc.
     SmartPack                   Stac Electronics
     Stac                        Stac Electronics
     Stacker                     Stac Electronics
     Stacker Anywhere            Stac Electronics
     Stacker MaxSpace            Stac Electronics
     Stacker MaxSpeed            Stac Electronics
     Symphony                    Lotus Development
                                 Corporation
     SyQuest                     SyQuest Technology
     Toshiba                     Toshiba Corporation
 
 
                                                      Appendix B.  Notices  457
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     Weitek                      Weitek Corporation
     Western Digital             Western Digital
                                 Corporation
     Windows                     Microsoft Corporation
     WordPerfect                 WorkPerfect Corporation
     386MAX                      Qualitas, Inc.
     8086                        Intel Corporation
     8088                        Intel Corporation
     80286                       Intel Corporation
     80386                       Intel Corporation
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  458  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  INDEX
  _____
 
 
 
 
 
     +--------------------+                    +----------+
     | SPECIAL CHARACTERS |                    | NUMERICS |
     +--------------------+                    +----------+
 
  -DPMS for Stacker  347                    386MAX and Stacker  348
  /-DPMS switch for Stacker  346
  /? switch  38
  /=a parameter for CHECK,                     +---+
   Stacker  367                                | A |
  /A switch (PC DOS Setup)  419                +---+
  /AUTO switch for Stacker  351
  /BD=drive, Stacker  352                   accessing
  /C switch (Setup)  10                        Central Point Backup  240
  /E switch (PC DOS Setup)  426             active window
  /EMS for Stacker  347                        definition of  43
  /EMS switch for Stacker  347              actual compression ratio,
  /Q switch for Stacker  343                 Stacker  316, 339
  /R switch for Stacker  370                add a blank line (ENTER)  95
  /UMB switch for Stacker  347              add a line of text (ENTER)  83
  /W switch (PC DOS Setup)  427             ADD in E Editor  131
  /W switch (Setup)  13                     administrator installation
  .BAT file  65                                copying PC DOS files and
  * (IBM trademark)  455                        tools  420
  ** (other company's trademark)  456          creating a directory  420
  = (E Editor)  88, 131                     advanced features
                                               RAMBoost  175
                                            Advanced Information screen  386
                                            advanced properties  223
                                               PC DOS Shell  223
                                            Advanced Setup screen
                                               Card Settle time  376
                                               CIS window address  376
                                               IRQ  376
 
 
 
 
 
 
  (C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1981, 1994                                        459
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  Advanced Setup screen (continued)         AUTOEXEC.BAT command  65, 67
     Token Ring speed  376                     APPEND  68
  ALL command                                  CPSCHED  68
     .All file  119                            DATAMON  68
     E Editor  119                             ECHO OFF  67
     searching text  119                       KEYB  68
  All Files, Stacker  315                      MODE  67
  allDOS Shell                                 MOUSE  68
     Help                                      multiple configurations  61, 62
        using the Help menu  203               PATH  67
  allocation units, Stacker                    PROMPT  67
     definition of  327                        SET  67
     lost  359                                 SMARTDRV  68
  ALT+F4 (Exit in E Editor)  82             AUTOEXEC.BAT file
  AntiVirus/DOS for Windows tool  17           explanation of  47
  AntiVirus/DOS tool  17                    AutoMount for Stacker  349
  APPEND command  68                        AutoMounting
  APPEND command (E Editor)  129               diskette drives  348
  appending                                    removable diskette drives  349
     the PC DOS Viewer topic                   software-driven drives  350
      information  45                          software-driven removable
  application shortcut keys                     drives  350
     defining  211, 221                     AutoProtect for Stacker  357, 358
  ASCII codes                               AutoRecover for Stacker  361
     displaying characters according        AUTOSAVE command (E Editor)  85
      to  137                               AutoSave for Stacker  334, 360
  Assembler syntax  127
  ATA card settings  380
  ATA Socket screen  380                       +---+
  ATTRIB command with Stacker  358             | B |
  ATTRIBUTE EXCLUSION command in               +---+
   CPBackup  247
  attributes, removing                      backing up
  AutoCompare  262                             before installing Stacker  299
  AUTOEXEC.BAT                                 files  445
     commands                                  Setup diskettes  436
        common  66                          backing up a file server  271
     editing during installation  27        backing up multiple drives  253
     startup commands  65
 
 
 
 
 
 
  460  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  Backup for DOS (Central Point)  18           +---+
  Backup for Windows (Central                  | C |
   Point)  18                                  +---+
  BACKUP FROM command  252
  backup status gauge  312                  C (change) command
  balancing compression and speed  326         E Editor  121
  batch programs                            C language syntax  127, 138
     running in a startup command  216      calculating mathematical expressions
  before installing Stacker  299             using E Editor  132
  Bernoulli drive  252                      CALL command
  block mark (E Editor)  104                   in startup commands for program
  block reflowing (ALT+R) using                 items  216
   E Editor  111                            calling
  block, configuration  59                     Central Point Backup  240
  boot (restart)                               the E Editor  75
     bypassing boot commands  49            Card settle time  376
  Boot Manager                              CD-ROM
     using to install PC DOS  411              device driver installation  53
  boot time, Stacker  341                      MSCDEX  53
  bootable diskette                         CD-ROM drives, Stacker  351
     See system diskette                    CD-ROM install of PC DOS  424
  BOX in E Editor  139                      CD-ROM support
  breaking a text line in E Editor  94         MSCDEX  66
  buffer                                    Central Point Backup
     described  108, 109                       installing  240
     E Editor  108, 109                        starting  240
  BUFFERS command  55                       Central Point Backup for DOS
  bulk-erasing a tape  279                   tool  18
  bundle file                               Central Point Backup for Windows
     copying to adminstrator                   installing  230
      directory  420                        Central Point Backup for Windows
     definition of  439                      tool  18
     recovering a Setup file  428           Central Point Undelete for
  bypassing CONFIG.SYS  49                   Windows  17
                                            Certifying tapes in Backup  278
                                            changing
                                               configuration  48
                                               expected compression ratio  339
                                               hardware devices  48
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  461
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  changing (continued)                      command (continued)
     passwords  333                            AUTOEXEC.BAT (continued)
     preferences  313                             CPSCHED  68
     Stacker drive size  337, 338                 DATAMON  68
     swap file settings  337                      ECHO OFF  67
  changing screen color                           KEYB  68
  changing text color                             MODE  67
  changing text format                            MOUSE  68
  changing user level in CPBackup  237            PATH  67
  CHECK command                                   PROMPT  67
     CHECK /F  332                                SET  67
     CHECK /WP  331                               SMARTDRV  68
     for troubleshooting  357                     startup  65
  Check Integrity tool  309                    CONFIG.SYS  51
  checking Stacker drives  331                 DEVICE  54
  CHKDSK command                               DEVICEHIGH  54
     running  359                              startup  48
     using with Stacker  359                commands
  choosing correct install                     CPBackup  237, 244, 247, 248,
   procedure  20, 409                           252, 255, 258, 259, 261, 268
  CIS (Card Information Structure)                attribute exclusions  247
   window address  376                            backup from  252
  clearing                                        date range selection  248
     the E Editor window  105                     include/exclude files  244
  client, definition of  144                      load setup  259
  closing a file                                  print history  268
     (F3)  77                                     QView  255
  clusters, Stacker  327                          save setup  258
  CMDREF online book  30                          schedule backups  261
  CNFIGNAM.EXE  383                               user level  237
  colors                                       DATE command  249
     changing                                  HELP command in the PC DOS
        in the PC DOS Shell  206                Viewer  35
  COLORS command                               help using /? switch  38
     PC DOS Shell  206                         in STACKER.INI  343
  combination keys  43                         INTERLNK  442
  combining text lines in E Editor  94         INTERLNK command  150
  command                                      INTERSVR command  150
     AUTOEXEC.BAT  66                          MEM  162
        APPEND  68
 
 
 
 
 
  462  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  commands (continued)                      compression ratio (continued)
     PC DOS Shell                              gauge  311
        online help for  199                   Stacker  323
     QCONFIG  162, 183                      Compression Report tool  309
     REXX for PC DOS  37                    compression tool, Stacker  18
     SETUP for PC DOS  11                   computers, connecting  143
     startup commands                       CONFIG command
        for program items  215, 216,           using with Stacker  362, 365
         217, 218, 219                      CONFIG.SYS
     summary for Stacker  352                  changing during installation  27
     UNPACK2  441                              INTERLNK command  149, 151
     VIEW  31                               CONFIG.SYS command
     XDF  439                                  bypassing  49
     XDFCOPY  436                              creation of  51
  comment lines, removing  10               CONFIG.SYS file
  common block, multiple                       changing  52
   configurations  59                          editing  52
  common installation questions  444           example of  55
  Communication Ports screen  379              explanation of  47
  compare                                      memory management  344
     generating a report in                 configuration
      CPBackup  263                            customizing  341, 342
     symbols defined in CPBackup  265       configuration block  59
  comparing data in CPBackup  262              common  59
  Compress Drive command, Stacker  317         menu  57
  Compress Drive tool  309                  configuration of system  47
  Compress Floppy tool  309                 configurations, multiple  48
  compressed data not available  364        Configure (PCM)
  compressed drives                            add a card to the card list  386
     installing PC DOS  415                    edit configuration values  386
  compressing                               configuring
     diskettes  318                            configuration considerations  165
     empty diskettes  319                      RAMBoost  165
     hard disks  317                        connecting a text line in
  compression                                E Editor  94
     details  314                           control characters using
     speed versus space  325                 E Editor  137
  compression ratio                         conventional memory  181
     adjustments  339                          specifying in the PC DOS Shell
                                                for programs  224
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  463
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  COPY command                              CPBackup (continued)
     PC DOS Shell  212                         drive display  254
  copy text (ALT+C) using                      excluding file attributes  247
   E Editor  112                               failing high speed test  235
  copying                                      files created by low-speed
     administrator files and                    backups  270, 289
      tools  420                               files that do not compare  264
     files to Setup diskettes  428             first time configuration  233
     program items among program               formatting non-SCSI tapes  278
      groups  212                              hidden files  248
     Setup diskettes  436                      include subdirectories
     the PC DOS Viewer topic                    example  245
      information  45                          include/exclude list
     topics into a file  44                     guidelines  245
     with the E Editor (ALT+C)  107            installing  229
  CP format vs QIC for tapes in                making a backup  240, 241
   Backup  280                                 monochrome file selection  251
  CPBackup                                     non-Express window explained  251
     AutoCompare  262                          password for backup set  241
     automatic file selections  244            preconfigured setup files  256,
     backing up to a network                    260
      device  269                              previous versions  259
     backing up to a network                   printing a backup directory  268
      directory  269                           QIC tape drives supported  276
     backup methods  287                       restoring data  266, 267
     changing the user level  237              restoring when Express is
     choosing files with the                    disabled  266
      keyboard  250                            SCSI tape directory  242
     compare symbols  265                      SCSI tape drives supported  278
     comparing data  262                       selecting files
     confidence test  234, 235, 236             automatically  245
        retesting  236                         selecting files by date  248
        troubleshooting  235                   selecting files manually  249
     configuration file  234                   selecting multiple drives when
     contents of setup files  257               Express is disabled  252
     CPBDIR  291                               setup files defined  257
     description of backup  241                setup files description  259
     disabling Express  251                    starting a compare  263
     displaying the directory                  strategies for backing up  285
      tree  250
 
 
 
 
 
  464  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  CPBackup (continued)                      custom setup, Stacker  301
     system files  248                      customizing
     tape backup strategies  287               AUTOEXEC.BAT file  65
     tape controller cards  282                E Editor window  134
        supported  282                      customizing the PC DOS Shell
     tape controller cards address             adding passwords for program
      table  283                                items  223
     tape information  275                     adding program groups  207, 208,
     tape password  243                         209
     unattended backups  262                   adding program items to
     user level reference chart  238            groups  210, 211
     using CPSCHED  261                        changing
     using the include/exclude                    color schemes  206
      list  244                                   group properties  227
     viewing files  255                           program item properties  214
     volume tape catalog                          screen modes  206
      explained  284                           copying program items among
     warnings  234, 241, 243                    groups  212
        quitting a SCSI backup  243            creating Help messages
        remember password  241                    for program groups  208
        skipping confidence test  234             for program items  224
     when to run confidence test  236          creating startup commands  215
  CPBackup confidence test                     defining application shortcut
     when to run  236                           keys  221
  CPBACKUP.CFG file  234                       deleting a program group  209
  CPBDIR  291                                  deleting program items from
     parameters  291                            groups  213
  CPSCHED command  68                          pausing after quitting a
  CPSCHED in Backup  261                        program  222
  creating                                     preventing program switching  227
     an administration directory  420          rearranging items in program
     Stacker drive  317                         groups  213
  cursor movement                              reserving shortcut keys for
     keys  90                                   programs  226
     move to beginning of marked area          running batch programs in a
      (ALT+Y)  114                              startup command  216
     move to end of marked area                setting video mode for
      (ALT+E)  113                              programs  226
                                               specifying memory for
                                                programs  224, 225
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  465
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  customizing the PC DOS Shell              deleting (continued)
   (continued)                                 Setup comment lines  10
     using a startup directory for             using the E Editor (ALT+D)  107
      programs  220                         deletion
     using replaceable                         restoring in the E Editor  95
      parameters  216, 217, 218, 219        details, disk space for Stacker  314
                                            device
                                               explanation of  53
     +---+                                  DEVICE command  54, 56
     | D |                                  device driver
     +---+                                     customizing features of  53
                                               explanation of  53
  damaged files, removing for                  for new drive  318
   Stacker  367                                installable  53
  DATAMON command  68                          order in CONFIG.SYS file  54
  DATE command  249                         device driver, installable
  DATE RANGE SELECTION command in              explanation of  53
   CPBackup  248                            DEVICEHIGH command  54, 56
  default E Editor                          diagnosing Stacker drives  358
     function keys  76                      DIR command
     search options  119                       using on XDF-formatted
     search options=''  125                     diskettes  439
  defining a startup menu  57               directories
  defragmenting with Stacker  327              startup
  delete a character                              for program items  211, 220
     left of cursor (BACKSPACE)  97         directory tree
     right of cursor (DELETE)  96              displaying in CPBackup  250
  delete a line of text                     disabling warnings, Stacker  314
   (CTRL+BACKSPACE)  95                     disk repair utilities  359
  delete a word of text (CTRL+D)  97           running  360
  DELETE command                               running with Stacker  360
     deleting a program group  209          disk space
     deleting a program item  213              gauge  311
     PC DOS Shell  209, 213                 disk summary
  delete marked text (ALT+D) using             Windows File Manager  316
   E Editor  112                            diskette
  deleting                                     new Setup features
     program groups  209                       using for emergency startup  441
     program items from groups  213            viewing contents of  439
 
 
 
 
 
 
  466  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  diskette (continued)                      drive letters (continued)
     XDF-formatted  434                        CD-ROM  351
  diskette, compressed                         identifying  318, 341
     unmounting  323                           specifying  351, 352
  diskette, startup  52                     drive map with Stacker  341
  DiskFix, PC Tools  359, 369, 370          drive other than drive C
  DISPLAY command                              installing on  409
     PC DOS Shell  207                      drive specifications
  display mode                                 in STACKER.INI  344
     See graphics mode, text mode           drives
  displaying                                   displaying multiple in
     multiple drives in CPBackup  253           CPBackup  253
     the directory tree in                     light on continuously during
      CPBackup  250                             backup  242
  document format, special  52                 mapping explained  254
  documentation links  43                      multiple selection in
  DOS                                           CPBackup  252
     DATE command  249                         resetting defaults for tapes  284
     error messages  36                        selecting multiple in
     starting the PC DOS Viewer                 CPBackup  252
      from  31                              Dual Boot
     wildcards in CPBackup  245                using to install PC DOS  411
  DOS system files                          duplicating XDF-formatted diskettes
     restoring  363
  DOS=HIGH,UMB command  56
  DOSERROR online book  30                     +---+
  DOSREXX online book  30                      | E |
  DOSSHELL command                             +---+
     starting the PC DOS Shell  197
  DPMS requirements, Stacker  346           E Editor
  DPMS.EXE  346                                .All file  119
  drawing lines (F6)  77                       = (E Editor)  88
  drive integrity                              activating the menu (F10)  79
     checking  332                             adding a blank line (ENTER)  95
  drive integrity, checking for                adding a line of text (ENTER)  83
   Stacker  331                                All command  119
  drive letters                                breaking a line  94
     assigning  318, 341                       buffer  108, 109
     at boot time  341                         closing (F3)  77
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  467
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  E Editor (continued)                      E Editor (continued)
     combining a line  94                      marking text (continued)
     connecting a line  94                        items (text, numbers or
     copying text (ALT+C)  107, 112                symbols) (ALT+Z)  105
     copying text to and from                     line (ALT+L)  103
      files  107                                  line (mouse)  101
     creating a file  82, 83                      word (ALT+W)  104
     customizing the window  134               marking text (ALT+Z)  105
     deleting a line of text                      text (ALT+Z)  105
      (CTRL+BACKSPACE)  95                     marking words (ALT+W)  104
     deleting a word of text                   modifying a file  82
      (CTRL+D)  97                             moving text (ALT+M)  108, 112
     deleting text (ALT+D)  107, 112           moving text to and from
     described  74                              files  109
     drawing lines (F6)  77                    moving the cursor  90
     editing a file (F8)  78                   naming a file (F7)  78
     erasing to end of line                    naming an unnamed file  84
      (CTRL+E)  95                             online help for  80
     ESC from E Editor menus  76, 77,          overlaying text (ALT+O)  112
      78, 79                                   paragraph formatting (ALT+P)  113
     ESC to get to command line  76,           printing a file  89
      77, 78, 79                               printing a file using
     exiting the E Editor (ALT+F4)  82          E Editor  89
     F5 print  89                              printing files (F5)  77
     filling marked area (ALT+F)  112          quitting a file (F3)  82
     finding and replacing text  121           reflowing block of text
     finding text  116                          (ALT+R)  111
     function keys  76                         reflowing marked area
     getting help (F1)  76                      (ALT+R)  111, 113
     getting information  76                   reflowing paragraph (ALT+P)  110
     help information  76                      replacing text  121
     joining a line  94                        restoring a line (F9)  78, 95
     jumping to E Editor command               saving (F2)  76
      line  76, 77, 78, 79                     saving and quitting (F4)  77
     macro, immediate  100                     saving and quitting a file
     marking blocks (ALT+B)  104                (F4)  82
     marking lines (ALT+L)  103                searching for text  116
     marking lines with mouse  101             selecting
     marking text  101, 103, 104, 105             text  101
        block (ALT+B)  104
 
 
 
 
 
  468  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  E Editor (continued)                      ESC (in E Editor)  76, 77, 78, 79
     splitting a line  94                   ESC key for E Editor  75, 80, 86
     starting                               examples of
        with the E command  82                 ADD  132
     starting from DOS  75                     edit 1 file  87
     text editor  73                           edit 2 files  87
     types of marks                            edit multiple files  87
        block (ALT+B)  104                     file naming  88
        text (ALT+Z)  105                      file naming shorthand  88
        word (ALT+W)  104                      math  133
     unmarking text (ALT+U)  105               multiple file specs  88
     using ALL command to search               print  89
      text  119                                setting margins  110
     using your keyboard  90                   setting tabs  98
  E Editor function keys  76                   string change  121
  E command                                    string search  116, 121
     starting the E Editor  82              EXIT command
  E command (or ED command)                    for the PC DOS Shell  205
     the E Editor  82                       exiting
  ECHO OFF command  67                         Stacker Anywhere for DOS  323
  editing                                   exiting the E Editor  82
     AUTOEXEC.BAT file  65                  expanded memory (EMS or EEMS)  183
     CONFIG.SYS  344                        expected compression ratio
     multiple files  87                        changing  339
     system files during install  27           for Stacker  316
  editing a file (F8)  78                   Expected Compression tool  309
  emergency diskette  441                   Express
  EMM386 and Stacker  347                      disabling in CPBackup  251
  empty diskette                               restoring when disabled in
     compressing  319                           CPBackup  266
  EMS and Stacker  347                      express setup, Stacker  301
  entire disk                               extended memory
     for creating Stacker drive  317           specifying in the PC DOS Shell
  erase to end of line (CTRL+E)  95             for programs  225
  error messages  36, 452                   extended memory (XMS)  182
  errors                                    extended memory, Stacker  346
     while optimizing using                 extra length tapes in Backup  279
      Stacker  369
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  469
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +---+                                  files (continued)
     | F |                                     creating  74
     +---+                                        See also Edlin  74
                                               excluding by attribute in
  F1 (HELP in E Editor)  76                     CPBackup  247
  F1 for online help  38                       monochrome selection in
  F10 (Menu in E Editor)  79                    CPBackup  251
  F11 (Previous)  79                           printing from the E Editor  89
  F12 (Next)  79                               selecting  245, 249
  F2 (SAVE in E Editor)  76                       automatically in CPBackup  245
  F3 (CLOSE in E Editor)  77, 82                  manually in CPBackup  249
  F4 (FILE in E Editor)  77, 82                selecting manually in
  F5 during startup  50, 446                    CPBackup  250
  F7 (RENAME in E Editor)  78                  setup files in Backup  257
  F8 (OPEN in E Editor)  78                    setup files in CPBackup  257, 259
  F8 during startup  50, 447                      contents of  257
  F9 (UNDO in E Editor)  78, 95                that do not compare in
  features                                      CPBackup  264
     of Stacker compression  294               viewing in CPBackup  255
  features.                                 FILES command  55
     for PC DOS 7  xiii                     files, printing (F5)  77
  file                                      fill marked area (ALT+F) using
     appending information to  45            E Editor  112
     AUTOEXEC.BAT  48                       finding
     CONFIG.SYS  48                            index topics in the PC DOS
     copying topic information to  45           Viewer  42
     copying topics into  44                finding and replacing text
  File Manager                                 using the E Editor  121
     monitoring Stacker drives  315         finding drive letters, Stacker  341
  file server                               finding text
     backing up  271                           with the E Editor  116
  file, bundle  440                         first time configuration in
  files                                      CPBackup  233
     automatic selection in                 Flash File System
      CPBackup  244                            MS-FLASH.SYS file  378
     backing up  445                        flashing message, Stacker  313
     backing up by date  248                format, special for documents  52
     copying from Setup diskettes  428      formatting
     created by low-speed                      XDF-formatted diskettes  438
      backups  270, 289
 
 
 
 
 
  470  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  formatting, paragraph (ALT+P) using       graphic characters using
   E Editor  113                             E Editor  137
  Forward push button  43                   graphics mode
  fragmentation gauge, Stacker  311            changing screen modes in the PC
  fragmentation with Stacker  327               DOS Shell  206
  free space                                   for program items  226
     compressing on hard drive  317
     creating Stacker drive  317
  Full optimization with Stacker  327          +---+
  Full Update, Stacker                         | H |
   optimization  302                           +---+
  Full-MaxSpace for Stacker  325, 326,
   327, 329                                 hard disk
  full-screen CPBackup  229                    installing on  22
  function keys                             hard disks
     F1-F12  76                                compressing  317
  function keys, E Editor  76               hardware device
                                               adding  48
                                            header, saved for Stacker  360
     +---+                                  help
     | G |                                     (F1)  76
     +---+                                     creating
                                                  for program groups  208
  gauges, Stacker                                 for program items  224
     Backup Status  312                        for other than Stacker  296, 310
     Compression Ratio  311                    for PC DOS Shell  199
     Disk Space  311                           for Stacker compression  296
     Fragmentation  311                        for Stacker Setup  301
     preferences for Windows  314              for the PC DOS Shell  201, 202,
  GET command in E Editor  128                  203
  getting E Editor help information            from within the PC DOS Viewer  40
     (F1)  76                                  getting online  35
  getting help                                 online  199, 201, 202, 203, 208,
     using the /? switch  38                    224
     using the PC DOS Viewer  40               using F1  38
  getting help for Stacker  301, 348           using the Help Option  38
  getting ready for Stacker  299            HELP command  35
  grandfather, father, son                  help menu in the PC DOS Shell
     backup strategy  288                      described  203
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  471
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  Help menu option  38                      installation
  Help push button  43                         Central Point Backup for
  hidden files in CPBackup  248                 Windows  230
  hidden files with Stacker  340               of CPBackup, full-screen  229
  high memory area (HMA)  181                  of the PC DOS Shell  195
  high speed                                   PC DOS Shell  195
     failing test in CPBackup  235          installing
  HIMEM.SYS and Stacker  347                   additional optional tools  426
  history files                                backing up files  445
     printing a directory in                   booting from diskette  23
      CPBackup  268                            bundle files  440
  hot key letter                               coping Setup files  428
     definition of  44                         country codes  12
                                               from a CD-ROM  424
                                               from within your DOS system  22
     +---+                                     if a LAN administrator  419
     | I |                                     if after the LAN Administrator
     +---+                                      installs  423
                                               if from a remote workstation to a
  IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows                 server  422
   tool  17                                    if installing to a server  420
  IBM AntiVirus/DOS tool  17                   if OS/2 is installed  411
  identifying drive letters,                   if OS/2 is installed as FAT  411
   Stacker  341                                if using Boot Manager  411
  IF command  63                               if using Dual Boot  411
  INCLUDE command  61                          if using OS/2 Boot Manager  412
  include subdirectories                       if you have a PS/1  414
     example in CPBackup  245                  if you have no hard disk  410
  include/exclude files list in                if your drives are
   CPBackup  244                                compressed  415
     guidelines  245                           if your system already has Dual
  incorrect version of INTERLNK  442            Boot capability  412
  index topics                                 ISO fonts  6
     finding in the PC DOS Viewer  42          keyboard layouts  6
  INF extensions  31                           keyboards  12
  Information (PCM)                            mouse drivers  266
     viewing card list  389                    on drive other than C  409
     viewing client info  389                  on hard disk  22
                                               optional tools  426
 
 
 
 
 
 
  472  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  installing (continued)                    KEYB command  68
     partitioning disks  445                keyboard
     PC DOS  3                                 choosing files in CPBackup  250
     problem determination  444             keys
     removing comment lines  10                for working with the E Editor  90
     setting time and date  6               keyword
     Stacker compression  297, 299             definition of  41
     using a mouse  7
     using diskettes  22
     Windows tools  13                         +---+
     XDF-formatted diskettes  434              | L |
  installing PC DOS from a LAN                 +---+
   server  419
  installing PC DOS from a LAN              LAN administrator
   workstation  419                            installing PC DOS on a
  INTERLNK  442                                 server  419
  INTERLNK command  150                        installing PC DOS on a
     preinstall considerations  148             workstation  419
  InterLnk program  143                        using setup /a  419
     breaking connection  153               laptop computer  143
  INTERSVR command  150                     larger, making Stacker drive  338
  IRQ  376                                  LIM 3.2/4.0  182
                                            line mark (E Editor)  101, 103
                                            lines, drawing (F6)  77
     +---+                                  linking to online topics  40
     | J |                                  loading
     +---+                                     Central Point Backup  240
                                               mouse device driver  11
  joining a text line in E Editor  94          the E Editor  75
                                               XDF  435, 438
                                            loading Stacker high  345
     +---+
     | K |
     +---+
 
  key
     stroke sequence play
      (CTRL+T)  100
     stroke sequence record
      (CTRL+R)  100
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  473
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +---+                                  memory types (continued)
     | M |                                     upper memory block (UMB)  181
     +---+                                  memory-resident program
                                               starting  68
  macro, immediate  100                     menu
  making a backup  240                         Help option  38
  margins                                      startup  57
     paragraph adjustment to  110           menu block, multiple
     setting  110                            configurations  57
  margins, setting  99                      MENUCOLOR command  57
  marking text                              MENUDEFAULT command  57
     See also text marking                  MENUITEM command  57
     how to mark  101, 103, 104, 105        messages, error  452
        line (ALT+L)  103                   mnemonic selection  198
        line (mouse)  101                   MODE command  67
  MATH in E Editor  132                     Modem/FAX card settings  379
  mathematical expressions in               monochrome
   E Editor  132                               file selection indication in
  MaxSpace for Stacker  325                     CPBackup  251
  MaxSpeed for Stacker  325                 monochrome screen, Stacker  300
  media errors while optimizing  369        mounting
  MEM command  162                             diskette drives (AutoMount)  348
  memory                                       drives to make data
     analyzing your computer  183               available  323
     conventional  344                         non-Stacker diskette drive  321
     expanded (EMS)  347                       permanent Stacker drives  349
     extended  346                             removable drives  348
     managers  344, 345, 346                   removable Stacker drives  318,
     run the optimizer  348                     344
     specifying in the PC DOS Shell            software-drive removable
      for programs  224, 225                    drives  350
     upper  345                                Stacker Windows drives  323
     upper memory blocks  345                  temporary drives  323
  memory types                              mouse
     conventional memory  181                  installing PC DOS 7  7
     expanded memory (EMS or                MOUSE command  68
      EEMS)  183                            mouse drivers  266
     extended memory (XMS)  182             move marked area (ALT+M) using
     high memory area (HMA)  181             E Editor  112
 
 
 
 
 
 
  474  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  movement                                  no hard disk
     of cursor  90                             using DOS commands  410
     of cursor to beginning of marked          using the startup diskette  410
      area (ALT+Y)  114                     NOEMS and Stacker  347
     of cursor to end of marked area        noems switch  54
      (ALT+E)  113                          non-Express window in CPBackup  251
  moving                                    Novell network
     around in the PC DOS Viewer  43           backing up  271
  moving text                                  backing up to a network
     with the E Editor (ALT+M)  108             directory  269
  MS-FLASH.SYS file  378                       drive display  254
  MSCDEX
     AUTOEXEC.BAT configuration  66
     CD-ROM device driver  53                  +---+
     CD-ROM support  53, 66                    | O |
  MSCDEX program, Stacker  351                 +---+
  MULT command  131
  multiple configuration  48                online
     common block  59                          documentation viewer  31
     menu block  57                         online books  29
  multiple configurations  57               online help
  multiple drive selection in                  creating Help messages
   CPBackup  252                                  for program groups  208
  multiple files, editing  87                     for program items  224
  multiple-drive backups  253                  for PC DOS Shell  199, 200
  multiply                                     for the PC DOS Shell  201, 202,
                                                203
                                               getting for the PC DOS Viewer  35
     +---+                                  online help for
     | N |                                     the E Editor  80
     +---+                                  optimization
                                               Stacker drives  327
  naming a file (F7)  78                       types of  327
  naming an unnamed file in                    versus recompressing  327
   E Editor  84                             Option (PCM)  390
  NEW command                               optional tools
     PC DOS Shell  208, 210                    Central Point Backup for DOS  15
  new features of Stacker  294                 Central Point Backup for
                                                Windows  15
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  475
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  optional tools (continued)                paragraph formatting (ALT+P) using
     Central Point Undelete for              E Editor  113
      Windows  15                           parameters
     CPBackup  229                             for SETUP  12
     IBM AntiVirus/DOS  15                     in startup commands for program
     IBM AntiVirus/DOS for Windows  15          items  216, 217, 218, 219
     PCMCIA Support  15                     Pascal syntax  127
     PenDOS  15                             password
     rerunning Setup to install  426           changing  333
     REXX Language Support  15                 protecting a backup  241
     Stacker Compression for DOS and           removing  334
      Windows  15                              setting  333
  options editor                               user level in CPBackup  237
     RAMBoost  178                          Password tool, Stacker  309
  OS/2                                      passwords
     starting the PC DOS Viewer                for program groups  209
      from  32                                 for program items  211
  OS/2 Dual Boot                            PATH command  67
     switching between operating            PC DOS Shell
      systems  413                             adding program groups  207, 208,
     using after installation  413              209
  OS/2 systems                                 changing
     FAT system  411                              group contents  210, 211, 212,
     installing PC DOS  411                        213
     using Boot Manager  411                      group properties  227
     using Dual Boot  411                         program item properties  214,
  overlay text using E Editor  112                 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220,
  overwrite warning during                         221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226,
   restore  267                                    227
                                               deleting a program group  209
                                               described  195
     +---+                                     Help
     | P |                                        creating Help messages  208,
     +---+                                         224
                                                  requesting  199
  packed format  441                              using the Help menu  202
  paragraph adjustment to new margins             viewing related
   using E Editor  110                             procedures  201
                                               installing  195
 
 
 
 
 
 
  476  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  PC DOS Shell (continued)                  PCM for DOS (continued)
     leaving temporarily  204                  Option selection  390
     quitting  205                             using  385
     starting                               PCM for Windows
        from the command prompt  197           associations  391
  PC DOS Shell window                          PCMWIN  391
     changing                               PCMATA.SYS  383
        color schemes  206                  PCMCIA
        screen modes  206                      advanced configuration
     rearranging items in program               considerations  393
      groups  213                              Advanced Setup screen  376
  PC DOS Viewer                                ATA card settings  380
     appending information to a                considerations before using  373
      file  45                                 dynamic configuration  384
     copying information to a file  45         Flash File System  378
     copying topic information  44             installed driver list  383
     definition of  29                         latest enhancements  372
     finding index topics  42                  Modem/FAX card settings  379
     getting help while using  40              multiple configurations  373, 393
     getting other types of online             PCM for DOS  385
      help  35                                 PCM for Windows  391
     linking to more topics  40                PCMFDISK  394
     moving around in the PC DOS               PCMRMAN  394
      Viewer  43                               PCMSETUP  375
     printing from the PC DOS                  UMB memory  373
      Viewer  44                            PCMCIA Support  17
     starting from a DOS Command            PCMCS.EXE  383
      Prompt  31                            PCMFDISK  394
     starting from OS/2  32                 PCMFFCS.EXE  383
     starting from PC DOS Shell  32         PCMRMAN  399
     starting from Windows  34              PCMSCD.EXE  383
     starting the online viewer  31         PCMSETUP  375
     using the viewer  29                   PCMSS.EXE  383
     viewing the initial PC DOS Viewer      PCMWIN
      screen  34                               386 enhanced mode  391
  PC Tools DiskFix  359, 369                   running  391
  PCM for DOS                               PenDOS optional tool  16
     Configure selection  386               performance
     Information selection  389                improving  324
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  477
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  permanent swap file, Stacker              program items
   Windows  336                                adding passwords for  211, 223
  Phoenix PCMCIA Support  17                   adding to program groups  210,
  phrase mark (E Editor)  105                   211
  precompressed data, Stacker  314             changing properties of  214
  preconfigured setup files in                 copying among program groups  212
   CPBackup  256, 260                          creating Help messages for  224
  preferences gauges  313, 314                 creating startup commands
  prevent Program Switch option                 for  211, 215, 216, 217, 218,
     PC DOS Shell  227                          219
  Previous push button  43                     defining shortcut keys for  211,
  PRINT command                                 221
     the E Editor  89                          deleting from program groups  213
  PRINT command (E Editor)  89                 preventing switching  227
  PRINT HISTORY command in                     rearranging  213
   CPBackup  268                               reserving shortcut keys for  226
  printer control characters using             setting video mode for  226
   E Editor  137                               specifying memory requirements
  printing                                      for  224, 225
     files from the E Editor  89               using a startup directory
     from the PC DOS Viewer  44                 for  211, 220
  printing a backup directory  268          programs
  printing a compare report in                 running
   CPBackup  263                                  from PC DOS Shell  198
  printing a file using E Editor  89        PROMPT command  67
  printing files (F5)  77                   PROPERTIES command
  problem                                      PC DOS Shell  214, 227
     with starting DOS  49                  properties in the PC DOS Shell
  problem determination  444                   advanced  223
  program groups                               application shortcut keys  221
     adding  207, 208, 209                     CALL command in startup
     adding passwords for  209                  commands  216
     adding program items to  210, 211         for groups
     changing properties of  227                  changing  227
     copying program items  212                for program items
     creating Help messages for  208              changing  214
     deleting  209                             Help messages for program
     deleting program items from  213           items  224
     rearranging program items  213            memory requirements for
                                                programs  224, 225
 
 
 
 
 
  478  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  properties in the PC DOS Shell            quitting
   (continued)                                 PC DOS Shell  205
     password for program items  223        quitting a file
     pause after program exit  222             (F3)  82
     program switching  227
     replaceable parameters in startup
      commands  216, 217, 218, 219             +---+
     reserved shortcut keys  226               | R |
     startup commands  215                     +---+
     startup directory for program
      items  220                            RAM and Stacker  347
     video mode  226                        RAMBoost
  protection                                   .INI files  164
     AutoProtect  331, 357                     advanced features  175
     AutoRecover  361                          changing memory usage of a
     checking disks  332                        block  176
     features  330                             comparison of memory types  181
     Password  333                             configuration file  180
  PS/1 systems                                 configuring  165
     installing DOS on  414                    considerations before
  push button                                   configuring  165
     Forward in the PC DOS Viewer  43          expanded memory (EMS or
     Help in the PC DOS Viewer  43              EEMS)  183
     Previous in the PC DOS Viewer  43         extended memory  182
  PUT in E Editor  129                         extended memory
                                                specification  183
                                               freeing conventional DOS
     +---+                                      memory  181
     | Q |                                     multiple configurations  164
     +---+                                     options editor  178
                                               overview  163
  QCONFIG command  162, 183                    RAMSETUP command  165
  QEMM Stealth and Stacker  348                reserved memory area  181
  QIC                                          system requirements  164
     and CPS format for tapes in               upper memory blocks  181
      CPBackup  280                            upper memory editor  177
  QIC tape drives supported  276                  function keys  177
  Quick optimization for Stacker  327          upper memory usage editor  175
                                               XMS  183
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  479
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  RAMBOOST.INI file  180                    replacing text
  read errors while optimizing  369            using the E Editor  121
  read-only password, Stacker  333          report tool, Stacker  309
  read/write password, Stacker  333         rerunning Setup  425
  README.TXT file                           reserve shortcut keys option
     printing the file  433                    PC DOS Shell  226
     using the file  433                    reserved memory area  181
     viewing the file  433                  resetting tape drive defaults  284
  README.XDF file  439                      restart
  rebuilding configuration,                    problem  49, 446
   Stacker  362, 365                        restoring
  recompressing a disk, Stacker  327,          data  267
   329, 339                                    DOS system files  363
  redirected drives  145, 152                  overwrite warning  267
  reflow marked area (ALT+R) using             Stacker header  360
   E Editor  111, 113                       restoring a line (F9)  78
  REM command  10                           restoring a line (F9), E Editor  95
  removable Stacker drives                  restoring data in CPBackup  266
     mounted not swapped (NS)  344          REXX commands  37
     mounted replaced (RP)  344             REXX Language Support for DOS  16
     mounting  318                          REXX syntax  138
  removing                                  root directory  47
     attributes, Stacker  358               running
     incorrect version of                      programs
      INTERLNK  442                               from PC DOS Shell  198
     passwords  334                         running CHKDSK, Stacker  359
     Setup comment lines  10                running without restarting
     Stacker  324                            system  65
     write-protection  331, 357, 360
  REORDER command
     PC DOS Shell  213                         +---+
  repairing                                    | S |
     Check errors  332                         +---+
  repartitioning
     hard disk  445                         SAVE command
  replaceable drives, defining for             E Editor  85
   Stacker  344                             SAVE command (E Editor)  85
  replaceable parameters                    SAVE SETUP command in CPBackup  258
     in startup commands for program
      items  216, 217, 218, 219
 
 
 
 
 
  480  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  SAVEHDR* files, Stacker  360              SET command  67
  saving                                    setting
     a file created with the                   compression level, Stacker  326
      E Editor  85                             passwords for Stacker  333
  saving a file                                Stacker up  299
     (F2)  76                               setting margins  99
  saving and quitting a file (F4)  77,      SETUP
   82                                          See also installation
  saving automatically (E Editor)  85          /A switch  419
  SCHEDULE BACKUPS command  261                /C switch  10
  scheduling an unattended backup  262         /E switch  426
  screen                                       /W switch  13, 427
     changing modes in the PC DOS              command syntax for  11
      Shell  206                            Setup diskettes
  screen, initial                              backing up  436
     PC DOS Viewer  34                         using DOS commands  435
  SCSI                                         viewing contents of  439
     tape directory  242                    setup files in CPBackup  257
     tape drives supported  278                contents of  257
  searching                                    description  259
     for the PC DOS Viewer index               loading  259
      topics  42                               preconfigured  260
     for the PC DOS Viewer topics  41          preconfigured in CPBackup  256
  searching for text                           saving  259
     using the E Editor  116, 121           setup for Stacker
  selected files, monitoring                   express or custom  301
   compression  315                            getting help on  301
  selecting                                    recovering from interrupted  361
     text                                      running  299
        in the E Editor  101                   troubleshooting  361
     using a mouse  7                       Setup program
  selecting files                              new features of  6
     manually in CPBackup  250              shell
  sentence mark (E Editor)  105                See PC DOS Shell
  server volume display                     shift marked text
     explained  254                            to the left (ALT+F7)  113
  server, definition of  144                   to the right (ALT+F8)  113
  servo-writing  279                        shortcut keys
                                               for starting program items  211,
                                                221
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  481
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  shortcut keys (continued)                 Stacker drive size
     reserving for program items  226          changing  338
  smaller, making Stacker drive  338        Stacker Drive Size tool  309
  SMARTDRV command  68                      Stacker menu
  sound for Stacker  313, 314                  File Manager  315
  special document format  52               Stacker Optimizer  327, 328, 329
  splitting a text line in                  Stacker Optimizer tool  309
   E Editor  94                             Stacker startup diskette  357, 362
  Stacker                                   Stacker Tuner tool  309
     unmounting a drive, DOS  358           Stacker Windows Toolbox
  Stacker Anywhere  320, 321                   changing Stacker drive size  338
     in memory  322                            Check tool  332
     running  322                              compress tool  317
     Windows icon  323                         compressing removable  319
  Stacker command summary  352                 Configure tool  337, 338
  Stacker Compression tool  18                 defragmenting a disk  328
  Stacker compression, installing              gauges  310, 313
  Stacker DOS Toolbox                          minimizing  314
     changing expected compression             opening  310
      ratio  339                               optimizing  329
     changing Stacker drive size  339          Optimizing tool  328
     defragmenting a disk  327                 overview  310
     defragmenting data  328                   Password tool  334
     optimizing  329                           recompressing data  328, 329
     optimizing data  328                      tuning  326
     Optimizing tool  327                      Uncompress tool  324
     recompressing a disk  328, 329            warnings  314
     recompressing data  327                Stacker, introduction to  293
     tuning  326                            STACKER.EXE  322
     uncompressing a disk  324              STACKER.INI  342, 343, 344
     using the password tool  333              /AUTO switch  351
  Stacker drive                                /BD=drive  352
     changing size of  337                     /Q switch  343
     creating  317                             editing  344
     determining letters of  341               syntax for  344
     STACVOL files  340                     STACVOL
     storing  340                              do not delete or format file  340
     unmounting for Windows  323               restoring file headers  360
                                               Stacker file  340
 
 
 
 
 
 
  482  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  START RESTORE command in                  surface scan, Stacker  369
   CPBackup  267                            switch
  starting                                     -DPMS for Stacker  347
     Central Point Backup  240                 /EMS for Stacker  347
     PC DOS Shell  197                         /UMB for Stacker  347
     programs                                  EMS for Stacker  347
        from PC DOS Shell  198                 Q for Stacker  343
     the E Editor  75, 82                      R for Stacker  370
     the online documentation               switch for PC DOS Setup
      viewer  31                               /A switch  419
  starting a compare in CPBackup  263          /E switch  426
  starting the PC DOS Viewer                switch for Setup
     from OS/2  32                             /C switch  10
     from PC DOS Shell  32                     /W switch  13
     from the DOS Command Prompt  31        switch, /?  38
     from Windows  34                       switches
  startup                                      for SETUP  12
     bypassing boot commands  49            switching between multiple files
     bypassing system files  49              (F10)  79
  startup command  48                       symbols used in compare in
  startup commands for program items         CPBackup  265
     creating  215                          syntax
     running batch programs in  216            Assembler  127
     using replaceable                         C language  127, 138
      parameters  216, 217, 218, 219           Pascal  127
  startup directory for program                REXX  138
   items  211, 220                          syntax directed E Editor
  startup diskette  410, 441                 features  138
     See also system diskette               SYS command with Stacker  363
  startup diskette for Stacker  357         system configuration  47
  startup menu  57                          system files in CPBackup  248
  startup problems, Stacker  362            system files Setup modification  8
  status, mounting                          system files, restoring for DOS  363
     RP  344                                system requirements
     SW  343                                   RAMBoost  164
  strategies and backup methods  287
  strategies for backing up  285
  SUBMENU command  57
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  483
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
     +---+                                  text file
     | T |                                     creating  82
     +---+                                  text mark (E Editor)  105
                                            text mode
  table of contents  43                        changing screen modes in the PC
  tape                                          DOS Shell  206
     backup strategies  287                    for program items  226
     bulk-erasing  279                      time table formatting tapes in
     certifying in CPBackup  278             Backup  280
     controller cards  283, 284             Token Ring speed  376
        address table  283                  Toolbox, Stacker DOS
        resetting defaults  284                changing expected compression
     controller cards supported  282            ratio  339
     extra length in CPBackup  279             changing Stacker drive size  339
     formatting in CPBackup  278               defragmenting a disk  327
     formatting time table in                  defragmenting data  328
      CPBackup  280                            Optimize tool  327
     information in CPBackup  275              optimizing  329
     making a backup  242                      optimizing data  328
     password-protected in                     Password tool  333
      CPBackup  243                            recompressing a disk  328, 329
     QIC drives supported  276                 recompressing data  327
     QIC vs CPS format in                      tuning  326
      CPBackup  280                            uncompressing a disk  324
     SCSI drives supported  278             Toolbox, Stacker Windows
     servo-writing  279                        changing Stacker drive size  338
     volume tape catalog explained in          Check tool  332
      CPBackup  284                            compress tool  317
  tape backup with Stacker  299                compressing removable  319
  testing backup speed  236                    Configure tool  337, 338
  text copying                                 defragmenting a disk  328
     using the E Editor (ALT+C)  107           gauges  310, 313, 314
  text deletion                                minimizing  314
     using the E Editor (ALT+D)  107           opening  310
  text editor  73                              Optimize tool  328
     DOS 5.0 Editor  75                        optimizing  329
     E Editor  74                              overview  310
     Edlin Editor  74                          Password tool  334
     special document format  52               recompressing data  328, 329
 
 
 
 
 
 
  484  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  Toolbox, Stacker Windows (continued)      tuning compression, Stacker  325
     tuning  326                            turning off
     Uncompress tool  324                      flash, Stacker  314
     warnings  314                             sound, Stacker  314
  tools                                     turning on
     Change expected compression               flash, Stacker  313
      ratio  339                               sound for Stacker  313, 314
     Check  332
     compress  317
     Configure Stacker drive size  337         +---+
     Configure swap file settings  337         | U |
     Optimize  327                             +---+
     Password  333
     Report  316                            UMB, Stacker  345
     Tune  325                              unattended backups  262
     Uncompress  324                        Uncompress tool  309, 324
  tools (see optional tools)                uncompressing a disk, Stacker  324
  tools, optional                           Undelete for Windows, Central
     CPBackup  229                           Point  17
  topics in the PC DOS Viewer  34           UNDO command (E Editor)  95
     linking to  40                         uninstalling  430
     printing  44                           unmarking
     searching for  41                         text
  troubleshooting                                 with the E Editor (ALT+U)  105
     cannot access compressed               unmounting Stacker drives
      data  364                                disk repair utilities  360
     computer won't start up  362              DOS  358
     CPBackup  235                             Windows  323
        confidence test  235                unnamed file in E Editor  84
     interrupted Stacker Setup  361         UNPACK2 command  441
     Optimizer errors  369                  unpacking a Setup file  441
     reboot during SDEFRAG  366, 367        updating Stacker drives  302
     startup problems  362                  upgrading across a LAN  423
     unable to repair FATs  367             upgrading Stacker  302
     write-protected Stacker                   getting the best compression  302
      drive  365                            upper memory
  troubleshooting CPBackup                     loading Stacker high  345
     drive light on  241                    upper memory block (UMB)  181
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  485
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                   BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  upper memory usage editor                 Windows (continued)
     RAMBoost  175                             Central Point Backup tool  18
  user level                                   IBM AntiVirus/DOS optional
     changing in CPBackup  237                  tool  17
     reference chart in CPBackup  238          installing Central Point
  USER LEVEL command in CPBackup  237           Backup  233
  user level password in CPBackup  237         installing optional tools  13
                                               installing Stacker  297
                                               preferences gauges  314
     +---+                                     starting the PC DOS Viewer
     | V |                                      from  34
     +---+                                     using the File Manager Stacker
                                                Menu  315
  video Mode options                        Windows help availability,
     PC DOS Shell  226                       Stacker  296
  VIEW command  31                          Windows permanent swap file  336,
  viewing                                    337
     PC DOS Viewer screen, initial  34      word mark (E Editor)  104
     system files during install  27        word wrap  94
  viewing files in CPBackup  255            WPSF
  Virtual Control Program Interface            See Windows permanent swap file
   (VCPI)  346                              write errors while optimizing  369
  VTC file explained in Backup  284         write-protected Stacker drive  365
                                            write-protection, Stacker  331, 357,
                                             360
     +---+
     | W |
     +---+                                     +---+
                                               | X |
  warning flash, Stacker  313                  +---+
  warnings
     CPBackup  234, 241, 243                XDF command  435, 438, 439
        quitting a SCSI backup  243         XDF-format
        remember password  241                 for Setup Diskette  434
        skipping confidence test  234          when backing up diskettes  436
  warnings, Stacker  314                       when copying diskettes  436
  WAV files for stacker  314                   when formatting  438
  Windows                                   XDFCOPY command  436
     building permanent swap file  337
 
 
 
 
 
 
  486  BASE User's Guide
 
 
 
 
 
 
  BASE BETA - October 13, 1994
 
  XMS Memory options
     PC DOS Shell  225
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                     Index  487
 
 
 
